《Naruto: The Hidden Protector》


 Chapter 1

    Chapter 1


    In Konoha (Konohagakure or The Vige hidden in the leaves) it was like your everyday morning. Ninjas were jumping from one rooftops to another. The civilians were doing their usual activities of doing business , Gossiping about some ninja , or criticising the nearby Uchiha police.


    But when no one was expecting it, in the middle of the vige a space rift appeared. From it came a masked man who observed the nearby vigers coldly . And without any dy he did a series of hand signs.


    With a huge cloud of smoke that managed to capture almost everyone''s attention, the masked man appeared standing on top of a nine tail fox.


    It took everyone a few seconds to register what happened and when they did they screamed,


    " Help the Kyuubi has escaped the seal. Inform the Hokage immediately"


    And with a roar from nowcontrolled Kurama the nine tails disaster started.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    " Minato, is this truly for the best? " asked an exhausted red haireddy. She was barely able to keep conscience while simultaneously using her Adamantine Sealing Chains to retrain the Kyuubi. Her name is Kushina Uzumaki, thest known living member of the famous Uzumaki n and 2nd Jinch¨±riki of the nine tails, the strongest of all the tailed beasts.She is also the wife of the fourth Hokage although that knowledge is not widespread amongst the vigers for some reason.


    Besides her stood atall, fair-skinned man. He has blue eyes and spiky, blond hair. Hailed as the Konoha''s Yellow sh, this here is the present Fourth Hokage of Konoha Minato Namikaze.


    " Yes Kushina , the vige cannot lose its tail beast and Naruto will need all the help he can get." Minato said as he did a series of hand signs.


    " But Minato won''t the vige discriminate against him just like they did to me. I don''t want him to go through that experience just for some power. " Said Kushina, still not convinced of her husband''s n.


    Minato gave her a reassuring smile and said softly, " Kushina I understand your concern but I''m doing this for his own good. When I held him I felt my son is very special and no this isn''t me doting on my son, I felt that he is the person Jiraiya sensei was seeking. The one who will bring peace to this chaotic world.


    I believe in my son Kushina so this is why I''m doing this. This is my responsibility as a father, to let my child reach his full potential and achieve his goal. "


    Looking at his eyes Kushina sighed and finally agreed. Although what Minato was doing can be considered selfish, she knew that he only wanted the best for our son.


    "Please don''t make me regret it minato."to her remark he just smiled and said confidently,


    "Don''t worry i''m sure the vige would ept him after all he is our son "


    When his words fell he did a series of hand seals. After a dozen or so hand sealster she shouted "forbidden jutsu of Reaper Death Seal."


    A person that is translucent, gaunt spectre with a demonic visage who has a muchrger body than an average human, possessing long, shaggy, white hair, from which two red horns protrude, as well as purple-hued skin began to to appear behind Minato. This person is draped in arge white kimono and carries a set of prayer beads. And to top it all off he has a tanto on his mouth.


    When the figure appeared the kyuubi which was trying to break free from the chains felt a chill up his spine. He hurriedly looked around and found Minato summoning the shinigami. And before it could do anything the shinigami with a swift movement swung the de he had in his mouth and split the kyuubi in half.


    While he was doing so the seals that were ced on the ground began to shine. And still while restraining the shinigami from pulling his soul immediately, MInato activated the formation " Eight Trigrams Sealing Style ".


    Half of the now split nine tail chakra began to flow towards him and while the other halfbegan to flow towards the altar where a baby is ced. Since he is quite near the nine tails the transfer was done almost immediately. And at this crucial moment when all seemed to go ording to n the nine tails which in a semi conscious state suddenly realised something.


    He was about to be sealed again. And what''s more to an infant. How could he, the strongest and arrogant of all the tailed beasts, bear such humiliation. In ast act of strugglehe used the opportunity where the adamantine chains were loosen toattack the infant baby.


    "I will not be sealed again " with a mighty roar he swung his ws to kill the baby before the sealing waspleted


    "Noooo"shouted both Minato and Kushina as they both used their bodies to shield their child from the attack. .


    Like a paper their bodies were pierced by the nine tails w. Fortunately for them they managed to save their child by killing the momentum.


    The nine tails roared in anger as hisst attempt at freedom was stopped by these damnable humans. It hatefullyred at them as its body was sucked into the seal. After it was fully sealed the couple both sighed in relief. They managed to protect their child.


    As adrenaline that was there vanished making them weak again. Minato coughed up some blood and said weakly, "I''m sorry Kushina, it looks like I won''t be able to hold on much longer. Pour in some chakra to the seal so we can observe Naruto''s growth and help him when he needs it the most and since we won''t be able to meet him for quite a while ...."he didn''t have to finish it as kushina understood what he wanted to say.


    She looked at her son sadly and said lovingly, ""Naruto..


    Don''t be picky.. Eat lots and grow strong..


    Make sure that you bathe every day and stay warm..


    Also.. Don''t stay upte.. You need lots of sleep..


    And make friends.. You don''t need a lot of friends..


    Just a few.. Ones you can really, really trust..


    I wasn''t very good at it, but keep up with your studies and practice your ninjutsu hard..


    Remember that everyone has strengths and weaknesses..


    So don''t get too depressed if you can''t do something well..


    Respect your teachers and upperssmen at the Academy..


    Oh, and this is important.. It''s about the Three Prohibitions for a shinobi..


    Be extra careful about lending and borrowing money..


    Put your mission wages into your savings ount..


    No alcohol until you''re twenty.. Too much can ruin your health, so drink in moderation..


    Another Prohibition is women..


    I''m a woman, so I don''t know too much about this but..


    All you need to remember is that this world is made up of men and women..


    So it''s only natural to take an interest in girls..


    But just don''t get hooked on bad women.. Find someone just like me..


    Speaking of the Three Prohibitions, be wary of Jiraiya Sensei, you know..


    Naruto, from now on, you''re going to face lots of pain and hardship..


    Be true to yourself.. Have a dream and have the confidence to make that dreame true..


    There''s so much.. Oh, so much more that I want to pass on to you.. I wish I could stay with you longer..


    I love you"


    She turned back to face minato and said weakly, "i''m sorry it looks like i took most of yourtime as well "


    Minato shook his head and said, "don''t worry about is kushina it''s all right "


    He then turned to look at his sonfor thest time and said, " I love you my son, you and your mother are what''s most precious to me " with his words he finally stopped resisting making the shinigami pull his soul immediately.


    During the pull he thought regretfully ''i wish i could spend more time with my family ''


    { don''t worry your wish shall be granted } an melodious voice said as he felt the pulling of his soul stop for a moment.


    Slowly opening his eyes he saw that he was brought into a ck and white world. As he looked around he realised that what he was seeing was the present situation. He also saw his dead body slowly falling down Kushina''s back. He tried to talk with the people but strangely enough they couldn''t hear him or see him.


    Just as he was about to be vexed he again heard that voice," calm down Minato, the dead can''t interact with the living. " Turning around he saw a girl no older than 10 walking towards him.


    "Who are you?" he asked with caution. Although he didn''t know what was happening he didn''t dare let his guard down.


    The girl chuckled at his behaviour and said a bit of sarcasm " why are you so weary you are already dead so it''s not like I could kill you again. "


    At her words Minato felt a bit awkward. True since he is already dead there isn''t anything she could do to harm him. He scratched his face awkwardly and asked , "eh sorry but who are you and is this the belly of the shinigami "


    The girl shook her head and said, "no this is what you could call the purend. More specifically, this is my domain in the purend. And as for who am I , well let''s wait a bit for that. It would be a hassle to introduce myself twice after all."


    While Minato was puzzled he soon got his answer as Kushina began to appear near him. She too looked at her surroundings with confusion but when she saw Minato she threw herself at him. Minato too, with practice ease hugged her and began to console her.


    The girl, although felt touched, decided to stop their union. She couldn''t keep their souls for a long time in her domain after all. She coughed twice to announce her presence.


    Kushina, hearing someone else''s voice, turned around to see a girl with long ck hair with silver strands wearing what looked like a kimono which made her too cute. As if something was awakened inside of her, she broke free from Minato''s embrace and hugged the poor little girl.


    "Kyaaa how cute , what is your name sweety, do you want toe with aunty kushina , minato can we keep her "


    Minato smiled wryly at his wife''s behaviour. It seems like having Naruto might have awakened Kushina''s motherly instincts.


    While girl who was now fighting a life and death battle to breath thought internally ,''damn it if i knew this would happen i would havee in my adult form "


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <strong>If you want to read advance chapters please visit my Patreon /Nauty_Manu</strong>

 Chapter 2

    Chapter 2


    There is a saying that says ¡® when one ages the more his intelligence grows ¡® but now I''m seriously doubting this saying.


    Hey there if you haven''t already released already I am your typical novel protagonist. In this life my name is Izanami Otsutsuki, the daughter of Hagoromo ¨­tsutsuki.


    Yeah shocking right. The sage of six paths is my dad. Well at least in this life l had a decent childhood.


    You see, before I was reborn in this world I was a simple office worker who only managed to get a job at a third ratepany that might as well sell us as ves.


    You see, in my previous life I was an orphan at birth since my parents decided it would be a wise choice to abandon me in the hospital. Shocking right. They used fake ids and fled before even taking me. How that is possible is something I''m curious about. They didn''t even give me a name before going away.


    In my childhood I dreamed of bing a cop and finding those two but reality is often disappointing. While I have decent athletic talent, my academic skills are not so good. Hell, I was even surprised that I got this job. And to be a cop you need some good grades so there you have it dream shattered.


    Well putting aside my depressing past I died at the age of 35 after saving a dude who jumped to protect his kid. Yeah I know I just don''t want that kid to experience what I experienced after all.


    Although I had some regrets, I''d say my actions are worth it. If that kid gets to have another day with his parents I''d totally be satisfied.


    Too bad I couldn''t finish some of the manga I just bought. Oh right before I forget I''m what you guys call an otaku. Hey, don''t judge me for someone who can only spend most of his day in an office. Manga and anime are the only things that might as well be interesting.


    Well anyway before my soul entered the cycle of reincarnation it was pulled in by this guy who calls himself mr. Joy.


    He said that he is the overseer of the world of naruto and he needed someone to help him manage that world. You see in Naruto world the reincarnation cycle is barely working. Since most of the inhabitants who died with so much regret they are unable to go on. So the purend was created to make them leave their regrets. But due to that world¡¯s mentality the number of souls who are forever staying in the purend increased each passing year. Mr. Joy said that it is mainly due to them going to war for the silliest reason. And what¡¯s ,more since ninja¡¯s fight on the borders of eachnd affecting the lives of the civilians making the death count way higher than it was in the official records.


    So my job is to manage the purend without letting it overflow. In doing so Mr.Joy said that he will give me three reasonable wishes.


    And when he said reasonably what he meant is that no Op cheat power, no plunder system, no immortality, no mind control superpower. Anything in his eptable limit will be allowed.


    Seeing that my short cut was cut off, I thought about this for a long time. And for an hour straight I asked about my new job details and such to further think about my options.


    And after careful consideration i told him my wishes,


    My first is for an independent space that has ess to the purend where I could retreat if necessary and do my duties without any security issues. Who knows what I will face when ck Zetsu finds out about me.


    My second wish is for me to have a body that is perfect to cultivate any energy I desire. I mainly asked that since in the Naruto verse you must have a natural affinity to master Sage mode. And no sir, I will not leave that to luck.


    And my final wish is knowledge. Knowledge of every manga and anime there is. At that time I only thought that this knowledge would be useful for me to develop a fighting style and have a good trump card just in case. But it was unexpectedly more useful in the future.


    Well anyway those wishes were granted as they are not as dangerous for a long time. Just when I thought everything was over Mr. Joy unexpectedly handed me a piece of paper. Reading it I found out it is a contract of sorts. There were some rules I needed to follow.


    Although most of them were quite obvious such as do not destroy the reincarnation cycle , do not destroy the purend. There were some which were quite interesting so to say.


    They were ¡®Do not interfere too much until cannon starts ¡®and ¡®Don¡¯t change history too much¡¯.


    After asking, I found that while Mr, Joy expects me to change a few things, he doesn''t want the overall situation to change as it would leave a time paradox and will be more of a mess to clean up.


    After that I signed the contract after reading it a few times. After that was done I was asked to choose a time for my rebirth. And I instantly said to reincarnate me in the era of the six paths. Since that era is the safest from any conflicts I was confident in my choice.


    Although Mr. Joy had said it was kind of weird for me to go to that era; he nheless agreed. After that with a bright light I was reincarnated in a new world.And to my surprise I was reborn as someone very special.


    I was reborn as the daughter of the sage of six paths. Although that might sound nice it actually came with a twist. Like Indra and Ashura who inherited his eyes and body, I also inherited one of traits. I inherited his human trait. Shocking right. We all forgot our famous six paths is actually half human. Well anyway i really don''t care about that as i could just create my own bloodline if i actually tried. A smart guy from another fanfic did it so why can¡¯t I too.


    Well I think it¡¯s time for me to actually speak about the present situation as I''m about to die an honourable death. Yes you guessed it, death by suffocation from boobs.


    If I was reborn again I will tell you my whole storyter.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ~general Pov~


    Just as our protagonist was about to die she was rescued by Minato. And for the first time in her long life she felt heartfelt gratitude towards someone for a person she only met for about two minutes .


    ~ Izanami Pov ~


    ¡°Thank you for your help , if you hadn¡¯t helped me I would sure that i would have met my father today ¡° said Izumi as she bowed towards minato.


    Minato waved his hand and said,¡±please don¡¯t think too much about it. In fact I should be the one apologising for my wife¡¯s action. I¡¯m truly sorry for the trouble my wife has caused ¡° saying so he also bowed.


    Izumi lifted her head and said softly ¡°you really are kind. If you were born in little hashi¡¯s era you might be the perfect hokage this vige needed.¡±


    ¡°Huh¡±both Minato and Kushina had question marks on top of her heads.


    The girl smiled and said,¡±greetings my name is Izanami Otsutsuki the one who manages the purend and the cycle of reincarnation¡±


    At first Minato and Kushina were shocked, then their shock turned to caution. They both knew that beings who managed the death are not simple. Take the shinigami for example. He could even divide the nine tails with just a casual swing.


    Looking at their cautious expressions Izunami chuckled and said ¡° don¡¯t worry i¡¯m not here to harm you. And besides, didn''t I tell you before MInato what could I do to a dead person even more to someone I am about to propose a deal with? ¡°


    ¡°A deal ¡°minato frowned as he asked this.


    ¡°Yes this deal would be beneficial for both of you as well as your son, so what you guys say ¡°Izanami asked while smiling like a devil which honestly made her only look cuter.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 3

    Chapter 3


    ¡° What is this deal you offer? Kushina asked after controlling her instinct to lunge at her.


    Izanami smile and replied , ¡° Kushina as someone who is immune the brainwashing konoha is doing how would you define this vige ¡°


    Kushina was stunned for a moment before a look of resignation appeared in her face. She faced Minato with a helpless smile and said, ¡°konoha is a vige that is full of darkness.¡±


    Minato, hearing her words, was stunned. You should know he is still the hokage you know. And hearing those words from his wife no less made it more impactable for him. Minato may not show it but he would often hear Kushina¡¯s words as reference when he is making decisions. Kushina, as a person who was born from Uzushiogakure, has a different perspective of things which is very helpful for him.


    Izanami, ignoring Minato''s dilemma, continued speaking. For Mianto to truly understand the situation he needed to understand his vage¡¯s nature more clearly. ¡° Then let me ask you how you would define the higher ups of your vige.¡±


    She thought for a while and said, ¡° greedy and hypocritical ¡°.


    Again kushina¡¯s words managed to hurt Minato more. And as the smart person he is he began to realise where this conversation is going .¡±Naruto ¡°he mumbled with a gaze full of worry.


    Izanami nodded and said, ¡±yes it is as you suspected the vige would take action against your son. In Fact he is already sent to an orphanage. His inheritance was confiscated and all the people who would want to adopt him were warned not to. And in a few days there would be a rumour going around in Konoha that the demon fox has reincarnated as a child in the vige. And by pure coincidence a child will be found who has whiskers in one of the many orphanages in konoha.¡±


    Each word she spoke Kushina and Minato¡¯s faces turned pale. Although they want to disagree with her in their hearts they know what she is saying is very possible to do. But even so ,


    ¡°No, the third hokage won¡¯t allow it, not to mention there is Jiraiya and Kakashi. I¡¯m sure they won¡¯t let Naruto experience such hardships¡± Minato said with hope filling his eyes. Even if the elders want to use Naruto¡¯s inheritance for themselves they have to back off when Jiraiya or the third hokage refuses. But the next moment his hope was shattered.


    ¡° Not necessarily, you see, your third Hokage is a huge hypocrite. He says that he is too old for the hokage position but when asked to hand over the position he spouts some nonsense about not having enough will of fire. This is also why even when you were selected as the hokage he didn¡¯t hand over most of his authorities to you. Hell, even 65% of the anbu is still loyal to him. To solidify his position he even massacred the senju n. ¡° Izanami said, shaking her head.


    Minato at that moment lost his footing and almost copsed into the ground if Kushina wasn''t there to catch him. He now realised that he has doomed his son''s future by making him the nine tails Jinch¨±riki.


    ¡° Well don''t lose hope too soon. Although I can''t directly interfere in Naruto''s life, I can still make sure he is healthy. ¡° Izanami said, making them looked at her with surprise.


    ¡° Why would you do this for us? What is it that you want from us? ¡° Kushina asked, puzzled.


    ¡°Hmm you could say it is an investment for the future.¡± izanami replied with a smile.


    ¡° What do you want us to do? ¡° It was Minato who asked this time. His sunny smile is now gone. Now he looked like a determined father who would do anything for their child.


    ¡° No need to be so worked up. You see, what I want from you is very simple. I want you to train Naruto in secret. Develop his skills for seals and battle instinct. Make him what you always want him to be. A good person ¡°At izanami¡¯s words both MInato and Kushina were once again stunned. Isn¡¯t this offer too great for them? They casted doubtful nces at Izanami asking whether she is trolling them.


    Izanami chuckled and said, ¡° don¡¯t give me such a look. I truly meant it when I said Naruto will be an investment. ¡°


    ¡° but there has to be some catch for this isn''t there. ¡° MInato asked, making Izanami smile again. She truly liked it when someone caught on to her point very quickly.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ~ In the Hokage Office Konoha ~


    ¡° Hiruzen give me the nine tails Jinch¨±riki. My root can make him a fine weapon to the vige. ¡° said a frail, old man, He had ck, shaggy hair, and his right eye and arm was bandaged.


    This is Danz¨­ Shimura The Darkness of the Shinobi as well as the Hokage adviser. In the shadows he also holds the position of Leader of the Root ninjas.


    ¡° That''s impossible Danzo, that is Minato¡¯s and Kushina¡¯s son. ¡° said Hiruzen as he sat in the Hokage seat with his hokage outfit on.


    ¡° So what, at these times we can''t care about those trivial things. The vige is under constant pressure from the other Hidden viges and war will happen anytime soon.


    Just give him to mee. I will make a great tool out of him, ¡° Danzo said without any shame. To him the nine tails Jinch¨±riki is just a tool he should own.


    ¡° Danzo don''t you dare. How dare even think of it. From now on you are forbidden from having any contact with Naruto. This is an Order, ¡° Hiruzen said with a bit of annoyance.


    ¡° But Hiruzen¡­¡± Danzo continued to speak when he was interrupted.


    ¡° Danzo don¡¯t forget i am Hokage so do as i say ¡° Hiruzen finally said, making Danzo give up.


    ¡° You will regret itter Hiruzen ¡° said Danzo as he walked back to his base.


    If he couldn''t go near that brat then he will just make sure that brates to him. And with the situation in the vige his work would be much easier.


    Looking at Danzo''s departing figure, Hiruzen sighed and took a puff of smoke from his pipe to calm his mind down. Knowing his friend he knew that he would cause trouble for Naruto. But with Anbu protecting him, Hiruzen didn¡¯t think Naruto¡¯s life would be in danger.


    Sighing again he decided to get back to doing his paperwork. The uchiha n needs more surveince. The reports did say that they are getting upset over the judging gazes of the vige after all. Maybe he should make them move out. There is that ce which is great for surveince. Hmm maybe i can sell theirnd for the civilians and bring some money for the vige.


    Just as Hiruzen was going through the reports and making some very dangerous decisions he heard a knock on his door. Taking his gaze from the paper he called for the person toe in.


    The door opened and the anbu who was in charge of protecting Naruto came in. Looking at the anbu he asked,


    ¡° is there anything unusual to report about Naruto ¡°


    The Anbu replied ¡° No Hokage sama. I just finished my shift and came here in case Hokage sama wanted to inquire about the child. ¡°


    ¡°Oh I see, tell me is the seal holding well. Did any chakra leakage happen? Or did anyone suspicious try toe in contact with Naruto. ¡°


    ¡° No hokage sama the seal is perfectly fine. And no one suspicious came in contact with Naruto. Although some of the Fourth hokage¡¯s friends dide near the orphanage to observe Naruto they all kept their distance. ¡°


    ¡° I see thank you for the hard work you can leave now, ¡° Hiruzen said, dismissing Anbu. Although he didn¡¯t show it, he is displeased with the ones who came to see Naruto. They are going to be a hindrance to his n for Naruto. ¡® i should properly give them a warning in the next council meeting. We also need to find a way to get some money to rebuild the vige. ¡®


    The anbu who was about to leave suddenly thought of something and asked hesitantly ¡°hokage sama there is this ne around Naruto¡¯s neck. Do we need to remove it ¡°


    ¡®Hmm ne, when did Naruto have a ne I should tell them to get it here ¡­¡­ no i wouldn''t touch that ne, it was there in the beginning and there is nothing wrong about it. It is just something Naruto was given. It is just a normal looking ne. Nothing special about it¡¯ Hiruzen thought with a lost look in his eyes for a moment as he thought about that ne. Once his eyes gained rity he spoke to the anbu ¡° don¡¯t worry about that ne it something i gave to Naruto. It is just a ne I was intending to give him when he was born. ¡°


    The anbu nodded and said his farewells and left the office. He didn¡¯t ask anything about the ne again like he was in a trance.


    When the anbu left, Hiruzen resumed his paperwork andpletely forgot about the mysterious ne.


    Looking at him in the corner of the room there was a girl who was rxing on the sofa. She was smiling widely after listening to their conversation. But strangely enough Hiruzen and anbu didn¡¯t sense her even when she was in the same room.


    The girl Izanami stood up from her seat and said softly, ¡° well it looks like my work here is done for today. I am really looking forward to the future now ¡° with her words she simply vanished out of existence like a ghost.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 4

    Chapter 4


    In thend of fire in one of the small towns in one of the many casinos, there was an unusual crowd gathered. Although such a crowd gathering wouldn¡¯t be a surprise for a well known casino in the fire capital but for a third rate casino such as this it certainly is surprising. And what¡¯s more the crowd is just gathering around one gambling table.


    On one side of the table there sat a fair-skinned woman with brown eyes and straight blonde hair that parts above her forehead. Her hair has shoulder-length bangs that frame her face and the rest reaches her lower back. She wears a grass-green haori with the kanji for "gamble" (Ù€, <i>kake</i>) on the back, inside a red circle. Underneath she wears a grey, kimono-style blouse with no sleeves, held closed by a broad, dark bluish-grey obi that matches her pants. Her blouse is closed quite low, revealing her sizable cleavage. She wears open-toed, strapped ck sandals with high heels. She has red nail polish on both her fingernails and toenails and uses a soft pink lipstick.


    She is Tsunade Senju the granddaughter of the first hokage Hashirama Senju. Like her grandfather she also has many titles. Such as Konoha''s Slug Princess Tsunade , One of the legendary Sannin, The best as the world''s strongest kunoichi and its greatest medical-nin. Although these titles are super cool, most people don¡¯t recognize Tsunade¡¯s name when hearing it. Because these days she is well known as The Legendary Sucker.


    ¡° 1¡­2¡­3¡­ open¡± said the dealer as he showed the dice.


    ¡° Yeah, I won again¡± said one of guys who won the bet.


    ¡° Me too, today is my lucky day¡± said another.


    Simr conversations were taking ce in the gambling table except for Tsunade who gritted her teeth in losing again.


    ¡° Tsunade sama please let¡¯s stop for today. You have already spent most of our money. If you gamble even more we would have no money to spend on our food or for the inn. ¡° said a fair-skinned woman of average height and slender build with onyx eyes and jet-ck hair; her hair is straight and shoulder-length with bangs that cover her ears and frame her face. She wore a long bluish-ck kimono with white trimmings, held closed by a white obi, and open-toed sandals with low heels. In her hand there is a pink pig.


    This girl is Shizune . She is a j¨­nin of Konohagakure. An apprentice of Tsunade, Making her a talented medical-nin. She is also the niece of Tsunade¡¯ste lover. In her hand she held her pet Tonton. Due to Tsunade¡¯s irresponsible spending Shizune often had to endure hunger. But even so she didn¡¯t leave Tsunade. She will just beg and cry for Tsunade to stop her irresponsible actions. But sadly Tsunade never listened. Her stubbornness is something she inherited from her grandfather after all.


    ¡° don¡¯t worry about it Shizune, I will definitely win the next match. ¡° Tsunade waved her concerns off like usual and ced another bet.


    The others who saw cing a bet all unanimously ced theirs in the opposite one. This is how they won every match. Everyone who knew about Tsunade¡¯s reputation always ced their bet in the opposite one she ced as she never won a game.


    But surprisingly this time it was different. When the dealer revealed the dice it was Tsunade who won. There were cries of despair as some of them lost a lot of money. The greediest ones even ced everything they had.


    But Tsunade, contrary to what everyone expected, didn''t seem happy. She even had a deep frown on her face. She immediately stood up and said, ¡° Shizune we leaving pack everything quickly ¡°


    Shizune, although surprised, did as she was told without asking for any more details. As someone who went to war and survived, Tsunade''s instinct for danger is not to be underestimated. She immediately collected their prize money and left the casino with Tsunade.


    As soon as they left the casino Tsunade said, ¡° we are leaving town immediately, something terrible is about to happen to us if we stay here today ¡±


    ¡° How rude, speaking as though me visiting you is a bad omen. Little hashi did a poor job educating his favourite grandchild¡± said a voice making both Tsunade and Shizune surprised.


    Turning around they saw a little wearing a ck kimono with white floral designs. Her long ck hair danced to the wind tune making a serene scene. She walked towards them with an innocent smile on her face.


    But for Tsunade and Shizune this girl is anything but innocent. As ninja¡¯s they are very good at judging an opponent''s strength with their presence and chakra. And the girl in front of them has no presence and no chakra. And this is impossible. Every living being has chakra even if that amount is abysmal. For someone to hide their chakra amount their chakra control and strength must be better than the other person. And Tsunade who prided herself in her excellent chakra control can¡¯t even feel anything from this girl. This shows how dangerous this girl is. If she didn''t take the initiative to reveal herself first Tsunade doubted she can survive a sneak attack from her.


    Even though she is scared shitless Tsunade didn¡¯t dare to show it in her face. She asked arrogantly ¡° huh what is a brat like you doing here? ¡°


    ¡° ara ara Tsuna chan if i was someone else your tactic would backfire on you, don¡¯t you know you don¡¯t call ady brat just because she is small. That is even after you figured out that I''m no ordinary child. ¡° the child spoke in a calm but teasing manner. But her eyes showed that if Tsunade didn¡¯t change her attitude now she would be in for a world of pain.


    A normal ninja would immediately back off after this warning but who was Tsunade? She is the granddaughter of Hashirama Senju, a person who was treated as royalty everywhere she went. So would she back down to an unnamed little girl just because she was threatened.


    ¡° huh what did you say brat , you wanna a beating ¡° she would just threaten the other party. She always solves things with her fists after all.


    ¡° Sigh very well then it looks like I have to punish you the same way I punished your Grandpa¡± The girl sighed and said mysteriously.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° and that makes it a total of 25 spankings tsuna chan¡± izanami said cheerfully as she eyed the pale Tsunade.


    What she did to Tsunade was simple. She simply conjured a gambling table and made Tsunade gamble with her. If she wins, the number of spankings she receives would go higher, and if by some miracle Tsunade wins she will get 100,000 ryo for each win. This is the same way she disciplined Hashirama, as someone who has a gambling habit he would gamble without looking at the consequences. There was this one time where he got 100 spankings because of his losses.


    ¡° Shizune we are escaping here ¡° suddenly Tsunade shouted as she dropped a smoke bomb. And without any dy she dashed away. Behind her Shizune also followed her as though she is used to this kind of behaviour. But before they could go too far they were restrained by some tree roots that came from the ground.


    Due to her shock Tsunade stopped abruptly making it very easy to restrain her quickly. But she didn¡¯t register what was happening to her. Her mind stopped working after seeing the wood release. It was just after she was covered in wood did she snap out of it. She tried to break free from the restraints with her strength but to her surprise she couldn¡¯t.


    ¡° It¡¯s no use, you cannot break those restraints with just with your chakra. Maybe if you use that seal but if that came to that i will just let the wood use their chakra absorptions property. ¡° came the girl¡¯s reply as she walked towards Tsunade with slow steps.


    ¡° Who are you, how do you have this bloodline release? Are you one of Orochimaru¡¯s test subjects¡± Tsunade asked with anger. The only ones who should be able to use wood release are Senjus. And Tsunade didn¡¯t feel the familiarity one would have if one were a Senju from her. So the only option would be she is an artificially wood release user. And to artificially make a wood release user you would need to use her grandpa''s cells.


    ¡°Calm down girl, My name is Izanami ¨­tsutsuki and no I¡¯m not one of your teammates'' experiment subjects. As for why I can use wood release it¡¯s quite simple, I am the one who taught little hashi how to perfect his wood release. And to do that I need to have it too you know. And do you seriously believe Hashirama could make that much jutsu on his own. ¡° Izanami asked making Tsunade silent.


    This is something she is curious about too. Hashirama can be many things but he isn¡¯t smart enough to create that much wood release jutsus. Even her Granduncle couldn¡¯t have helped since he has no idea on how wood release worked.


    ¡° How can I believe you are not lying?¡± she asked just to confirm this.


    Izanami didn¡¯t say anything, she just showed Tsunade a ne she hung on her neck. It was a simple ne with two angel wings. This should be enough to believe her. And from the look on her face it seems like she believes her now.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 5

    Chapter 5


    Hashirama Senju who was hailed as the God of Shinobi was someone who is respected and feared in the whole world. But even so in his childhood he was just a normal child that hated wars. So how did someone like him be so powerful that all the elemental nations have to bow before his name. The answer was that he had a teacher who guided him.


    Due to his teacher¡¯s instructions he kept her name and identity a secret but as a sign of respect and gratitude towards her he and his fellow student and friend Madara wrote a diary. In the annals of history this is the second time where both he and Madara joined forces in creating something.


    This book had two parts, one which was written by Hashirama while the other was written by Madara. In this book they both wrote their experiences they had during her tutge. They originally thought it would be better to ce it in the Konoha grand library as a sign of good partnership between the Senju and Uchiha ns. But they decided against it as some other ns came to migrate with them.


    At that time they thought these ns would fight over it as the book was written by them. And they couldn''t be med as anything Madara or Hashirama used could be a treasure for those ns. So they decided to pass this book on as a family heritage.


    And Tsunade as a direct descendant of Hashirma naturally read through it. At that time she also thought it would be some kind of secret technique her grandpa decided to pass on. And imagine her surprise after she finished reading. At that time she tried to find the other part of the book as it said to contain a surprise if someone brought the two of them together. But she was disappointed when she realised that Madara took the other half away.


    Anyways what Izanami showed them, the ne was something that was mentioned in the book. It is said that this ne is also the symbol of this teacher¡¯s n. So if someone is wearing this ne that person will also represent the teacher. And this ne couldn¡¯t be replicated so there would be no frauds.


    ¡° So you are my grandpa''s secret teacher.¡± eximed Tsunade in shock.


    ¡° That''s right, I am that mysterious teacher little Hashi mentioned in his book. ¡° Izanami said in a bit of nostalgia.


    As someone who lived a long time she was bored most of the time. So as a hobby she began to teach some students. And in the era where Hashirma and Madara lived she just happened to live near the ce where those two boys meet each other secretly.


    So she began to teach them to pass the time while also thinking it would be quite interesting. And she was right. Both of them resembled Ashura and Indra so much that everyday with them was always something to look forward to.


    And the one who benefited most was Hashirma. Due to wood release being very special for a normal human wield there was rarely any user of it in the Senju n. Even some of Ashura¡¯s reincarnations didn¡¯t have it. So no one bothered to leave any detailed records or instructions about it. Due to that most of the wood release jutsus Hashirama has were given to him by her.


    ¡° So now that you are certain of my identity, let''s finish this punishment. We have a lot of things to discuss after all, ¡° Izanami said with a big smile. No matter how old she is as an otaku, she always wanted to beat some sense into Tsunade who she previously thought was too arrogant.


    ¡°Wait, you are serious about that, ¡° Tsunade asked in horror.


    ¡° Yes, of course I was. Did you really think I was just bluffing? Girl i am someone who would even burn your hokage¡¯s beard so much less you a little girl who only knows how to run away from debt collectors. ¡° Izanami said as she willed the jutsu to ce Tsunade in a suitable tform.


    ¡° Wait, what do you mean hokage¡¯s beard? As far as i know, that Minato brat has no beard. ¡° Tsunade asked, trying to buy some time to escape.


    ¡° Oh don''t worry about that we will talk about in length after this is over¡± Izanami said as she spanked Tsunade hard. For the next 20 minutes there were only the shouts of Tsunade begging for mercy.


    Shizune, who was forgotten, watched as her teacher was thoroughly disciplined. She wouldn¡¯t say it out loud but she is satisfied with this arrangement. As someone who is constantly being on edge due to Tsunade¡¯s actions, watching her like that brought some joy in it. But don¡¯t misunderstand, she will never betray or hurt Tsunade just because she is being pushed around by her. Her loyalty isn¡¯t that shallow. But if possible she would very much like it if this Izanami person woulde with them. That way she could be at ease as Tsunade wouldn¡¯t dare act like she was in front of her.


    ¡° haaa that was better, can¡¯t say i didn¡¯t enjoy it¡± Izanami said cheerfully,pletely ignoring the twitching Tsunade who was on the floor. She didn¡¯t dare to sit.


    ¡° Okay enough goofing around, use medical jutsu on yourself and sit down. We are going to have a serious discussion. ¡° Izanami said seriously.


    ¡° Should I go somewhere and book a private room for us? We are still on the streets right? ¡°Shizune said with a bit of uncertainty. For thest 20 minutes or so she didn¡¯t sense or see anyone near her area. Even for a rural vige this is strange.


    ¡° Oh don''t worry about that stuff. We are already in my domain of illusions so what we discuss will not be heard by anyone else.¡± Izanami said offhandedly, making Tsunade who was slowly getting up, stand up immediately.


    ¡° Wait by domain you don¡¯t mean the domain the legendary Rushif¨¡ n was famous for right. Wait, could it be you are a one of them¡± Tsunade asked.


    ¡° oh right i forgot to mention it but I¡¯m also the first Rushifa.¡± Izanami said dropping another bomb.


    In her n archives there was mentioned a n which dominated the world due to their unparalleled strength and intelligence. Even the Senju or Uchiha didn¡¯t dare make conflict with them. But suddenly one day the n simply vanished from the earth causing a huge uproar. It was theorised that they hid themselves in a domain which was their n speciality. As to why they hid themselves no one knew.


    ¡° oh we didn¡¯t hide, we just moved out to a better ce where we could stay in peace. Even now some peoplee out to enjoy themselves.¡± Izanami said, making Tsunade look at her in astonishment. ¡® did she just read her mind¡¯


    ¡°No, your expressions are too easy to see,¡± she said again, making Tsunade have a panic attack. What bulshit is she saying she as one of the Sannins naturally knows how to mask her expressions so what Izanami says is just not true. So there is one way this could happen.


    ¡® She is too skilled in reading people¡¯s expressions ¡® Tsunade thought with a grim look. Izanami here is the natural enemy of all the negotiators in this world as even if they could mask their expressions Izanami would still be able read them like a book.


    ¡° You are simply thinking too much of this Tsunade, if this continues we will be stuck here forever ¡° Izanamiined as she lightly flicked Tsunade¡¯s forehead.


    Tsunade took a deep breath to calm her mind down. Yes she would just stress her mind if she continued to think deeply about everything.


    ¡° So why do you want to meet me? ¡° Tsunade asked finally after sitting in one of the seats Izanami had prepared for this discussion. And to no one¡¯s surprise Izanami was already sitting in hers.


    ¡° Well it¡¯s nothing too big but can you guyse to my hidden Vige and stay there? Since the fourth Hokage died yesterday I think some fools woulde to eliminate you so you don¡¯t be the next Hokage as you are very suitable for the role ¡° Izanami said.


    ¡° What do you mean eliminate me and how the hell did that Minato brat died, And who the hell wants that stupid position? ¡° Tsunade shouted as she hit the table they were using. She lost her cool very quickly.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 6

    Chapter 6


    ¡° Yesterday after the wife of the fourth hokage gave birth she was attacked by a masked man. His aim was the nine tail inside of her. Fortunately Minato managed to rescue his son before the mask man killed him.


    A series of events happened and the nine tails was released into Konaha making the vige suffer heavy damage. At that time some one thought it would be a good idea to give the Uchiha n a curfew to suppress them. And due to this stupid result the death count went higher due to the ninja¡¯s being unfamiliar with the escape routes.


    Anyway the fourth hokage with help of his weakened wife sealed half of the Kyuubi in his son and half in himself. But as a result of this sealing they were both killed by an angry fox whose pride was stepped on.


    Due to Konaha losing their hokage Hiruzen took his position again making more than one person dissatisfied. So they will hold a high-level meeting today. Most of the n heads are still quite dissatisfied with Hiruzen so they will urge him to select the Fifth Hokage. But they won¡¯t pressure him too much as they themselves have their handful in dealing the aftermath.


    But in that council there is an idiot whose patience is running low these days. He will eliminate all the obstacles for him to be hokage even if it meant crippling the vige even more.


    So you get what I mean now? ¡° Izanami asked Tsunade, whose expression turned sour.


    ¡° Yeah Danzo wille after me due to my position as a possible candidate for the Hokage even if I am against taking the position. ¡° she said with a tired sigh. She left the vige hoping to get away from all of this mess but it seems like that is too much to ask for.


    ¡° won''t the third hokage protect master Tsunade if he was notified?¡± Shizune asked in worry. Due to Tsunade¡¯s stubborn nature she didn¡¯t tell the dark things about the vige to Shizune so she is mostly unaware how hypocritical their third hokage is.


    Izanami red at Tsunade and scolded, ¡° why didn¡¯t you tell her Tsunade, do you truly believe your beloved teacher would protect her if she was unaware of the truth? Face the facts Tsunade you can¡¯t run away from reality forever. ¡°


    Tsunade gritted her teeth but she didn¡¯t argue. How could she when all the evidence is right in front of her? After she got Hemophobia she investigated the mysterious deaths from the Senju n. And she found out that her teacher deliberately issued the most dangerous missions to the Senju n and even during team missions only the Senju n member would die by an enemy attack. She further found out that the civilians who had some Senju blood would mysteriously disappear. That¡¯s when she found out about the horrifying truth: her sensei and his three advisers are destroying the Senju and Uchiha ns.


    Due to her helplessness and rage she decided to leave the vige with her only family member Shizune. She couldn¡¯t confront her sensei after all.


    ¡°Argg what do you mean i should do then? Fight them please as soon as I say my findings I will be dead. And what¡¯s more I can''t fight back due to my condition. That¡¯s why I kept my finding a secret. Danzo only needs a valid excuse for him to kidnap Shizune. ¡± Tsunade shouted with tears dripping from her face. She lost her whole family and n. And what¡¯s more even while she knows the truth she can¡¯t take revenge due to being weak.


    Izanami said nothing as she walked towards Tsunade and hugged her. Softly patting her head she said, ¡°there there you can let it all out. ¡°


    And like a dam that was broken Tsunade let out all her emotions. She spoke about her n''s death, death of her lover and most importantly death of her little brother. She let everyint she had in her life out.


    After a few minutes she finally calmed down but even so she didn¡¯t let go of the hug. She liked how Izanami is petting her hair. It reminded her of her grandma who was strict but kind.


    ¡° Tsunade I know how you feel, believe I truly do. But you must realise this, the world is not so kind for us to live peacefully. So if we don¡¯t want any regrets we should live as we want in the present. So while your way of keeping Shizune away from the darkness is good it will only do more harm to her in the future. ¡° Izanami patiently exined to Tsunade only could nod her head.


    ¡° But you know your family isn¡¯t all dead you know ¡° hearing this Tsunade got up immediately. She looked at Izanami in astonishment. Did she hear it correctly is someone from her n still alive.


    Izanami looking at her expecting face shook her head sadly and said, ¡° I''m sorry to tell you but I couldn''t save anyone from the Senju n as Danzo made sure to eliminate everyone. What I''m talking about is the Uzumaki n. While you might not know, the Uzumaki and Senju were originally one n. And besides i managed to save a branch family from the Senju n so not all hope is lost ¡°


    Tsunade, hearing the first part, was saddened but gradually her expression became more and more excited. She was not alone in this world.


    ¡° Where are they now ? , are they in your vige? , which vige is it? Can I meet them ? ¡° Tsunade began to throw a barrage of questions at Izanami without giving her the chance to answer anything.


    Izanami let out a chuckle at her actions. She knew that Tsunade, longs more than anyone for a family. Which is why her actions didn''t surprise Izanami one bit.


    ¡° Calm down a bit Tsunade, they are in my vige which unlike the existing viges is actually hidden. In that vige there are numerous ns and civilian families I rescued in the past.


    So I''m going to ask you again will youe to my vige until you can protect yourself or is out of danger. ¡° Izanami asked again


    ¡° Of course I wille. How could I not when there are people from my n there.¡± Tsunade said excitedly.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <strong>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</strong>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 7

    Chapter 7


    In thend of hot springs three individuals who wore hoods walked through the crowd towards a rather luxurious area. This area was famous amongst tourists for it is where most could buy souvenirs.


    The three of them didn¡¯t pay any heed to the stalls that sell many unique items. They continued their journey until they arrived at a luxurious building which is called ¡® <i>Takamagahara ¡¯ .</i>


    Without any hesitation they all entered the building. When they arrived at the lobby, a guard came over to ask about their business due to all of them hiding their identity.


    ¡° What can I do to help you, dear guest, are you here to check in or meet someone.¡± the guard respectfully while also secretly signalling to his colleagues to help him if these guests just turned out to be troublemakers.


    The shortest of the three stepped forward and showed her ne while also showing the red ring in her hand. She said ¡° we would like a private room for a week. Since we are tired, can we get some rest before doing the necessary procedures?¡±


    The guard paused and bowed respectfully to her and said ¡° yes i will see to that, would you require me to escort you¡±


    ¡°Nah i know the way, i hope my usual room is still avable. ¡° She asked as she walked forward.


    ¡° Yes madam, that room will always be reserved for you, ¡° said the guard with a smile. He watched as the guests disappeared into the building.


    His colleagues who were waiting for any signal to intervene if necessary rxed their muscles. One of them came to guard and asked, ¡° so why did you all formal all of a sudden ¡°


    The guard smiled and said, ¡° of course i have to be formal to our leader¡±


    Understanding what his friend said the other also showed a smile, ¡° well that¡¯s a surprise, i thought she never used this way to go there ¡°


    Thetter shrugged and said, ¡° well we are too young to imagine what kinds of thoughts run through her head, maybe she came because she wanted to see us or maybe she came here on a whim who knows¡±


    ¡° hahaha that¡¯s true for someone like her, our normal thinking can¡¯t fathom her motives ¡° like the guards began to talk back and forth about how abnormal their leader is.


    While the said leader Izanami was twitching her eye every time she heard those two dimwits talk about her abnormal ways of life. She made a mental note to punish those two when they are off of their shift.


    ¡° So why are we in this ce again? I thought we were going to your hidden Vige.¡± Tsunade asked as she was tired of this long journey. When they first came to the Land of Hot Springs Izanami first brought them to a ck market hideout and purchased these clothes saying that it is for extra protection.


    After that she brought them in a roundabout way to this building which deduced was some kind of inn. Then she talked to a guard and walked inside like owned the ce. And it¡¯s not time to rest since the sun is still high up in the sky.


    Izanami turned to her and said, ¡° Of course we are going to my Vige but unlike the other viges my vige is called a hidden vige due to it being hidden. ¡°


    Tsunade was stunned at her words. Then she blushed in shame. How the hell could she know that her vige has literally been hidden from everyone. She thought it would be the same as the other viges.


    They walked for a few minutes and then reached a door that looks like it was taken out from an ancient castle on how it is decorated with designs. Looking closely Tsunade found there were many seals written all over it in very small letters so it is not visible at close ze. Even she only found it due to her seeing simr doors in the Senju n where they looked away important documents.


    Looking at Izanami in shock she asked, ¡° Is this the work of a Uzumaki seal Grandmaster¡±


    Izanami nodded and said, ¡° Correct, this door is made by the Uzumaki n I rescued. I take it you have seen simr doors in your n. ¡°


    Tsunade nodded and said, ¡° Yes, doors like these are used to store the top secret scrolls. ¡°


    Izanami noded and pushed the door open. A normal ninja wouldn¡¯t be able to feel it but both Tsunade and Shizune felt a wave of chakra scan them when the door opened. But they didn¡¯t panic as they somewhat expected this.


    Entering the room they found that it was a normal study. There was a bed, table and a bookshelf . Well those three already took most of the room''s space as this is a small room.


    When they all entered the room Izanami closed the door. She then walked to the bookshelf and began to pull one book that made a click sound. Soon on top of the table began to shine and three talismans appeared. She then gave Tsunade and Shizune each one.


    ¡°Lie down in that bed and pour some of your chakra into the talisman. ¡° she said as lied down in bed.


    Imitating her, Tsunade and Shizune alsoy down in the bed . Then they all poured some of their chakra and in a sh they disappeared.


    Opening their eyes both Tsunade and Shizune show something amazing. They were no longer in the small room. They were now in a hall that had a traditional vibe. But more than the ce they were in, they looked at Izanami in surprise. Did she just use the Flying Thunder God technique? Just as they were about to ask her they heard,


    ¡° Before you ask that question you should look outside, Trust me you would like the scenery ¡° saying this Izanami walked and opened the door that leads to the outside. Tsunade and Shizune looked at each other for a moment before they too left the room.


    The moment they went outside they were stunned. What they came out with was a building that looked like a shrine which means it is situated in a very high ce. Because of this they could see the vige scenery more clearly.


    They were no longer in thend of hot springs, no in fact they were longer onnd. They were now on a floating ind. How did they find that out, well da the clouds that a normal human couldn¡¯t is now just in their arms reach now.


    ¡° Well I would close my mouth if i were you, just to be safe in case a fly goes in there ¡° hearing this remark they turned to Izanami who was smiling at them.


    Looking at Izanami they saw she had taken off her hood. Her ck hair danced to the blowing wind. She spread her hands and said , ¡° Girls I wee you to Japan thend of the rising Sun¡±


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 8

    Chapter 8


    ¡° So did you enjoy the view? ¡° Izanami asked cheekily. She always liked to see the looks of surprise in the ones thate here for the first time. Tsunade and Shizune didn¡¯t answer her. They were too tired and shocked to answer her right now.


    Seeing them like this Izanami shook her head and said aloud, ¡° sigh it looks like they are too shocked to hear me, hey Nanami can you bring us a car, I¡¯m thinking of letting them rest soon ¡°


    Hearing her words a girl appeared in front of Izanami. She wore a ck clothings that covered most of her features. She also wore a mask that looked like a fox. She answered Izanami¡¯s request , ¡° I shall see to it matriarch ¡°. Saying so she disappeared like she was never there to begin with.


    Tsunade, who was listening to their conversation, had cold sweat running down her back. She could barely sense the girl and if she didn¡¯t appear in front of her she might as well not realise about her. ¡® This vige is scary ¡® she thought internally.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡® I love this vige ¡® Tsunade thought as she drank a huge wine barrel. After they went to the vige in what Izanami called a car, they arrived at a ce which looked like a Daimyo''s castle. And from what Izanami was saying it might be one since this ce is her home.


    When they arrived at their rooms the first thing Tsunade did when she was asked in what she wanted do was say, ¡° I need a drink to cool my head down ¡°


    Izanami nodded and asked a maid to give her what she wanted. The maid went and soon came with a barrel that had a few runes carved on it. When asked what it was she exined,


    ¡° You see in our vige there are too many ns that drink more than ordinary people do so we ced seals to make the barrel morerger inside so we can hold more alcohol in one barrel. ¡°


    And ording to her one barrel can hold up to 25 barrels total. And Tsunade was having a st over this. She no longer needs to wait for her next drink to arrive. And to be honest this licker is way better than what she had ever had in her life.


    Shizune who was also helping herself to a drink. But unlike Tsunade she isn¡¯t that much into Alcohol. She just likes to have a drink to calm her mind. Dealing with Tsunade can be quite tiring sometimes. Tonton was helping himself by eating the delicious food they were offered.


    While Tsunade and the rest were enjoying themselves, Izanami was doing some paperwork in her office. But unlike in Konoha where the Hokage was in charge of everything she only had a few responsibilities.


    In fact she wished she could give this work to someone else like she did to her other responsibilities but unlike in other viges where everyone is eying for power in this vige the people would do anything Izanami asked them to do.


    This isn¡¯t done because she brainwashed them or anything. No this purely because she is loved by everyone. Even if by some chance there was someone who would want power in the vige. They would juste and say that they are more suitable for the position. If Izanami deemed him suitable he would be then given her position no question asked.


    But if she deemed him not suitable she would just make him realise why she said so. First she would put him under the illusion of him seeding her position and observe his thinking pattern. After that he would put in another illusion where he would be one of the vigers who was hurt by his incorrect decision he made in his first illusion.


    This was enough to make most people who came to her understand her decision. That¡¯s why no one came to challenge her authority in thest few centuries.


    While this may be a good oue for some like the Third Hokage who wanted to cling to his position till he died, But for Izanami she hated it. For her who wanted freedom this position is a huge weight for her. So she gives most of her authority to the ones who are more suitable for them than her. She just reads their reports and advises them if they did something wrong in their monthly meetings.


    ¡® Speaking of meetings isn¡¯t the one for this month next week ¡® Izanami thought as she looked up from the report she was reading.


    ¡° Nanami dear, can you tell me when the next vige meeting is going to be held? ¡± she asked as she looked at the direction of a specific space on the wall.


    From that space the woman who was there to greet Izanami near the temple appeared. She took a small phone-like object from her pouch and answered, ¡° Matriarch, the next meeting will be held next week at noon . Would you like me to change the time and date ¡°


    Izanami shook her head and said, ¡° No no, I just asked to refresh my memory. Anyway Izanami, have you found anyone to rece me yet? I¡¯m too old for this position, you know. ¡°


    Nanami looked her with deadpan gaze and said, ¡°Matriarch forget my bluntness but even if by the off chance there was someone like that who is suitable to be your sessor, I doubt he or she would agree to it ¡°


    Like a spoiled child Izanami whined, ¡° why is that anyway, it¡¯s not like I¡¯m asking them to fight me to death. Could it be this position is actually cursed?  ¡° she asked as faked a shocked expression.


    Nanami, deciding to humour her said, ¡°yes it is cursed. Thest time you did an election for the Vige head position ,99% of the total poption voted for you. Even the other candidates gave their vote to you so yes the position is cursed¡±


    ¡° argg don¡¯t remind me of that. I still can¡¯t understand how that even happened. I mean if you are running a campaign against me why the hell would you vote for me? ¡° Izanami grumbled as she remembered that memory.


    Since the vigers are noting forward to challenge her position she thought it would be a good idea to hold an election so maybe she can go home. But no she won the election by securing 99% percent of the total votes. And that 1% was her vote .


    ¡° Sigh hey Nanami how is the world taking Minato¡¯s and Kushina¡¯s death. Izanami asked, hoping to change the subject.


    Nanami¡¯s expression turned serious as she typed a few words in her phone a few times before answering. ¡± Hidden cloud and Hidden stone are keeping it low for now. They would try poking Konaha to gauge their reaction. But ultimately they wouldn¡¯t do anything too brazen since they are still recovering from the aftermath of the Third Ninja War. As for the other nations they areying low on this one. Most are too weak to do anything now. But Konoha ninja bounties seemed to have increased. ¡±


    ¡° Sigh, typical, those nations would in courage the bounty hunters to do their dirty work. I think the most likely culprits are the Daimyos. Sigh little Hashi it seems like everyone wants a part of your vige ¡° Izanami said with a tired sigh.


    ¡° Let the Yokai unit know that they are allowed to bring any victims who would be caught in this mess¡± Izanami ordered. This was her usual order when these types of things happened.


    A ninja vige thought to test the waters and attacks a part of the enemy nation. The civilians in those nearby areas sometimes died without knowing why. So Izanami usually rescues those people with her elite guard unit Yokai. So on this ind most of the people are civilians who were rescued by Izanami.


    But unlike the civilians in Konoha where they only know how toin, here civilians are allowed to create ns if they have suitable qualifications. For example there are a group of civilians who are very good at making a unique licker then they could apply to register themselves as a n that specialises in making Likers. After they were officially registered they could use that n name to promote their goods and make huge businesses with other ns. If they are lucky they may be able to sell their goods outside.


    Because of this rule there are numerous ns in Japan. Some are ns specialised in fighting like the Yuki, Hagoromo, Senju. Some specialise in sealing like the Uzumaki. There are some who specialise in cksmithing like Kagutsuchi, Masamune or G¨­ka.


    Due to this unique culture the life of a civilian or a n member was not much different. The only difference they have is that n members could ask for guidance in their matters from the n while civilians have to find suitable people for guidance.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 9

    Chapter 9


    ~ 1 weekter ~


    In Japan there stood a building that has a history as old as the ind itself. This building is quite special for residents in Japan. This is all due to one simple reason which is , This is the ce where the important decisions would be made every month. They call this building the Jade pce.


    The Jade pce has numerous rooms for different purposes such as Meeting rooms, guest rooms, dining rooms etc. Due to it holding a significant value to the Vige most of the time it is guarded by Shadow garden, a unit that is tasked in protecting the Vige in the shadows.


    Today the Jade pce is quite lively. Since the monthly meeting would be held today, various n heads and department heads came to the Jade pce to participate in the meeting.


    Although any party can participate in this meeting they usually send their representatives to speak on behalf of them . For the major ns the n heads take this responsibility. For the smaller ns they will not participate until they want to ask for permission for something their respective department heads couldn''t do.


    There are various departments in Japan. Most of the time these departments are managed by the ns such as the Sealing department by the Uzumaki. Of course non Uzumaki can also join this department or even be a department head. But that rarely happens as most ns usually are specialised in their respective fields.


    Anyway even though this is an unorthodox way of governing the vige with izanami¡¯s leadership skills the vige was thriving . This is also one of the reasons why no one fights for Vige head position as they don¡¯t have the confidence to lead the people as smoothly as she could.


    In the room where the meeting was supposed to be held the atmosphere was quite lively. Various n heads who were mostly busy due to their busy schedules oftene early to catch up with each other. So most n leaders and department heads are busy partying with each other. And if someone from earth looked at how they party they will most likely say that this is a yakuza gathering.


    ¡° say Kazuma how is the recent project going, the one the matrach wanted.  ¡° asked a middle aged man with a ck hair and a beautiful face.


    He is the n head of the Yuki n which was said to be wiped out in The Land of Water. Simr to the Uzumaki, they were rescued by Izanami and were tasked in running the public security department. Due to their good looks they were quite famous in the vige.


    ¡° Oh I already delivered that to the matriarch already. I gotta say using seals to create a pocket dimension and then anchoring it to a ne is something only she can think of. Don¡¯t you agree with me Haruko? ¡° said Kazuma while drinking some sake from his cup.


    Kazuma is the n leader of the Uzumaki n and also the head of the Sealing department. His age is simr to Minato but with his red beard he appeared much older. Due toing to the vige with simr situations he and Haruko who is also known as Haruko Yuki got along together. And both of them are quite good friends.


    Soon the door that led to this meeting room opened and Iznami came in. Beside there were Nanami and another man who was dressed like a young master. He had hair quite simr to Iznami but unlike her he didn¡¯t have any silver strands in her hair.


    When everyone looked at Izanami''s face they all stopped what they were doing. The ones who were drunk quickly sobered up. Unlike her usual cheerful or mischievous face now her expression was some of fitting the leader of the Land of the Rising Sun.


    She took her seat as the head and sat down. Her aides both stood at her side. Even when she was seated no one moved or spoke. Although the younger ones remained clueless about her sudden change, the older ones all wore a grave expression. They knew that when she was like the situation must be dire.


    Izanami¡¯s gaze swept over the crowd and finally settled on Kazuma Uzumaki. She said softly, ¡° Kazuma did you get notified of what happened in the Land of Fire. Specifically speaking about what happened in Konoha. ¡°


    Kazuma, although puzzled, still answered ¡° I''m sorry matriarch, I only recently came out of my researchboratory. So I¡¯m still catching up on thetest news these days. ¡°


    Izanami nodded her head in understanding. Kazuma as the head of the sealing department had a lot of duties, and he would go missing in hisboratory for a few weeks straight when he was researching seals. At that time no one woulde to disturb him since the smallest mistake could blow the whole room apart.


    ¡° Vali tell them the details ¡° izanami gestured to the man next to her to do the exnation.


    The man named Vali Rushif¨¡ bowed and said, ¡° yes matriarch ¡°. He then deployed his domain and soon everyone saw that their surroundings turned white. With a snap of his fingers he made a few screens appear in front of everyone.


    In those screens there are reports about the nine tail attacks that happened in Konoha. Reading those reports the crowd became nosy. Especially Kazuma.


    ¡° Imposible , please matriarch, please tell me what here is a lie ¡° Kazuma asked while tears came down from his eyes. Due to his shock he even stood up from his chair.


    Izanami closed her eyes and answered, ¡° Unfortunately it is true. When I arrived at the scene Kurama had already pierced them with his ws. I¡¯m sorry kazuma i couldn¡¯t save your cousin ¡°


    Kazuma flopped down to his seat with a defeated expression. Kushina was his cousin and also her only family member who had the Uzumaki Royal blood. So her loss hit him very badly.


    Most of the n heads or the department heads didn¡¯t say much to him. They just looked at him with a worried expression. Haruko patted Kazuma''s shoulders to calm him down.


    Looking at his expression, Izanami''s expression softened. When Kazuma came to the vige he was just barely 7 years old. So Izanami saw him as one of her own children. And looking at his expression she said softly , ¡° Kazuma ¡°


    Kazuma turned to her. His eyes had lost most of its light. Izanami, unable to bear it said, ¡° Kazuma although I know it is cruel for me to say but you must move on. You have a nephew you know. Remember the ne I asked you to make. I gave it to him. And also all hope is not lost you know. I managed to anchor part of their souls to the ne. If we are lucky they could regenerate their souls and be able to have a chance to be reborn again. ¡°


    Hope began toe back into his eyes as he thought of what he just heard. Yes with seals it is possible for someone to stay in this world if they have a suitable body and a full soul. This is the same principle Orochimaru uses.


    ¡° Matriarch, can I meet my nephew?¡± Kazuma suddenly asked. Since that child is in Konoha without anyone to look after him. He wanted to confirm his well being.


    Izanami didn''t speak but her aide Nanami spoke on behalf of her , ¡° That would be difficult for now. And you calm down first . This matter is also rted to what we are about to discuss ¡°


    She looked at Vali who nodded and changed the content on everyone''s screens. There instead of a report about the nine tails attack. There is a report on what happened in the high level meeting in Konoha. In that report there is something mentioned about a child that would not be adopted by anyone due to him being the Jinch¨±riki.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 10

    Chapter 10


    ¡° Konoha can¡¯t be this foolish right? ¡° asked a man who looked like he didn''t want to be here. This man is Akira Kurokage. He is the n leader of the Kurokage n and also holds the position of captainmander. His duty is to rate the missions that would be given to the Yokai unit. And like the Nara n , the Kurokage n are born strategists. So he could easily guess what Konoha wanted to do with their Jinch¨±riki .


    ¡° Yes, they want to iste him. Although this might have high risks, the rewards are equally high for them not to try this option,  ¡° said another man who was drinking his wine without any care. His name is Sachiko Takahashi, the master strategist of the vige. Although he lookszy, that couldn¡¯t be farther from the truth. In fact he is someone who could be considered a master at strategists. So his brain always tends to strategize even the little details. So he is usually busy with his time drinking to not over exhaust his brain.


    ¡° Damn those Konoha elders ¡° shouted Kazuma as he gritted his teeth in anger. As someone who was from the n that was once betrayed by their closest allies he naturally doesn¡¯t have any good opinion of the higher ups of konoha. And in the report he clearly saw that Hokage made every family who wanted to adopt Naruto back down. His reason: ¡® Because Naruto¡¯s background would be known and his life would be in danger¡¯. What a load of bulshit. Did he think the other hidden viges have that much time and resources to go on a hunt for one child?. Even if they somehow wasted many resources to find him, how long would they continue their search?


    Kazuma began to curse the third Hokage and his advisers repeatedly for the next 20 minutes. Others who saw his expression didn¡¯t disturb. The Uzumaki are well known for theirck of awareness.  So when they get angry they don¡¯t beat around the bush and directly speak about it to their face. The others ignored him for now and continued their discussion with Izanami.


    ¡°Matriarch, what do you propose we should do about this? From what we gathered so far the other viges may use this chance to attack Konoha again. If we tread carefully we may be able to rescue Kazuma''s nephew. ¡°Said Sachiko with a serious look. Since he is called a master strategist, when Izanami wanted to do something he would naturallye up with a strategy to help her cause.


    Izanami looked at everyone again and sighed. He gave them a helpless smile and said, ¡°As much as I want to bring Kazuma¡¯s nephew here I currently have my hands tied on this. You should read this too get the bigger picture Sachiko ¡°


    Sachiko raised his eyebrows at Izanami¡¯s wording. You should know that he already read the full report before he spoke. So what made her hesitate. After Vali presented everyone with another document he froze. He simply couldn¡¯t believe what he was reading.


    ¡° um matriarch forgive me for asking but is this document real? You aren¡¯t pranking us or anything right. ¡° He asked in doubt. For the first time in his thirty whole years he began to doubt his eyes when saw this report.


    ¡° No, that one is real. That report is a copy of Danzo¡¯s orders to his roots. And just so you know we got this report from the Chiba n. ¡° Izanami said, making Sachiko shut up. He knew that Chiba with their unique secret techniques could shrink themselves to a level where an ordinary ninja couldn¡¯t locate them. They were excellent at infiltration missions as even elite jonins have a hard time locating them due their uniqueness. You wouldn¡¯t be able to locate an ant when you are surrounded by elephants after all. Although they were dangerous their n was on the brink of extinction in the warring state. In the warring state there were no sneak attacks, just destroy everything with a big jutsu. So their normal casualty rate is higher than other ns leading them to a rather dire state. Thankfully they managed to survive after Izanami took them in.


    ¡° But I still have a hard time believing this. We are talking about Danzo right. He can¡¯t be this stupid to act like this. If there is one mishap everything would fall apart. ¡° Sachiko mumbled under his breath but due to everyone¡¯s keen hearing they all heard it.


    Frankly speaking they couldn¡¯t believe this report either. Isting a Jinch¨±riki is nothing new, as most viges use this method to install loyalty or protect them from unnecessary harm. But what Danzo is about to do is utter madness. He isn''t just ying fire, he is pouring gasoline on it.


    ¡° spread the rumors of a Demon fox that was reincarnated as a child residing in one of the orphanages, make the orphanage director create a scene where their secret conversation would be heard by an adult , frame the Uchiha by spreading rumors on how they didn¡¯te to help the vige.


    Truly Danzo really is the darkness of Konoha. Not only did he want to rampaging Kyuubi Jinch¨±riki , he also wanted to kill off one of their founding ns . ¡°said Haruko with a sigh.


    ¡° Well Konoha might cease to exist after a few months. After all there is no way that old man could fend off the nine tails like Minato did. Should we just go and start recruiting the innocent ns and civilians matriarch ? It is the only thing we could do if the third hokage didn¡¯t stop babysitting his old friend, ¡° said Akira. He was just waiting for the matriarch''s orders to publish a series of missions they would need to do.


    Like that, various other n heads and department heads began to throw out some of their own proposals and reasons for it making the meeting quite rowdy. Even Kazuma who had woken up from his stream of curses also said his own proposals in this matter. Well most of his proposals were to nt a bomb in the root headquarters and the hokage towers.


    Nanami who was silent till now finally spoke to make everyone silent , ¡° enough behave yourselves you in front of the matriarch ¡°


    Everyone reflexively straightened their backs when they heard her words. Although no one would say to her face they have a deep fear for Nanami. It isn¡¯t because she was ugly or because of her position. No it is because this girl is a fanatic. Although mellowed down after working as the Yokai unit¡¯s leader in her early days she would kidnap everyone who didn¡¯t behave correctly and thoroughly educate them. As the oldest Rushif¨¡ apart from Izanami herbat experience couldn¡¯t be taken lightly.


    Yes, don''t be mistaken by her young appearance. Like Izanami she too achieved a level of power where she could be able to retain her youth. So the n heads who are mostly born from Japan knew about her. They still remembered the times where she was in charge of teaching a ss for a week due to an incident. Considently most present n heads were a part of that ss. Due to their upbringing and childish nature most of them were arrogant and had delinquent attitudes. And in that span of a week she managed to thoroughly discipline them that even Izanami was impressed.


    So even now when Nanami speaks no one wishes to interrupt. No, it''s safe to say that they don¡¯t dare to interrupt her. Their titles or positions wouldn¡¯t save them from her wrath if she was displeased. And they knew perfectly well that their matriarch wouldn¡¯t help them too much if Nanami decided to go on a rampage on them. She is her adopted daughter after all. And Izanami dotes on her family more than she realises.


    This is why the Rushif¨¡ n, even though it has no blood rtion to Izanami, is quite terrifying. Unlike the other ns that carried the bloodline of their progenitor the Rushif¨¡ n doesn¡¯t have that. Their members now are family members of the people who Izanami adopted. Due to not having a specific temte for them to train they all tend to go after different fields. The onlymon thing amongst them is that they all have a good mastery over weapons and have some almost perfect chakra control.


    The one that managed to achieve the perfect chakra control state will be able to manifest their domains. And achieving that is said to be called the pinnacle of what a normal human could achieve.


    Nanami and Izanami who went further from this state could be considered gods or people at the level at the six paths. They broke through the barrier that made them human. How that was possible will be told another day.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 11

    Chapter 11


    ¡° Now now Nanami dear, don¡¯t scare them too much, ¡° Izanami said, calming Nanami down a little. The atmosphere which was tense began to gradually calm down at her words. She then said to everyone present ,


    ¡° don¡¯t worry about Naruto, although I don¡¯t know whether it was Konoha¡¯s luck or destiny he would not destroy Konoha just because of his hardships¡­. probably. ¡° She sounded unsure at the end.


    ¡° Ahh, why is that matriarch? ¡° It was Kazuma who asked this question. Although the Uzumakis are passive in nature that doesn¡¯t mean they are saints. They react more violently than the Uchiha.


    Izanami scratched her nose while saying, ¡° well you see Naruto is kind of special. He is the spirit inheritor of my second brother¡¯s chakra. So ahh that would normally make him quite hard to rally. ¡°


    ¡° Wait, you said normally that would mean something changed, ¡° Sachiko, who caught on to this little detail, asked hesitantly. He has a very bad feeling about this.


    ¡° Well you see I may have added a function for Naruto tomunicate with his parents when he is asleep or in a very sticky situation ¡° Izanami said looking away.


    The room went silent. Everyone looked at Izanami with wide eyes. She might have doomed Konoha before any nation invaded it.


    While many may forget it, but Minato Namikaze is a scary guy when he is angry. There was a reason why two of the ninja viges ordered their ninja¡¯s retreat when they encountered him. And it¡¯s not just because he is the fastest ninja , no it is because he will hunt them down till he is finished with them.


    There was just one time when a rock shinobi attacked one of his teammates and managed to injure to the point where he had to retire as a ninja. Although the higher ups at that time didn¡¯t want to take revenge for this since they managed to get a better deal somehow , Minato didn¡¯t take this lightly.


    He disguised himself and entered the ckmarket and began his hunt. He hunted everyone who was in that party. He even went further and killed off the people who were indirectly involved in this matter. Turns out this incident was a set up as this teammate of his was a distant senju. If the Third Ninja didn¡¯t start Mianto would have gone further in his investigation and kill Danzo and Hiruzen due to their involvement.


    This is how scary Minato can be. And this information is only known to three factions. Iwagakure and Kumogakure due to their involvement in this incident. Andstly Japan who manages the underworld.


    Minato went to such lengths to a teammate he cares for and imagine what he will do when he sees how the vige is treating his son.


    ¡® May Konaha rest in peace ¡® everyone prayed in their hearts knowing what Minato would do to Konoha. And they wouldn¡¯t be shocked to hear that Minato resurrected himself to carry out his revenge. He is a one in a million genius after all. He just needs enough time and resources .


    Seeing everyone like they were about to hear Konaha¡¯s destruction any minute now Izanami¡¯s lips twitched. She was about to say that Naruto will lose his memories in the morning to escape from suspicion of the third hokage. And Minato wouldn¡¯t do anything to konoha till Naruto graduate . But she held her silence as a new n began to form in her mind. She has been quite boredtely so she was thinking of going on a vacation. And she might just be able to pull it off.


    She seriously said, ¡° Nanami make some arrangements for me to leave Japan for the next few years. ¡°


    Nanami asked in surprise, ¡° where might you go matriarch¡±


    Izanami cheerfully said , ¡° Of course, I''m going to Konoha. Someone has to make sure it doesn¡¯t self-destruct after all. ¡°


    ¡° haaah ¡° everyone was dumbfounded at her words.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    After much persuasion from everyone, Izanami''s trip was dyed for a few years. Even Kazuma tried to persuade her to cancel the trip. It¡¯s not that they wanted to keep Izanami from leaving , it¡¯s just that there are too many things she needed to do before they could let her wander around.


    Japan isn¡¯t the only territory they have in this world. As someone who lived in this world for centuries Izanami has many businesses and other hidden territories. And although most of them are self sufficient she still needs to make the final decision for many things.


    For example The ck market which is controlled by the Rushifa n needs her advice on how they should operate in various nations. Do they need to suppress the hidden ninja viges or should they suppress the daimyo. These important decisions are made by Izanami sincest month''s orders may not be suitable for the next month.


    And that¡¯s only talking about the ck market. There are numerous businesses that Izanami control. Each business could make waves in the ninja world if they were not handled carefully. For example the Uzumaki live off selling their seals in the ck market. If they are not careful the world economy may crumble because of them.


    ¡° Uggg I''m kinda starting to regret setting up all of this ¡° Izanami grumbled as she sank into her office chair.


    After the meeting was over they all dispersed to their own workces. Many new decisions came up in this meeting after all. And as respectable leaders they have to make sure their departments and ns are notified without any dy.


    And Izanami had to go and start doing her preparations to leave Japan. And she need to make a suitable background for her to legally stay in Konoha since being an orphan is more dangerous than illegally staying in Konoha.


    Well fortunately she has her lovely secretary who will take care of that. If not for her Izanami would have to do twice as many preparations as she is doing now.


    ¡° I''m really happy that you are my secretary Nanami chan ¡° Izanami said to Nanami who appeared in her office.


    This unexpected praise made Nanami who came to report something slightly off guard. Her ears began to turn red. Although she might appear strict and serious she is unexpectedly very shy to suddenpliments.


    Of Course this is only known to two people, one being Vali who often works with her while the other being Izanami. Only these two know her secret as she can¡¯t make them disappear or threaten them. Fortunately no poor soul managed to uncover her secret till now.


    Nanami quickly regained her calm when she saw the teasing look in Izanami¡¯s eyes. She sighed and said, ¡° Matriarch here is a report that might interest you ¡°


    ¡° Hmm, what could that be? ¡° Izanami asked aloud as she took the report from Nanami¡¯s hand. Reading it her expression froze. She read it again just to be sure.


    Rubbing her forehead she asked, ¡° hey Nanami can I get my vacation tomorrow. You can be the next vige chief so I can retire peacefully ¡°


    Nanami ignored her words and said , ¡° Matriarch just clean your own mess ¡°


    Izanami sighed as she said ¡° figures. Hey Nanami I will head out for a bit , be a dear and finish some of my paperwork. ¡° And without letting Nanami reply Izanami sank into the shadows.


    Nanami just sighed as she walked towards the vige head¡¯s seat. She sat on it and began to see what she had to do, ¡° Honestly mother, you should really be d that I''m your daughter. ¡° Sheined as she began doing the rest of the paperwork.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 12

    Chapter 12


    In one of the many hospitals in Japan, Tsunadeid on one of the many beds there and contemted her life¡¯s worth. Beside her Shizune sat on a stool trying to console her but to no avail.


    Suddenly a gust of wind came from the open window and Izanami appeared before them. She looked at Tsunade and sighed. With a bit of strength she flicked Tsunade¡¯s forehead making a bang sound.


    ¡° ow ¡°with a shout filled with pain Tsunade came back to reality. The first she wanted to do was hit the person who hurt her. But just as she moved a little bit her whole body began to hurt like hell. And that¡¯s when she remembered what her condition was. So as ast resort she red hatefully at the Izanami.


    But Izanamipletely ignored her re. She looked at Tsunade and sneered, ¡° what did the beating that kid give you not enough. Want me to discipline you too ¡°


    All of Tsunade¡¯s momentum disappeared as she looked away. She couldn¡¯t face anyone after what happened today.


    ¡° What now you feel ashamed, where was that shame when you were trying to boss around those kids huh ¡° Izanami rebuked her ruthlessly.


    Tsunade didn¡¯t answer her. She just looked down in shame. She truly felt ashamed of her actions at that time. But even more than shame she felt her pride shatter because of the incident.


    Earlier when she and Shizune went outside to sightsee they happened to find a good bar. And as the alcoholic freak she was, Tsunade naturally got drunk. Coincidentally the shop they went to was a shop that the Yamanashi n owned. This n in the Warring state was famous for their drunken swordsmanship. Due to their fighting style relying heavily on their drunkenness their n makes unique alcohol that can make anyone drunk with just one sip.


    Even Sachiko, the well known drunkard in Japan wouldn¡¯t dare drink their wine casually. This is because of one speciality of this wine. Normally after someone is drunk most medical ninja''s or n¡¯s that have a high regeneration ability can remove their drunkenness after injecting chakra into their brain. But after drinking this wine, the more chakra you inject the more drunkenness you be.


    Unluckily, Tsunade as a force of habit poured chakra to cure her drunkenness. And as she was still drunk she didn¡¯t notice the change and continued to pour chakra. It was only when Shizune noticed her condition that she finally stopped. But at that time it was toote. Tsunade was barely holding her conscience.


    Shizune tried to get Tsunade back to her room since she isn¡¯t quite stable right now. But due to the drunkenness Tsunade¡¯s stubbornness intensified. She stubbornly said that she won¡¯t go back to her room till she enjoyed looking around the ce.


    Since Shizune couldn¡¯t forcibly bring Tsunade back to her room she had no choice but to go along with her wishes. She prayed in her heart that Tsunade wouldn¡¯t bring them too much trouble.


    And to her relief they weren''t dragged into any unnecessary troubles Tsunade just strolled around the vige. But she let her guard down too soon as Tsunade¡¯s attention went to a peculiar machine. It was set up near the park they decided to rest for a while.


    Going near it, Tsunade found that it was a Gacha machine from the kids who were tasked in safe guarding it. Although she was unfamiliar with the term since it was a gambling Tsunade honestly didn¡¯t care.


    And she did what always do , she started gambling. And like always she only got the trashy items. But she didn¡¯t care, she just kept gambling until the kids guarding the machine said that her time was over.


    As it turned out, Izanami who invented this machine made a rule for whoever using it will only have 20 rounds a day. As she knew first hand the horrors of Gacha she did so that they won¡¯t be people who will go bankrupt in one day.


    But Tsunade didn¡¯t take this kindly. Due to her drunken state her temper was far worse. And when someone said that she couldn¡¯t gamble she exploded. Even her teacher wouldn¡¯t dare tell her to stop gambling, So she was about to beat some sense into this kid for stopping her.


    And her decision turned out to be a terrible mistake. The kid she was about to hit was a Uzumaki and not just any Uzumaki but a true Uzumaki who are most fearsome of them all. Kushina Uzumaki and Mito Uzumaki are also true Uzumakis.


    So when he saw Tsunade attacking him , he also attacked her. He used his Adamantine chains to seal Tsunade¡¯s movements. And with a punch to the abdomen he knocked Tsunade out instantly.


    One must know that Tsunade, although drunk, was still one of the legendary sannin. So for someone to knock her down that easily , they must have considerable strength. But for her to be knocked down by a kid who didn¡¯t look like a ninja. That destroyed Tsunade¡¯s pride.


    Hearing the story from Shizune Izanami sighed. She already read the report Nanami gave her so she only wanted to hear Tsunade¡¯s part of the story. She sighed once again before saying,


    ¡° Tsunade, I''ll be blunt with you. As you are now you only have thebat power of a special jounin. ¡°


    Tsunade looked at her in disbelief. She then angrily said, ¡° what the hell do you mean, I lost just because I was drunk at that time. If I faced against that kid again I¡¯ll beat him without even breaking a sweat ¡°


    Izanami looked at her and asked, ¡° Tsunade then tell me when was thest time you trained or actually fought someone. Hell, I''ll even bet that your chakra control might have lowered a bit due to you not doing it seriously. ¡°


    ¡° That¡¯s impossibl.. ¡°Tsunade wanted to say it was impossible but she quieted down when she remembered about a certain n, The n her sensei is terrified of , The Uchiha n. The Uchiha n are born warriors. So even when they are old they never stop their training. That¡¯s why the vige is afraid of them so much, even if they were old they at least have chunin level power.


    In fact the n itself are homes for various types of geniuses. Due to their curse they always think about the family members. Even Obito who was said to be a shame of Uchiha was not abandoned. If Obito asked any member for help, they would curse at him, but nheless help him.


    ¡° Tsunade let me make this clear to you. You might be the princess of Konoha or even one of the legendary Sannins but your status means nothing if you are weak.This is thew of this world.


    So Tsunade stop running away from reality. This is my advice from someone who lived in this world for a long time. ¡° Saying these words, Izanami flickered away from the hospital leaving Tsunade to contemte.


    Ultimately Tsunade sighed and said to Shizune, ¡° Shizune can you get me a bottle of wine? I really need a drink right now ¡° But she received no reply. Looking around she saw that Shizune was missing from the room.


    Tsunade sighed again at what was happening. Izanami might have taken Shizune away with her so Tsunade would seriously think about it. This made Tsunade helpless. She really doesn''t want to think about this matter as it is very much rted to her past. She sighed again. Looks like she is going to sigh a lot today.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 13

    Chapter 13


    A few days passed after Izanami had the talk with Tsunade. And Tsunade , although reluctant, began doing her exercises to shape her body back into top condition. She finally realised how much of a bad situation she is in.


    When she was still a ninja due her bloodline and endurance she could fight for hours straight without showing any exhaustion. And that too in simple taijutsu. But now due to her body can only fight 3 hours straight. After that time limit she will gradually begin to show exhaustion.


    Her chakra control which she was proud of was lost. At present she could be said to have a chaka control better than a regr jonin. But for Tsunade this is rubbish. This is also a reason why learning medical ninjutsu is considered very hard and impractical in the academy. To be a qualified medical ninja you must at least have jonin level chakra control. This is one of the reasons why most medical ninja¡¯s are special jonins.


    Since Tsunade still can¡¯t see blood due to her condition she was in a dilemma on how to improve her chakra control. ording to her, the best way to improve your chakra control is the fish exercise, where you mend the wounds of a dying fish. As she was mulling over this problem izanami decided to help her out.


    ¡° You know Tsunade, I may have a solution for your problem. First is an exercise I did when I was little to improve my chakra control. It¡¯s actually quite simple do you want to learn it ¡°


    To izanami¡¯s question Tsunade nodded frantically. Of course she wants to learn it. I mean who wouldn¡¯t want to learn the exercises that the teacher of her grandfather did to solidify her foundation.


    Seeing her enthusiasm, Izanami smiled. She then snapped her fingers and called one of the hidden yokai members. A man dressed just like Nanami had arrived in front of her while kneeling.


    She then instructed, ¡° get me two bowls filled with water ¡°


    The yokai member nodded and melted into the shadows. And after a few seconds he appeared again. But this time in his hands there ate two bowls filled with water. Thanking him , Izanami took the two bowls from him. The man bowed again and went back to his duties.


    Izanami then turned her attention to Tsunade again. Putting one bowl to the side she began her exnation.


    ¡° My exercise is actually quite simple. You just have to coat your hand in ayer of chakra and dip it inside this bowl. And in doing so you must be able to make sure your hand is not wet ¡° saying so she dipped her hand into the bowl. She kept it inside for a few minutes and brought it back outside to show it to Tsunade. And like she described her hand is as dry as it was before.


    ¡° Since you already have a good understanding of chakra control this may be too easy for you so let me tell you the next step in advance. ¡° Saying so, Izanami made a gesture as she was grabbing something . And then she then grabbed all of the water in the bowl like it was a solid object. Putting the bowl to the side she then started to shape the water into the various shapes like it was y.


    Tsunade had to admit she was fascinated by these actions. She once tried something simr in her childhood years but even then she could at most scoop a handful of water and not let it fall down. Not like Izanami who somehow seem to treat the water like it was rubber.


    ¡° Hmm from the look in your eyes you seemed to have done something simr , well not surprising since the Uzumaki and Senju n techniques require a very high level of chakra control. Well anyway do you think you could do this exercise now Tsunade? ¡° Izanami asked.


    Tsunade thought about it for a few minutes and answered , ¡° I think I could do the first step quite easily but I have no clue on how to do what you are doing now. I can¡¯t control the chakra I have already released from my body after all. ¡°


    ¡° Ahh you see, the trick here is to not let go of the connection you have to the chakrayer you release. Like for example you release a thinyer of chakra over your hand to prevent it from getting wet but in this step apart from the chakrayer that covers your hand you also release a thinyer over the water covering it from the environment. ¡°Izanami exined the principle of this briefly to Tsunade.


    ¡° I see, thank you for the exnation. I will be able to manage with this, ¡° Tsunade said as she took the remaining bowl away to practice. She will start her practice at her room so she wouldn¡¯t be disturbed by anyone. She is quite eager to get her chakra control back.


    Izanami chuckled and put the water back into the bowl. She then handed the bowl to Shizune and said, ¡° Here you should practice with this too. It¡¯s never bad to have a good chakra control ¡°


    Shizune thanked Izanami as she also went towards her room with an excited expression. She too was quite fascinated by Izanami¡¯s level of chakra control. And truth be told she wasn¡¯t able to improve her strength in the past years so she was thankful for Izanami to teach her a way to improve her strength.


    After both Shizune and Tsunade left, Izanami took a seat on the nearby bench as she rxed. She looked at the sky with a remorseful gaze. Although She didn¡¯t say it out loud, Tsunade''s condition was indirectly her fault. Due to her contract she couldn¡¯t actively meddle in the ninja world. So even when she knew Tsunade was going to suffer she could do nothing about it.


    And worst of all this incident isn¡¯t the first one Izanami faced. Throughout the countless years she was alive she was restricted from saving many lives. Indra and Ashura . Hashirama and Madara all these people¡¯s lives were ruined because of her inability to change anything.


    So she could only resort to saving the few people she can secretly. Just like she did with the Uzumaki. After the war was over and the ninja viges were about to invade the safe hideouts Izanami masked their presence to keep the few survivors alive. This is also why Kazuma was the only survivor of the Uzumaki royal bloodline. The adults all perished in the battlefield.


    ¡°But all of this farce will be over. I just have to wait for a few years. Just in a few years I will make my move ¡° Izanami dered as her eyes became determined. She could feel it. The restriction her contract had on her is slowly loosening. Well Naruto¡¯s birth signifies that the cannon has started. And that¡¯s why she wants to go to Konoha where everything started.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 14

    Chapter 14


    ~Timeskip 3 years~


    A lot has changed in these three years in the ninja world. Most Hidden viges managed to recover most of the resources they lost in the ninja war. Which led most of them to make some moves. Especially Kumogakure.


    Kumogakureunched an attack on Konoha in the disguise of peace talks. Their aim was to kidnap the Hyuga princess and bring the Hyuga bloodline into Kumogakure. This way they could also have the Byakugan in Kumogakure. But unfortunately the kidnappers were stopped by the Hyuga patriarch. In his rage he killed the enemy ninjas giving the Hidden cloud a reason to start the war. They demanded Konoha to give them the killer of their ninjas. They were hoping this would give them a valid reason to start the war, after all no vige wanted to be branded the bad guy. But to their utter disappointment The third Hokage agreed to hand over the killer.


    This action of the third hokage put the Hyuga n in a difficult spot. Although most of the Hyuga n elders would like to let Hiashi take the me, they cannot allow the n to be humiliated and let the byakugan spread to other ninja viges. So they decided to select a scapegoat for them. And that scapegoat became Hizashi Hyuga the younger brother of Hiashi and the leader of the branch family.


    Hiashi argued with elders for hours to save his brother''s life, to him his brother¡¯s life is worth more than a n that wanted to cripple their own people. But he was finally stopped by Hizashi.


    Hizashi then sacrificed himself to Kumo ninjas to save his elder brother. But unlike the cannon he didn¡¯t kill himself in the npound but he went on a suicide mission. After he was brought away from Konoha he broke through his restraints and killed more than 20 elite Kumo ninjas. The reports say that just when they were about toe near a Kumo hideout he went on this rampage.


    His body was not retrieved due to the fact that he killed himself with thest remaining elite ninja with an explosion tag. Due to this explosion both the elite ninja and Hizashi¡¯s bodies were turned into ash. If not for the eyewitnesses from the reinforcement team Kumo would have believed that Konoha secretly rescued Hizashi.


    And weirdly enough Kumo didn¡¯t pursue this matter again. Normally they would demand Konoha to pay morepensation with excuses like ¡® you ordered Hizashi to kill our ninjas ¡®. But this time they couldn¡¯t do that. In the investigation they found that the explosion tag that was used in the battle was from a Kumo ninja who was found dead in battle.


    Unlike the standard Explosion tag this one was brought from the underworld making it quite valuable. Reports say that he purchased this explosion tag to kill his girlfriend who was cheating with a weapon merchant. His n was to kill both of them in an explosion making it look like an ident. In fact he was about to kill both of them aftering back from the mission. He nned so that no one would suspect him as he just got back from a mission.


    The Hidden concluded that Hizashi on his way to Kumo spotted the explosion tag so he decided to do ast mission to the vige. As they say a dead man has very little loose after all.


    Since Kumogakure didn¡¯te for more trouble Konoha once again returned into an era of peace. But the unity ns had to the vige waspletely strained. The Uchiha were somehow med for not protecting the vige enough, ns like the Nara, Akimichi and Yamanakapletely stopped supporting the third hokage and the council. They didn¡¯t like what the vige did to the Hyuga n. The Hyuga npletely changed. Hiashi stopped being passive. He aggressively started to suppress every elder who aided the vige in sacrificing his brother.


    The smaller ns also began to distance themselves from the vige. Except for the Anbu, no one wanted to help in the vige''s urgent quests. This made the situation quite awkward for the Hokage faction. Without ninjas who willingly took any urgent missions they were slowly losing their source of ie.


    One must know that to issue an urgent mission one must pay twice the price that is normally required. So the vige usually earns a huge profit bypleting these missions. These missions are quite special as there is a high risk in these tasks. It wouldn¡¯t be surprising if the C rank mission suddenly turned B rank.


    This wouldn¡¯t happen in normal missions as the vige would investigate the mission first. This way they wouldn¡¯t have to sacrifice their precious ninja¡¯s needlessly to missions that turned from C to A.


    And of course the vige takes the necessary costs from the mission fee. Normally no one would notice this as the standard prices are already made after adding the investigation fee. The anbu would mostly take the investigation tasks of A to S rank. And if they are able to finish the mission they would also do it and submit it. So this way they would earn twice the money as they werepleting two quests at once.


    And in urgent missions no investigation team would so the vige cannot order the ninjas toplete them. This would make them look like the viins and if many ninja¡¯s rebel from the vige because of this decision the vige would only suffer. And they couldn¡¯t just order the anbu to do all of these tasks since there are way more important matters they are needed.


    So they would be in a dilemma until a certain someonees to the vige. Whether her visit would be a blessing or a curse is uncertain. After all, long lived beings rarely tend to followmon sense. And the said being is now chatting happily with a person who should be dead.


    In one of the guest rooms in Japan there were both Izanami and Hizashi sipping their tea with a serene expression. The room looked like it was from the Hyuga n due to their simr descines. And on the floor there were tatami mats making it a perfect Japanese traditional house.


    This room was made to amodate people who would be called traditional. And like this room there are countless other rooms specially made for different themes. If your guest is a youth who is barely in his twenties they would be escorted to a room where most furniture and decorations are modern.


    This is mainly to make the other party rx and make it easier to do the negotiations. Of course this knowledge came from izanami who once saw it in one of her favorite anime.


    ¡° So Hizashi, how does it feel to die once. ¡° Izanmai asked after she finished her cup of tea.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 15

    Chapter 15


    ¡° Hmm I don¡¯t know how to describe it. It just felt like I was stuffed in water and was forcibly taken away. ¡° He answered after thinking for a few minutes.


    Truth be told he himself is surprised at how calmed he is. He was sure he died in that explosion. ¡®Hmme to think of it why did even think of going for the suicidal move ¡® he wondered.


    And that¡¯s when he remembered it. When he was being dragged into the enemy hideout he heard a voice that gave him 2 options. One being quietly ept his fate and be a sacrifice or change his fate by his own hands. And at that time he wanted to see his son and brother. He wanted to be together with his family. So he chose the second option.


    The voice guided him in his operation. It gave him the necessary instructions needed to kill the elite kumo ninjas in such a short amount of time. It was also the one who told him to take the wired explosion tag. And if he remembered correctly the voice should belong to¡­


    ¡° Yes, that voice is mine. I was the one who gave you the necessary instructions at that time, ¡° Izanami said, surprising Hizashi. He wondered whether this girl had the power to read minds.


    ¡° No, I''m just very good at discerning people¡¯s expressions. ¡° the girl answered as if it was obvious.


    ¡° You are one scarydy. But can I ask a question? ¡° Hizashi said with a bit of fear in his eyes. He senses no falsehood in her words and he can¡¯t be sure of this either. If what she says is true then she could mask her expressions perfectly. So getting a read on her is quite impossible.


    ¡° If it is something I know then I will answer to the best of my abilities ¡° Izanami said


    ¡° How am I so calm even after all of this? I should be panicking or at the least on guard against you . But why am I epting everything at face value? Even when I actively try to agitate myself I can¡¯t seem to do it ? ¡° Hizashi said in a calm voice. But his eyes showed how restless he is inside. No one likes losing control of their body after all.


    ¡° Oh it¡¯s because of that, ¡° Izanami said as she pointed her finger in one direction of the room.


    Looking in that direction Hizashi saw that there was a small altar and on top of that altar there were three incense sticks which were lit. Although he isn¡¯t well knowledgeable in medicines he could tell that those incense sticks are made from medical herbs.


    ¡° As you might have guessed, those incense sticks are not normal. They are made from various medicinal herbs. Their main use is to forcibly calm the mind of anyone who inhaled its smoke. And of course we add some more herbs to bring out more fresh smells so it can be also used as a room freshener. ¡° Izanami said proudly.


    This was something a small n in Japan found out a few years ago. The n was actually something that liked to research in medicine. But in recent years they decided to find new ways to use the medicine they researched. And so they decided to ask for various opinions from the public.


    This method of asking for public opinion is, although a bit umon,is actually used frequently by various ns. Especially ns that specialise in inventions. It frees them from the hassle of thinking of new ideas everyday. And of course they would reward anyone who gave wonderful ideas.


    And it just so happened that this idea of using a mind calming herb as an incense stick is something Izanami came up with. So of course she is proud of this product.


    Hizashi had an imaginary headache when he heard this. Did this woman realise how precious this invention is? People from the logistic units will fight to the death for this. That¡¯s how scary dealing with paperwork everyday is. He wouldn¡¯t even be surprised if the third Hokage starts a ninja war for this. As the person who deals with more paperwork than everyone else in Konoha he would definitely want this.


    ¡° Say Hizashi, I have a deal that may interest you want to hear it ¡° Izanami said with her eyes shining.


    ¡° Hmm a deal, what could that be? ¡° Hizashi asked, raising an eyebrow.


    ¡° Well the thing is I am about to go to Konoha in a few weeks. So I want someone who would know the information of everyone who woulde seeking trouble. Especially in the Hyuga n where there seemed to be more than one nuisance ¡° She said with her eyes burning in anger. She has a special grudge with the Hyuga n elders who seemed to be hell bent on branding that damn seal on everyone.


    At her words Hizashi went on full alert. Even the medicine¡¯s effect seemed to have broken for a few minutes. ¡° I may be sacrificed by the n but don¡¯t think for a second that I''ll betray my n just because of that. ¡° He said, eying Izanami wearily.


    Izanami blinked her eyes in confusion before everything clicked in her head. She looked at him seriously and said , ¡° Hey don¡¯t make it sound like I am about to massacre the entire Hyuga n. And honestly I could gather what I want to know without asking you but the news directly came from a local and what gathered from the outside can be very different after all. ¡°


    And with a pause she continued ¡° And besides even if I wanted to I won''t harm your n. That is the only thing left by my best friend, ¡° she said with a sad expression.


    Looking at that expression Hizashi found it to be quite simr how his elder brother would look at him when the someone from the main branch makes trouble with him.


    Hiashi due to his position as the n head couldn''t interfere with and show too much favouritism to a branch family member. So he could only geit his teeth when he is forced to witness his younger brother being bullied in the family.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 16

    Chapter 16


    In the capital of the Land of Iron where life is filled with snow and samurais a meeting was being held. Unlike the meeting held by the elemental nations where everyone was like going to the battle field here is different.


    In the center of the room there is a round table that isrge enough to amodate 15 people. And on that table there are various screens that would be used for sharing reports and evidence to everyone present. And in front these screens sat 14 people.


    Although the climate of the Land of Iron is quite cold these people didn¡¯t seem to mind the cold as they all wore light clothing. Their attire resembled that of what someone would wear in the Sengoku period.


    But it isn¡¯t like these people are extremely and resilient to the cold weather to an abnormal degree. It¡¯s just that this room and almost every building in thend of iron is equipped with an indoor heater. They just need someone to put some charcoal and pour in a bit of their chakra to start the machine. And since the chakra capacity to run the machine is very low even an ordinary person could use it. Since this machine is a necessity for thend of iron it is sold at a low price. Even a beggar can afford it if they really tried.


    Of course like the other viges there are orphans and homeless kids in thend of iron too. But these kids are often recruited to do the security department , public service departments and factories that offer them some money in exchange for doing some chores.


    It is unknown who implemented this policy because as long as the residents in thend of iron remembers this was always like this even before the creation of ninja viges. So residents always followed this teaching. And it¡¯s not like they hate this policy. Many orphans who were helped by these actionster achieved great things.


    As the saying goes ¡®there are no useless talents it''s just there are no good people who can use it ¡®.


    The meeting room which was quite lively suddenly stopped after a messenger barged into the room. Normally he wouldn¡¯t dare do such a disrespectful thing as inside the room everyone has a high status. But he couldn¡¯t help it. The news is that important.


    He ran towards their daimyo who was also present in this room. Unlike in the othernds the daimyo of thend of Iron is someone who is respected for her strength and intellect. In fact the daimyo family could be considered a family of powerful swordsmen. Every sessor must pass the trial ced by the captains of each corp and earn their vote and loyalty. If there are two sessors one will be appointed as the daimyo while the other as the captainmander.


    In thend of Iron there are no shinobi. So they have samurais who act as security personnel. The most elite of these samurais chosen to form a group that is called the Demon yer corp. In their eyes the ones who harm their own even in this dire situation are just demons. If you have so much energy why don¡¯t you go help an elder who is unable to go outside just to get his medicine. The demon yer corp has the responsibility of protecting those innocent victims so most if not all members have their own teams manage the territory they are in charge of. So even if someone from the demon yer corp is unable to be everywhere his team members would be able to handle the situation. What¡¯s special about this corp is that each member has mastered a breathing technique.


    Breathing techniques are something samurai constantly use. Due to their inability in using chakra, breathing techniques are very valuable to them. Of course due to their importance there are copies of breathing techniques in the library. If you enter the army or need a way to increase your fighting power you are allowed to see these techniques under the supervision of a training advisor.


    The Demon yer corp has about 500 members. And the top of top members are called team leaders or Hashira¡¯s. To be a hashira one must create their own breathing technique or seed in bing a sessor for another Hashira. After the Hasira retires you could have his or her mantle.


    Currently there are 5 hashiras who are active. They are the me Hashira Shinjuro Rengoku , the Water Hashira Sakonji Urokodaki , the Thunder Hashira Jigoro Kuwajima , the Stone Hashira Tengen Uzui andstly the Moon Hashira Luna Rushifa who is also the daimyo of the Land of Iron.


    Luna took the message scroll from her exhausted messenger and began to read it. After reading she began to tremble. The other Hashiras looked at her with worried and serious expressions. And just when they were about to ask about the message Luna stood up from her seat and began to dance happily.


    Everyone was confused by her actions even more so when she started yelling , ¡° yes yes yes she is finallying here. Yes, today is the best day ever. ¡°


    ¡° Heye ond tell us why are you so happy, and please stop doing that your dance is horrible ¡° said Jigoro as he couldn¡¯t bear it anymore.


    Hearing his words Luna froze and in the next second she began to sit down as this whole situation didn¡¯t happen.


    Coughing slightly she said, ¡° ehem sorry about that, well you we will have a guest arriving at the capital in a few days so I want all of you to ry this message to your subordinates clearly, ¡® respect the guest who woulde here like they respect me , no give her a higher respect than me . And anyone who would antagonise her or disrespect her would be punished heavily without any questions asked. ¡® Do you understand? ¡° At the end of her words her aura began to rise as she pressured everyone in the room with her aura.


    ¡° Pardon my rudeness but may I ask who is visiting us ¡° the stone Hashira asked with a hand raised.


    Luna smiled and said, ¡°Our honoured guest is the 1st Hashira and the creator of the breathing techniques and finally the one who founded the demon yer corp the Nature hashira Izanami Otsutsuki ¡°


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 17

    Chapter 17


    ¡° Must you really go away at a time like this matriarch? ¡° Nanami asked in a toneced with asperation and resignation.


    Although Izanami didn¡¯t specify the true reason she wanted to stay in Konoha , Nanami knew that she just wanted to ck off from her duties. And in Japan, although it seems peaceful at a nce, the truth is far from that.


    The majority of Japan¡¯s poption is made from the ns that were on the brink of extinction from all around the world. So they all hold different ideals and values that may contradict each other. In fact in the warring state period it wasn¡¯t umon for the ns who recently migrated here to make trouble.


    But all those trouble makers were dealt with by Izanami. In fact it isn¡¯t wrong to say Izanami went to their npound and beat the shit out of every member with an inted ego. Showed her dominance and made them submit to her rule whether they like it or not.


    In fact most n leaders are now selected by this method. After all you need strength to defend and control your own n right. The exception to this rule is when selecting the department heads. The department heads are not chosen because of their strength . They are chosen simply because they are the best at their jobs. And unlike n leaders the department heads are protected by the Yokai corp so no one could put pressure on them. And even if by chance the department head and the n leader get into an argument it will be solved by Izanami herself.


    In Japan Izanami¡¯s rule is thew. If she tells them to go left they go left. Don¡¯t be fooled by how Izanami normally behave around each other. As a monster that even her brothers fear, how could she be less of a monster than her own father.


    ¡° Yes Nanami, I need to go. You know the Uchiha and Konoha are now at each other''s throats . I can¡¯t just let one of my brother¡¯s n be destroyed because of a silly civil war ¡° Izanami said with a serious tone.


    Sure she could be using this as an excuse to go on a vacation but that didn¡¯t mean she would shy away from her responsibilities because of that. Unlike what she remembered, the Uchiha and Konoha higher ups seemed to have an even more strained rtionship than they had in canon.


    The vige higher ups openly despise them to the point where they scowl at them in public. Even Danzo didn¡¯t need to do anything too drastic to fuel the fire. He just asionally made the root ninjas cause trouble for the Uchiha.


    The only reason they didn¡¯t go to war is because Hiruzen held his ground on not provoking the Uchiha. He even specifically ordered his n to not cause any trouble.


    ¡° And besides me going there might as well keep the other vigers in check. ¡° Izanami said with a mischievous smile.


    Seeing her smile, Nanami had a bad feeling. And she usually gets this feeling when her adopted mother decides to make chaos.


    ¡°Sigh, please keep the damage to a minimum¡± she finally said knowing that her mother is not going to listen to her at this point.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° So are we going back the same way we came here? ¡° Tsunade asked as Izanami came near them.


    During her stay here Tsunade managed to regain her strength. But due to her illness she still couldn¡¯t see blood. But unlike before where would faint with the scent of blood now she could at least think calmly for a few minutes before she gets dizzy.


    But unlike Tsunade Shizune was the one who benefited most these past few years. Not only did she manage to improve her chakra control she also managed to improve medical knowledge. In japan there are few ns who research medicinal herbs after all. She also managed to improve her surgical knowledge after working in one of the hospitals in Japan.


    ¡° Hmm we can use that method too but ¡­¡± Izanami said as she began to ponder.


    ¡° But what , do you have any other methods to get to Konoha much faster? ¡° Tsunade asked in annoyance. ¡® If you are going to say something then just say it without dying it . it is annoying to wait for the next part after you be curious ¡® She thought internally.


    Izanami gave them a big smile and asked innocently, ¡° Have you ever flew at the speed of sound ¡°


    ¡° ¡° Huh ¡° ¡° was the collective response from both Tsunade and Shizune.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° Hahahaha I really missed this feeling¡± Izanamiughed as she rode on her Latios.


    If you are wondering how a legendary Pokemon appeared in this world ? The answer is fairly simple actually.


    Izanami has worked hard and efficiently for thest few centuries so as the good boss Mr. Joy is, he gave Izanami many bonuses. And since she actually doesn''t get paid the bonus tends toe as random wishes.


    And in one of her random wishes she managed to get a ticket to enter the pokemon world. And as a hard core outaku how could she not catch a pokemon when she was given a chance to visit them.


    And she did just that. Due to her stay being only limited to 3 years she only managed to capture and befriend 75 pokemon. If she was given more time she could potentially capture more species.


    And the Pokemon she caught were given their own small world for them to enjoy. Honestly, the ce Izanami made them is way better than their old homes. And truth be told most of these pokemon she captured were rescued by her or they themselves came to her.


    As a person who practises senjutsu her affinity with Pokemon''s is off the charts. It could even be considered unfair as even the most cautious Pokemons let their guard down when with Izanami.


    While Izanami was enjoying her time, Tsunade and Shizune, who were also riding a pokemon, were holding it tightly in fear of falling down. The one they are riding is a Latias. And even when Izanami said that they won¡¯t fall down, these two find it hard to believe it due to the speed they are going at.


    After flying for an hour Izanami finally saw the borders for thend of Iron. ¡° We are almost at our destination so Latias and Latios let''s speed things up hahahaha ¡° Izanami said as the two pokemon increased their speed.


    Tsunade and Shizune, who were barely holding it back, screamed as the speed increased. ¡® why the hell did you say to increase the speed if we are near the destination , shouldn¡¯t it be the other way around.¡¯ They both thought , as they tried to stay conscious.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 18

    Chapter 18


    ¡° Luna sama, is it alright for not sending someone to escort our guests from the border? ¡° asked Tengen as he and the other hasira¡¯s gathered near the castle gate to wee their dear guests.


    Although he is the youngest of all the hashira¡¯s he is someone who has some exceptional qualities as a leader. So he couldn¡¯t help but wonder why didn¡¯t send someone to escort the guests.


    ¡® Is it some kind of tradition amongst Hasiras? But the others seemed to be as puzzled as me so it couldn¡¯t be it ¡¯ he wondered.


    Luna chuckled and answered for everyone to hear , ¡°hahaha you are right Tengen we would normally send someone to escort our guests. But you see our guest isn¡¯t someone we could treat with ourmon sense. This person is someone who even I don¡¯t know how to handle. And furthermore this person didn¡¯te through the border so it is impossible for us even if we send someone. ¡°


    ¡° oh if this person didn¡¯te through the border how do you know she wille today. It isn¡¯t like they could sneak in here with moon squids guarding the borders, ¡° asked Jigoro, now interested in this topic.


    Lua shook her head and replied, ¡° Frankly I don¡¯t know. As even if she came through the border I wouldn¡¯t know about her presence. She is quite skilled at infiltration after all. And even most of the moon squid secret techniques are made by her so tracking her is impossible. I just know she will arrive due to the letter she sent in advance. ¡°


    Everyone was shocked at her words. Although they refused to admit it, not even they could escape from the moon squads surveince. Even when they could perceive their presence no one could catch them. That is how advanced their skills are.


    ¡°Hmm oh our guest seemed to have arrived ¡° Luna said as she looked at the sky. As the leader of the Moon Squad her perception capabilities could be considered the best. So she managed to sense the movement in the air.


    And soon enough a silhouette of two flying objects began to came to everyone''s vision. The two objects slowly began to grow bigger for the hashira¡¯s to make sense of what it is.


    ¡° Is that a summoning beast? And how is it travelling at such speed? ¡° asked Sakonji in shock. As someone who focussed on speed he was very shocked to see such a summoning beast. If possible he would like to make a contract with it.


    Soon Latios and Latias descended near them. The first to get down was Tsunade and Shizune who ran towards a ce where they could throw their breakfast.


    Ignoring those two Izanami gracefully got off from Latias and patted its head. Latios not to be out done nudged her with its head asking for a head pat . izanami smiled as she also gave both of them plenty of headats.


    After they had their fill Izanami said to them ¡° Thank you for the ride Latios and Latias I¡¯lle to see you guys again. ¡°


    They both nodded their heads and flew away back to their new home. Unlike normal summoned beasts they quite enjoy themselves as they travel in the sky.


    After those two left Izanami finally turned to the people who were looking godsmack at her. They thought the person they were about to greet was an old expert or even a middle aged person. But even they didn¡¯t  expect to see a child who is no older than six to be the strongest and oldest of all Hashiras.


    However unlike the others Luna wasn¡¯t surprised at izanami¡¯s appearance. How could she not know what their n ancestor look like?. She knelt on the ground and said, ¡° It has been a while, Matriarch. I hope you had a fun journey. ¡°


    Izanami smiled at Luna and said, ¡° It has been a while Luna. When was thest time I saw you , Oh right it was when you came to Japan for a vacation . Come on , you should get up . You are the Daimyo after all  ¡°


    ¡° When has that title ever mattered to you matriarch, with the amount of influence you have you could make any daimyo kneel just by hearing your name ¡° Luna said . She was kidding about this. If Izanami wanted she could make anyone kneel in front of her without showing off her powers.


    ¡° Whatever, just get up already. Your subordinates need someone to introduce us after all ¡° Izanami said she forcibly made Luna get up.


    ¡° arhem everyone let me introduce you all , this is the 1st Hashira and also the founder of the Demon ying Corp The Nature Hashira Izanami ¨­tsutsuki ¡° Luna said.


    Izanami just gave them a smile and said , ¡° It¡¯s nice to meet all of you . Oh and if you guys are wondering those two who ran away are Tsunade and Shizune from Konoha but don¡¯t worry too much about them ¡°


    When she said that she could swear, someoneined, ¡° What do you mean don¡¯t bother I¡¯m a sannin for god¡¯s sake ¡° But she is sure that is just her imagination.


    ¡° Well matriarch, shall we go inside ¡°Luna said as she gestured for them to enter the castle.


    Nodding her in agreement, Izanami followed Luna to her castle. The rest also followed them including Tsunade and Shizune and their familiar Tonton.


    The daimyo''s castle in the Land of Iron is a bit different from the normal castle one could find in the elemental nations. It was built for practical use instead of luxury like others. This mainly due to the harsh weather the Land of Iron experiences everyday.


    Inside the castle is decorated with heaters and other modern machines to make the inside asfortable as possible. There were no gold vases or gold statues to show their wealth. Instead they have paintings and art works that were made by master artists.


    And in one of the many guest rooms the party began to take their seats. Izanami and Luna were rxed while the others were quite tense. Why they were so tense is due to invisible pressure Izanami is releasing. Although she didn¡¯t quite release her bloodlust yet her conqueror''s haki remnant is enough to put pressure on any being.


    As for why she even has a conqueror''s haki. it¡¯s fairly simple. One of her wishes was to be able to master any energy. And haki was obviously included in that list.


    In her early years she trained vigorously to train her haki. And due to all that hard work she managed to master every type of haki to their full potential. Not only that she even managed to pass her haki training to her disciples. Although most of them couldn¡¯t manifest haki, their initial understanding helped them greatly.


    Like for example Luna mastered her observation haki to the limit and managed to locate any person around 2 kilometre radius if she actively tried. This is how she managed to locate Izanami before everyone else.


    ¡°Ehmm matriarch, why are you releasing your pressure on us, did we do something wrong? ¡° Luna asked worriedly. At first she thought Izanami was just testing everyone. But even after all this time she didn¡¯t take away her pressure so she is quite worried about the reason.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 19

    Chapter 19


    ¡° hmm it¡¯s no reason I was just trying to determine whether the seals I ced here are working ¡° Izanami said she kept her eyes on the tea cup as she lessurly drank her tea.


    ¡® huh what seals ¡® Luna in bewilderment but before she could even ask that question the ce they were seated began to be covered by a barrier and momentster many cakes began to fall down all of them.


    ¡° Huh, what the hell is this madness ¡°asked Tunade in surprise. If they were not protected by the barrier all of them would be covered in cakes.


    The hashiras all grouped together as they surrounded Luna to shield her from any enemies. It was their instinctive response in a ce of danger. Although Luna is quite capable of taking care of herself, too much protection is never a bad thing.


    But suddenly izanami who was drinking her tea snapped her fingers making the cake storm stoppletely. Even the ones that were in mid air stopped. ¡° Tsk it seems like the seal was messed up by someone over the years ¡°she grumbled as she drank her tea.


    Luna, who was the first to get her bearings back , cautiously touched a cake that was stopped in mid air and her eyes widened in surprise. ¡° This is all an illusion, ¡° she said in shock.


    ¡°Huh ¡°everyone said in unison as they heard her words. Even Izanamai was surprised at her words.


    But unlike others she was surprised that Luna managed to identify this as an illusion. Although it may not seem like it she is a master of illusions so the seals that produce illusions are her best works. Is she getting sloppy in her seals?


    ¡®No that can¡¯t be it ¡® she denied that thought immediately. Although she ced these seals centuries ago and they have seemed to lose most of their effects, it still doesn¡¯t change the fact she is a genuine seal grandmaster.


    ¡® No, that''s wrong. I think I broke through that threshold long before I created these seals. ¡® she thought as she thought of many possibilities.


    ¡® could Luna simply have the talent to look through the illusions, no if she had that ability she may have already seen my original appearance. So it has to be something that has to do with just in illusions, wait could it be¡­¡¯ Izanami suddenly thought of a very terrifying but absurd idea.


    ¡° Hey Luna, how do you preserve the world when you use total consecration? ¡° Izanami asked in a serious tone.


    ¡°Huh Oh um I when I enter the total consideration world usually loses its colour. ¡° Luna answered her in a flustered tone.


    Hearing her answer, the other hashira''s had a confused expression. The world loses its colour that sure didn¡¯t happen to them. Sure in total concentration they will lose sight of others but even so they didn¡¯t experience something like that.


    ¡°Hahahahaha finally , finally someone else managed to master that technique ¡° izanami burst intoughter. Her serious expression was long gone.


    ¡° Hey, would you mind exining this to us, not everyone here understands what you are talking about after all¡± Tsunade said in a bit of annoyance. She felt that she was being left out from hearing an amusing story.


    ¡° hahaaha ha haaa ahem sorry about that , what was your question again? Oh right you guys have no idea about breathing techniques. ¡° Izanami coughed a little to calm herself. Well she couldn¡¯t help it. The technique Luna used was one of her best friend¡¯s special moves. She was a bit sentimental.


    ¡° Well Tsunade, although I doubt you have much knowledge about this subject so I will start from the beginning.


    Breathing techniques are a type of Kenjutsu. As you might be already aware we need to breathe the air for our body to function. When we run for a mile straight we sometimes feel out of breath. Do you know why, ¡° Izanami asked Tsunade.


    Tsunade, hearing the question, thought for a few minutes. In her mind various possibilities came. Such as not having enough air or blood cirction slowing down. And ultimately she asked, ¡°is it because the human body is wasting a huge amount of air we breathe. ¡°


    ¡°Yes, the human body wastes more than 60% of the air we breathe. ¡®So what would happen if I could drop the percentage of air we take. ¡®This is the thought that led me to create the breathing techniques.


    For weeks I studied how our blood circtes in the human body and modified my breathing pattern to take in more air and drop the waste percentage. Of course I couldn¡¯t suddenly make the percentage drop to 0% right off the bat. With trial and error I slowly managed to reduce it to 35% and that¡¯s when I made a shocking discovery.


    I found out that everytime i breathe I can also inhale some natural energy. And each time I managed to reduce the percentage more the more natural energy I could inhale. Due to my special constitution I could control the natural energy without turning myself into stone but for your ordinary person that is death sentence.


    This made me develop a branch of breathing techniques which are enhanced by someone''s chakra. This led to the creation of the chakra enhanced breathing technique. And if you must know this breathing style is the one every Hashira used as a foundation to create their own breathing style.


    So any questions? ¡° She asked after ending her exnation.


    ¡° Yes, why did you react like that after saying something about a total concentration technique? What does that even mean? ¡° Tsunade asked.


    ¡°Oh that well as you heard earlier breathing techniques make someone absorb a little amount of natural energy. And the more natural energy you are able to control the more in strength you grow.


    And the total concentrate state is something you could achieve after taking in natural energy. While not ridiculous as the sage mode , this state also allows one to achieve a greater perception and improved senses. And although this isn¡¯t said out loud to be a Hashira one must achieve the total consecration state.


    And Luna here achieved something that even your normal couldn¡¯t achieve. She managed to tap into the advanced technique Universal Perception. This is an advanced perception that allows the user to observe the world in its true form. So no illusions can be effective against someone like that.


    And during the time I have lived in this world I have only seen three people who are able to achieve this state. One is my best friend while the other is my niece. And finally we have little Luna here. ¡° Izanami said as she looked at Luna¡¯s shocked face with a smile.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 20

    Chapter 20


    Long long ago before the concept of shinobi or ns were born there stood a small vige in the Land of Ancestors. In that vige there was a unique family that held the leadership of that vige.


    In that family there were two sons and one daughter. The two sons were exceptional in their own ways. The eldest was a genius who used his knowledge and wisdom to improve the vige. The youngest, although not as talented as the eldest, had his own charm. He had the power to unite the people with his words and actions.


    The father who held the position of the vige chief was a powerful man. It was said that before he became a vige chief he and his brother fought and defeated a monster who was going to destroy this whole world. And most of all he had chakra which he distributed to everyone in the vige. Even though the chief was a powerful man he too began to grow old. And that¡¯s when disaster struck them.


    He called his two sons who were already grown ups to his office and gave them a trial.


    The trial was to go and help the people who were still suffering from the aftermath of their fight with the monster.


    The two brothers agreed to their father¡¯smand and went on a journey toplete their trial. The eldest who grew arrogant and cold in recent years found another small vige that was suffering from a water shortage. Investigating this further he found out that theke near them is dried up . So he used his chakra and wisdom to fill theke and notify the viges. And with his task done he departed from the vige to go back to his home.


    The youngest also found another vige facing a simr problem. But unlike the eldest he didn¡¯t just fill theke he tried to help the vige by making them a well so they could never have a problem like that in the future. Although this took more time he finally was able to create a well for the vige. And so he too departed from the vige.


    The two brothers finally came back home and told their story to their father. The father, after hearing them, finally made his decision. He chose the youngest as his sessor.


    The eldest unable to bear this left the vige swearing to take revenge on everyone. ording to him what he did was right and the vige chief position was rightfully his as the eldest child.


    And after a few days he came back to destroy his vige. At that time there was no one who could stop him due to his recent powerup. This led the youngest to confront his older brother. And simr to his brother the youngest also got stronger. If their powers were to be measured they most would be on an equal footing.


    But even so their battle was catastrophism for the vige. Even the father who was once powerful couldn¡¯t intervene as he had already given up most of his powers to his son. When all hope was lost a single sword cleaved through the air.


    This sword strike managed to force the two brothers to distance themselves. When everyone looked at the direction the sword strike came from they saw the remaining child, the younger sister of the two brothers walking towards them. In both her hands there are two swords shaped like Katanas.


    Everyone was surprised at the daughter¡¯s appearance. Most of the viger¡¯s shouted for her to take shelter. To them she was their princess whom everyone adored. So they don¡¯t want her to get hurt.


    But unexpectedly they were stopped by the father. Although most wouldn¡¯t have noticed it he noticed it. His daughter although isn¡¯t intelligent as his first son or as charismatic as his second she has her own unique qualities. But she always held back from showing her talents and stayed under the shadows of her brothers.


    The girl walked towards her brother with a calm expression. She wasn¡¯t even affected by the bloodlust or aura her brothers were releasing.


    The first to move was the eldest. He didn''t like it when someone was interrupting his fight, especially after his pride was wounded a few days ago. So in a fit of rage he attacked his sister. The youngest tried to block it but he was toote.


    The attack came near the girl but unlike what everyone expected she didn¡¯t panic. She calmly brought her sword down and split the attack in half.


    There was silence as the two brothers were speechless at her disy of power. They never thought that their little sister was this strong.


    Finally the sister came in front of her brothers. She looked at her brothers with a series gaze and said these words, ¡° Stop this fighting or else I will join you and make you dance to my tune ¡°


    Hearing hee arrogant words everyone was at a loss for words. They never experienced their sweet princess would say these words one day.


    Even amongst everyone the one who reacted more strongly to her words was the eldest. He blinded in his fury attacked the sister in a frenzy.


    The sister, almost as though expecting this, dealt with his attacks ordingly. At times, she deftly parried their strikes, while at others, she skillfully blocked their advances. Like this she continued to hold off against her older brother without any problem further shocking the audience.


    This went on for a while until the sister couldn¡¯t take it anymore. Her calm face was now filled with annoyance. Her patience for her brother had already run out.


    She finally began to retaliate. Her twin swords glowed with fire and lighting as she muttered, ¡° twin sword style 3rd form Lightning Ember sh ¡°


    Lightning and fire fused as it attacked the two brothers like a raging dragon. Some might wonder why she attacked her other brother when he stopped fighting. Well the answer is simple: he just stood there while she had to deal with their elder all by herself. As everyone knows women are quite vengeful .


    The sword attacks broke their two brother defences very easily. After all, it is powered by natural energy. But even if their defences were broken, how would the two brothers give up so easily? They created more defences.Then they poured more power into their defences and fortified it more. Fortunately their efforts weren¡¯t in vain as they managed to hold off the attack.


    But even when they managed to hold off against that attack they weren''t very happy. Why you ask because their sister was looking at them with a bloodthirsty grin. Her swords were still glowing with fire and lightning making them quite sure that she canunch such attacks a few times at them.


    ¡° So brothers what do you say, do you want to dance some more ¡°the sister asked with a look that scared them a little.


    But even when their instincts were screaming at them to stop this fighting they still attacked her.¡¯ So what if their sister had some power we are still stronger ¡® that foolish thought was what spelled their fate.


    The sister mercilessly gave a good beating to her brothers. After they finally admit defeat under her hand did she stop.


    So what do you think of this story? ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at some excited children that were sitting around her .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 21

    Chapter 21


    ¡° But what happenedter big sis Izanami ¡°a little girl asked Izanami. If one looked at this kid closely they would realise that this girl here bore a striking resemnce to Nezuko. Hell, even the other kids who were surrounding Izanami also had some resemnce to the other Hashiras.


    If someone asked Izanami how characters who were supposed to be in a different anime appear she would say she has no idea. Because she honestly has no clue how this is possible either. She would usually think of this as one of her bosses'' funny jokes. After all, what good would you do if you think about this too deeply?


    ¡° Hmm the siblings argued for a while but ultimately they had no choice but to reconcile after they were bested by their sister. After that they lived happily ever after, ¡° Izanami said with a smile.


    ¡° Big sister, why does that part feel like it is a lie? ¡° asked one boy innocently.


    ¡° who knows. '''' Izanami shrugged her shoulders with a mischievous smile. The children began to pester her to tell them more stories, making Izanami quite helpless. As much as she wanted to tell them some more she too had some work to do. So she helplessly left the yground after promising to tell them someter.


    After she exited the park she met someone unexpected. He is a youthful man with striking blue hair and bright blue eyes, dressed in a sleek suit. Despite his young age, his attire and demeanor exude an air of maturity and sophistication. Despite his small stature, he carries himself with confidence and poise, suggesting a sense of self-assurance beyond his years. His youthful features areplemented by his stylish appearance, creating a striking and memorable impression.


    ¡° Now this is a surprise. I didn''t expect I would meet you here Nagisa. So why did the CEO of the world banke here for ? ¡° Izanami asked in a haughty tone.


    Hearing her tone and words Nagisa who was also the CEO of the world bank smiled wryly. ¡° Come on matriarch, are you still holding a grudge against me for that time? Didn¡¯t I apologise already? ¡° he asked in a helpless tone.


    People who knew him would be shocked at his attitude. This man here is the person who controls the only bank in the Shinobi world. This makes him a person who has enough status to even make a small country kneel. After all, without money you can¡¯t live in this world. And besides most countries still running due to the loans the world bank is lending them. Without that no country would have been able to exist after facing three ninja wars.


    And if that status is not enough the man himself is a genius and freak of nature. It is said that his knowledge and skills in business are terrifying. Due to his genius, he is inherently prideful and arrogant. Even the stone shinobi who are known to be prideful would have to bow down to his arrogance.


    But why did such a man appear so meek in front of Izanami? Well Nagisa¡¯s full name is Nagisa Rushifa. But unlike most of the Rushifa n he is someone who was adopted by Iznami. His position could be said to be the same as Nanami. But unlike Nanami he didn¡¯t want any power in the n. He is a businessman not a n leader. So he mostly stays away from n politics which also made him spend less time with Iznami.


    Although Izanami as a responsible mother didn¡¯t stop him from going on his path. But she did make him promise to meet or contact him every month. But due to his workload he sometimes forgets to contact her. And incidentally he forgot to contact her for a month straight which made Izanami very angry.


    He still shivered when remembering his punishment that day. Izanami without any notice barged into his office and spanked him till he felt his but burn.


    ¡°Tsk even you are now addressing me with a formal tone , I knew I should not have given you that bank. After all you forgot my promise because of some paperwork right ¡° Izanami said with dissatisfaction.


    ¡°Ok ok mom cool down, you seriously need to cool down don¡¯t you need the bank for your uing n ¡° Nagisa hurriedly tried to calm her down. Sweat was pouring on his face as he dreaded what his mother would do.


    Although the world bank was something she started he was the one that is currently running it. And he quite liked his job. The look of desperation in the usual prideful daimyos faces were priceless after all.


    ¡° tsk so why are you here Nagisa ? I doubt you came here to look for me, ¡° Izanami said, still visibly annoyed.


    Nagisa said, scratching his head embarrassedly, "Oh, actually, I really just came here to see you. When I arrived at the pce, Luna told me that you went off somewhere, and knowing you, I figured I would find you here."


    ¡° hmm this is surprising I didn¡¯t take you to be one of those guys who would stalk little girls. Did being a bank CEO finally corrupted your brain. Well not surprising since most of your associates are rapists and terrorists ¡°Izanami said something too dangerous offhandedly.


    If Nagisa was a normal person he would freak out at her words. After all, what if someone heard those dangerous ims they would be taken away by some nice burly men for some rounds of interrogation. But as a foster child of Izanami how could he be normal.


    ¡° Yeah you are right mom, man those guys must have rubbed their bad habits on me. Anyway mom, do you want toe with me for a while, I promise I will give you some candy as a reward ¡° Nagisa said with a smile. If you want to talk back to someone like Izanami just try to be as shameless as her.


    Both of them stared at each other before bursting intoughter.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 22

    Chapter 22


    After a while they both stoppedughing. Since it isn¡¯t good to stay in the road for too long they decided to go to a nearby inn to have a chat with each other.


    ¡° So tell me why did youe looking for me Nagisa and stop with bulshit of just seeing me. Tell me the real reason you came here¡° Izanami asked her foster son seriously.


    As much as she wants to spend her time with her children she knows that they won¡¯t usuallye looking for her just to spend some time. At the very least Nagisa won¡¯te. He is someone who doesn¡¯t like to leave his work half finished. So he won¡¯t go on any of his personal journeys if there is any work he needs to do.


    Nagisa looked a little ashamed at her words. True he normally wouldn¡¯te to see her. Even this time he didn¡¯t juste to meet her to catch up with her. But even so he still loves his mother so hearing say things like this did make him a little sad.


    Seeing his expression, Izanami''s expression softened. Although she didn¡¯t want to say things so harshly as she knew her children¡¯s situation better than everyone. But they need to understand that not everything is fine just because you have a stable job.


    Nagisa bowed his head and said sincerely , ¡° I¡¯m sorry for lying mother but I really did want to meet you even if it wasn¡¯t my priority. ¡°


    Izanami sighed and answered, ¡° nevermind that just tell me why did you want to see me that badly ¡°


    Nagisa looked at his mother with a serious but curious expression and asked, ¡° Mother, what are you truly nning to do in Konoha? As you might be aware, Kumo recently provoked Konoha to check the overall situation. And from the looks of it the other viges would soon do their own methods to see how weakened Konoha really is. If they are convinced Konoha is weak they will go on a full attack like they did with the Land of Whirlpool . And in such a situation why are you going there? You do realise you can¡¯t protect Konoha without revealing your identity. ¡°


    Izanami smiled and said , ¡° well you answered your own question ¡°


    ¡° Huh¡± question marks began to appear on top of Nagisa¡¯s head. He is too confused to say another word.


    Izanami chuckled and answered, ¡° You are right . If I want to save Konoha from the other viges I will inevitably be forced to reveal my identity. But what If I create a new identity that no one would dare to provoke. ¡°


    Nagisa began to ponder what Izanami said. Honestly there already more than one identity Iznami could use to make the other viges weary. For example she is the owner of many famouspanies that are very popr amongst ninjas. If they issue a ban of not selling their wares to any specific viges the viges economy would copse. What can a ninja do when he can¡¯t buy the equipment he wants?


    ¡® wait if it is about economy there is one identity that mother could use to directly threaten the economy of any ninja vige. And with her calling me here I¡¯m pretty sure of my guess¡¯ Nagisa thought internally.


    ¡° Mother, are you by chance thinking of taking my position of the CEO of the World Bank away from me and using it to threaten the other viges. ¡° Nagisa asked.


    Izanami who was drinking the drink they were served did a splendid spit take at his words. She looked at her son with an using tone and asked, ¡° Why the hell did you think of something like that ? Do you honestly believe I would do something like that ? ¡°


    Hearing her words Nagisa broke out in a cold sweat. He didn¡¯t think his words would trigger such a reaction.


    What Nagisa didn¡¯t think is that for Izanami apart from her family nothing truly mattered. To her who has reached the pinnacle in various fields such things like positions or titles are nothing. This is why she even did that voting for her vige chief position. She isn¡¯t like Hiruzen who likes to cling to power. And honestly she hates such people. If you can¡¯t give up your position just don¡¯t hand it over in the first ce.


    After a few minutes of lecturing Nagisa Izanami finally calmed down. She sighed and began speaking again, ¡° Look Nagisa, I am someone who lived for thousands of years. I have reached the pinnacle in various fields and left my name in the legends. So it is not logical for me to be greedy for power.


    And besides when I assign someone to any position under my authority I only assign someone who is best suited for this position. Even you are no exception. Your talent in Business is unmatched in this era. And besides you have improved the World bank more than what I did so i have no authority to even question your position. ¡°


    ¡° So what were you going to do ¡° Nagisa asked curiously.


    Izanami smiled devilishly as she said, ¡° Oh nothing too serious I¡¯m just going to be your everyday Young Mistress who just happen to be the sole rtive to the CEO of the World Bank ¡°


    Nagisa stood up from his seat immediately as he backed away from Izanami. He knew that smile too well. That was the smile his mother makes when she reverts to her Young Mistress form. And oh boy is he terrified of it.


    As someone who meets with rich and influential people on a daily basis he can proudly say that his mother is unmatched in the field of acting as a young mistress. Those young masters would look like children in front of her.


    Even his reputation as a person who treats any noble as ants is made because he took some lessons from her. And honestly he can say that he didn¡¯t master even 20% of what she can do.


    Nagisa at this moment felt bad for the Vige elders in Konoha who will have to deal with Izanami in the future. He sincerely wished there isn''t anyone who would be provoked by her attitude.


    Well sadly for him his wish couldn¡¯t be granted since there is a one eyed mummy in Konoha that has too much pride in his head.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 23

    Chapter 23


    ¡° So, does anyone have any questions? ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at the people in the conference room.


    After their little discussion Izanami and Nagisa spent some time together catching up with each other. And the very next day Luna held a special meeting to discuss their future ns. And Izanami just now presented her n in full detail.


    Hearing her ns most of the people gathered here were too shocked to react. Most of them looked at Nagisa to see his reaction as his help is very crucial to this n. But as usual he had his poker face that he is quite famous for. So most of the attendees couldn¡¯t get a read on him.


    ¡° Hey Izanami care to tell me why I am here. You don¡¯t expect me toe with you to Konoha do you? ¡° Tsunade asked. She was just rxing in her room when she was dragged here by Izanami.


    Izanami shook her head as she heard this. Honestly she wished Tsunade would not be this stubborn on this matter. Whether she liked it or not she is still the Senju princess. If she really desired it there would be many who would support her. And for the n to seed smoothly her participation is needed. Even a child could realise this. But she nheless exined the reason for her presence,


    ¡° Tsunade do you really want to go back to your bad unhealthy habits? You should just stop running away from the problem. Whether you like it or not, the Vige your grandfather created is beginning to break apart. You should at least try to save it before everything falls apart.


    Don¡¯t forget there is a reason your teacher didn¡¯t want you to interfere with the vige council. The authority you wield is not any lower than the vige elders. So your presence is quite important for our n to work smoothly.  ¡°


    Hearing her words, Tsunade fell silent. She knew her responsibilities very well. But she is still hesitant to go back to that ce. The vige caused her too much pain.


    Looking at Tsunade''s still hesitant look Izanami sighed. She then began to bring out her trump cards to the table.


    ¡° Sigh, well it looks like I have no choice. Tsunade Senju, as if youe with me back to Konoha, I will pay off half of your debts you owe to the World Bank. ¡°


    ¡° huh ¡° Tsunade looked shocked at her words. ¡® When the hell did I borrow money from the World Bank ¡® she thought in wonder. But an unpleasant memory popped into her head.


    It was during the time she was searching for the disappearance of her n members. In one of the folders she found out that a considerable amount of money was borrowed from the World Bank toplete the construction of the vige. It was said that the Senju and Uchiha will be paying back the debt by giving a small amount of their mission rewards. Originally the debt was supposed to be paid off after a 100 years but with two ninja wars the time increased as more n members had to borrow money from the bank to buy off their equipment. And with each war taking more n members away it was estimated that the debt would be a considerable amount.


    At that time Tsunade didn¡¯t care about it as the debt of her n members was the least of her worries. And she honestly didn¡¯t hear about this in her entire ninja life so she mistakenly thought that Konoha somehow paid this off or the bank confiscated some assets the n owned to cover the debt.


    But now Tsunade knew the whole truth. ¡® This bitch overlooked it until I am drivened to a corner ¡® She thought as she red at Izanami angrily. Forget about paying the debt of her dead n members she herself is in debt.


    Tsunade really wanted to curse her grandfather this time. Unlike the personal debt she sometimes gets, this debt is a n debt. So if the n isn¡¯t extinct the remaining members must pay off the debt.


    Although this may sound unfair it actually isn¡¯t. Unlike personal debts where the interest increases every month. n debts are very easy to pay off. Since they just have to give up a small quota of their earnings it is very popr amongst ns. Especially with the major ns who have more than hundreds of members. It just takes more time.


    ¡° I really hate you , you know that ¡° Tsunade grumbled as epted her fate. She knew that there was no way for her to escape this. And even if she ran away she doubted someone like Izanami would take too long to catch her again.


    Izanami said nothing as she just gave Tsunade a small smile. Although this might be a little forceful, this is the only method she could think of to make Tsunade agree. And besides, Tsunade will definitely enjoy what she will do after they reach Konoha.


    ¡° So does anyone else have any questions. ¡° Izanami asked just to make sure.


    No one said anything as the work they had to do in this n was very little. Most of them had small duties like spreading the news to other nations or making some good kimonos for Izanami to wear.


    ¡° Well since no one has any questions let¡¯s get this n started. ¡°Izanami finally said after no one raised any questions. The rest stood up as they went to do their duties. Izanami has to leave in a week after all.


    Izanami gazed at the sky as she thought, ¡® Finally no more holding back. Hashirama and Madara, I will not let your dreams be destroyed by some idiots. It''s time for your teacher to keep her part of the promise ¡®


    She clenched her fists as she remembered the times she was helpless in saving her students. That contract made Izanami regret many things. If she had the ability she would have never let Madara go down the dark side.


    Izanami exhales deeply as she tries to calm down her mind. It''s not worthmenting about what happened in the past when you have the ability to change the future.


    Thinking so she too left the meeting room. She also has somest minute preparations to do.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 24

    Chapter 24


    Konohagakure also known as Vige Hidden in the Leaves is known as the strongest vige amongst the five great shinobi viges. As shown by the past ninja wars their title as the strongest remained undisturbed even when they were attacked by all four of the other shinobi viges.


    Due to this huge prestige, numerous tourists, merchants, and other influential peoplee to Konoha, resulting in its economy thriving better than the other viges. Numerous businesses bloomed due to the influx of people.


    Today there was a suddenmotion near the Vige gates as a rather important carriage came to view. This situation is quite rare as it was the norm for various Damyos toe and go so no one had reacted like this in ages. And even then the people wouldn¡¯t react like this.


    While this was going on, a carriage decorated with various designs was pulled by two ck horses, driven through the road undisturbed by themotion it was causing. The carriage driver was already used to this reaction, as it happened every time they went out.


    But that does not mean Konoha Anbu wouldn''t react to this. They already sent someone to report about this new arrival especially after seeing the golden coloured insignia of a pigeon. This is the insignia of the World Bank after all.


    Since these people are too high profile the higher-ups immediately gave a reply to the anbu team. With their orders received the anbu team quickly reced the guards and weed the guests. With their help the carriage went inside the vige without any checking.


    While this is happening inside the carriage izanami who saw all of this threw a wide smirk at Tsunade.


    ¡° heh i told you so ¡° She said with a look of superiority.


    Tsunade, hearing this, gritted her teeth as she clenched her fists in frustration.Earlier she and izanami just made a bet on whether the vige guards would let their carriage pass through without even stopping them. And Tsunade as usual said the unlikely option of them at least stopping the driver at the checkpoint just as a formality.


    But she greatly underestimated how much of a coward her sensei is. I mean,e on, aren¡¯t they supposed to be ninjas? What would they do if some enemy ninjas invaded Konoha under the disguise of this carriage? At least they should send in a sensor.


    ¡® Old man, you better pray that I don¡¯t get a meeting with you,¡¯ Tsunade vowed in her heart. She is going to have her revenge one way or another.


    While Tsunade was having some dangerous thoughts concerning her teacher, the carriage reached the Hokage building. The coachman got off from his seat to open the doors.


    But he was beaten to it as someone else opened the door from the inside. Tenegen, who was selected as the escort for this trip, got off to open a way for Izanami to get down. Izanami gracefully got down with the help of Tengen.


    She opened her fan and covered her face with it, just like any young mistress would do in the movies. Her acting was so good that even Tsunade and Tengen were stunned. Tsunade even had to disrupt her chakra to check whether she is in a genjutsu .


    "Hmph, so this is Konoha, huh? Not bad. This young mistress is satisfied," Izanami remarked with a hint of satisfaction as she strolled into the building, exuding an air of ownership.


    Hearing her words, the ANBU ninja, concealed in the shadows, exchanged grim nces. Each of them had endured numerous missions for affluent merchants and nobles during their tenure as ninjas. Those experiences left a bitter taste in their mouths, a sentiment they now felt resurfacing. They instinctively braced themselves for what was toe, their expressions revealing their apprehension. ''Ah, this is going to be troublesome,'' echoed their collective thought.


    It wasn¡¯t just them. Even the most respected figures shared this sentiment, as evidenced by the scrutiny of their guests through the lens of a crystal ball. Among them was Danzo, a formidable ninja and ndestine partner to the Hokage, Hiruzen. Unlike his counterpart, Danzo regarded the nobles with a cold detachment, his icy demeanor striking fear into their hearts with just a nce. It was this very quality that had prevented him from ever being seriously considered as a candidate for the position of Hokage by the Fire Daimyo.


    Of course, all of this was noticed by Izanami. As soon as she entered the vige, her Observation Haki enveloped the entire vigepletely. With her high mastery, she could preserve the emotions and thoughts of everyone within her range. This is why she even put on that show¡ªto gauge the reactions of the higher-ups. And to say she is satisfied would be an understatement.


    Hiruzen and Danzo are already starting to scheme on how to make her donate some money into their pockets. This clearly shows that they had clearly not done their homework.As a visitoring to Konoha on an official journey it was inevitable for The World Bank to issue a warning of their visit to Konoha.


    At first, Izanami had some doubts about whether Danzo or one of the other two elders would realize her purpose foring here personally. After all, why would someone send a representative from the World Bank if they don¡¯t have any debt? Just as Tsunade had discovered, a thorough examination of the financial records would inevitably unveil the truth.


    But it seems she underestimated their level of caution. From the emotions and thoughts she is getting from them, they didn¡¯t register as a threat to their rule. Maybe they thought she was just here to live in Konoha like the wife of the Fire Daimyo. After all, the World Bank did have a mansion in Konoha.


    Ah, I see. In that case, the sentence should be adjusted to reflect her internal thoughts:


    ¡®Well, now that I think about it, these guys don¡¯t really have any ability to govern,¡¯ Izanami thought to herself, a hint of disdain coloring her inner monologue. ¡®From what I remember, the vige still is functioning due to the policies Tobirama invented. If anything, the only remarkable things they did was to lower the education level of the citizens and send innocent children as cannon fodder.¡¯


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 25

    Chapter 25


    Izanami, lost in her thoughts, found herself standing before the reception desk almost unconsciously.


    ¡°Hello, miss. How can I help you today?¡± The receptionist asked kindly, breaking Izanami out of her reverie.


    Collecting herself, Izanami addressed the receptionist with a hint of impatience in her tone. ¡°Hmph, of course, this young mistress has some business here but that is no concern for you. But before that, where is your Hokage? Shouldn¡¯t hee and greet me? This young mistress doesn¡¯t have all day. If he¡¯s just trying to dy our meeting, then he should prepare to pay off the added interest on the debt Konoha owes us.¡±


    There was silence all of a sudden. Everyone who heard this whether they were civilians or ninjas were able to react as they heard her arrogant words.


    As Izanami stood before the reception desk, her impatience palpable, a collective murmur arose from those nearby. "Did this girl go insane or something? Why would the Hokagee greet her? Even if she''s a noble, isn''t this arrogance a bit too much?" Their shock and anger were evident, especially among the ninjas. To them, the Hokage was an idol.


    Sensing the hostility in the air, Izanami turned her gaze to the surrounding audience and asked arrogantly, "What are you looking at? Never seen a princess before? Tsk, is this how Konoha is? Everywhere you look, you can only see mad horn dogs who have no manners. I wouldn''t even be surprised if the people here kidnapped little girls to satisfy their lust. Maybe I should also charge this to the debt this vige owes."


    Hearing her words, the ninjas all turned away from her. Although they wanted to curse at this little girl for insulting the Hokage, they didn¡¯t dare to make trouble. They knew that this girl just wanted some excuse for extorting money from the vige.


    As ninjas, their ability to assess the situation was far better than the civilians who still kept ring at the girl. Although the Hokage wouldn¡¯t punish some civilians, he surely would punish the ninjas for creating more trouble for him, especially when they realized that this girl was here to collect the debt money the vige owed to them.


    The receptionist, a retired ninja, quicklyposed herself, masking any expression of annoyance or agitation. With professional grace, she assured Izanami that she would promptly inform the Hokage of her presence and inquire about his avability at that moment. However, her professional facade almost faltered upon hearing the words Izanami uttered next.


    "Huh, who do you think I am? I don¡¯t care if your Hokage is unavable right now," Izanami retorted, her arrogance palpable. "Just tell him to stop his boring stuff ande greet me. I won''t waste my time waiting for your Hokage to finish his porn book."


    The receptionist tried her best to maintain herposure, but her patience was wearing thin. Who did this girl think she was? Hadn''t her parents taught her any manners? She needed to learn how to respect her elders.


    Just as the receptionist was about to address the girl''s behavior, an ANBU ninja arrived on the scene. He approached Izanami and said in a cold voice , "The Hokage-sama has requested your presence."


    Izanami narrowed her eyes as she said , ¡° Watch your tone mongrel. Is this how Konoha is treating the representative of the World Bank? Maybe I should just increase more interest value to the debt this nasty vige owns the World Bank so no one dares to threaten this young mistress. ¡°


    The ANBU Root operative, d in the distinctive uniform, remained unfazed by Izanami''s threats. As a mere pawn in Danzo''s game, he was singrly focused on carrying out his orders. Without flinching, he reiterated hismand, "The Hokage awaits your presence. Follow me, or it will be considered defiance against Konoha."


    Izanami responded with a smirk, her expression challenging. "Heh, do you dare to try, mongrel? I''d like to see how Konoha would fare when the World Bank decides to seek revenge." Her words dripped with confidence and disdain, daring the ninja to test her resolve.


    ¡° That is enough '''' Someone shouted as everyone turned to see the other person who came out of the carriage. It was Tsunade Senju, the princess of Konoha.


    The atmosphere crackled with anticipation as everyone awaited Tsunade''s response to the insolent girl''s behavior. Surely, the legendary Hokage''s student wouldn''t tolerate such disrespect, especially in front of her revered mentor. But to the surprise of all, Tsunade didn''t scold the girl. Instead, she directed her reprimand at the ANBU operative.


    "Why the hell are you picking a fight with a little girl?" Tsunade''s voice cut through the tension, her irritation palpable. "Don''t you have better things to do?"


    Turning her attention to Izanami, Tsunade continued in a stern tone, "And Izanami, what''s the point of quarreling with this idiot? Let''s just go and meet with the old man."


    Izanami snorted dismissively, her disdain evident. "Hmph, I have better things to do than argue with that mad dog over there. I just didn''t appreciate his attitude. Who does he think he is?" Her defiance matched Tsunade''s, though tempered with a hint of arrogance.


    Just as she was about to continue her speech, Tsunade directly intervened. "Yeah, yeah, just leave the poor guy already. Let''s go already. Come with me; I already know the way to where the old man is." Tsunade''s tone was firm, signaling an end to the confrontation as she took charge of the situation.


    Without waiting for Izanami''s reply, Tsunade briskly left the scene, prompting Izanami to grumble about Konoha''sck of hospitality as she followed. Her entourage trailed behind her.


    As themotion subsided and the unexpected situation settled, the audience, particrly the older ninjas, gradually regained theirposure. They understood firsthand or through hearsay Tsunade''s fiery temperament, so her decision not to raise her fists or reprimand Izanami indicated only one thing.


    The realization that Izanamimanded such respect, to the extent that even Tsunade refrained from confrontation, struck fear into their hearts. Throughout the Fire Country, Tsunade''s respect was sparingly granted, reserved primarily for the Fire Daimyo himself, and even then, she did not extend such courtesy to his family.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 26

    Chapter 26


    In the office of the Hokage, a grim atmosphere prevailed. Even the typically serene Hiruzen wore an uncharacteristically troubled expression as he, alongside the three elders, observed the events downstairs through the legendary crystal ball.


    "Homura, is what she said true? Are we really in debt to the World Bank?" Hiruzen inquired, turning to his friend. Homura, entrusted with managing the vige''s financial affairs, held the answers they desperately sought.


    "Yes, I just went through the records earlier," Homura confirmed, his tone grave. "It appears that a significant portion of funds was indeed allocated to stabilize the vige during the First Hokage''s era under Tobirama''s guidance. This measure was taken to address the economic challenges faced during the vige''s infancy. However, what we didn''t realize was that this incurred a debt with the World Bank."


    He continued, exining the intricacies of the situation. "Originally, the debt was meant to be repaid by future generations of the Senju and Uchiha ns, the founders of our vige. The agreement was for a small percentage of each n member''s monthly ie to be directed towards repaying the debt. Given the poption at that time, approximately a thousand members in each n, the debt was projected to be settled within fifty years."


    Homura''s revtion cast a shadow over the room, as the weight of this newfound knowledge settled heavily upon them.


    Hiruzen nodded solemnly as he processed Homura''s words. "Yes, the casualties of the First Ninja War took a heavy toll on both the Senju and Uchiha ns, particrly decimating the ranks of the Senju, almost to the point of extinction."


    Regret weighed heavily upon Hiruzen''s shoulders as he reflected on the consequences of past decisions. "Allowing Danzo to operate unchecked was a mistake," he admitted quietly to himself, recognizing his ownplicity in the matter. Though he may not have directly endorsed the decision, his inaction had inadvertently facilitated it.


    "Given the circumstances, it''s only fair that both ns face the consequences of their actions," Danzo stated abruptly, his voiceced with contempt. "And as for those wretched Uchiha, they should consider themselves fortunate if their existence serves Konoha''s interests." His eyes gleamed with a sinister light, revealing the depth of his animosity towards the Uchiha.


    The other two elders also chimed in, their voices echoing agreement. "Yes, that seems quite reasonable," one of them affirmed. "With the Senju n no longer in existence, it is only fair that the Uchiha bear responsibility for their actions from the past."


    Their voices melded into a chorus of agreement, echoing Danzo''s sentiments with an air of validation. In their unityy an unspoken acknowledgment of the Uchiha''s past missteps, magnifying the significance of their debts to the World Bank. It was a burden too hefty for any run-of-the-mill n to shoulder. With the Uchiha''s future hanging in the bnce, a subtle sense of anticipation rippled through the ranks of Konoha''s elite. After all, there was a shared belief that a weakened Uchiha meant a stronger Konoha.


    "Enough, all of you!" Hiruzen''s voice boomed through the room, cutting through the tension like a de. With a surge of his aura, he asserted his authority as the Hokage, reminding them that despite his age, he stillmanded respect.


    Although the others fell silent in the face of Hiruzen''s imposing aura, Danzo remained undeterred. "Isn''t this reasonable?" he pressed on, his tone defiant. "The vige simply cannot bear this debt, especially in the wake of the Nine Tails incident and the aftermath of the Third Shinobi War. This is the best course of action for Konoha."


    To Danzo, this was more than just a matter of economics; it was a rare opportunity. With the Uchiha n weakened financially, they would have no choice but to pursue high-ranking missions, leaving them vulnerable to his machinations. It was a chance to further his own agenda, to utilize his Root ninjas to eliminate them and harvest their eyes for his own gain.


    "Danzo, enough," Hiruzen''s voice sliced through the tension, his re piercing as he addressed his persistent council member. "We will discuss this further once we''ve heard the full story from the representative. They must agree to our arrangement before any decisions are made." His tone brooked no argument, signaling an end to the debate for the time being.


    "Well, it seems you guys at least have some sense in your old fossil brains," a sarcastic voice remarked as the door of the Hokage''s office was kicked open.


    Everyone jumped as the door swung open, revealing Izanami standing there like she owned the ce. She strolled in casually, with Tsunade and Shizune trailing behind, their faces a jumble of resignation and confusion, showing just howplicated things were. Tengen hovered by the doorway, clearly feeling left out; nheless he yed his role as the bodyguard.


    "You old fogies sure have some guts to make this young miss wait," Izanami remarked with a threatening edge, using her fan to partially conceal her face. "So, do you have any exnation for this? Beware, if you don''t give this young miss a satisfactory answer, our negotiation is already over."


    "Now, now, youngdy, why don''t you calm down for a minute," Hiruzen intervened, his signature grandfatherly smile softening his words. "We were just a bit confused by your sudden arrival. Do forgive us, as we are quite old and not as quick to adapt."


    If this was a normal negotiation the other party would have to back down hearing these words. After all bullying an elder is frowned upon in every era. But unfortunately for Hiruzen the one he is dealing is someone who don¡¯t give a shit about this.


    "Huh, if you already know you''re old, then why the hell are you still Hokage?" Izanami retorted mercilessly. "And what''s with this elder council anyway? All I see is a group of old fossils who only know how toin. I mean, there''s a mummy in this room! Is Konoha socking that they need a half-functional person to manage it?" Her words dripped with sarcasm and disdain.


    Hiruzen''s grandfatherly smile faltered at Izanami''s words, a flicker of annoyance crossing his features before heposed himself. Danzo, on the other hand, emitted his gloomy aura, his anger palpable in the air. The other two elders mirrored his hostility, their res directed fiercely at Izanami.


    As the tension in the room thickened, Izanami couldn''t help but smirk behind her fan. ¡®Hehe, this is almost too easy,¡¯ she thought to herself, relishing in the difort she had caused.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 27

    Chapter 27


    In negotiations, maintaining a calm andposed demeanor is crucial. However, despite their awareness of this fundamental principle, the upants of the room couldn''t help but feel their anger stir at Izanami''s provocative words. After all, having ruled Konoha for over 15 years, they possessed a deep-rooted sense of pride that was not easily shaken.


    The first to react was Danzo, known for his arrogance and pride above all. His voice,ced with a palpable aura of killing intent, dripped with threat as he spoke. "Who are you to speak to us like that, brat?" he snarled. "Do you wish to make an enemy out of Konoha? Do you truly believe that simply because you''re a representative of the World Bank, there will be no consequences for your insolence?"


    Izanami''s smirk widened into a menacing grin. "Oh, do you dare to suggest that Konoha has the audacity to attack me? Izanami Yosokuna, the direct kin of Nagisa Yosokuna, the CEO of the World Bank? I wonder where Konoha summons such reckless confidence," she taunted, her voiceced with a chilling edge that sent shivers down the spine.


    At that moment, Danzo trembled involuntarily. The name Nagisa Yosokuna still brought terror to him, sending a chill down his spine. Back when he was first appointed as the Root Commander, he had entertained the idea of controlling Nagisa, believing it would provide him with significant financial backing. But oh, how wrong he had been.


    Before he could even make a move towards his goal, his financial situation had crumbled. In fact, it was no exaggeration to say that he was on the brink of bankruptcy. Just as he was considering embezzling funds from the vige, a warning letter arrived¡ªbearing the unmistakable mark of Nagisa Yosokuna.


    The letter contained only a few words: "This is thest warning I''m giving you. Try something like this again, and I will make sure you are penniless in the next moment."


    This incident instilled in Danzo an instinctive fear of the World Bank. Subconsciously, he knew better than to cross them. If it weren''t for hearing that name again, Danzo might have forgotten about the incident altogether, lost amidst the fog of old age.


    Seeing Danzo''s reaction, Hiruzen was honestly shocked. He had never seen his friend back down just from hearing someone''s name. This realization left Hiruzen deeply concerned. If Danzo, known for his unwavering resolve, was reacting like this, then this incident might be far more disastrous than any war they had faced before.


    "Hahaha, why don''t we all calm down for now," Hiruzen interjected with his usual kind smile, though the underlying threat was unmistakable. If Izanami didn''t back down, Konoha would have justifiable cause for war. After all, protecting one''s honor was a valid reason for conflict.


    However, Hiruzen''s assumption was gravely mistaken. Izanami couldn''t care less about starting a war. With the contract that once bound her now disappeared, she no longer felt constrained. Moreover, as Madara''s teacher, she possessed formidable power, capable of taking on all four hidden viges without breaking a sweat.


    "But before we descend into further argument, let''s put an end to this," Tsunade interjected firmly, cutting Izanami off. "Bickering amongst ourselves won''t aplish anything. Let''s just get this negotiation over with. I have other matters to attend to." Her tone brooked no further dissent as she directed the conversation back to its intended purpose.


    "Tsk, fine," Izanami replied with a click of her tongue, her tone dripping with disdain. "But don''t make it seem like I''m the one seeking quarrel with these old fools. This young miss has better things to do than engage in something so unsightly."


    Tsunade really wanted toment that she was the oldest among them, but in the end, she didn¡¯t dare to voice it aloud. Not when her sensei was giving her a resentful look. If she had to put it into words, her sensei would most likely want to say, ¡®Couldn''t you have informed us about this annoyance before all of this happened?¡¯


    Inwardly, Tsunade cursed, ¡®Hey, don¡¯t me me. How the hell should I know Izanami has a switch that instantly turns her like this? And do you honestly believe I would even say anything to you after all you''ve done to me?¡¯


    After everyone was seated, Hiruzen posed the million-dor question, "So, how can Konoha be of service to you?"


    Izanami regarded him as if he were a fool before retorting, "Well, obviously, you can be of service after paying off your debts."


    Silence insured after those words verbarated in the Hokage offce. Tsunade was trying very hard not to break her poker face andugh out loud. Shizune herself was faring no better.


    Hiruzen with twitching eyes said with a forced but calm voice, ¡° Oh can you specify the debts we owe to the World Bank ¡°


    Izanami nodded upon hearing this and gestured for Shizune to hand her some documents. cing them on the table, she began, "This here is the contract that was signed by your First Hokage, Hashirama Senju. It states that for the betterment of the vige, he borrowed the sum of 100,000,000,000 ryo. Over the years, the vige has only managed to pay up to 25,000,000 ryo, and that''s without taking into consideration the interest that has been umting for thest few years. The World Bank insists that you pay at least half of the debt before any negotiations can proceed."


    Hiruzen didn¡¯t say anything as he took the contract to inspect it. After reading it, he handed it to his friends. Although faint, there was a sense of relief in his eyes. The contract was exactly as they had been informed. So their earlier countermeasures would be enough to repel this disaster.


    Izanami, seeing this, had an evil smirk on her face. Thankfully, the fan was covering her face, or else everyone else would have run out of the room in fear. And her smile only widened when she heard Hiruzen¡¯s answer,


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 28

    Chapter 28


    "Hmm, ording to the contract, it is stated that this debt will be paid by the two founding ns of Konoha, the Senju and the Uchiha. Is that correct?" Hiruzen inquired, resting his chin in his hands.


    Izanami nodded in acknowledgment and replied, "Yes, at that time, those two ns under the name of Konoha borrowed that sum of money. Initially, they diligently paid their debts for a few years before it abruptly ceased. We patiently waited for your economy to stabilize, given Konoha''s esteemed reputation among hidden viges, fully expecting the debts to be honored. However, it seems we were mistaken," she finished, her tone dripping with disdain.


    Hiruzen, for his part, didn¡¯t even twitch upon hearing those words. As someone who had been Hokage for more than 15 years, he could be as shameless as Danzo when it mattered. Hepletely ignored Izanami¡¯s words and stated, ¡°Since this agreement was made by the two ns, it has nothing to do with the vige. You can go to the Uchihapound to ask for the debt, since the Senju only has one member.¡±


    Izanami didn¡¯t act surprised hearing those words. She simply asked, ¡°So you are saying this debt will be paid by the Uchiha and Senju only, and the vige refuses to meddle with this matter?¡±


    Hiruzen nodded as he continued, ¡°Yes, since the agreement was made this way, I fail to see any reason for Konoha to meddle in the matters of these two ns.¡±


    ¡°Very well, then this young miss will go visit the Uchiha n to settle the debt, but I warn you now, don¡¯t meddle with this after saying those words,¡± Izanami threatened.


    ¡°Worry not, the vige will not meddle with n matters unless it concerns the vige as a whole,¡± Hiruzen said tly.


    One might ask how he said those words in front of his student Tsunade Senju. Well, the answer is quite simple. A simple genjutsu made everyone forget about the presence of Tsunade and Shizune. If not for this Hiruzen wouldn¡¯t dare say these things out loud. After all, he still fears Tsunade¡¯s retaliation. Who knows what she will do if she gets mad.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s good to know,¡± Hiruzen replied, feeling a secret sigh of relief escape him. However, the next words from Izanami almost made him have a heart attack. ¡°Well, with that, over half of what I wanted to discuss is over,¡± she said with a smile.


    ¡°Oh, um, what else do you want to discuss with us?¡± Hiruzen said, internally freaking out. All his instincts as a great warrior and politician were screaming at him to run because what wasing next wasn¡¯t something he would like very much.


    Izanami said nothing as she took thest remaining scroll and ced it on the table. Upon closer inspection, it was a sealing scroll. With a bang, five mountains of piled-up documents came into view.


    ¡°These here are the details of the dead ninjas and civilians who all have debts to the World Bank. Usually, when someone who took a loan dies, we take all of their money in their bank ount to cut off their debts. In case there is someone who inherited his wealth, we will leave 50% to the inheritor and give him more time to grow up to be an adult and pay up the rest of the debts. Of course, if the inheritor has no money, we will offer jobs that they will have to work until the debts are paid.


    ¡°But you see, the thing here is, in ninja viges, there is a rule that says all of the possessions of the deceased will be taken by the vige unless there is someone to inherit the wealth. So, do you get what I¡¯m getting at?¡± Izanami said with an evil smirk.


    Although the elders and Hokage knew what she was talking about, their minds refused to believe it. If such a thing were true, then the vige would crumble under debts. So, they desperately hoped for this to be just a bad dream. But unfortunately, reality is often cruel.


    ¡°Since the vige ims all the possessions of every deceased ninja, they also im the debt owed by that ninja,¡± Izanami said, fully revealing her evil smile. Oh, how much she enjoyed this feeling¡ªthe look of utter despair on the faces of those who thought themselves important.


    ¡°So, how will Konoha pay off this debt?¡± Izanami said, delivering the finishing blow.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    "Hah, that''s exactly what I needed," Izanami remarked, taking a satisfying sip from her cup of sake.


    ¡°I can¡¯t believe you were able to do that,¡± Tsunade said absentmindedly. She couldn¡¯t fathom how the earlier incident happened. She witnessed the scene of the higher-ups, who were always so arrogant, bow down under Izanami¡¯s every instruction. Even Danzo said nothing.


    ¡°Heh, if you think that''s impressive, then you surely haven¡¯t seen the world yet,¡± Izanami said with a chuckle. Truthfully speaking, the World Bank didn''t care about the money they lent to Konoha. As the only bank in the shinobi world, there was no way they would have a loss if they yed their cards right. And the money the bank lent to the daimyo was way more than the money they had lent to Konoha. Izanami only did it to achieve one of her goals. And that was to take custody of one little boy.


    ¡°Izanami-sama, we have arrived at our destination,¡± the voice of the carriage driver rang out as he stopped the carriage at a luxurious vi.


    Tengen opened the door for Izanami and the rest to disembark. If someone didn¡¯t know any better, they would think that he is a butler. Well, that couldn¡¯t be further from the truth. The truth is, the only reason Tengen is here is to indicate that the Land of Iron is on Izanami¡¯s side. Well, that is the official reason anyway. The true reason he is here is that he wants to have a vacation and travel around the world. As a teenager, it''s in his blood to explore the unknown.


    Luna, knowing this, allowed him to apany Izanami. He was told to guard her for three months ande back to do his duties.


    When Izanami saw the ce they were living in, a nostalgic look appeared in her eyes. Although the house had some old architecture, it was quite luxuriouspared to what an average civilian has. What made Izanami quite nostalgic is that this house had the same design as the one she lived in when she was younger. She remembered one time showing a picture to Hashirama and Madara about her old home.


    ¡°So this is your house in Konoha, huh? I wonder why I never remember this being here,¡± Tsunade said, mumbling in confusion. For her, who lived in this vige for most of her life, this is the first time she saw or heard about this house being here.


    ¡®Did they build it after the Nine-Tails incident? No, that''s impossible. I can feel faint traces of my grandfather''s Wood Style chakra from this building. So, this means this building was here when the vige was founded. But howe I didn¡¯t know this?¡¯ she wondered as she gazed at the building.


    ¡°The answer is quite simple, actually. I ced some seals here to make everyone here forget about this building. So even if you saw this building before, you wouldn¡¯t pay any attention to it, like you wouldn¡¯t pay any attention to every pebble youe across,¡± Izanami said, interrupting her thoughts.


    ¡°Seals are too overpowered,¡± that''s all Tsunade could say afterprehending what Izanami said.


    ¡°Of course they are. Why the hell do you think other ninja viges all united to destroy the Uzumaki n?¡± Izanami said as a matter of fact tone as she walked towards the house.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 29

    Chapter 29


    Despite not being used very often, the interior of the vi was quite clean. The floors were swept clean, the furniture polished to a shine. Sunlight streamed in through the windows, casting a warm glow over the tastefully decorated rooms. It was evident that someone had been maintaining the ce meticulously, despite its infrequent use. Izanami walked through the halls with a sense of familiarity, her footsteps echoing softly against the wooden floors.


    Following her, the rest looked at the vi with curious eyes. It¡¯s not every day you see something so luxurious, especially since the wood here is made by their revered God of Shinobi. If news of such a building''s existence were revealed to the public, this ce would have already been hailed as the most famous tourist attraction.


    As everyone knows, Hashirama, despite being hailed as the God of Shinobi, wasn¡¯t known for his creativity and intelligence, so he almost never made any buildings. Even in making the Senjupound, Hashirama only supplied the wood and not the building itself, like how Yamato would do in the future.


    So for Hashirama to make such a wonderful vi, it is seen how much effort he put into aplishing it. This building may as well be his greatest masterpiece if we didn''t take Konoha vige into ount.


    While they were marveling at the building, a group of animals emerged from inside to wee them. This group was quite bizarre, as there were cats, dogs, and crows among them.


    Usually, such a group wouldn''te together, as some of them are each other''s natural enemies. Even if trained at a young age, they wouldn''te as a group. But the most surprising thing here is that all these animals have eyes full of wisdom. If one didn''t know any better, some might mistake them for a bunch of ninjas who used transformation jutsu.


    Even amongst ninja beasts, only sage animals have shown this much intellect in their eyes. This is also one of the reasons why the Sannin are quite popr, due to their ability tomand many beasts who have wisdom simr to any human.


    ¡°Oh, it''s been a while, you guys,¡± Izanami greeted the animals as she crouched down and began to pet them. She started with the cat that had a shy expression, then moved to the dog, which tried to dodge her hand, andstly to the crow that seemed to be eager.


    After petting them all, she got up and dusted her clothes a little bit. Then, she looked around and asked aloud, ¡°So where is your caretaker?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m here, Izanami-sama,¡± replied a middle-aged man who emerged from one of the rooms. If Naruto were to look at him, they would immediately recognize him. After all, he is the legendary Ramen Guy, Teuchi, the owner of the Ichiraku Ramen shop in Konoha.


    Seeing him, Izanami smiled. It was actually a coincidence that Teuchi came in contact with her. During the time he opened his shop for the first time in Konoha, he needed a sponsor to help him. So he applied for a loan from the World Bank. And it just so happened that Izanami saw this during her visits to the World Bank.


    After recognizing Teuchi, Izanami immediately sprang into action. She used her authority and issued a private meeting with him. And in that meeting, they made an agreement. Izanami would fully sponsor his business, and in return, he needed to do some odd jobs for her. Of course, most of her requests were quite simple, like keeping the mansion clean and taking care of the pets. So Teuchi didn¡¯t really mind it.


    In fact, this deal was quite advantageous for him. Not only did he get a great backer, but he also got a free residence in a luxurious mansion. And most of all, his shop is only a few meters away from the mansion, making it quite convenient for him.


    ¡°How was the negotiations, Izanami-sama? Did the vige allow it?¡± Teuchi asked with a bit of expectation and hope.


    Izanami gave him a thumbs up and said, ¡°Yep, it all went ording to n."


    Hearing her words Teuchi burst into tears. Finally his friend''s son would be able to live his life as a normal kid. With Izanami as his backer no one in Konoha would ever be able to bully him again.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    While Izanami and the others were talking with a Teuchi, a rather peculiar situation was happening in the Hokage office. The ever calm and smiling Hiruzen was now cursing loudly. If it was not for the seals ced on the office to restrict the sound the whole Konoha would have heard his curses.


    Apart from him the other Konoha elders weren''t faring any better. Especially Danzo who was turning more gloomy the second after reading one file. If it wasn¡¯t for his excellent control over his emotions he would also join his friend in cursing Izanami.


    After what seems like forever Hiruzen finally calmed down. Not really as he kept smoking to fill the entire room with smoke. But he is still able to have a proper conversation for now.


    "Any ideas on how to settle this debt?" Hiruzen inquired, his voice punctuated by the haze of smoke from his cigarettes.


    ¡° With the current economic situation in Konoha I''m afraid we simply don¡¯t have the necessary funds to spare. We are already barely hanging on after the Kyuubi incident, ¡° Homura said with a grave tone. During the time Hiruzen was cursing he calcted the minimal funds that were required to hold off this debt till the vige was able to stabilise itself. But unfortunately even that amount is not something the current Konoha can handle.


    ¡° Tsk do you think we would be able to make the other n leaders agree to share the burden. ¡° Hiruzen asked with a click of tongue.


    ¡° That is highly unlikely, the n leaders themselves are not faring any better due to the nine tail incident. ¡°Koharu interejected. As the person responsible for internal affairs she knew how much damage the vige sustained more than anyone.


    ¡° damn does this mean we have to agree to her demands? ¡° Hiruzen said helplessly.


    Hearing his words Danzo who was silent suddenly sprang into action. He shouted at Hiruzen, ¡° Hiruzen are you out of your mind. That is the nine tails Jinchuriki we are talking about. How can you let an outsider get her hands on Konoha''s greatest weapon? ¡°


    "Then provide a damn solution to this problem!" Hiruzen finally snapped back at Danzo, his frustration boiling over.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 30

    Chapter 30


    "Then let''s utilize Shisui¡¯s eyes to manipte that girl¡¯s mind," Danzo suggested with a hint of reluctance. He was hesitant to sacrifice one of Shisui¡¯s Mangeky¨­ Sharingan techniques, as he had his sights set on iming those eyes for himself. However, he knew he had topromise in this situation. If they were serious about paying off all those debts, Danzo realized he would be the first to face bankruptcy.


    As the overseer of most orphans who became members of Root, Danzo controlled all their assets. Given that Root operatives often undertook perilous missions with high mortality rates, he had made a reckless decision in the past. Before sending any of his operatives on these suicide missions, he instructed them to take out substantial loans from the World Bank. This ensured that even if his puppets perished, they would still be of use to him.


    Reflecting on his past actions, Danzo couldn¡¯tprehend why he had made such choices. Perhaps it was driven by a desire for revenge, or maybe it stemmed from his frustration with Hiruzen, who had shed Root''s budget. Regardless, Danzo harbored deep regret for his decisions.


    "Are you out of your damn mind, Danzo? Do you evenprehend the consequences of what you''re proposing?" Hiruzen''s voice wasced with anger and frustration as he addressed his longtime rival.


    "Calm down, Hiruzen. First, let''s hear what Danzo has to say," Koharu interjected, attempting to diffuse the tension. While acknowledging Danzo''s extreme methods, she couldn''t deny that his solutions often came with some merit.


    ¡° We will use the Anbu ninjas to lure in her bodyguards and if possible kill him while framing him to be foreign ninja spy. While her bodyguard is busy we will use that opportunity to sneak into that girl''s house and use Kotoamatsukami on her. ¡° Danzo said his perfect n with a bit of pride. ¡® and after that I will take Shisui¡¯s eyes after his perpace is over. ¡® he thought internally.


    Hiruzen began to ponder for a moment. Although the n seemed to be foolproof, the risk is too high. For example what would happen if the Anbu ninjas were not able to hold Tenegen back. Despite not being famous in the ninja world Tengen as the youngest Hashira has the strength of an elite jounin. So his ability to escape from the Anbu ninjas is not an impossibility.


    ¡° Danzo this is too risky and consequences are too serveware. Konoha would be seen as aughing stock if this is brought to light. So don¡¯t even think of doing something like this. ¡° Hiruzen said righteously.


    ¡° Hiruzen, you are a coward. Do you really want to give up the custody of the nine tailed Jinchuriki and do nothing? ¡° Danzo roared as he red at his friend. Did he think he was born yesterday? This cunning old friend only wanted him to do everything in secret so that he will have no part in this.


    ¡° Danzo don¡¯t forget I am the Hokage ¡° Hiruzen roared with his famous catch praise.


    ¡° Hiruzen, you will regret it. Everything I do is for Konoha, ¡° Danzo said as he made his exit. He vowed to take revenge on his friend for making do this.


    After Danzo''s departure, the Hokage''s office once again returned to its silent state. Hiruzen exhaled a deep breath as he sat down on his seat. He looked at his two remaining friends and said, "I will ask the Fire Daimyo for some support. For now, let''s rest and gather our thoughts and discuss this matter tomorrow. "


    Homura and Koharu nodded as they too left the office. They too are tired after brainstorming for ideas for so long.


    After everyone left the office, Hiruzen looked at the full moon in the sky as he muttered a bit mncholically, "Sensei, I really wish you were here to help us."


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    "The moon is still as beautiful as ever," Izanami remarked, gazing at the full moon in the sky from her balcony window as she leaned on the railing.


    "Don''t you think so too?" Izanami asked, turning to address the animals behind her. Leading them was a rabbit that had been missing earlier in the afternoon.


    "Hmph, what beauty does a prison have?" the rabbit remarked surprisingly, its voice carrying a feminine tone in response to her inquiry.


    ¡°Now, now, Grandma, don¡¯t get all grumpy all of a sudden. You can¡¯t really deny the beauty the moon has, And besides aren¡¯t half freed from the seal father and uncle ced on you. Although you can¡¯t use your true body you at least have the luxury to move around and enjoy this world that you wished to protect. ¡± Izanami said as she consoled the grumpy rabbit.


    "Hmph, who is a grandma? I''m still in my twenties. Call me big sister," the rabbit snorted.


    Izanami smiled wryly as she remarked, "You know, I really want to see Dad¡¯s expression when he sees you like this, Kaguya oba-san." "So, how has life been fairing for you guys these years?" she asked as she addressed the other animals who were present here.


    "Well, it was quite nice," the cat, who was once called Rin Nohara, said with a smile.


    ¡°Oh, it was quite nice. Konoha sure has some interesting ces. I kinda wished I could show them to Konan and Nagato,¡± the crow, who had the soul of Yahiko, said with excitement and hidden sadness.


    ¡°Well, this old man is quite satisfied with his life, Izanami-sama,¡± the dog, which had the soul of Sakumo Hatake, who held the title Konoha''s White Fang, said with a calm demeanor.


    ¡° Well at least you guys are having fun ¡°Izanami said with a bit of a chuckle.


    ¡° So Izanami, why are you here in Konoha? Last time I heard you are not interested ining here, ¡° Kaguya asked with a bit of curiosity.


    Izanami smiled helplessly as she said, ¡° well I actually didn¡¯t want toe here so soon but I had to just in case this rotten vige was razed to the ground by others. ¡°


    ¡° Is the situation that worse in the outside world. ¡° Sakumo asked with a bit of seriousness in his voice. Due to Ninja Beasts being a thing in Konoha no one discusses high level secrets near him so the information he could gather was quite limited.


    ¡° Yes I¡¯m sure you guys have heard about the recent Hayuga n incident ¡° Everyone nodded at her words. Due to the Kumo ambassadors making a big fuss about it in public, the information about this incident was quite well spread.


    ¡° Well after seeing Konoha¡¯s stand the other hidden viges realised how dire the situation in Konoha is. So as to not let this golden opportunity go to waste, they are actively trying to provoke Konoha into war. ¡° Izanami said.


    ¡° So what are you nning to do? As far as I know you wouldn¡¯t get involved in this unless the vige¡¯s foundation is about to copse. ¡°Kaguya said, looking at her granddaughter. After living with Izanami for a few centuries she knew roughly how Izanami¡¯s mind works.


    She doesn¡¯t actively try to meddle with the world. To her, this world will always be the same until humans realize how foolish their narrow-minded thinking is. Chakra isn¡¯t all about violence and destruction. If the viges used their natural habitat to their advantage, they too would be able to prosper.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 31

    Chapter 31


    "I''m worried Konoha would use Naruto as their weapon to minimize unnecessary casualties. With how the vige views him, the possibility is too high," Izanami said with a serious look.


    Kaguya and Sakumo both nodded in understanding. Unlike in the era of the Second Hokage, who had the vige tightly wrapped in his hands, the Third Hokage¡¯s authority is quite limited. Since Naruto is not officially a ninja, he is under the rule of the civilian council.


    Almost every member of the civilian council would be more than happy to sacrifice him to save some vigers. Even if the Third Hokage refuses, he will be cornered if the other three advisors agree to it. And with Danzo¡¯s character, he would be the first one to agree to this proposal, as it is too advantageous a situation for him to miss.


    ¡° Minato Sensei son ¡° Rin said with a bit of sadness in her voice.


    "Speaking about him, how is he? I heard he was kicked out of the orphanage," Izanami asked in genuine worry. She knew that the general treatment towards Naruto was bad, so she made several arrangements for his care.


    One arrangement was providing him with unlimited free ramen in Teuchi¡¯s shop. This was something she and Teuchi both agreed on. As a fellow disciple of Jiraiya alongside Minato, Teuchi wanted to adopt Naruto when he first saw him.


    It wasn¡¯t just Teuchi who wanted to adopt Naruto; many families and ns wanted to do the same. Some did so out of loyalty to Minato, while others were driven by greed. However, all these attempts were rejected by the Third Hokage. He didn¡¯t even let the Nara n, one of the ns that supported his position, do anything.


    Instead of Rin, it was Yahiko who answered her question. Since he is a crow, he is the most suitable one to observe Naruto without anyone getting suspicious.


    "It''s quite terrible, actually. Due to the rumors, almost every viger knows Naruto''s appearance. So most shop vendors overprice him or outright reject him. This has led to him not going to any shops, even if the shop vendors act clueless about his identity. If it wasn''t for Teuchi, Naruto may have died of hunger," Yahiko exined.


    Hearing his words, Izanami had a grim expression. It seemed that most of the countermeasures she took weren''t that sessful. She had sent agents to run food shops so Naruto would be able to buy some healthy food. She also tried to increase the allowance Naruto received, but that proved to be useless as the shops overpriced him.


    "Oh right, I almost forgot about this. Last week, I saw Sakumo-san¡¯s son, Kakashi, drop off some groceries on Naruto''s doorstep," Yahiko said, surprising Izanami a little.


    In the original story, Kakashi was too broken from all the deaths to do anything about Naruto. If she remembered correctly, Kakashi went on more than 100 S-rank missions to escape from reality. If it wasn¡¯t for Jiraiya¡¯s book, he would have be a person devoid of emotion. So what could be the reason for his sudden change.


    Izanami looked at Sakumo was questioning eyes ¡® did he somehow break free from my curse and talk to Kakashi?" she wondered.


    Sakumo, sensing her gaze, said helplessly, ¡°Although I can¡¯t read minds, I can very much guess what you are thinking. And no, I didn¡¯t talk to him. It was a Uchiha girl who talked some sense into him. Well, not surprising since that n is most knowledgeable about love.¡±


    ¡°Wait, a Uchiha girl?¡± Izanami asked in shock. Something like this wasn¡¯t in the original story. Did her boss reincarnate some other lostmb to make things more difficult for me? She had to investigate this anomaly before she lost her advantage in the plot.


    ¡° Who is this Uchiha girl, and most importantly how was she able toe close to Kakashi. Although that guy won¡¯t say he instinctively avoids the Uchiha n members. In fact if it wasn¡¯t for Anbu duties he wouldn¡¯t even meet Shisui and Itachi. Obito¡¯s supposed death hit him too hard. ¡° Izanami said.


    ¡° Yes that is true, but you see Izanami sama this Uchiha girl is quite talented in genjutsu. And based on my observation that their encounter was purely a coincidence. ¡° Sakumo said.


    ¡° I see when I go to the Uchiha n tomorrow I will try to find more about this girl, she might be an interesting character. "Izanami said, making Kaguya sigh.


    Her granddaughter definitely wanted to investigate this mysterious Uchiha girl. Although Kaguya didn¡¯t know why this girl caught her interest, she wasn¡¯t going to say anything about it. Unlike her useless, narrow-minded sons, Izanami was able to think in a broader perspective. So even if this girl was dangerous, she wouldn¡¯t just seal her up in a moon to die of boredom.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s head back to bed for now. Tomorrow is a big¡­¡± Izanami was going to continue her words when she suddenly stopped. She turned her head in a specific direction, using her Observation Haki to zoom in on where she felt a special chakra signature. There, she saw a green, half-made Susanoo. And she recognized it immediately.


    ¡°A green Susanoo¡­ Danzo, that motherfucker¡­¡± Izanami cursed as she got up in a hurry. She snapped her fingers and her outfit changed. The kimono she wore was no more, reced with a tight ck ninja wear simr to what Nanami and the yokai members wore. On her waist were two ck katanas and a fox mask simr to what an Anbu would wear.


    She quickly put on the fox mask, and as soon as she did, her presence started to slowly disappear from everyone''s senses. Even Sakumo and Kaguya, who had the best senses amongst all of them, would think she was gone if they didn¡¯t see her standing with their own eyes.


    ¡°You guys wait here and don¡¯t follow me. I¡¯m going to step out for a little bit,¡± Izanami said firmly. With that, she simply jumped from the window to a nearby rooftop. With amazing agility, she disappeared from everyone¡¯s sight, leaving behind only the faint echo of her departure.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter32

    Chapter32


    Shisui was having a very bad day. During his shift in Anbu, he was tasked to escort a noble to the Fire Capital, and it wasn¡¯t a pleasant experience. They had to stop at various spots just because the noble wanted to enjoy the scenery. To top it all off, Shisui had to be on guard for any sneak attacks or bandits. Furthermore, the guards the noble had were not even doing their job right; it seemed as though those samurais were treating it like a vacation.


    Shisui really wanted to rx like them, but he couldn¡¯t. Due to the recent financial struggle and shortage in manpower in Konoha Anbu, ninjas like him had to take these missions and bring some money to the vige. In addition to that, the vige wanted to promote their ninjas to have more people give missions to them. So if someone messed up these missions, the bacsh would be too much for the vige to bear.


    This was especially true for an Uchiha like him. Shisui knew that most of the higher-ups in Konoha would directly me his n if he made any mistakes. And he couldn¡¯t afford that, especially at a time like this when the rtionship between the vige and the Uchiha n was at its worst.


    So he somehow endured it andpleted his mission. Since he was exhausted mentally he hurriedly returned to the vige to get some good rest for the day. But his bad luck didn¡¯t let him do as he pleased.


    Just after he was about to go to bed to get some sleep a Root ninja came and told him toe to the Root headquarters. Since the summon is from an elder of Konoha, Shisui had toe there as soon as possible. So he could begrudgingly put on his ninja uniform again and rush to the Root headquarters. As an Anbu ninja he knew where the Root headquarters was.


    Due to his hurry he didn¡¯t even inform Fugaku about his summon. This is a procedure the Uchiha do when someone from the higher ups summons them. They want no more misunderstanding after all.


    ¡® Now that I think about it I should have spoken to n leader Fugaku about everything ¡® Shisui thought with a grim face.


    His situation isn¡¯t quite what you could say good. One of his eyes is missing while he is poisoned. And worst of all he is surrounded by Root ninjas who are at minimum jonin level shinobi.


    His only saving grace is the Susano he forcibly managed to summon. But even that is too taxing for his body due to the huge consumption of chakra and the loss of one of his eyes. He can feel himself almost nearing his limit.


    His only hope is to kill as many Root members so that Danzo would call them back. After all he doesn¡¯t need to waste more of his valuable Root ninjas to kill a near death ninja when he can get his hands on his corpse after his death. After all, he is the darkness of Konoha , who would question his actions if the Hokage is quiet about it.


    And so with that as the only hope Shisui acted and fought desperately. With his susano¡¯s absolute defence he didn¡¯t worry about any attacks as he went on the full offensive. And soon he was able to kill more than 5 Root ninjas.


    But even after all these casualties the order for retreat didn¡¯te. It looked like he had underestimated Danzo¡¯s greed for his remaining eye. Shisui quietly began to steady his breathing. It seemed he would have to use all his trump cards to escape from this situation.


    But just as he was about to make a move, a sudden chilling sensation enveloped him, sending shivers down his spine. The atmosphere around him grew tense, and an eerie silence descended upon the area, causing even the bravest of Root ninjas to freeze in shock. In that fleeting moment of distraction, their fate was sealed.


    ¡°Twin Sword Style: Benevolent Demon¡± a soft yetmanding voice echoed through the air, sending a chill down Shisui''s spine as he watched in horror. With swift precision, the mysterious figure swiftly dispatched another 6 Root ninjas, their heads rolling to the ground in a macabre disy of deadly elegance.


    After her kill, the figure gracefullynded atop the tree where Shisui was taking cover. Bathed in the gentle glow of the moonlight, her identity was revealed. She was a girl of about sixteen years old, her long ck hair tied in a ponytail cascading down her back. d in tight ck ninja attire that entuated her impressive figure, her face concealed behind a fox mask, she exuded an aura of mystery and danger. In her hands, she wielded two katanas, their des now stained with the blood of her victims.


    "Who are you? Identify yourself. This is the territory of the Leaf Vige. If you don¡¯t answer now, we will consider you an invader," the Root squad captain shouted as he signaled his men to take action as soon as she spoke.


    They didn¡¯t care even if this person was the Hokage himself. Danzo clearly ordered them to leave no witnesses. To them, Danzo was the true leader of the Leaf Vige. Anyone who got in his way was an enemy they must y.


    "Hmph, who I am is no concern of yours. You all should just focus on surviving," the girl said as her figure disappeared again. In the next second, she reappeared behind the Root squad captain, her de dripping with fresh blood.


    The squad captain wasn¡¯t even able to make a move as his head rolled down from his neck. The next moment, his body slumped down. But even when their leader was killed, the other Root ninjas didn¡¯t seem to mind it. In fact, they even attacked the figure with their jutsus without giving him a nce.


    Izanami poured chakra into her legs as she jumped high up in the air to evade the iing jutsus. When she was in the air, she saw that the Root ninjas had thrown explosion tags at her.


    Normally, when someone is in the air, their ability to evade projectiles is very limited. Of course, if you have techniques to move in the air, that''s a different story. But those techniques can be counted on one hand, so the probability of encountering someone who knows them could be considered very slim. But unfortunately for the Root ninjas Izanami here is one of them.


    Two jet-ck fallen angel wings appeared behind Izanami as she skillfully and gracefully dodged the explosion tags. She even went out of her way to redirect some of them back to their owners, essentially killing them.


    After sensing that Shisui had retreated with Itachi, Izanami stopped fooling around and looked at her opponents with a cold gaze. The 15 Root ninjas who came to do this mission were left with only 2. And the only reason they are even alive is that they are long-ranged fighters.


    ¡°Well, I usually won¡¯t use this, but since I need to put on a great show, so it can¡¯t be helped,¡± Izanami said as she began performing hand signs after sheathing her des.


    And with a momentum that would put any Uchiha to shame, she said, ¡°Fire Style: Great Fire Annihtion.¡± The next moment she spewed a torrent of green fire thatpletely annihted everyone present. It even burned the dead bodies of the root ninjas without leaving any ashes.


    Seeing her work here is done Izanami used her enhanced speed to go away from the crime scene. She doesn''t need some Anbu ninjas to find out about her involvement after all.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 33

    Chapter 33


    "Damn these teenagers these days, always thinking suicide is the best option," Izanami cursed as she brought the now blind Shisui to safety, just in time before he hit the water.


    After covering her traces from the previous incident, Izanami directly dashed towards the ce where she sensed Shisui and Itachi were.


    Yes, like in the original story, Itachi managed to reach Shisui in time. In fact, he located Shisui when he was in his Susano fending off the Root members. Uchiha n members instinctively feel the presence of the Susano if they are close enough. This is especially true for Itachi, who is a true Uchiha. Susano is something they can achieve through their bloodline, after all.


    After finding Shisui, Itachi was about to go and help him, but Izanami acted before he could. She didn''t believe Itachi could handle all those Root members while protecting Shisui. He stillcked enough fighting experience, even though he is at jonin level.


    So, with Izanami distracting every Root member, Itachi managed to rescue Shisui away from the battleground. The only reason they didn''t rush to a hospital is because of Danzo. That man won''t let Shisui live another day, after all.


    So, like in the original story, they went to the cliff where they usually train since, for the time being, it is a good spot for rest. And, like the brain-dead idiot Shisui is, he didn¡¯t think of a way to get revenge and instead tried tomit suicide after traumatizing his best friend.


    As the only person who has a brain, Izanami had to save the idiot before he went to the purend and gave her more trouble.


    Izanami sighed as she detoxified Shisui after cing him on the bed. They are now in a room inside Izanami''s mansion. This is the best ce she could take him without anyone noticing. Sending him to Japan is just asking for trouble. She was sure Nanami would beat the shit out of him as soon as he regained consciousness. Kagami Uchiha, Shisui¡¯s grandfather, was her best friend after all.


    So, she naturally kept tabs on Shisui. So, after finding out how easily he was brainwashed, it left a sour taste in her mouth. Further, if he realizes the real reason he was attacked today, well, it would be better for him to die with ignorance than face her wrath.


    After half an hour, Shisui began to show signs of regaining consciousness. The poison was exceptionally potent, causing him to pass out as soon as he began to fall. Thus, the fact that he was even able to talk to Itachi without showing any signs of pain was already a miracle.


    ¡°You shouldn''t try to get up so soon, Shisui. With you losing your eyes and the aftereffects of the poison, your body simply can''t handle the strain,¡± Izanami warned when she saw Shisui trying to get up from the bed.


    ¡°Who are you? Am I dead? Is this the Pure Land?¡± Shisui asked as he tried to sense his surroundings. Even though he lost his eyes, he is still a great sensor.


    ¡°I''m what you call a shinigami. Yes, you died, and no, this isn''t the Pure Land,¡± Izanami said, deciding to have some fun.


    ¡°Huh, is somewhere else other than the Pure Land for the dead to go?¡± Shisui asked in surprise. He was strangely calm for some reason and more curious than ever. Maybe dying changed his mentality.


    ¡°Of course there is. The Pure Land is just one ce a soul could enter. For example, there is the shinigami''s realm, where souls who made the contract with the shinigami go. There is also the demon world, where souls with too much negative karma or whose souls were too corrupted go,¡± Izanami exined with a serious expression. She wasn''t lying about this.


    The Pure Land is where most souls gather, so it is widely spread amongst mortals that it is the only ce where they would go after death. But that isn''t entirely true. For example, Minato, who died using the Reaper Death Seal, went to the Shinigami''s Realm instead of the Pure Land.


    Hidan, known for his immortality, sold his soul to Jashin, another shinigami. So due to his soul being imed by another person, he wouldn''t die until his current body couldn''t contain his soul. That is why even when his head was cut, he didn''t die. His body was still housing his soul, after all.


    But if he gets in contact with a soul-destroying jutsu, then he would be killed without even trying. No one is perfect, after all. And in Japan, there are numerous ns who specialize in soul arts.


    ¡°So, since you are a Shinigami, I presume I''m in the Shinigami''s Realm,¡± said Shisui.


    ¡°Well, no. The ce where you are now is called Konoha, the vige that is going to ruin due to four people,¡± Izanami said, making Shisui stand up immediately.


    But due to not being familiar with the surroundings and with theck of sight, he fell down immediately.


    Seeing this, Izanami sighed again. ¡°Sigh, did you really have to do that? You know if this floor didn''t have a soft surface, you would most likely break your nose due to that fall. And that means more work for me,¡± she asked with a bit of resentment.


    Does this guy have to make her do more work? She just wanted to raise Naruto and keep the higher-ups in check with her influence. She isn''t here to work overtime like in Japan.


    Afterining for a bit more she helped Shisui back into his bed. After making sure he didn¡¯t get hurt during the fall she continued, ¡° rest for now tomorrow I will answer all your questions, Oh and friendly reminder if you somehow go out of this house and get caught again by Danzo¡¯s men I won¡¯t being to help you. So don¡¯t do something and make the situation more worse ¡°


    Saying those words izanami left the room. She has to get some sleep since tomorrow she has many important things to do.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 34

    Chapter 34


    It was a new day for Konoha vige. Many shop vendors began their preparations to open their shops for business. Ninjas began to head over to the Hokage office to get their missions and make a living. Everything was normal except for a simple detail. The Hokage office which was supposed to be a quiet ce is quite rowdy in the early morning.


    That is because the Hokage advisor Danzo Shamura is now arguing with a girl who looked like she couldn''t be bothered to be here. Yep you guessed it right.


    As soon as the sun rays hit the earth izanami came to the Hokage office to take custody of naruto. And she deliberately took her timeing here to make sure all of the Konoha corrupt 3 elders came running here.


    Why were they in a hurry you ask. Well the meeting they were supposed to be holding was actually nned to be in the evening. Well that¡¯s what they believed as izanami¡¯s words were , ¡° give me your answer tomorrow. ¡°.


    Well due to yesterday¡¯s meeting being held in the afternoon no one suspected anything. Even Danzo, the one who quickly catches on to schemes amongst them. Due to their misconception they were unable to execute their ns. After all, who would believe a high ranking person woulde in the early morning.


    ¡° We cannot let you take in the nine tails Jinchuriki. That is konoha¡¯s property ¡° Danzo roared as he red at Izanami trying to scare her.


    But izanami, who would even scare Madara,pletely ignored his re and inly said, ¡° Do I look , I care , if you want the tail beast, why don¡¯t I just release it. And besides, do you even have the capital to negotiate with me? You all owe The World Bank a hefty sum and that¡¯s beside the money Minato borrowed under name of the Uzumaki n ¡°


    She sneered at him. Does this man think he is some big shot for her to obey him? Even the Fire daimyo won¡¯t dare to say anything when she is speaking. This is how much of an influence the World Bank has in this world.


    ¡° Furthermore with the records we have he seemed to be using the inheritance his parents left him , and as per the rules he has to shoulder the debts his father took ¡°


    ¡° How do you know Naruto Uzumaki is Minato¡¯s son? That is supposed to be a S rank secret. ¡° Hiruzen asked in a panic. He and the others heard nothing of this yesterday. They were only told that a n debt under the Uzumaki name was there and they wanted Naruto, the only known survivor, to pay it back. There was no mention of Minato. Did someone leak the secret to her?


    Izanami threw a disdainful nce at Hiruzen and said, ¡° hmph do you think the World Bank is as stupid as those stupid vigers you have. We have legal documents of Minato Namikaze and Kushina Uzumaki marriage certificates. In fact the loan Minato borrowed under the name of the Uzumaki n was to stabilise the situation in the vige.


    And their death dates match the birth date of Naruto Uzumaki who bore a great resemnce to his father. And in Konoha there is only one Uzumaki family. We also have Kushina¡¯s pregnancy reports. And that is the only reason Naruto Uzumaki is even allowed to inherit his parents legacy. ¡°


    Hiruzen couldn¡¯t say anything after hearing those words. It made sense after all. How did Minato Namikaze manage to secure a n loan under the Uzumaki n? Small ns don¡¯t typically have the opportunity to apply for a n loan. Only ns that are strong enough or have a significant inheritance have the ability to do so. The bank requires something to act as a guarantee.


    ¡°So don''t bother this young miss with your boring lies. Will you tell me where Naruto Uzumaki is, or should I just resort to my methods? But remember, if I am forced to do so, then Konoha will have to answer to the Daimyo and the World Bank, So if you know what¡¯s best for you don¡¯t try any funny business with me ¡± Izanami threatened them with an icy tone.


    These fools may attempt to deceive the World Bank, but they wouldn¡¯t dare to deceive the Fire Daimyo. Apart from the World Bank, Konoha heavily relied on the funds provided by the Daimyo. If they lost thisst support, they would face the same tragedy that Sunagakure is facing now.


    And that would spell doom for Hiruzen who wanted to preserve his reputation. After all they don¡¯t have someone who could mine gold. So Hiruzen could only reluctantly gesture an Anbu to escort her to where Naruto is. At this time he wished he didn¡¯t tap into Naruto¡¯s inheritance. After all if he left it at that then Naruto wouldn¡¯t be found for another few years until he became an adult. And those few years would be enough for him to put the little kid under his control.


    Izanami, who knew Hiruzen¡¯s thoughts, snorted. She really wanted to see what this hypocrite would do when his true nature is revealed. But in the end, she didn¡¯t care enough to go through that trouble. Maybe Naruto would do that after he''s grown up.


    With a smirk that sent chills through everyone, Izanami turned around and followed the Anbu ninja out. But just as she reached the door, she suddenly turned around and said, ¡°Oh right, before I forget, go inform the Uchiha n about the preparations for the debt. I¡¯m going there today to collect it.¡±


    And without waiting for a reply, she walked out of the Hokage''s office. Hiruzen just sighed as he felt another headacheing on. Due to Naruto''s trouble, he somewhat forgot to inform Fugaku about the arrangement. Usually, he would slowly think of a way to rope Fugaku into agreeing to this. But since he had no time for that, he decided to do something else.


    He looked at his old teammate and said, ¡°Danzo, send someone to inform Fugaku about her arrival and the arrangements the vige made. If necessary, go there yourself and inform him.¡±


    Danzo for once didn¡¯t disagree with Hiruzen¡¯s decisions nodded. If there is something that would cripple the evil Uchiha then he would do it without even blinking. And he wanted someone to went his anger after Izanami¡¯s actions. If not for the rejection he was feeling in his new eye he would have used Kotoamatsukami on Izanami without any dy.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 35

    Chapter 35


    ¡° hmm hmm hmm ¡° Izanami hummed a tune as she walked through the busy streets of Konoha. She was in a good mood after trolling those old geezers. Those geezers didn¡¯t know when to stop their antics. And besides, they sure love to talk as if they are protecting this vige.


    Putting aside Hiruzen¡¯s and Danzo¡¯s actions against the Uchiha and Senju ns . The other two advisors have done nothing that has benefited the Hidden Leaf. The only thing they did was dry up the Konoha treachery. If one were to look carefully almost every major civilian business has the backing of these two elders.


    Even the Sarutobi n doesn¡¯t have that much wealth as these two. But unfortunately these two elders have no strength to back up their wealth. Their ns are still minor ns without any powerhouses. This is why they need the support of either Danzo or Hiruzen.


    But even then they most of the time support Hiruzen since he is very lenient towards them. This is also why they objected when Danzo tried to be Hokage after Hiruzen¡¯s death. They knew that he would not hesitate to steal all their assets while saying it is for the good of the vige.


    As Izanami was thinking about the four idiots she suddenly heard a very disturbing conversation.


    ¡° Hey, did you see that demon fox? I heard some people saying that they are gonna vanquish him for once and for all. They have long had enough of that brat''s pranks. I mean who does he think he is ? If it was not for the third Hokage¡¯s orders, wouldn''t that beast be killed already. ¡° said one man as he asked hispanion.


    ¡° Sheeze, do you want to go to jail? Even if that demon fox deserves to die a horrible death we still can''t go against the Hokage''s orders. What would happen to us if we were discovered? ¡° said the other one as he looked everywhere in fear.


    ¡° Huh, do you truly believe that our esteemed Hokage would me us if we do something against that filth? I bet the only reason he even forbids us is because he couldn¡¯t see a child being killed, ¡° said the other.


    ¡° Well that might be true but he will still punish us if we disobey his orders ¡°said the man trying to convince hispanion.


    Thepanion shrugged as he said, ¡° well since I¡¯m not the one who is doing the deed I wouldn¡¯t know how their actions would be faced, I just told you because I wanted to share this good info with you. I mean if they really were able to do something against that demon fox won¡¯t everyone be happy. ¡°


    The viger nodded as he said, ¡° yeah I too would be d if someone decided to get rid of that Demon Fox¡­. ¡°


    Izanami who was eavesdropping on their conversation frowned. She could tell that those people who are searching for Naruto are not normal civilians. Civilians don¡¯t have that much courage to challenge the Hokage¡¯s authority and do any harm to Naruto. Even ninjas don¡¯t dare to do that if they don¡¯t want to bebelled as a rogue. So this can only be a work of one person.


    Danzo who doesn''t give a shit about Hokage¡¯s authority. And he just happened to have a small army of emotionless puppets who would do his bidding.


    After arriving at this conclusion, Izanami¡¯s expression turned cold. It appears she didn¡¯t make herself clear when she said ¡®don¡¯t try any funny business.¡¯


    She looked at the Anbu ninja and instantly trapped him in a Genjutsu. With her observer incapacitated, she could make a move. She deployed her observation Haki to the maximum range and tried finding Naruto.


    After a few seconds, she found Naruto by thekeside, fishing. But just before she could breathe a sigh of relief, she sensed more than five Root members dashing towards him. Another thing she noticed was the absence of an Anbu guard around Naruto.


    ¡°So that monkey is also in on this, huh? Well, it looks like I have to show them their ce very soon,¡± Izanami thought with a bit of anger. ¡°But for now, I gotta do something about those Root ninjas,¡± she thought as she used her observation Haki to lock onto them.


    Then she muttered, ¡°Die.¡± Like it was a divine decree, the Root ninjas all suddenly stiffened and dropped dead in an instant.


    What she did was an advanced technique using her Conqueror''s Haki. She essentially used her willpower to halt the Root members'' brain functions. This level of control is only possible due to her high mastery over her Conqueror''s Haki. If she were in the One Piece world, she would be considered the pinnacle of Haki mastery.


    ¡° Now to give a massage to that one eyed fool Earth release Coffin transfer ¡° Izanami said as she made one hand sign.


    In the next moment the dead bodies of the Root members were devoured by the earth,pletely removing their traces. And soon they all magically appeared in the office of Danzo in his Root Headquarters.


    After she is done with Danzo she thought about how to punish Hiruzen. Although he actively didn¡¯t do anything allowing Danzo to do something like this can also be considered giving him his consent. If Izanami were to guess his thoughts it might be something like,


    ¡° Naruto cannot be owned by anyone other than me . If that is happening then it is better to give him a Root seal to ensure his loyalty to Konoha. And besides I could always dissolve that seal when he is under my control. ¡°


    Izanami thought for a while and then suddenly had a bright idea. She grinned evilly, scaring a few curious kids who happened to see her.


    ¡® oops gotta keep my dark thoughts from leaking ¡® she thought as she used her fan to cover her face.


    She then looked at the Hokage Building. With her observation haki she locked on to Hiruzen. Then she muttered, ¡° Yin release: Genjutsu Reverse Harem ¡° ¡° Light release: Illusion of Deception ¡° .


    ¡° Hmp that ought to keep that monkey upied. I wonder whether his tastes would change after a few months though, ¡° Izanami wondered as she lifted the Genjutsu of the Anbu ninja.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 36

    Chapter 36


    Danzo Shimura is well-versed in schemes. As the true darkness of Konoha, he has a hand in almost every scheme that has been carried out in the vige. Whether it was to frame a genius, eliminate an unstable Uchiha, kidnap a hidden Senju member, assassinate a rising Hokage candidate, or even attempt to assassinate the Hokage himself, he has been involved in every conceivable plot.


    However, despite his expertise, these years have not yielded favorable results for him. First, there was a failed attempt to kill Hiruzen. Due to this failure he had lost the trust of Kakashi Hatake, a great ninja who was on the verge of bing his greatest tool. Then there is the failed attempt to snatch both of Shisui¡¯s eyes. Even though he only got one eye it is still a failure . Especially when he lost an elite squad during the mission to retrieve the other eye.


    And now his most recent failure is losing the nine tails custody to that cursed brat. Who does she think she is to demand them hand over the nine tails from Hiruzen. That is Konoha¡¯s greatest weapon. A weapon that is rightfully his. And he isn¡¯t going to give that weapon to anyone.


    So, as soon as he left the Hokage office, he instructed his Root ninjas to ce a Root seal on the Nine-Tails Jinchuriki. This way, even if that brat takes custody of the Nine-Tails, he will still have the ability tomand it to do his bidding. Since this is a very important task, he especially ordered his elite scouting squad to do this mission.


    And the result? All of his elite ninjas are dead, their corpses left in his office. And the weirdest thing about this is how the culprit came and ced these corpses here. There was no chakra trail or any use of space time ninjutsu. Danzo made sure of it himself. The Root ninjas who were guarding this ce were not harmed or ced in a genjutsu. This is like it was done by a ghost.


    ¡° Does our tracking team find any clues? ¡° Danzo asked the Root ninja beside him.


    ¡° No Danzo sama both the Inuzuka and Aburame n members are still searching for any clues about the intruder. ¡° The Root ninja beside him replied.


    ¡°Tsk useless ¡° Danzo spat as he clicked his tongue. He needed to fortify his base more thoroughly. He didn¡¯t want another incident like this happening in his Root headquarters.


    ¡® I need more funds. The barrier needs more adjustments and more ninjas are needed to rece the dead ones ¡® Danzo thought as he remembered his recent mission failures.


    ¡° i¡¯m going to the Hokage Office , notify me immediately if you find something, ¡° Danzo coldly said as he turned to leave.


    ¡° Yes Danzo sama ¡° The Root ninjas bowed as they all said in unison.


    The trip to the Hokage office was uneventful, as Danzo used the secret tunnels to get there. Being someone ustomed to darkness, he found it troublesome to traverse the main streets. Apart from the Anbu ninjas patrolling the tunnels, he encountered no one along the way.


    When Danzo arrived at the Hokage Tower, he bypassed the line and headed straight to the Hokage''s office. As a high-ranking elder of Konoha and the Hokage''s assistant, he had the privilege to do so. Without bothering to knock, he entered the office.


    "Hiruzen..." Danzo''s words trailed off as he took in the sight before him.


    The usually dignified Hokage was a shadow of his former self. His desk, once piled high with paperwork,y empty, its contents scattered on the floor. Hiruzen''s expression resembled that of a man who had lost all purpose. In his hand, he clutched a familiar crystal ball.


    "Oi oi, Hiruzen, what happened?" Danzo rushed to his friend''s side, shaking him in an attempt to snap him out of his daze. But Hiruzen remained unresponsive.


    With no other option, Danzo resorted to pping Hiruzen across the face. The sharp sound echoed through the room, reverberating even outside.


    The p jolted Hiruzen back to reality, though not without pain. He looked at Danzo with confusion, the sting of the p registering.


    "O, Danzo, why the hell did you p me? Are you trying to kill me with that?" Hiruzen eximed, nursing his cheek.


    Ignoring his friend''s protests, Danzo delivered another p, this time to Hiruzen''s other cheek. Without hesitation, he demanded, "Are you finally back to reality? What happened here earlier? Your office is barely recognizable at this point."


    Hiruzen paused, attempting to recall the events. As the memories flooded back, he let out a horrified gasp, realizing the scene he had witnessed earlier.


    Annoyed at his friend¡¯s behaviour Danzo was about to p him again. But this time Hiruzen managed to stop him before he could,


    ¡° Oi Danzo, why the hell are you so keen on pping me? ¡° Hiruzen red at his friend. If it was not for Danzo¡¯s indifferent look he would have suspected Danzo was taking revenge on him for all he had done in the past.


    ¡° Because it is the most effective way, ¡° Danzo said, inly hiding his true thoughts. At first he too was trying to wake up Hiruzen but then he remembered this is the best way to take his revenge so he gave Hiruzen a second p with more force.


    ¡° So why were you so scared earlier. ¡° he asked, trying to change the subject.


    Although Hiruzen wanted to argue back he stopped and shivered when he tried remembering the scenes earlier. It was a nightmare. A true nightmare.


    "Danzo, someone has cast a genjutsu on me. I need you to find the culprit and detain him. If capturing him is impossible, kill him immediately. You can even utilize the Anbu for this," Hiruzen said, his expression darkening.


    Earlier, he had been ensnared in a Genjutsu that subjected him to the disturbing illusion of macho men engaging in an orgy. Merely attempting to use the crystal ball to observe Konoha had proven too much for him. The worst part was the sensation that those men were advancing toward him, striking poses that nearly made him retch at the mere recollection. Even when he attempted to shut his eyes, the horrifying image persisted.


    For someone to employ such a vile technique against him was an act of pure evil. ¡®The culprit needed to face justice. ¡® Hiruzen thought with killing intent leaking out of his eyes.


    Danzo, seeing his friend''s state, didn''t know what to say. He had a sinking suspicion that the person who killed his Root ninjas is the same person who cast the Genjutsu on Hirzen. But he wondered what his friend saw for him to act this way.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 37

    Chapter 37


    In the outskirts of Konoha there is a river. This river is called Naka river. If someone from thousand years were to see this river they would recognise that this is the same river Indra created with his Susano.


    On one side of the river back a small golden haired blue eyed child was fishing. He looked like he was about 4 years old. On his side was a little basket made from leaves. Inside the basket there were some small fishes he managed to catch.


    While this kid was peacefully catching his lunch and dinner two people walking towards his direction.


    They were Izanami and the Anbu ninja. Izanami had an annoyed look as she red at the Anbu ninja who was trying hard to ignore the piercing re.


    Earlier when they entered Naruto''s apartment they witnessed how cruel the vigers actually were. There were numerous rocks that were thrown at his apartment. Furthermore, in the fridge she found out that there is basically nothing but expired milk. Even in the cupboards there was only ramen which was nearing its expire date.


    Looking at his wardrobe they found the only clothes he has are a pair of yellow shirt and a short. His pyjamas were the hospital gowns that the hospital give.


    And since this visit Izanami was giving the Anbu ninja a stink eye. She even asked in sarcasm, ¡° hey although I can be called rtively ignorant of the ways of a ninja but is your vige right in the head. Aren''t all ying with fire here.


    Do you guys even know what would happen if Naruto snapped suddenly? Are you that confident in restraining an angered jinchuriki? ¡°


    Ever since then the Anbu ninja has avoided eye contact with her. He too was puzzled on why the third Hokage didn¡¯t do anything about this. As a Anbu ninja he knew if the third Hokage wanted to remove the rumors around Naruto he could do it without any problem. You just need to issue aw and use some ninjas who are good with Genjutsu to change the memory of whoever spreads the rumor. And ever since then he hase to doubt the Hokage¡¯s character.


    This is the effect Izanami wanted. Today it would just be one person but in a few years this seed of doubt will spread towards hisrades, family members and so on. And if the right evidence is presented Hiruzen¡¯s image would shatter immediately.


    ¡® hehehe I wonder how Hiruzen will react when his reputation goes rock bottom in an instant. ¡® Izanami thought with a chuckle.


    Her chuckle, although not loud, managed to capture the attention of the young Naruto who was fishing. Turning around he saw one unfamiliar girl and a ninja who wore the same uniform as the silver haired ninja who was kind enough to give him some groceries.


    "Who are you, big sister? Oh, are you here to fish too?" Naruto asked with his innocent smile, a rare disy of trust toward a stranger, given his past experiences of being shunned and mistreated by the vigers. But this "big sister" seemed different from the others in Konoha; at least she didn''t scowl at the sight of him.


    "Oh no, little brother, I''m not here to fish. But I''m a little curious why you think someone woulde to this dangerous forest just to fish when they could buy some at the market," Izanami replied, her expression tinged with amusement.


    Indeed, this forest wasbeled as a danger zone, and it seemed unlikely that anyone, except Naruto, would venture into it for fishing. Even if someone did want to fish, there were safer designated spots for such activities, especially catering to tourists visiting from the Fire Country.


    Why hadn''t anyone informed Naruto about these safer areas? Well, it was likely that the vigers hoped Naruto would meet an unfortunate end in the wild, so they deliberately kept him ignorant about the safer locations. However, their n would have seeded if not for Kurama''s presence within Naruto.


    Tailed beasts were apex predators, and even when sealed, their mere presence was enough to deter other creatures sensitive to a person''s aura. This was also why some sensor ninjas could immediately detect the presence of a Jinchuriki nearby.


    ¡° Hehe is that so , I don''t really know about it since the uncles at the market don''t sell anything to me ¡° Naruto said while sheepishly scratching the back of his head.


    ¡° Is that so , say little brother what is your name ? ¡° Izanami asked after taking a seat near him.


    This action surprised Naruto as everyone distanced themselves from him like he was some sort of gue. Thinking maybe this big sister is someone who didn''t know about him he hesitated to speak.


    After all he didn''t want the only person who didn''t dislike him other than his grandpa hokage to hate him too. But even though he is hesitant he ultimately decided to tell his name . He didn''t like to trick anyone.


    ¡° Naruto¡­ Naruto Uzumaki¡­¡± he said in a low voice.


    ¡° Oh a Uzumaki huh that''s quite rare since you don''t have their iconic red hair. ¡° Izanami said, surprising him.


    He once heard from his Grandpa Hokage that the Uzumaki was a huge n.


    ¡° Wait big sister, do you know any of my n members?¡± Naruto asked in excitement.


    Izanami smiled at how excited he was. But before she could say anything the Anbu ninja beside her interjected to their conversation.


    ¡° I''m sorrydy Izanami but we are asked to head back to the vige¡±


    Izanami looked at the Anbu with an annoyed look and considered whether to ce him under a Genjutsu to keep him silent. But in the corner of her eye she saw another group of Anbu ninjas watching them.


    Izanami was a bit puzzled at this. These ninjas only arrived now so their mission is to escort them back to the vige.


    ¡® Did something happen in the Vige for the security to be this tight ¡® Izanami wondered not knowing the prank she did on Hiruzen and Danzo hadpletely scared the shit out of them.


    After thinking for a while she decided to find out what happened after going back to the mansion. And without forgetting to give an annoyed look at the Anbu ninja she kindly spoke to Naruto, ¡° Naruto it looks like we have to go back to the vige. Why don''t I help you pack things up here ¡°


    Naruto, although puzzled, agreed to head back to the vige. Although the amount of fish he catched today is a bit low it''s still better than nothing.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 38

    Chapter 38


    The journey back to the vige was filled with Naruto''s boundless energy and curiosity. He bombarded Izanami with a multitude of questions, his enthusiasm undiminished by her calm demeanour. While some might have found his exuberance overwhelming, Izanami remained patient, answering each question with ease.


    Having interacted with individuals like Ashura and Hashirama in the past, Izanami was well-ustomed to dealing with cheerful and hyperactive personalities. Naruto''s lively spirit reminded her of them, and she found herself enjoying the interaction despite the unusual circumstances.


    As they reached a junction where their paths diverged, Naruto wore a wistful expression. Despite his reluctance to part ways, he maintained his customary smile and waved at Izanami. "Well, Big Sis, I have to go my own way from here. Thanks for hanging out with me today. I had a st!" His smile held genuine warmth, though a touch of sadness colored his gaze.


    Hearing his words Izanami was a little puzzled then she suddenly realised ¡® Crap I forgot to tell him the news ¡®. She coughed a little before saying , ¡° Oh right Naruto I forgot to tell you but you will be living with me from today. As of today you are formally under my care. ¡°


    Hearing those words Naruto was stunned. Then a happy smile appeared on his face. With tears dripping from his eyes he asked, ¡° Big sister does that mean you are going to be my family¡±


    In Naruto''s small mind only those who are family would live together. It is because of hisck of family that Naruto had to live alone.


    Izanami was surprised at his words. Then a happy reassuring smile came to her face. She patted Naruto''s head as he said , ¡° Yes from today on we are family¡±


    ¡° Yeee I have a family too ¡° Naruto cheered happily. He was so happy that he jumped a few times.


    Chuckling at his childishness Izanami held Naruto''s hand as she guided him to the mansion.


    And to make sure they were not interrupted again she casted a small Genjutsu on the Anbu ninjas to go away.


    After they left she deployed her domain to mask their presence. She didn''t want Naruto to witness her punch an ignorant passerby because they couldn''t keep their mouths shut.


    Naruto obediently followed Izanami wherever she was taking him. He didn''t ask any more questions thinking it would annoy her.


    Izanami couldn''t help but be amused by Naruto''s behavior. If she didn''t know any better, she might have mistaken him for a well-mannered, obedient child. "It seems this poor guy has suffered more than it was told in the canon," she thought with a sad smile. She decided to punish Hiruzen and Danzo a little more to make it up to Naruto for what he suffered.


    When she thought of this, a collective shiver ran through the backs of Hiruzen and Danzo, who were still in the Hokage office waiting for any news about the intruder. At that moment, they didn¡¯t realize that the one who had perpetrated all the actions that terrified both of them wasing to punish them again.


    Arriving near the mansion, Naruto''s excitement grew too much for his act to continue, ¡° Wow big sister, is this really your house? This house is 3 times bigger than my apartment building. ¡° He said with his eyes shining like stars.


    ¡° Correction, not my house , our house . Don¡¯t forget you are also living with me from today ¡° Izanami said as she pinched Naruto¡¯s cheek.


    ¡° Hehehe, I forgot about that, ¡° Naruto said sheepishly, scratching his head.


    Izanami chuckled at his antics. She then guided him inside the mansion. Naruto was amazed at every little thing. He kept asking questions,pletely forgetting to put up his act. Izanami, like usual, answered all his questions until they went inside.


    As soon as they got inside an army of animals dashed towards them. Leading them was Kaguya who shamelessly jumped into Izanami¡¯s arms.


    ¡® I wonder what father¡¯s and uncle¡¯s reaction would be when they see how their mother is acting now ¡® Izanami thought amused. She then eyed Naruto who was petting Rin and Sakumo with a happy smile.


    ¡® Poor kid must be his first time petting an animal who didn¡¯t run away from him in fear ¡® Izanami thought.


    After a while Izanami said, ¡° Okay Naruto let¡¯s get you freshened up , we will have lunch at Ichiraku''s next door. ¡°


    ¡° Wait really , thank you big sister, ¡° Naruto said as dashed inside the house to get a wash. In his excitement hepletely forgot that he has no idea where the bathroom really is.


    Izanamiughed at this as she followed closely behind him. After he got lost three times he looked Izanami and showed a sheepish smile , ¡° Hehehe big sister I might have gotten lost dattebayo ¡°


    Izanami almostughed out loud at this. He even used the typical Uzumaki catchphrase in his words. After a while she guided him to the washroom. Then after instructing where his new clothes are and warning him not to burn himself in the hot water izanami walked out of the bathroom.


    She didn¡¯t offer to wash him not because of her dislike but because he needs some alone time to sort out his thoughts. Izanami believes Naruto thinks this is a dream and he would wake up very quickly. As she didn¡¯t want to be forceful she decided to let him take his time to adjust to his new lifestyle.


    After they are out of the bathroom Kaguya who was still on Izanami¡¯s arms asked suddenly, ¡° is he your brother¡¯s reincarnation ¡°


    ¡° Yes, he is this generation''s Ashura¡¯s reincarnation. ¡° Izanami said, hiding nothing from her grandmother. She wasn¡¯t too surprised at how Kaguya guessed it. Even in the original story Kaguya recognised the familiarity in Naruto and Susuke at a nce.


    ¡° yeah I noticed. He is just like how Ashura was when he was young. I remember seeing the same goofy smile on him when he was caught doing something unnecessary, ¡° Kaguya said in a mncholic tone.


    ¡°Oh you were watching us from the moon. ¡° Izanami asked with a raised eyebrow. This is new to her.


    ¡° Of course I did. What else could I do in that cold prison. No matter how many seals your father and uncle ced on me they can¡¯tpletely cut off my connection to this. So I was able to see how my grandsons were. ¡° She said with a bit of sadness.


    Izanami sighed at this. Her father and uncle were great beings who were respected by many but they were horrible sons who didn¡¯t know how much they hurt their mother.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 39

    Chapter 39


    After a while Naruto came out from the bathroom. He was now wearing a yukata that looked quite good on him.


    ¡° Now that''s better, so what do you think about your new outfit?¡± Izanami asked with a smile. Naruto''s outfit was tailored made for him.


    ¡° Hmm I don''t know, it feels kinda weird.¡± Naruto said honestly. Due almost all of his clothes being rags he doesn''t know how to feel when he is given such good clothes to wear. It felt very foreign to him.


    Izanami had to smile wryly at this. It seems like she needs to give him more time to adapt to his new lifestyle before giving the gifts she has for him.


    ¡° Well anyway, let''s go to Ichiraku. I''m sure your stomach is already feeling hungry. ¡° Izanami said, making him excited again.


    Then Izanami exited the mansion with a super excited Naruto. They only had to walk a few steps before they arrived at the Ramen Shop.


    Looking around Izanami saw that there were not the only ones who came to eat some ramen. There was Tsunade , Shizune and Tengen who were already digging into thier meals. And apart from them Izanami found someone unexpected.


    ¡° Oh I didn''t expect to see you here Nanami. Did you finally decide to go on a vacation? ¡° Izanami asked with a raised eyebrow.


    This workaholic daughter of hers doesn''t know how to take it easy at all. In fact the only times she even takes a break is when Izanami issues an order.


    Nanami didn''t say anything as she was busy eating her noodles. And if Izanami didn¡¯t know any better she would have thought Nanami didn''t hear her earlier which is impossible as the second human sage her perception and hearing is top notch.


    ¡® Oh yeahe to think of it , doesn''t that old toad sage Gamamaru like to act as a deaf , senile old geezer. ¡® Izanami thought of the best actor in the world. Being a sage he is one with nature meaning his physical conditions would always be in top shape even if he is old. So why did Gamamaru act like a senile old geezer? It¡¯s just because he wants to set the right mood to deliver his prophecies.


    ¡° So who is this? ¡° Nanami¡¯s voice broke Izanami from her thoughts.


    ¡° This is your new youngest brother Naruto Uzumaki, be nice to him since he is family from now on. ¡° Izanami said with a smile.


    Tsunade and Shizune, who were eating and listening to the conversation, almost choked at her words. They knew what being adopted by Izanami meant. It would mean no one would be allowed to bully him or her. Normally, this would be a good thing, but Naruto is a child who is despised and bullied by almost everyone in Konoha. Izanami doesn¡¯t tolerate anyone mistreating her children, and when she seeks revenge, it often leads to a bloodbath.


    The entire Konoha could be razed to the ground because of her anger, and it has happened before. Although Tsunade didn¡¯t witness it herself, she had heard stories from Senju n members in Japan. About 100 years ago, an adopted child of Izanami, who was skilled at cksmithing, was threatened by a small ninja vige and suffered severe injuries.


    The consequences were immense. In just two days, the entire vige was destroyed and vanished from history. Those who had harmed Izanami¡¯s child were driven mad from the torture they suffered.


    These stories circted in Japan as warnings. They served as a reminder that anyone who dared to harm her children would face punishment from Izanami herself, and there would be no forgiveness.


    Even those who had once attempted to rebel were spared from punishment by Izanami personally, and for that, they were grateful. Despite her innocent appearance, Izanami was a terrifying individual whomanded the respect of all the major ns in Japan. How could someone with such influence not be feared?


    Thinking these Tsunade made a silent prayer, ¡® Oh God please save Konoha from this disaster ¡®


    Izanami, who could discern a person''s thoughts with a nce, twitched her lips at Tsunade''s expression. "I''m not a heartless monster, you know," she remarked. "I only razed that vige to the ground because it was filled with scum. Rapists, mass murderers, you name it. These individuals were trying to expand their territory by absorbing nearby viges and cities. They threatened my son to make them weapons to boost theirbat capabilities."


    "Of course, my son refused to supply them with weapons just so they could plunder innocent vigers. This rejection angered them, and they beat him mercilessly. The only reason they didn''t kill him at that time was because they needed his skills to craft weapons. When I discovered this, I immediately destroyed the entire vige and made sure to give some extra attention to the bastards who injured my son. As for the vige disappearing from history, that urred because the First Great Ninja War was happening at that time," she exined, not wanting to be seen in a negative light.


    ¡°Oh,¡± Tsunade said, though she didn''t seem entirely convinced.


    ¡°It''s true, you know. If Mother really was angry, raising a vige to the ground is thest thing they should worry about,¡± Nanami added, making the situation worse.


    Izanami groaned at her daughter''s actions. It seemed the misunderstanding wouldn''t be resolved today. She then gestured to Naruto to take a seat. Fortunately, Naruto was too absorbed in his ramen fantasies to actually hear the conversation. This was one of the things she liked about the Uzumaki¡ªthey were very simple and easy to get along with.


    ¡° Give me the special Spicy Chicken Miso Ramen and what do you want Naruto ¡° Izanami asked turning to Naruto .


    ¡° Miso Chashu, ¡° Naruto eximed with his hands high up in the air.


    ¡° Well you heard the young man. get iting Teuchi today¡¯s a celebration for Naruto ¡° Izanami said with a wide grin.


    Teuchi gave a thumbs up as he said, ¡° Ok boss the order ising right up ¡°


    And so the celebration began. Naruto as usual began his way devouring his ramen which made everyone marvel at his skills. But then they were again shocked by Izanami who also ate her ramen at a simr speed to Naruto. But unlike Naruto she was elegant and filled with grace.


    Seeing their dumbfounded looks, Nanami shook her head in resignation. ¡® If you are too shocked at this much then you might as well have yourmon sense broken by her after living with her for a few days.¡¯ she thought with a little bit of amusement.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 40

    Chapter 40


    After a while the celebration ended as everyone was too full to eat anything. Teuchi has some amazing culinary skills that made almost everyone ask for a second serving. After paying the bill all of them bid their farewells and came back to the mansion.


    Tsunade, who was theziest of all of them, went directly to the winery to grab a bottle to drink. What good would a celebration would be if they didn¡¯t get drunk.


    ¡° Oh right Tsunade remember to bring a ss of fruit juice for Naruto ¡° izanami said not intending to stop Tsunade this time. Putting aside Tsunade¡¯s ulterior motives she thought it is a good decision to have a small gathering for Naruto to properly introduce himself to the family.


    ¡° Ok ¡° Tsunade said as she rummaged through the wine cer to see what was in there like she was selecting fruits from the market.


    ¡° Come on Naruto, let''s go to the living room and prepare the table. You have some space for some fruit juice right ¡° Izanami said with a smile.


    ¡° You bet I do, ¡° Naruto said with a cheeky smile.


    ¡° hahaha that¡¯s the spirit ¡° izanami said heartily as she guided him to the living room. The room was decorated with many beautiful paintings , calligraphy and antiques.


    And to no one''s surprise Kaguya, Rin , Yahiko and Sakumo werezing around in the living room.


    ¡° Oh, did you guys also want to celebrate with us? ¡° Izanami asked as she carried Kaguya into her arms.


    ¡° yeah I wanna join ¡° came Kaguya¡¯szy reply.


    ¡° oh a party i¡¯m in ¡° said Yahiko who looks a bit excited.


    ¡°If it isn¡¯t too much ¡° came Rin¡¯s reserved reply.


    ¡° Sure ¡° came Sakumo¡¯s short reply.


    While the group were preparing the table for another celebration Nanami was walking down the corridor towards one of the guest rooms that is being apanied by Shisui. As the leader of the Yokai unit she knew almost everything that was happening in the Shinobi world. Especially if it was something as important as Shisui Uchihamitting suicide.


    As the remaining descendant of her old friend Kagami Uchiha, Shisui was on Nanami¡¯s lookout list. A prodigy who was able to graduate from the academy at the age of 7 . Made the name for himself as the Shisui of the Body Flicker in the Third great ninja war. A leader of the peace faction in the Uchiha n.


    But even in his impressive record there was one thing that made Nanami feel a headache. Shisui Uchiha is too naive. After getting the Mangekyo Sharingan and mastering it he told his abilities to the Third Hokage and his three friends.


    As a Shinobi, keeping your cards to yourself is one of the basic rules everyone learns. But he went against all that spoke about his dangerous ability.


    Nanami really wondered whether this is a side effect of him skipping school and graduating at a young age. After all, even in Japan where anyone could be a genius no child under the age of 13 is allowed to drop out from school.


    This is one of the first rules Izanami dered so no one dared to raise any objections. Even heaven defying genius have to attend school even if it is meaningless to them.


    But of course those guys can go to advanced sses or be assistants to teachers and make some ie making them not wasting any time. There is no one who would say too much money.


    Arriving at Shisui¡¯s room, Nanami knocked twice before entering it. On the bed Shisui was there with his eyes covered in bandages.


    But unlike when Izanami visited him hisplexion waspletely fine. This meant that the poison waspletely removed and cured. If not for the bandages in his wounds he would be as healthy as ever.


    ¡° Who are you? ¡° Shisui asked in vignce.


    ¡° Oh this is a surprise you could tell that I''m a different person ¡° Nanami said in a bit of surprise. To normal sensors she and Izanami would appear as the same being due to both of them being human sages. And with their chakra control masking their chakra is not a problem meaning unless they intentionally release their chakra the sensors wouldn''t be able to differentiate between them.


    ¡° Yes, unlike that person who came earlier, your presence is different. Her walking is filled with elegance while yours is like a ninja. ¡° Shisui said as he tried to make countermeasures in case this person turns hostile.


    ¡° Huh I never thought about it like that. I guess you are quite exceptional. Even your stupid grandfather wouldn''t notice such details¡± Nanami said in a bit of admiration. She was honest in her words.


    Earlier she thought Shisui was able to be a genius due to his mastery over the Sharingan and the resources his grandfather left him. But it seems her judgement was wrong. If he could analyse such things in an instant then he is a natural genius.


    ¡° But even with this talent you still fell into that man''s hands. You went ahead and told a group of power hungry maniacs that you possess the ability to change the minds of anyone without them even realising. Do you realise how foolish your actions were? ¡° Nanami asked in a mocking tone.


    ¡° Yes, I thought the Hokage would ept the Uchiha if the n stopped having rebellious thoughts. ¡° Shisui said bitterly. He truly never wondered why the n was this much agitated. After staying here for a day he began releasing the dark truths that he purposefully ignored.


    The Uchiha were isted in their own vige. The Hokage faction tried their hardest to suppress the Uchiha. He even thought that his admission to Anbu was in order to suppress the n.


    Seeing Shisui so deted Nanami felt a twinge of sadness. She knew how hard it must have been for him to see all his beliefs crumble because of betrayal.


    Sighing, she came close to him and gave him a hug. Shisui''s body tensed up immediately and he was just a second away from jumping to side when Nanami said in a soothing tone.


    ¡° There there let it all out , It isn''t always nice to bottle up your emotions. Let it all out then you will feel better ¡°


    Like a dam that was broken, tears began to stream down Shisui''s eye sockets. He didn''t know who this stranger is but she gave him the samefort his grandfather had once given him. So he instinctively let his feelings take over him .


    He let out all the bottle up emotions inside of him. How he felt when Danzo took his eyes , how he felt betrayed when the third Hokage didn''t do anything to stop the conflict with the Uchiha. He let it all out. Everything that made him stressed out day and night was said to Nanami.


    Due to his exhaustion from speaking so long he unintentionally slept in Nanami ''s arms.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 41

    Chapter 41


    After waking up, Shisui felt awkward. He didn¡¯t know why he acted this way when the person in front of him was aplete stranger. The only thing he could do at this moment was look away in embarrassment.


    Seeing him like this, Nanami couldn¡¯t help but release a small chuckle. ''Shisui resembles his grandfather too much,'' she thought with a hint of nostalgia. When they were kids, Kagami was always the crybaby. He would cry over the smallest things and then look away in shame after realizing he had cried.


    ¡° Now since you are all embarrassed I should introduce myself. My name is Nanami Rushif¨¡, the adopted daughter of Izanami Otsutsuki, the one who saved you yesterday. ¡° Nanami said, trying to change the subject.


    ¡°Hello, as you may have already known, I am Shisui Uchiha. ¡° Shisui also said his introductions.


    ¡° Yes, the idiot descendant of Kagami uchiha ¡° Nanami said sarcastically.


    ¡° It seems like you have a grudge against my grandfather, ¡° Shisui said with a wry smile. Although Shisui couldn¡¯t see her face she could tell from her voice that this person is young girl. Maybe one of grandfather¡¯s secret descendants. He did hear from his nsman that his grandfather was quite a yboy.


    *boink *


    Shisui¡¯s thoughts stopped as he felt a huge pain on his head. He could guess that he was hit on the head.


    Nanami who had her fist clenched said ominously, ¡° Although I can¡¯t read people like my mother I still can see that you were thinking something rude about me. ¡°


    ¡® Scary ¡® Shisui thought as he held his head in pain.


    ¡° So why are you here? I don''t think you just came here just to see me ¡° Shisui asked as pondered on why thisdy came here to see him.


    ¡° I''m here to actually give something your grandfather left for you ¡° Nanami said as she reached inside of her Kimono and pulled a container. She then ced it on Shisui''s hands as she said ,


    ¡° These here are your grandfather''s original eyes. He originally intrusted them to me to give you so you can unlock your Eternal Mangekyo Sharingan but since you decided to donate them you could use these as spares ¡° her voice ced with sarcasm when she said thest part.


    ¡° Wait wait what do you mean these are grandpa''s original eyes and what is the Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan , is it the next evolution of the Mangekyou Sharingan? Why does it need my grandpa''s eyes. ¡° Shisui began to ask questions one after another.


    As someone who didn¡¯t know about the things written in the stone tablet Shisui¡¯s understanding of Mangekyou Sharingan is quite limited. He only knew that to awaken one¡¯s Mangekyou you need extreme stimtion with negative thoughts. This is why he jumped off the cliff when Itachi was present. To make Itachi feel enough negative emotions to awaken his Mangekyou.


    ¡° Hmm, where to start ¡°Nanami said as she pondered about this. With those questions alone she understood that Shisui had not gone to the Naka Shrine. This means he didn¡¯t let the n leader know about his Mangekyou Sharingan as it is an old tradition passed down in the Uchiha n for the n leader to show them the Uchiha stone tablet if they were able to awaken the Mangekyou Sharingan.


    "Let''s start with your grandfather then. You see, your grandfather is my best friend and my only blood rtive. Before I was adopted by my mother, I was born to an Uchiha and a Senju. During the time of my birth, the battles between the Uchiha and Senju ns were at their peak.


    I was shunned by both ns, especially by the Uchiha, since I was unable to awaken my Sharingan. The only reason I was allowed to live was due to my father sacrificing himself and faking our deaths. This happened when I was just five years old, the very age where one is thrown into the battlefield to survive.


    After my father¡¯s death me and my mother had to live alone in the forest to insure my father¡¯s sacrifice was not wasted. We lived for another year in seclusion before Kagami''s family took us in. As it turns out, Kagami''s mother was a daughter of a merchant and she was more than happy to help her sister inw. ¡° Nanami said with a sad look in her eyes. Her childhood is quite simr to Naruto but even then she wasn''t treated as badly as him.


    ¡° So your mother was my great-grandfather'' s sister. ¡° Shisui asked after thinking a bit.


    ¡° Yes , even though he didn''t directly help us , he indirectly did many things. And mine and Kagami''s friendship is something that was one of his works. Although I don''t know exactly why he did it I could take a few guesses.


    You see, for an Uchiha we always need someone to be our emotional pir. And although I didn''t know at that time my mother had a terrible illness. And so do you want to guess what would happen if the only pir that was keeping me sane broke apart. ¡°


    ¡° You would lose the will to live or worse gopletely insane. ¡° Shisui said. He had seen it countless times during the war. A lot of Uchiha n members died during the third great ninja war. This made many n members unstable for a period of time.


    ¡° Yes, that is why he included Kagami into my life. To give me another reason to live. Well much of the credit also should be given to Kagami as unlike your usual Uchiha he is quite the social butterfly. ¡° Nanami said with a bit of a chuckle.


    ¡° I''ve heard, ¡° Shisui said, agreeing with her. He heard that his grandfather is able to win any girl or make her his best friend in case he fails.


    ¡° After my mother passed away I decided to leave home. Even when I had Kagami I didn''t really feel at home in the house. That was until I met my adopted mother who took me in.


    She healed my heart and gave me a reason to live again. So I trained and became strong enough to stand by her side. ¡° Nanami said with a smile.


    ¡° Due to my work I had numerous opportunities to get in contact with Kagami. Even when Konoha was founded and he became one of the second Hokage''s students didn''t stop me from meeting him.


    During one of my visits he gave me his eyes. It was before he went on hisst mission. He knew he was being targeted so he left his greatest inheritance to you. ¡° Nanami said as she prepared to get up.


    ¡° Wait you still haven''t told me what Eternal Mangekyou is . ¡° Shisui said holding her hand.


    Nanami smiled and answered, ¡° the Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan is the next evolution of the Mangekyou Sharingan. ording to the stone tablet, to awaken the eternal Mangekyou you must have another pair of Mangekyou eyes from a close blood rtive. After transnting the other pair of eyes you will have the Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan. ¡°


    ¡° I see, '''' Shisui said, his grip tightening on the ss container.


    ¡° So tell me Shisui what is your choice. Would you transnt these eyes your grandfather left you and fight for your dream or would you choose to hide yourself in the darkness forever and let that 12 year old friend of yours take care of everything? ¡° Nanami asked seriously.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 42

    Chapter 42


    The door to the dinner table was opened. From there came Nanami and Shisui who had a new bandage wrapped on his head. Seeing them entering izanami looked at them before saying in surprise , ¡° wow I didn''t expect you to gave those pairs to him this quickly Nanami ¡°


    ¡° He is ready for it matriarch. Since Konoha already considered him dead it would be best for him to have it. There is a limit to what a blind man could do to help his n. ¡° Nanami said as she took a seat followed by Shisui.


    ¡° No, that''s what I was saying. I was just surprised that you would let him awaken his Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan this easily. His pupil technique with addition of what Kagami had will make him quite the troublesome opponent. ¡° Izanami said, making Shisui, who just took a seat, stand up immediately.


    ¡° Wait what do you mean I have the Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan. I thought you need two pairs of Mangekyou Sharingan to awaken it. ¡° He asked in a shocked voice.


    Nanami was also surprised at this but unlike Shisui she began to ponder what happened. She recointed everything thought of the reason for a few minutes. Then she suddenly realised something after analysing all the things she knew about the Sharingan.


    She asked in a somewhat unsure tone, ¡° Is it because Shisui¡¯s bloodline had upgraded ¡° .


    Izanami shook her head at this. ¡° No, the correct answer would be that he purified his bloodline. Because to upgrade you need more than just a Mangekyou Sharingan. ¡°


    ¡° What¡¯s the difference between those two? Shisui asked in puzzlement. Since to him who knows nothing about Biology and Science those two words are quite the same.


    ¡° You see when you upgrade your bloodline you are essentially evolving your blood into a higher level. For example, I imagine you have an A rank bloodline. If you upgrade your bloodline your bloodline would evolve into a S rank or SS rank.


    But when you are purifying your bloodline you essentially unlock the hidden powers that were dormant in it. For example imagine you have 50 % of this A rank bloodline and after purifying it you have 100% of said bloodline enabling you to fully explore your potential. ¡° Izanami exined to the both of them.


    ¡° I see so that¡¯s why you need another pair of Mangekyou Sharingan. You are essentially increasing your bloodline percentage by transnting another sharingan which has all the data needed. And to make sure the process has no faults you need the sharingans of a close blood rtive. ¡° Nanami eximed as she connected all the dots.


    ¡° Yes , unlike the Hyuga n which tries hardest to preserve their bloodline purity, the Uchiha n''s bloodline purity has decreased in each generation. Currently there is no one who could be considered a full Uchiha. ¡° Izanami said while inwardly thinking , ¡® That¡¯s unless no one is practising the bloodline purifying technique I gave Madara. If I remember correctly, that skill book should be in the Uchiha n. ¡®


    ¡° But why do you know all this? I can understand Nanami san since she read the Uchiha stone tablet but you speak of things that are not mentioned in the tablet. ¡° Shisui asked in bewilderment. When she heard him say she is a Shinigami Shisui thought she was just joking since he is alive.


    Izanami tilted her head and said as if this was a matter of fact , ¡° well because my brother is the one who founded the Uchiha n. So of course I know everything there is to know in this n. ¡°


    ¡° Wait, does that mean you are also a Uchiha n member? But wait, how old are you ? The Uchiha n has a history of a thousand years and you lived that long. Isn''t that impossible? ¡° Shisui said in rapid session. Ever since he came to this ce he has been hearing pretty outrageous things and this is most outrageous amongst everything he heard.


    Izanami got up from her seat. Her hands and eyes were twitching ever so slightly after all of Shisui''s questions. There is a universal rule that all men must follow. Never ask a woman for their age. And Shisui did just that. So you can imagine how screwed up he is now.


    Reaching Shisui Izanami gripped his head hard making him vail in pain. She said in a slightly cold voice, ¡° you know I don''t really like to hit injured patients but you really pushed your luck there. Since you need some punishment I will have to hasten your recovery for a bit. ¡°


    Saying those a green aura began toe out of her hand as it flowed towards Shisui lighting up body. His injuries which were still recovering began to heal at a rapid pace. Even the eyes that were still adapting began to hasten their recovery. And in a matter of seconds Shisui''s body is devoid of any injuries.


    Seeing her work done , Izanami nodded her head a bit before finally saying, ¡° Since you are healed, please ept your punishment¡±. And without waiting for an answer she punched him in the face.


    With a bang Shisui was thrown towards the wall. He grimaced in pain as he felt he might have broken his back.


    Izanami dusted her hands and went back to her seat like nothing happened. Tsunade, Shizune and Naruto who watched all this from next room shuddered as they unanimously thought, ¡® Don''t make Izanami angry by asking her age. ¡®


    ¡° Hey you three bring those things over here. Are we starting this party or what? ¡° she said as she gave the three hiding figures a nce.


    They quickly did as she ordered. They didn''t want to face her wrath. Especially Naruto who didn''t want the only person who treated him kindly to be angry at him.


    Nanami sighed at her adopted mother''s behaviour. Unlike the rest she knew her mother isn''t that petty to hurt Shisui just because he mentioned her age. She is too old for that shit. The only reason she punished him was for his past actions where he betrayed his n and told aplete stranger his power.


    For Izanami familyes first before everything. This is why she always tries to lessen her authority in the Rushif¨¡ n. She didn''t want to be someone like the Third Hokage who would only nourishe his n. She didn¡¯t want to y favourites for anyone.


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</strong>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 43

    Chapter 43


    Despite the small incident with Shisui earlier, the small party was held without any otherplications. Since this party is mostly for Naruto everyone unanimously decided to y with him for today.


    So while the adults were drinking they yed board games which Izanami copied from her old universe. Due to the limited entertainment in the ninja world the board games became a hit amongst them. Especially for Naruto who never had the opportunity to y with anyone in his entire life.


    For the whole afternoon they yed and enjoyed themselves to the fullest. Even Shisui, who was a little awkward at first, joined in on the fun. But as the saying goes ¡® all good things must eventuallye to and end. ¡® . When it was near 3¡¯ o''clock in the evening the party eventually came to an end.


    After cleaning up the mess they made everyone went to do their own work. Tsunade and Shizune had a meeting with the Hoage. As the disciple of the Third Hokage her return to the vige is a big thing to Konoha.


    And most of all the vige higher ups need to give a good exnation to Tsunade about the decision they made yesterday regarding the debt to the World Bank. Unlike the Uchiha n, they can¡¯t just force the debt on her. They aren¡¯t Danzo who has no dignity or shame if it means getting what he wants.


    If Tsunade ends up rebelling from the vige the scandalism would be too much for the vige to bear. Especially with the special connections Tsunade has with the Fire Daimyo. The title of ¡® Princess of Konoha ¡® isn¡¯t just for show. If someone had any legal rights to the vige it would be her as her grandfather was one of the founders. And since in the Uchiha n there is no one who had blood rtions to Madara there is nopetition for Tsunade.


    As Shizune and Tsunade were about to depart, Izanami stopped them. She turned to Tengen and said, ¡° you should go with them. It¡¯s not everyday you could see people taking shamelessness to the extreme. This would be a good experience for you who is looking to broaden your horizons. ¡°


    Tengen nodded after thinking about it for a while. True in the Land of Iron the people value dignity more than anything. So this may be a good experience for him who wanted to know the ways of the world.


    Izanami then turned to Tsunade and spoke, ¡° Take him with you , if asked why he is here. Tell them that he is here to make sure you don¡¯t run away from me. If they asked him to wait outside, ask them if they are willingling to bear the full burden of your debt and my annoyance. ¡°


    Tsunade was speechless at Izanami¡¯s words. Although the debt she umted was huge she never did think about not paying back. This is not how a Senju, much less the granddaughter of Hashirama Senju, would act. Whether it takes days , months or years Tsunade always paid her debt.


    This is also why many Casino owners and loan sharks still let Tsunade borrow money. They knew she would eventually pay them back.


    But even Tsunade had some dissatisfaction about this she didn''t say it as she listened to the next words Izanami said, ¡° Oh right if you let him go I will deduct the first 3 months of the debt you need to pay. ¡°


    She swiftly turned to Tengen and angrily shouted, ¡° what are you doing? Quickly get ready we are going to the Hokage Building. We are alreadyte. ¡°


    Hearing her orders Tengen nodded absentmindedly as he quickly went inside his room to get geared up. While on his way he couldn''t help but think inwardly, ¡® So this is what it meant to be shameless. It seems like I have more things to learn from this journey. ¡®


    After they departed Izanami looked at Nanami and Shisui and asked, ¡° So you guys got any ns this afternoon¡±


    Nanami nodded as she said , ¡° Yes I will head to the ck Market ce in the Land of Fire. There we could find a good test subject for Shisui to train his Eternal Mangakyou Sharingan. ¡°


    ¡° Oh bounty hunting huh. Well good luck with it . But remember to keep a low profile. Our ns are just beginning to take shape. ¡° Izanami warned as she agreed to their idea. Bounty hunting is the most suitable way to train.


    ¡° Yes matriarch, we would sure be careful, ¡± Nanami agreed as she bowed her head a bit before dragging Shisui out of the house.


    After everyone departed Izanami began to contemte what she should do too. She could walk around Konoha to sight see but she was sure she would break some bones in anger. After all knowing Danzo he would sure to circte many nasty rumours about her.


    This is his usual way of getting revenge after all. Make a baseless rumour and spread it using his minions. And if chance arrives use his minions to start a fight and frame it on his intended target.


    And she couldn¡¯t be bothered to disguise herself. Why should she do something so troublesome just to save some strangers from being hospitalized?. Should sheze around for today.


    As she was wondering about this Kaguya jumped on herp and spoke, ¡° So when are you going to the Uchiha n ¡°


    ¡° Oh right I almost forgot about that, ¡° Izanami said as she remembered that she was supposed to have a meeting with Fugaku today.


    Thinking of her visit to the Uchiha n a mischievous n came to her mind. She remembered the anomaly she wanted to investigate in the Uchiha n. As she was about to stood up Naruto who was busy ying with Rin and Sakumo turned towards her and asked , ¡° Big sister are you going somewhere ¡°


    ¡° Oh Naruto , I¡¯m going head out for a bit. Do you want to join me ? ¡° Izanami asked as she gave Naruto a small smile.


    Naruto nodded shyly. He didn¡¯t want to be apart from izanami. He is still afraid that she will leave him and he will lose everything again.


    ¡° it''s not that I mind but isn¡¯t it a bit risky to take Naruto to the Uchiha n. Hriuzen wouldn¡¯t allow it ¡° Sakumo said with a bit of worry in his tone. In the past few hours he began to like this kid and didn¡¯t want him taken away because of something like that.


    Izanami with a disdainful expression said, ¡° Heh so what if he is displeased. He isn¡¯t the boss of me . And even if he sends his men to cause trouble I will just break their bones and let them rest in the hospital for the rest of their lives. ¡°


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 44

    Chapter 44


    Unlike the vibrant atmosphere in the vige, the Uchiha n district is a little nd. Even though in the past this district was one of the busiest in Konoha. But with the Third Hokage gaining power this business district slowly began to lose the excitement it once held.


    After the nine tail incident and with the n being forced to move away from their ancestral ground the businesses in the Uchiha n were deeply affected. Vigers rarely came to purchase items from their shops due to the rumors. This forced many n members to join the police department.


    The only reason why the n isn¡¯t bankrupt is due to the numerous assets they have all around the Fire nation. But even with these assets they were very tight with their finances.


    So when Fugaku heard that the vige had basically dumped a huge debt on them without even thinking twice he almost felt his heart stop beating. This is a huge problem for him. Even the n¡¯s idea of rebelling is not bigpared to this.


    He could barely keep hisposure as he left the Hokage tower. If he could, he wished to destroy that building with his Susano. He felt great disappointment after what happened that day. He knew the vige didn¡¯t like the Uchiha n but to disregard them this much.


    Furthermore the debt is something the two ns had to take to establish this vige. And despite knowing this the elders ruthlessly said that they will not interfere with this. Isn¡¯t this the same as saying the Uchiha n is no longer recognised in Konoha. What about the sacrifices the n made to support this vige? Aren¡¯t they one of the founding ns?


    These questions lingered in Fugaku¡¯s mind as he walked back to his home. He was too tired to even go to work today. He only managed to calm his mind down a little after drinking some of his favourite tea.


    Exhaling a deep sigh he rubbed his forehead in pain. He was wondering how to break this news to the n members. Due to most of the nsmen joining the police force he knew they were too agitated these days. With this news he is pretty sure even they would finally snap.


    ¡° It seems a coup d''etat is inevitable ¡± Fugaku muttered with a heavy sigh.


    Although he is against the idea, but he has no choice. This debt would leave many nsmen homeless and painless. As a n leader he must care about his n before anything else. The only option they have is to mortgage their properties but doing that would basically make them homeless.


    Just as Fugaku was going through a spiral of dark thoughts he heard a n member calling out his name in a hurry. He got up from his seat in a hurry. Did the n elders somehow find out about the debt and finally go crazy?. After Shisui¡¯s death the elders were on the boiling point. The radicals were screaming their lungs out for revenge.


    Fugaku imagining the worst case scenario gulped as he went towards the door. Looking at the distraised n member he asked, ¡° what happened ¡°


    ¡° n leader, a few minutes ago someone came to the Police headquarters and issued a Hyakki Yagy¨­ . The receptionist tried to chase away her saying that that tradition is no longer a thing. But that girl didn¡¯t listen at all. And she then began to beat up every single member in the police force. Even the captions were not speared. She is now heading towards here, ¡° the distressed n member said . In his voice there was a bit of distress and admiration.


    ¡°Huh ¡° Fugaku was stunned. Not in a million years did he ever think such a thing was happening. Also Hyakki Yagy¨­ isn¡¯t that something you only do when deciding the n leader.


    Filled with various questions Fugaku followed his n member to meet this person. Using a Hyakki Yagy¨­es with a cost. Either you submit or die. There is no excuse for being the loser.


    ~ At the Police Headquarters ~


    Izanami walked out of the Police headquarters with Naruto with a little difficulty. Well with people lying on the floor everywhere it is quite hard to move without stepping on them.


    Earlier she went to the Police Headquarters thinking of meeting Fugaku there but it seems he wasn¡¯t at work today. Since she had to go straight to his house to meet him she decided to help him a bit on the way. So she issued a Hyakki Yagy¨­ to the whole n.


    Hyakki Yagy¨­ is the sacred ritual the Uchiha n uses to select their n leaders. This is basically the candidate fighting all the elders and making them submit to his rule. If they are stubborn to the core then they will be punished. In the best case you would just be stripped off your titles and positions and in the worst case you will be killed.


    The Uchiha n value strength above all else isn''t actually a lie. To them strength is justice. This is also why Itachi, even under suspicion of murdering Shisui, wasn''t subject to interrogation. Unless you could catch him by yourself, no n member wanted to oppose Itachi. And theck of evidence also yed a crucial role in it.


    What Izanami aimed to do was to let the frustrated Uchiha members vent by fighting her. As a n that loves the thrill of battle this is the best way to make them a little calm. Izanami proposing a Hyakki Yagy¨­ is the best excuse for them to fight to their heart''s content.


    ¡° Remember Naruto, to fully tame a Uchiha you must defeat them in battle and make them submit to you. ¡° Izanami said to Naruto who had stars in her eyes.


    Naruto didn¡¯t know any adult business such as Uchiha pride or dignity. All he knows is that his big sister is so cool. She defeated close to 30 in a matter of minutes. And that¡¯s without using any ninjutsu. For him who has never seen a ninja fight, Izanami was like a huge superhero. So even when Izanami was exining something to him he wasn¡¯t paying much attention to it as he was busy admiring his new big sister.


    He only managed to break out of his fantasy when she flicked his forehead. Clutching his forehead in pain he looked at Izanami with a tear filled gaze.


    Izanami smiled at him and exined , ¡° Remember Naruto we are here to meet a guest so we shouldn¡¯t step on anyone or harm any property. ¡°


    ¡° Oh ¡° Naruto said as he looked at his surroundings. There were unconscious men everywhere. And he almost stepped on one of them without knowing it.


    ¡°Uh I¡¯m sorry sleeping uncle , I¡¯ll be careful next time ¡° Naruto said to the man who he was about to step on. Whether the man heard it or not is unknown as he only grunted.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 45

    Chapter 45


    "Stop right there. You have caused enoughmotion already." Fugaku said as he finally catched up with the two intruders who came to cause a mess in the n. This pair didn''te towards his house directly but took a huge detour and walked around the entire npound.


    It''s like she was touring the whole Uchiha n. Even the elders were defeated by her when they came to apprehend her. So apart from him and his men everyone who went to challenge her are now lying on the ground unconscious.


    But if Fugaku was being honest he was honestly surprised that his n was defeated this quickly.Almost 90% of the whole Uchiha poption is a genius in their own fields. Whether it is Ninjutsu , Genjutsu , Taijutsu or even Kenjutsu the Uchiha ncked nothing. Especially the elders whoare the elite amongst elites.


    Thisbination is nothing to scoff at even in Konoha. Even the Vige higher ups would cower in fear when the whole n unites.But this girl defeated all of them in a matter of minutes. And from his observations he found out that no one was killed.


    This is obviously a plus in Fugaku''s book. The Uchiha n respectes the strong but that doesn''t mean they are easy to bully. If anyone of his nsmen were killed, Fugaku would fight this person to the death even if it meant sacrificing himself. That is his duty as the n leader.


    Izanami observing Fuagku had to hide the wide smile that was threatening to break into her face. When watching the anime Izanami always thought Fugaku was someone who would sway to the pressure. But looking at him now Izanami found that to be false. He is a true n leader who wanted nothing but the best for his nsman.


    If Izanami had to guess, the only reason Fugaku allowed Itachi to do the massacre was because he couldn''t bear to fight his own son. His pride and joy.


    ''Now that I think about it, Itachi can''t kill off everyone in the n by himself even with Obitio''s and Danzo''s help. '' Izanami thought inwardly. From the fight she fought there were numerous people who were on the verge of awakening Mangekyou Sharingans. They only needed a little push to awaken them. Furthermore the Uchiha n has many hidden experts.


    And no matter how nonsensical fate is, it cannot give Itachi the power to kill off all of them. Even if he triedhe would have to exhaust his Mangakyou Sharinganpletely to deal with all of them. So that leaves Izanami with an interesting conclusion.


    '' So the Uchiha n, simr to the Senju n, went into hiding. They concealed themselves so Danzo or Hiruzen wouldn''t be able to find them. ''Izanami thought. It isn''t impossible with theresources and history the Uchiha n has going into hiding is not a problem. Without showing their Sharingan no one could distinguish themselves amongstmon folk.


    " Well if it isn''t the n leader Fugaku. Well do forgive us for not immediately going to your residence. You see little Naruto here has not seen much of the Uchiha n so I was letting him sight see. I hope that isn''t a problem with you " Izanami said with a business-like smile.


    Fugaku who heard her words almost stumbled back from shock. Did he hear it right? The son of Minato is here in the Uchiha n. He had to finish this business before disaster struck them. And for a moment he felt gratitude for Izanami for knocking down every n member into unconsciousness. If they know the nine tail Jinch¨±riki is here then they will do something drastic without thinking about the consequences.


    And what''s more he is pretty sure the vige higher ups would do something drastic too if they realised he is here. The Nine tails incident made it quite clear that the Sharingan can control the tail beast.


    Thinking all of these things, Fugaku tried his very best to lead them to his house as quickly as possible. He didn''t want toplicate things anymore.


    Izanami, who could easily read Fugaku''s thoughts like an open book, contemted whether to go on another tour just to tease him. And besides, it''s not like she came here unprepared.


    As soon as she left the mansion she enveloped the whole vige in her domain of illusions. So as long as she had this domain deployed everything is under her control. The Anbu ninjas who are watching the Uchiha n from the watchtower or the hidden Root ninjas deployed by Danzo can only collect the information Izanami allowed them to collect.


    To them nothing is going wrong and the Uchiha n is doing their everyday work like usual. There was no <em>Hyakki Yak¨­</em> . No one saw anyone who single handedly beat down the whole Uchiha n. And obviously the Nine tail Jinchiruki is not the Uchiha n right now.


    But after thinking about it for a while Izanami decided to abandon the idea. She didn''t want to pressure him too much. After all he would need to be fully conscious for the talk they are about to have.


    So without any dy all of them headed towards Fugaku''s house. The trip was quite boring since apart from Naruto who was enjoying himself no one talked. Fugaku and his men all had their signature poker face.


    Arriving at his house, Fugaku dismissed his men. Although they are his retainers they knew when to back down. After all, the n leader''s duties aren''t something they can interfere with. After his followers left he gestured to his guests toe inside.


    After going inside Izanami looked at her surroundingswith a bit of interest.Just now she felt the activation of Fuinjutsu.And that too an observation type Fuinjutsu. So she released her senses and found that the entire room they are now in is covered with various seals.


    With a bit of more studying Izanami found that these seals are made by an Uzumaki as the way these seals are used is quite familiar to her. Thinking about Kushina''s rtionship with Mikoto Izanami didn''t find it too strange.


    But what interested her the most is the familiar chakra signature she felt when releasing her senses. Although it was very faint like it was sealed she could undoubtedly recognise that chakra signature.


    '' What in the bloody hell is going on with this world? '' izanami wondered in her mind.


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>.</strong>


    <strong>If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</strong>


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 46

    Chapter 46


    Although Izanami was shocked and wanted nothing but to investigate this matter immediately, she didn¡¯t change her expression or move from her seat. Izanami knew not to rush anything. Especially when they are getting ready to have a negotiation.


    Although she didn¡¯t explicitly give away her identity she knew Fugaku may have an inkling<b> </b>on who she is. I mean he was already looking like he was about to face an enemy kage. And as a n leader he would fail his responsibilities if he didn¡¯t find any information about her after all themotion she did yesterday.


    Izanami didn¡¯t pick on that receptionist just to be petty. No, she wanted to cause amotion so that her arrival would be alerted to every n leader. This is so Hiruzen would not be able to shrink his responsibilities or silently bury this incident. No, she wanted to show how much Hiruzen and his friends screwed up so their poprity would drop.


    This is her way of taking revenge for what those guys did to her students'' ns. She will destroy the reputation Hiruzen tried to protect so much. How will the vigers react when they realise that the vige they love so much is in decline because of the Third Hokage¡¯s actions. They would soon realise that the grand dream Hiruzen shows them is nothing but an illusion.


    Thinking of her future ns, Izanami smiled evilly. Her smile was so scary that it even scared the hell out of Fugaku . And if that isn¡¯t enough Hiruzen who was at home reading Jaraiya¡¯s novel to heal his soul shivered.


    ¡° So who are you and why did you cause such amotion at the police headquarters. ¡° Fugaku asked after calming himself down. He narrowed eyes and activated his three tomoe sharingan as he said those words. He was ready in case this person in front of him is an enemy.


    Izanami, who Fugaku tried to pressure with his sharingan, didn''t even flinch. Earlier she was in the presence of Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan so this kind of pressure is nothing to her. Especially when Fugaku was still concealing his Mangekeyou Sharingan.


    She just used her own aura to protect Naruto from being affected by Fugaku¡¯s pressure. Despite being a nine-tailed Jinchuriki, Naruto is still a child, so he should note in contact with such pressure at a young age. It''s not good for one¡¯s physic.


    ¡® Wait, Is itachi so extreme because of his experience on the battlefield at a young age ¡® izanami thought as felt she might have solved why Itachi held such a mentality. His views on life and death isn¡¯t something that even Hiruzen or Danzo could instill. In factpared to itachi they are simply naive in that aspect.


    Thinking so Izanami red at Fugaku and said , ¡° Remove that pressure I don¡¯t want Naruto to be like your elder son ¡°


    ¡° huh ¡° Fugaku was dumbfounded at this. And most importantly he was very confused. Although he rarely shows it, his elder son is his pride. And everyone he met always say that they wished their children were like him. And this is the first time he has met someone who said they don¡¯t want their children to be like him.


    Although Fugaku wanted to ask a million questions about what his son did wrong he stillplied and retreated his pressure. He didn¡¯t want to be a victim like the rest of his n were.


    Seeing him cooperating obediently, Izanami nodded her head internally. She then retracted her aura that was shielding Naruto. After that she turned to Naruto and asked, ¡° Naruto do you want to stay here and join this boring meeting or go and y with someone your age. Oh right there is this aunt who is also a friend of your mother here. I''m sure she would like to meet you ¡°


    She looked at Fugaku''s eyes when she mentioned Mikoto. Fugaku, taking the hint, nodded his head in agreement.


    ¡° Mikoto, could youe here for a second?¡± he said as he called his wife.


    Soon Mikoto came with a tray with three cups of tea. She was already making tea when Fugaku called her.


    Fugaku then gestured to Naruto ¡° you can go to the backyard and y with my second son who is also in a simr age to you. My wife will escort you ¡° Although his expression tone didn''t change there was a bit of warmth in his voice. Simr to how Kushina and Mikoto were friends, he and Minato were also friends. So naturally he is kind towards his friend''s only son.


    Naruto looked at Mikoto before looking at Izanami again. Although he couldn''t tell why he wanted to go with this aunty and talk with her. And her being a friend of his mom''s was also a reason.


    Naruto always wanted to know about his parents so this is a great opportunity for him. But despite his eagerness he still needed to get Izanami¡¯s permission.


    Izanami smiled and said, ¡° Go, you can go and y to your heart''s desire. After this meeting is over I''lle and see you ¡°


    Naruto nodded with a cheerful smile as he got up in a hurry. He then Skipped towards Mikoto like an excited rabbit.


    Mikoto smiled gently at his behaviour. ''He is just like Kushina when we were, young ¡® she thought as she took Naruto''s hand. After bowing towards Izanami a little she left with Naruto.


    After they left Izanami, who was smiling all the time, turned serious. Earlier she was like a big sister who was just here to apany her younger brother but now she is like a queen who holds the authority of the whole world.


    ¡° Fugaku, let''s talk, ¡° she said in her authoritative tone.


    Fugaku, although stunned at this sudden shift in character, managed to gather his bearings quickly. He also turned serious as he asked again , ¡° Who are you and what do you want with the Uchiha n? ¡°


    ¡° My identity huh , well for one I¡¯m the representative of the World Bank who came to im the debt Konoha owed ¡° hearing Izanami¡¯s words Fugaku¡¯s expression darkened.


    ¡® Shit shit they are already here ¡® he cursed in his head. He only got the news about their astronomical debt a few hours ago and now you are telling him the debt collector is already here. Where is justice when it is needed? Wasn¡¯t they supposed to give at least 2 days to discuss it with the n elders?


    ¡° And apart from that I am also here to offer the Uchiha n a proposal. ¡° Izanami said, making Fugaku look at her with his eyes narrowed. It seems like this is more than collecting some debt money.


    Fugaku exhaled a deep breath and asked, ¡° What is your proposal.¡±


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 47

    Chapter 47


    While Izanami and Fugaku were having their discussion, Mikoto escorted Naruto towards the backyard of their house. Although quite obedient, Naruto asked a multitude of questions along the way. This was the first time he had the chance to learn about his parents, and he was quite excited. After all, the Third Hokage had been tight-lipped, only mentioning that Naruto¡¯s parents were heroes and leaving it at that.


    Mikoto, who was used to Kushina¡¯s over-excited nature, wasn''t overwhelmed or annoyed like a normal person would. She gently exined every question Naruto asked. Within the scope of what she could speak of course. Although she didn¡¯t know how Naruto was able to enter into the Uchiha n she wasn¡¯t going to make the situation moreplicated than it already is. As the wife of the n leader she too had her own responsibilities.


    And so Mikoto told everything she could tell to Naruto. She told him about how his mother was when she was just his age. How his father was a genius and how his mother had dered him as her rival when they were in school.


    While they were discussing things unknowingly they reached their destination. And seeing that they have already arrived Mikoto decided to end this discussion temporarily. She wanted her son to be friends with Naruto just like how she and Kushina were.


    Opening the door that leads to the backyard Mikoto and Naruto found themselves in the presence of a young boy with ck hair and cute face ying with a girl who is about 12-13 years old.


    Noticing their arrival the girl looked at Mikoto and asked, ¡° oh Mom did youe to join..¡± her words trailed off as her gazended on Naruto. Her expression changed a little as she recognized him.


    Naruto, who was the most sensitive to how others perceive him, felt a bit of sadness and thought, ¡® Is she going to hate me like the others? ¡®. Mikoto meanwhile signalled with her eyes for her daughter to not say anything harsh to Naruto.


    But unlike what Mikoto and Naruto thought, this girl didn''t care about Naruto''s identity as a Demon Fox or the nine tails Jinchuriki. What she was surprised about was for another reason,


    ¡® Why does he feel like uncle Ashura? It''s the same as Susuke. Is he also a reincarnation like me? No, this feels different. Sasuke clearly doesn''t remember his past and Naruto too looks like have the same situation. ¡® the girl thought internally. Deciding to investigate this further she spoke, ¡° Oh mom who is this child you brought with you. ¡°


    Mikoto smiled gently as she introduced Naruto to everyone, ¡° His name is Naruto Uzumaki, the son of my best friend. Since he came here I thought it would be nice for you guys to know each other. Oh did you know he is around Sasuke¡¯s age. ¡°


    ¡° Nice to meet you Dattebayo, ¡° Naruto said, shing his ever-present cheerful smile.


    ¡° Oh it¡¯s nice to meet you, Naruto. My name is Kiyomi Uchiha . ¡° The girl Kiyomi introduced herself. She then pointed to Sasuke and said, ¡° And this here is Sasuke Uchiha, my younger brother. I hope you guys will be friends since you are at the same age. ¡°


    Sasuke, like a proud young master, only nodded his head. He didn¡¯t know why but ever since he saw that blond haired kid he wanted to beat the shit out of him for no reason.


    Mikoto frowned a bit seeing Sasuke¡¯s behaviour. Although Sasuke doesn¡¯t have many friends due to his attachment to Itachi he doesn¡¯t act so arrogantly in front of any other kid. So what made him change his behaviour drastically.


    While Mikoto was puzzled at his behaviour Kiyomi had an understanding look in her eyes. Even if they are only reincarnations the rivalry is still there. In fact this further made Kiyomi understand that her guess about them is correct.


    ¡° Hey, what are you guys doing? ¡° Naruto asked. He for some reason wanted to show that smelly Sasuke that he is better than him.


    Kiyomi sensing his fighting spirit raised an eyebrow as she said , ¡° Oh we were just teaching Sasuke how to mold chakra. Do you want to join us Naruto ¡°


    ¡° Hehehe if you don¡¯t mind, ¡° Naruto said with a bit of shyness. He isn¡¯t used to people treating him this nicely. Usually most people would shout at him even when he only nced at them.


    Kiyomi then gestured to both Naruto and Sasuke to take a seat in the courtyard as she began her lesson. Mikoto went inside to bring some snacks for all of them to enjoy while learning.


    After both kids took a seat Kiyomi began her lesson. ¡° You see kids, chakra in essence is made out of two different energies. One is spiritual energy and the other is physical energy. Spiritual energy is something thates from the mind and soul while physical energy as the name suggestses from the body.


    Bybining these two energies we create chakra. And as you may have known before all living creatures have chakra as meagre as it may be. This is because for all living beings having a mind , soul and body is very essential.


    Well talking about these energies a very interesting rumor was quite popr during the warring state periods. ¡°


    ¡° What is it Kiyomi big sis , tell us quickly,¡± Naruto asked excitedly. Sasuke, although remained silent, had his eyes shining. He was curious as Naruto about this rumour.


    Kiyomi chuckled at their enthusiasm and replied, ¡° Well it is said that if one were to master spiritual energy and Physical energy to their ultimate level they are able to enter a state where they could never run out of chakra. ¡°


    ¡° Wow, does that mean I could do cool jutsus all day and not get tired. ¡° Naruto asked excitedly.


    Kiyomi nodded her head. What she said is true. If one were to perfectly control their spiritual and physical energies they are able to have a near infinite chakra. Although it is but a rumour at this age as no one was able to do it in thest century.


    ¡° Yeah I''m gonna train so hard and definitely do as big sis said. ¡° Naruto said as he gave his signature smile.


    Sasuke on the side scoffed at his stupidity, ¡° heh if it was that easy then everyone would have been able to do it. And besides I doubt you could do when by big brother wasn''t able to do it ¡°


    Although Sasuke didn''t know much about these energies. He heard from his big brother that manipting spiritual energy is super hard . And even then he is considered the best Genjutsu expert in the n due to his excellent control. So if his big brother who is considered a genius failed to achieve such a legendary state, how could this blonde idiot do it?


    Naruto who didn''t take the provocation well snapped as he red at Sasuke, ¡° what did you say girly face want to try who is the best¡±


    ¡° Heh bring it on ¡° Sasuke arrogantly dered as he too got ready to fight.


    But before the two of them could react both of them suddenly felt something hitting their forehead making them scream out in pain.


    ¡°¡° Oww oww oww¡±¡± Sasuke and Naruto both clutched their heads in pain as they looked at Kiyomi with teary eyes.


    Kiyomi red at the two of them and rebuked, ¡° No fighting when I''m teaching, Do you understand¡±


    Naruto and Sasuke who wanted toin suddenly froze in fear as the aura Kiyomi was releasing was terrifying. They both nodded at the same time not wanting to provoke her anymore.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 48

    Chapter 48


    Shortly after Mikoto arrived with a tray full of snacks. And wanting to forget the previous scene both Sasuke and Naruto began to dig into the snacks like their life depended on it. And while eating they didn¡¯t forget to throw curses at each other.


    Mikoto and Kiyomi both sighed at their antics. If it was not for both of them not showing any real hostility towards each other they would have a serious talk with them.


    After all of them enjoyed their snacks a little, Kiyomi once again started her lesson.


    ¡° Now I''m going to teach you how to harness chakra. First we have to meditate and calm your minds. ¡° Kiyomi said as she instructed both of them how to meditate.


    Both of them, due to their excitement, weren''t able to calm their minds in the first try but gradually under Kiyomi¡¯s instructions they were able to enter a meditative state.


    ¡° Now I''m going to inject a bit of my chakra into your bodies. Try your best to understand and get a feel for my chakra. ¡° Kiyomi said as she injected a little bit of her chakra into their system.


    At first both of them didn''t get it as this is a bit foreign thing to them. But gradually they began to feel the warm sensation in their backs.


    Both of them then said at the same time said , ¡° I can feel it on my back ¡°


    Mikoto, who heard this, was surprised. Usually children need at least a week to get the feeling of chakra. Geniuses from ns shorten this time period to 3 days or a day. And monsters do it even faster than them. Even her eldest son had to consecrate for an hour to get the feeling of chakra.


    While Mikoto was surprised, Kiyomi on the other hand didn''t seem that much impressed. Unlike her mother she knew that these two have chakra sensitivity buried deep in their souls. After all, after going through that many reincarnations their instincts are more sharper than any normal human.


    ¡° Good now try to follow my chakra. I will guide it through your meridians for you to get a feel for it. ¡° Kiyomi said as she guided her chakra. She first began it very slowly as she didn''t want to harm their bodies by over stimting their meridians.


    As she guided the chakra in their bodies Naruto and Sasuke gradually began to locate their chara pathways. While doing so they found out that the chakra flow always stops at their stomachs. Focusing on their senses they found that the ce has a lot of chakra gathered there.


    ¡° Don¡¯t try to unlock your chakra on your own. Your bodies are still not used to welding chakra so it will only hurt you if you unlock it sooner, For now just focus on locating the chakra pathways in your bodies. ¡° Kiyomi''s voice rang out in their ears as they tried to move the chakra in their stomach.


    Hearing her warning they stopped what they were about to do. As much as they were curious they are still little kids so they tend to obey every warning adults give to them.


    After a half an hour Kiyomi stopped supplying her chakra to both Naruto and Sasuke. She didn¡¯t think these two troublemakers would be able to endure anymore meditation.


    And just as she guessed these two immediately started to fool around as soon as they finished the exercise. Individually they may endure it for more time but when they are together that is asking for the impossible.


    Their ancestors'' chakra made it impossible for them to not fight for the silliest thing. This is what Hagoromo described as the hatred between his two sons. They would fight for the silliest thing to show their dominance over the other.


    Kiyomi having first hand experience on how troublesome Indra and Ashura could be sighed while thinking, ¡®sigh they sure have inherited that troublesome ego ¡®.


    Mikoto on the other hand smiled as she saw their interactions. While many might have not known, she and Kushina were quite simr in their childhood. Mikoto, as the princess of the Uchiha n, always had to show her superiority over Kushina the Uzumaki Princess.


    As members of two major ns who dominated the warring periods this was an expected result. This rivalry didn¡¯t disappear even after the Uzumaki n¡¯s destruction. In fact it only intensified. Kushina, like Sasuke in the original story, had to guard the dignity of their ns.


    In fact if it was not for Minato being the genius he was these two would be considered the diamonds of their generation. And their friendship was also born due to making an alliance to defeat Mianto.


    So Mikoto didn¡¯t take their rivalry to heart. They just need to grow up and their friendship would grow. ¡® And having Naruto may let Sasuke be more expressive of his feelings ¡® she thought as she looked at her son with a bit of sadness.


    Due to the n situation Fugaku had lost his smile. He always returned home with a tired or angry expression. And Sasuke who is still little wanting her father¡¯s love and approval only gets a cold response. And Iatchi is rarely at home, making the situation worse.


    If it was not for Kiyomi¡¯s presence Sasuke would already lose all his emotions. Mikoto, despite being a great mother, couldn''t help her younger son with this problem. As in Sasuke¡¯s view, his brother and father hold more importance to him.


    This is amon trait amongst Uchiha nsmen. The value they give each person is different. But don¡¯t misunderstand, it''s not that Sasuke doesn''t love his mother and sister. it¡¯s just that in his eyes the value is a little lower than his brother and father.


    Obito¡¯s obsession towards continuing the Infinite Tsukuyomi n can also be exined by this. To him a world without Rin is not worth living for. And that is why he didn¡¯t hesitate in murdering his own nsmen. The same is true for Itachi who didn¡¯t mind killing his own parents just to give his little brother a stable life.


    This trait is one of the reasons why Tobirama called the Uchiha n a cursed n. They have their own priorities and won¡¯t care about any others. A n filled with emotionally attached people.


    While Sasuke and Naruto fooled around with each other, Izanami and Fugaku finished their discussion. If one looked closely they could see Fugaku with a tired but satisfied expression. It seems he may have achieved something great for his n.


    After the discussion was over Izanami wasted no time as she went to fetch Naruto. After that much negotiating with Fugaku made her a bit tired.


    She forgot how it felt with working ipetent people due to not having any experience with them for thest centuries. Japan under her rule made it hard for the ipetent to live.


    Whether their talent was in cooking they could livefortably with that talent alone. That''s the type of environment Izanami managed to make Japan in her long life.


    So she forgot how things operate in the real world. n leader is pressured by the n elders who have too much ego. Some high ranking members are too corrupt to change their ways.


    ¡® Arrgg¡¯ remembering those problems Izanami had a headache. In fact she wondered whether to just kidnap every Uchiha n member and be done with it. As soon as they step into Japan they would have to change whether they like it or not.


    While she was on her thoughts, unknowingly she arrived at the ce where Naruto and Sasuke were learning. She looked at Kiyomi with aplex look.


    With a sigh she made a few hand signs and muttered, ¡° Time release: Suspended World ¡±


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 49

    Chapter 49


    In her long life Izanami had numerous professions. With time being the only thing shecked she was able to perfect her professions even if she had a minimal talent. For instance she once wanted to study medicine since she had free time. And while doing so she found out she had a little talent in that field. But with her sheer determination alone she managed to be hailed as the medical sage who could cure any illnesses.


    To her talent is just a VIP pass for the journey ahead. What really mattered was the hard work and dedication the person put to reach his goal.


    Take Might Guy for example. He doesn''t have an impressive chakra amount as Naruto or any great teacher to guide him. But did he give up? No, he worked harder than everyone. He said he wanted to catch up to Kakashi and he did just that. He knew that he had only taijutsu so he became a taijutsu freak who could even kill a being close to the six path level. And he did all that with his hard work alone.


    And Izanami, simr to him, didn''t give up on anyone or anything just because of the difficulty it had. She, like a researcher, researched many fields to improve herself. She researched wood style and made wood style from scratch. She wanted to create the unique fire of the two tails and she did just that. Bybining different chakra natures with fire chakra she achieved her goal. And the blue fire is just one of her creations.


    Bybining a great amount of fire and lightning chakra blue mes were made. And by adding yin chakra into that mix you could make mes simr to Amatarasu. Also if you double the fire chakra volume andpress it you could create mes that are simr to the sun.


    One of Izanami''s research projects was time. In the Naruto world there are only a few instances where time ninjutsu or artifacts are used but in all of those instances they are mentioned to be quite overpowered.


    So to research this Izanami observed how the Dragon Vain in Roran worked. And to her surprise she found out that the chakra gathered there belongs to nonother than the itself. Furthermore the chakra there is not something just anyone could manipte as it contained the will of the .


    As she continued her research Izanami finally came to two conclusions. One Time isw governed by the itself. So to use any ninjutsu that uses time needs to pay a huge price. As the itself is governing thisw you must prepare an equivalent exchange.


    Two the timew cannot be directly tampered by any being unless it is a. This meant that even her father can¡¯t directly interfere or manipte time as it is impossible. And even when one is interfering with time they are essentially just using the world as a middleman .


    From this, Izanami had an interesting hypothesis. The time-traveling artifact that the ¨­tsutsuki n possesses might actually be a former''s will contained within an artifact. This could exin its ability to traverse timelines, as it canmunicate with the wills of others.


    This also rifies why the energy consumption when using that artifact is rtively smallpared to the immense energy and sacrifices needed for time ninjutsu. It''s akin to shopping in a supermarket with a membership card that grants a 45% discount on every transaction while others have to pay the full price.


    At first Izanami was a bit down when she realised she couldn¡¯t directly manipte the timew as she wasn¡¯t a. And just when she was about to head back home she suddenly realised a small detail of her second wish.


    Her second wish was to have a body that is able to manipte any energy. Initially she thought this would allow her to use natural energy. But what if this also applies tows.


    Normally you wouldn¡¯t be able to answer this question as you have to try it yourself. But that problem was solved by her third wish. Her third wish was to have knowledge of all the anime worlds.


    Contrary to what she thought at first , this wish only allows her to search for the knowledge she wants. Think of it as a search browser where you can search and learn everything. So the only limitation she has is her imagination and eagerness. If she never thought of a subject she wouldn¡¯t be able to get the necessary knowledge.


    With a bit of excitement Izanami searched for the necessary knowledge. And after days of searching she finally reached a conclusion.


    In the tensura worldws can be manipted with Ultimate skills. And to use ultimate skills you would need a huge amount of magicules.


    So using this as a reference Izanami maniptes the Dragon Vain¡¯s chakra and familiarises herself with it. After she got the hang of it she tried to tap into the Timew. With a few weeks of hard work she managed to familiarise herself with how to manipte the Time Law.


    After that she tried to use her own chakra to do the process instead of using the Dragon Vain. Although it was very hard she gradually began to get the hang of it. And after another decade of practice and hard work she could use time ninjutsu like it was any other ninjutsu.


    ¡° Time release: Suspended World ¡°


    As izanami¡¯s words fell, time began to stop. The clouds, birds and even humans stopped their movements as if they were frozen in ce. And in this frozen world only two people were able to move.


    ¡° It¡¯s been quite some time Kiyomi , i wonder if you still remember me ¡° Izanami said as she walked towards Kiyomi with a small smile.


    Kiyomi narrowed her eyes. Although she could feel a bit of familiarity with this person she wasn¡¯t sure. But she knew one thing: this person is dangerous. So she didn¡¯t reply and just readied her weapons.


    Seeing her like that, Izanami froze for a second. Then she smiled wryly and said, ¡° right you have never seen me in this form huh. Well not surprising since I have changed a bit too much for anyone to recognise me at first nce. And Indra was never one to keep our childhood photos. ¡°


    Saying so, Izanami began to undo her transformation. She usually stays in her childlike form due to not wanting to be leered at by men and women left and right. She is that beautiful after all.


    Her body glowed as her height began to increase. Her child-like body slowly began to transform from a child into an adult. After the light subsided Izanami¡¯s full beauty was fully disyed to the world once again.


    ¡°Would this wake up your memory, my dear niece?¡± Izanami said in a melodious voice that would captivate any being.


    Seeing the familiar figure, Kiyomi had a shocked expression. And soon her eyes watered as she ran towards Izanami and hugged her. While sobbing she muttered, ¡° Aunt Izanami ¡°


    Izanamiforted her niece and began to stroke her head. She smiled gently and said, ¡° It¡¯s good to see you again too, little Kiyomi. ¡°


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 50

    Chapter 50


    After a few minutes Kiyomi broke the hug. She felt a little embarrassed at herself for behaving like that earlier. As someone who lived a fulfilling life in her previous life, her behaviour could be said to be too childish. But she couldn¡¯t help herself. Meeting someone so dear after so many years made her a bit emotional.


    ¡° So have you calmed down enough? ¡° Izanami asked after seeing Kiyomi calming down.


    Kiyomi nodded as she looked at her aunt with a bit of suspicion. Earlier she didn''t think that much about it but now that she is taking a good look at her. Her aunt didn¡¯t seem to be in the same situation as her.


    Her chakra signature , body structure or even her appearance nothing has changed at all. It was like she had inhabited her original body. And that is quite impossible after all. Even for a half Otsutsuki living for many centuries isn¡¯t possible even with the help of natural energy.


    ¡°Not that I mind but how are you still alive? Even grandpa died when he was close to 150 ¡°Kiyomi asked in a bit of bewilderment. ¡° And what happened to your hair, why is it all ck now? ¡° She said, looking at Izanami¡¯s hair.


    The once silvery hair is now almost ck. If it was not for the asional silver strands, Kiyomi would have thought she might have dyed her hair like that.


    Izanami touched her hair and said with a bit of mncholy ¡° Oh this well it is a long story. But for now let¡¯s leave it at that. More importantly take this ¡° She said she bought a ne from her Kimono sleeve.


    It was a ne that is shaped with a cross and two angel wings. There is a red ruby on the middle of the cross that makes it more mysterious.


    Kiyomi, taking the ne, looked at Izanami with a questioning gaze. Although this ne has some seals in ce it isn¡¯t something too interesting.


    Izanami then exined, ¡° This ne is like an Id. When you go to any shop I own, show them this. This would inform them that you are part of my family. So if you run into a pinch you could utilize the forces I control without any limitation.


    This would also allow you to arrange a meeting with me without anyone knowing. Use it tomorrow for our talk. ¡°


    Kiyomi nodded as held the ne tightly. Although she didn''t know what kind of resources her aunt has but knowing her she might have even have a hidden vige under her. But she is still curious about something.


    ¡° But why don¡¯t we have the talk now. Why wait for it till tomorrow. ¡° She asked in puzzlement. Since time has stopped, isn''t it very suitable to have their talk?


    The answer to her question came with a flick of her forehead. Kiyomi held her head in pain as she threw Izanami an annoyed gaze. ¡°Why did you do that ¡° She asked in a bit of annoyance.


    Izanami sighed as she said, ¡° it seems you are still as clueless as ever. Girl, do you even realise how much energy one needed to stop time. Especially when the world''s will is ring at me. ¡°


    ¡° Hehehe I forgot about that, ¡° Kiyomi said with her tongue sticking out.


    Izanami sighed again. She forgot about how clueless Kiyomi could be. Sometimes she wondered whether she is Ashura¡¯s daughter as her behaviour is quite simr to him. Indra was never like this.


    ¡° Well whatever, juste to meet me tomorrow. We could celebrate our reunion in peace. Oh and before I forget, don''t worry about being secretive when you leave the n. Just act normal when you reach the ce. ¡° Izanami warned as she began to change back to her child-like form.


    After everything is set up as it was supposed to she undid her Justu making time flow again. After that she acted as if the previous conversation didn''t happen at all and brought Naruto out of the Uchiha n.


    Truth be told, she was a bit exhausted after stopping time. Although she could manipte the Timew as she pleases it stilles at a cost. And that is being observed by the World¡¯s will. The world doesn¡¯t like anyone messing with its stuff.


    But she was really out of options there. She couldn¡¯t really bring Kiyomi into a Genjutsu. Things could go horribly wrong .Especially when a Genjutsu specialist was nearby. And what if Kiyomi didn¡¯t take the invitation and tries to fight her. Fugaku, despite having signed the alliance, wouldn''t care much about it as he would fight her.


    And the strongest amongst them all Mikoto would also interfere. Yes, the strongest amongst them is Mikoto, not Fugaku. This was something Izanami found out after observing the whole Uchiha n.


    In the Uchiha n there is a special division that is hidden even amongst elders. And that division is like a special force that protects the n from hidden dangers. And from what izanami found out their leader is none other than Mikoto the strongest kunoichi and the strongest Genjutsu user of the Uchiha n.


    ¡® well this is somewhat of an expected result. How could Madara¡¯s descendant be weak? ¡® Izanami thought with a chuckle.


    Yes, Mikoto Uchiha is the granddaughter of Madara Uchiha, the famous Ghost of the Uchiha. Madara was the n leader before Konoha was founded. And in the warring periods the ns followed the main family like how the nobles would follow the royal family. So it was tradition that the n leader must bear an heir. And Madara was no exception.


    It¡¯s just thatpared to the Grand wedding, Hashirama and Mito took his was quite simple. But even so Madara was like a celebrity so how did his marriage life was hidden from everyone. Well izanami may have helped a little. Since she knew Madara would be an enemy of the world she provided protection to his children and wife . And honestly that was the least she could do at that time.


    But never did she in her wildest dreams did she imagine Mikoto being Madara¡¯s granddaughter. But thinking about this way it made sense.


    Fugaku, despite being the n leader, only specialises in fire release and taijutsu. But Itachi specialises in Kenjutsu and Genjutsu. So the only conclusion is that tachi inherited his talents from his mother.


    ¡° Did you have fun Naruto ¡° Izanami asked Naruto.


    Naruto excitedly nodded his head and answered, ¡° yeah it was awesome . Although that smelly Sasuke is annoying, I had fun. Oh big sis Kiyomi taught us how to harness chakra and aunty Mikoto gave us some tasty snacks ¡°


    ¡° Oh that¡¯s great. I¡¯m d you had fun there. Oh I know why don¡¯t we invite them to our house in the future. I¡¯m sure they would be more than happy toe by ¡° Izanami said as she ruffled Naruto¡¯s hair.


    ¡°Really you would do that? ¡° Naruto asked with his eyes shining.


    Izanami nodded and said proudly, ¡° Hmm you bet I¡¯d do that. After all it is your request after all. How could I say no to you ¡°


    ¡° Yaaaay big sis Izanami you are the best ¡° Naruto said as he jumped in joy.


    Izanami smiled gently as she looked at Naruto¡¯s behaviour. Although he didn¡¯t realise it himself he is now acting like a normal kid his age. His reserveness had vanished. This is what Izanami wanted to see.


    A child should be happy under an adult''s care and not think too deeply about anything.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 51

    Chapter 51


    It was quitete when both Naruto and Izanami came back home. They saw that they were thest to arrive. Dinner was taken care of by Nanami and with Shizune helping her. As for Tsunade, she was drinking with Shisui who had a troubled look.


    It''s not like Shisui hasn''t had a drink before. In fact he may have drunk a lot to relieve himself from the pressure he had to face from both the n and the vige. But even then he couldn''t be a match to Tsunade who only knows how to get drunk.


    Had it not been for Nanami asking him to let Shizune take a break he would have already feld this room.


    But fortunately his saviour has arrived. With one look Izanami used a bit of her Conqueror''s haki to intermediate Tsunade.


    Tsunade who was drunk and was goofing around immediately sprung into action. Her drunkenness disappeared as she took a fighting stance. Her eyes survaid the surroundings with a cautious look.


    ¡° Don''t set a bad example in front of the kids Tsunade¡± her eyes went to Izanami who spoke.


    Despite Tsunade wanting to refute Izanami¡¯s words she wisely kept her silence. Izanami''s eyes were very serious. If she did this again she will get punished. And Tsunade didn''t want to find what kind of punishment she would face when that happens.


    Shortly after, Nanami arrived with Shizune in tow with pots filled with food. They ced the food on the table and announced, ¡° Dinner''s ready¡±


    Everyone gathered towards the dining room to eat. After they all sat down Izanami said, ¡° itadakimasu ¡°. Afterwards everyone also joined as they started eating.


    As soon as they took a bite they all eximed, ¡° Delicious¡± .


    ¡° Hmm it seems like you have improved your cooking skills again Nanami ¡° Izanami praised as she relished her food. In her long life something she was never bored of was eating tasty food.


    ¡°Thank you for the praise Matriarch ¡° Nanami said humbly but Izanami who knew her better than anyone knew that she was very excited.


    Izanami shook her head with a helpless smile. Although Nanami looked very strict and cold, she is inwardly like a small child who liked praise. And cooking is the hobby she liked the most so she is very happy to hear any praises about her cooking.


    After dinner everyone gotfy in the living room. Since it was still a bit early to go to bed they decided to enjoy themselves by talking about how their day went by. And ofcourse it was Naruto who was doing the talking as he was excitedly describing the things that happened at the Uchiha n.


    Hearing this, Shisui had aplicated expression. And this was especially shown when he heard about Naruto mentioning Izanami¡¯s way of taming a Uchiha n member. Although he wanted to say that is wrong but deep down somewhere in his mind he knew it was correct.


    While they were chatting Izanami suddenly said, ¡° Oh right I forgot about that ¡°. She then turned to Naruto and said, ¡° Naruto, would youe here for a second. ¡°


    Naruto, hearing her call him, got up and went near Izanami with a curious expression. When he was near her she said, ¡° Well would please take out that ne for a second. ¡°


    Naruto nodded although still puzzled as to what she was doing. He didn''t know when but this ne was always with him. But even so it isn''t anything special.


    But what happened next blew Naruto''s mind. As soon as he took out the cross and angel winged ne Izanami pointed her finger at the red gem in the middle. Her hand glowed a little as a small beam of light went towards the gem from her hand.


    As soon as the light touched the ne it glowed as numerous seals began to unravel itself. Izanami swiped her hand and the seals began to glow again. And after she did some adjustments with her finger the seals once again went back to the ne.


    Naruto looked at the ne and asked in surprise. He then asked excitedly, ¡° Hey hey big sister did you see that, the ne glowed and some cool symbols came out and they sparkled and¡­.. ¡°


    As Naruto began to excitedly describe everything Izanami stopped him before he could go too far, ¡° Now now Naruto as much as I would like to hear you describe everything you forgot about something, You forgot to ask me what this ne does. ¡°


    ¡° Oh right , hehehe I forgot about it Dattebayo. ¡° Naruto awkwardly said as he scratched his head.


    ¡° this kid ¡° izanami sighed at how simple minded Naruto is. Hopefully his parents may change his thinking process.


    ¡° You see this ne is something like an Id. If you go to any shop that has this symbol on their sign boards you can buy anything from there free of charge. And it so happened that The Ichiraku Ramen shop has this symbol on their sign board. So you get what I mean right? ¡° Izanami asked with a wide smile.


    ¡° It means I can eat Ramen as much as I want ¡° Naruto said excitedly with his eyes shining like stars.


    ¡°Yep you got it, but do make sure to eat with us every three meals. Always eating Ramen is not healthy . You got that mister ¡° Izanami said sternly.


    ¡° Yes mam, your orders are mymand dattebayo, ¡° Naruto said as he saluted.


    Izanami chuckled at Naruto''s behaviour. She then ruffled his head and said, ¡° Now go to bed. You have a great day ahead. ¡°


    Naruto then ran towards his room with a wide smile, He couldn¡¯t wait for it to be morning.


    After Naruto went to his room a hush silence enveloped the living room. When Izanami called Naruto and unlocked the mechanism in his ne everybody¡¯s attention was on her. Especially Nanami, Shizune and Tsunade. They all recognised what the ne represents.


    In japan Izanami isw. Everything she does is right . so when she orders someone to go right they should go right without any questions. Normally such a tyrannical rule will live short as the people would rebel against the king to fight for their freedom. But Izanami is an exception to this rule.


    Despite her tyranny, izanami was quite famous amongst her people. And most importantly she was wise and knew what¡¯s right and wrong. That is why no one wanted to rebel against her. No one wanted to say no to a good ruler.


    But despite Izanami¡¯s qualification she was ultimately just one person so there is a need for someone to represent her. And that person is given this ne. This ne contains a bit of Izanmi¡¯s chakra so anyone who has this ne can use her authority to do what she or he desires. And there are numerous seals ced on these nes that even if the ne is stolen they wouldn¡¯t be able to misuse it.


    Since these nes are made personally by her the number of people who had this could be counted in one hand. Currently there are four people who have these nes.


    One being Kaguya as she is the only blood rted family member that is currently alive. The next is Nanami who is like Izanami¡¯s secretary. The third one is Kiyomi who had no idea what she even got. Andstly is Naruto who would only find out about this after a few years.


    So for now he only thinks this is a free ramen coupon he could use everyday.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 52

    Chapter 52


    ¡°Are you sure it is a good idea to give him that much authority, Matriarch? ¡° Nanami asked as she looked at Izanami. Normally she wouldn¡¯t question Izanami¡¯s decisions but she couldn¡¯t help it this time. You could mobilise the entire Japan with that ne. And that much power is given to a 4 year old brat.


    No matter how much you look at it this is definitely a bad decision. So Nanami was puzzled as to why her mother would even do that.


    Hearing her daughter''s question Izanami sighed as she spoke, ¡° well I have several reasons. For once it is for Naruto¡¯s protection. With him having that no hidden vige would be allowed to harm him as the Yokai members would make sure of that. And secondly it is what I promised to give to him after the deal I made with Minato and Kushina. ¡°


    ¡° What deal? ¡° Tsunade asked, puzzled.


    Izanami looked at the moon and answered , ¡° In return for the custody of Naruto I will do my utmost best to give him a stable life where he will have enough protection to evene out of a war unharmed. ¡°


    Tsunade stood up from her seat in shock. Did she hear that right? Coming out of a war without even getting harmed. Is that even possible? In the battlefields status doesn¡¯t matter. What one needs the most is the ability to survive.


    Seeing Tsunade¡¯s doubtful gaze Izanami chuckled and added, ¡° You know unlike the other hidden viges japan has been there for more than 100 years. And if it really came to a war with the other hidden viges Japan would win without any difficulties even when all the hidden vigese together. ¡°


    This is something Izanami is confident in. She has made sure Japan residents while valuing peace still kept up with their training. The strongest fist rules everything so Izanami made sure her ind is one the strong fist side. And with her efforts she made a terrifying vige that would be able to win the Fourth Great Ninja war by itself. Of course that is the premise Madara isn¡¯t on the battlefield.


    Since he is Izanami¡¯s student she made sure to train him for everything. And when she meant everything she meant it literally. No matter what is thrown at him he is able to survive. It could be said that unless it is Hashirama who is serious no one could hold Madara down.


    Tsunade still couldn¡¯t believe such a im. So she looked at Nanami who nodded her head in confirmation. And with that all her doubt was cleared. She finally looked at Izanami and said, ¡° I pity the people who would be your enemy. ¡°


    ¡° Huh ¡° Izanami was puzzled at the sudden statement. Did she say something that Tsunade view her as a monster?. Izanami looked at Nanami for help but her stupid daughter just sipped her teapletely ignoring her mother.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    Naruto woke up suddenly. Looking around he saw that he was not in his new room. And what''s more he seems to be floating on water.


    He looked around with a bit of puzzlement and fear. Did someone kidnap him and throw him in this gloomy space?. His mind rang with these thoughts as he looked at his surroundings to see a way to go back home.


    But everywhere he looked he only found one thing. And that is never ending sewer. Naruto panicked as he found himself stranded in this ce.


    He was about to cry when he heard a rustling sound in one direction. Curiously he walked towards the location that sound wasing from.


    He didn''t know whether it was his imagination but the closer he gets ,the more heavy his body feels.


    When he finally arrived at his destination he saw a massive shrine-like cage. The cage''s doors are secured by a sheet of parchment with "seal" (·â) written on it, behind which is the cage''s lock. The bars of the cage are far enough apart for Naruto to walk between them.


    As Naruto was looking at the cage in wonder he suddenly heard a growling sound. Inside the cage two red lights suddenly appeared. ¡° You sure have a lot of courage to appear before me, brat. ¡° a gruff and rough voice filled with dense killing intent rang out.


    Slowly the red lights which were the person¡¯s eyes came closer to the cage door. When they were very close Naruto was able to see the appearance of the speaker. It is a red-orange coloured kitsune with ck fur around its red eyes that stretch up to its ears, and nine long swiping tails. It also has an upper-body structure of a human,plete with opposable thumbs on its wed hands.


    ¡° Be prepared to die brat ¡° the fox shouted as it tried to decapitate Naruto using one of his ws. The Word here is tried as even when it managed to reach near Naruto it was suddenly blocked by a small hand.


    Well smallpared to giant ws but it was a slender adult¡¯s hand. ¡° I see you are still as hostile to humans as ever Kurama, ¡° Izanami said as she blocked Kurama¡¯s w with her hand.


    Naruto who instinctively closed his eyes when the w was about to arrive opened his eyes when he heard the familiar voice. But what puzzled him was instead of the childlike appearance Izanami had she now looked like a beautiful woman who was in her twenties.


    Unable to recognize her, Naruto asked innocently , ¡° Aunty are you big sis izanami¡¯s mother ? ¡°


    Izanami chuckled at his words. She then shook her head and answered, ¡° No Naruto, I''m still your big sis Izanami. It¡¯s just that I¡¯m in my adult form. ¡°


    Naruto¡¯s eyes shined at her exnation. He then excitedly asked, ¡° Wow that¡¯s so cool. Can I do it too? Big sis Izanami teach me teach me ¡°


    ¡° Now Naruto don¡¯t get too excited. You just learned how to harness chakra yesterday. You need to practise hard if you want to do this trick. And if you train hard I will teach you this technique in the future.¡° Izanami said, making Naruto dete a little bit. But then he cheered up again after hearing thest part.


    While they were having such a lively conversation Kurama snapped back to reality. While it was shocking that a human could stop its ws with just physical strength alone. But more than that it had a way more pressing matter to ask, ¡° How are you still alive big sister Izanami ¡°


    Hearing Kurama¡¯s question izanami gave a V sign and said, ¡° well of course it is because i¡¯m a genius ¡°


    Kurama almost stumbled back when he heard her answer. He forgot that dealing with this person is more troublesome than dealing with Shikaku. As unlike Shikaku who he could subdue with its strength this person is way out of his lead. If he had to guess he would need at least someone near the old man¡¯s level to deal with her.


    ¡° Argg, it''s nice seeing you again, big sister, ¡° Kurama said grumbling. He then asked ¡° So why are you here in this prison? Did youe here to free me ¡°


    Izanami chuckled and answered, ¡° Well Kurama Naruto here is my new adopted family member. So I came here to let him meet his parents while remodelling this ce a bit ¡°


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 53

    Chapter 53


    Silence descended as Kurama heard what Izanami said. Then a low growl escaped his lips as he asked while gritting his teeth, ¡° Tell me big sister why do you favour these humans while ignoring us. Are we not your family? Why haven''t you helped us when we were captured and became tools for these humans to use. Wasn''t you alive back then? Do We truly mean nothing to you?


    Even now you didn''t bother to help me get out of this damn prison. Answer me big sister ¡° Kurama practically screamed as he asked thest question.


    Izanami sighed at Kurama¡¯s outburst. Before she answered Kurama¡¯s question she looked at Naruto with a smile and said, ¡° Naruto be a dear and close your ears will you, what I am about to say is something you must not hear till you are older. ¡°


    Naruto nodded as he covered his ears in fright. During Kurama¡¯s outburst he unintentionally released some of his aura scaring Naruto. This aura could even make a jonin run in fear, much less a small child.


    After Naruto covered his ears Izanami looked at Kurama coldly, In her eyes deep anger and disappointment was evident. ¡° Kurama you sure have some balls to say that to me when you guys screw things yourselves.


    Do you think I abandoned you guys? Then who the hell made those shrines and holynds where you could live in peace. What did you do to them? Just because you guys were bored you ventured outside to bully humans.


    And isn¡¯t that why you were captured in the first ce. You Kurama the big bad fox thought it would be fun to challenge and defeat Madara when you came across him. Centuries you have killed and bullied humans so you thought this one is also like them right. Weak and insignificant that you would be able to crush with your giant paws.


    Why did you think Hashirma was so adamant about capturing all of you? Isn¡¯t it because of your bad reputation amongst humans? If you guys listened to me and stayed at your shrines and controlled your ego you all wouldn¡¯t be captured and enved.


    Do you have anything to say Kurama ¡°


    Kurama was shocked to hear those words. Although he wanted to refuse those words, nothing came out of his mouth. He knew what she said was the truth. It was him who went to battle Madara. As a person who was nicknamed the Shura Kurama wanted to defeat him. Him being a Indra descendant also yed a role in it.


    When they were born Indra and Ashura were fighting their battles with their families. And they as creations of Hagoromo automatically belonged to Ashura¡¯s faction. So in their childhood they had a slight dislike for Indra. And Kurama wanted to punish Madara who is quite simr to Indra. But who would have thought that he would be controlled by Madara without even being able to put up a fight.


    ¡° And besides Kurama why the hell can¡¯t you unseal yourself. Your previous jinchuriki¡¯s are two Uzumaki¡¯s who are the best at sealing. If you bothered to learn you might have gone out of this cage already. ¡° Izanami said with a sigh.


    Unlike the others Kurama had the resources he needed to break free. If he bothered to read and learn from the memories of his hosts he might have already be a seal grandmaster and break out of this seal himself.


    Kurama had no words to say. In fact he felt that he was so stupid to even realise this. As the beings made out of chakra they have the best affinity towards sealing as their chakra control is the best.


    While Kurama was depressed about his life, Izanami came near Naruto again. For thest few minutes Naruto was covering his ears so he didn¡¯t hear the rather weird conversation. Izanami patted his head and said , ¡° Ok Naruto you can remove your hands now. ¡°


    Although Naruto didn¡¯t hear what she said , looking at her smiling face he deduced that it is okay to remove his hands. After he removed his hands he asked , ¡°Big sis where is this ce and who is that big fox ¡°


    ¡°This here is your mindscape Naruto. And that big fox is what you called a tail beast. His name is Kurama by the way. Don¡¯t worry although he acts tough and mighty he is a big softy inside. Say Naruto why don¡¯t you introduce yourself to him ¡° Izanami said as she pointed her finger at Kuruma who isstill brooding.


    ¡° Hey Kurama, it''s nice to meet you, ¡° Naruto excitedly shouted. Since he still didn¡¯t know what a tail beast was and how his suffering is rted to him , he greeted Kurama with enthusiasm .


    Kurama who was brooding suddenly heard that brat addressing with his name. He was instantly furious and wanted to shout at him but with one re from Izanami he shut up. Grumbling, he said, ¡° It¡¯s nice to meet you too, kid. ¡°


    Seeing them getting along so well Izanami said , ¡°well since introductions are over. Let¡¯s do the main reason we came here. But first let¡¯s remodel this ce. ¡°


    With that said Izanami used some of her spiritual energy and took control over Naruto¡¯s mindscape for a moment. She then changed the scenery from a sewer to that of a Japanese shrine. On the side she made Sakura trees bloom while also adding some sunny climate to the sky.


    ¡° That''s better , Now for the final step ¡° Izanami said as she closed her eyes. She exhaled a deep breath as she began to censerate. Her hair began to defy gravity as it began to float. Ripples began to appear in the mindscape as a space crack appeared. From it two white spheres came.


    The spheres then began to turn into two silhouettes . The seal on the cage began to glow as two yellow and red lights went out of it and went inside the two silhouettes. After the chakra entered inside them their bodies gradually began to form and solidify. And in a matter of minutes both Minato and Kushina are shown in their full glory.


    After they solidified their forms Izanami opened her eyes. She smiled and said, ¡° Well it¡¯s nice to meet you again Minato and Kushina ¡°


    ¡° Yes, it has been a while ¡°Minato said with a warm smile. His smile widened as his gazended on Naruto . He looked at Izanami and asked, ¡° That¡¯s him right ¡°


    Izanami nodded her head and said, ¡° yes he is your son Naruto. Come on Naruto go meet your parents ¡° she pushed naruto forward to meet his parents.


    ¡° Naruto NARUTO¡± as soon as her son¡¯s name he dashed towards Naruto at a speed that even left Minato behind. And without any hesitation she hugged him tightly.


    ¡° Naruto do you remember me , It¡¯s me, your motherOh my sweet by how I missed you ¡° Ksuhina said as tears poured from her eyes.


    Naruto was shocked. ¡° You are my Okaasan ¡° he asked with almost reflexively,


    ¡°Yes my sweet Naruto , It¡¯s me your mother ¡° Kushina said as more tears went down her eyes.


    Tears came down Naruto¡¯s eyes as he said, ¡°Okaasan ¡° . That was the final straw as he began to cry. As a small child he wanted his mother¡¯s care and warmth the most. And now he finally got it.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 54

    Chapter 54


    While Kushina and Naruto were having their touching moment Izanami looked at Minato who didn¡¯t go to participate.


    ¡° Don¡¯t you want to join in that? ¡° Izanami said as she pointed to Naruto and Kushina.


    Minato smiled sadly and answered, ¡° I feel I don¡¯t have the right to do that. It was because of my death that Naruto was thrown into such a situation. If i had survived he would have been able to live like a normal kid ¡°


    ¡° So you saw everything huh ¡° Izanami said as she looked at him.


    ¡° Yes in that space I saw everything, Everytime I see those vigers throw stones or try to beat Naruto up I always thought, ¡® Is this the vige I sacrificed my life to protect? Why did they do this to my son? Was everything I did to this vige meaningless? ¡° Minato said as his eyes teared up.


    ¡° Every time I saw my son drinking expired food I felt my soul shatter. ¡° he said as he clenched his fists. ¡° Tell me, is my decision wrong? ¡° he asked Izanami.


    ¡° No it was not. You protected what you thought was your home. It is this vige that broke your trust and ignored your sacrifice. ¡° It was not Izanami who answered Minato. It was Kurama who was listening to the conversation.


    ¡° Kyuubi, ¡° Minato said in a bit of shock. Never in his life did he think the nine tails would sympathise with him.


    Izanami chuckled and answered, ¡°Don¡¯t be too surprised Minato , Kurma despite his animosity towards humans knows humans the best. And this is true for the humans he acknowledges ¡°


    ¡° Big sister, he doesn''t need to know that, '''' Kurama said flusteredly. If it was another person he would have argued back. But he knew doing that would only backfire on him.


    ¡° oh so the Kayuubi has a name huh ¡° Minato was a bit surprised. He didn¡¯t know that. But thinking back at it the tail beasts were never something people knew much about. Even their own Jinchuriki¡¯s didn¡¯t know much about them.


    ¡°Of course we have names. It¡¯s just that we never allow you humans to address us in them, ¡° Kurama said as he scoffed when he heard Manato¡¯s words.


    ¡° No actually both Gy¨±ki and Ch¨­mei actually allowed their Jinchuriki¡¯s to address them in their names ¡° izanami rified.


    ¡° Arrg those two are exceptions. Especially Ch¨­mei, with that guy¡¯s personality I wouldn¡¯t be surprised if he got along with his Jinchuriki in just one day. ¡° Kurama said as he got a headache from thinking of his oddball of a sibling. If Ch¨­mei¡¯s host was not too bad of a person then he would get along with him without any problems.


    ¡° Who are those two again if you don¡¯t mind me asking ? ¡° Minato asked awkwardly. He was hardly able to follow the conversation that is going on here.


    ¡°Oh right, Ch¨­mei is what you call the Seven tails and Gy¨±k is the eight tails. Both of them are quite reasonable so they are very easy to get along with.


    ¡°I see, ¡° Minato said, unable to utter anything more. He felt his world view crash after hearing about this new information.This also made him a bit relieved. When he ced the seal on Naruto he intentionally ced a small gap for Kurama¡¯s chakra to go through. He wished his son could be a perfect Jinchuriki just like Killer B.


    ¡° So anyway, Minato, since you now know the whole truth you should have no trouble agreeing to our deal right ¡° Izanami said as she looked at him.


    ¡° Yes , no matter how much I want to defend the vige treating my son like this too much. So I will do as you say from now on, ¡° Minato said as he sighed.


    ¡° Oh please don''t make it that dramatic. I only wanted you to teach Naruto how to be a Shinobi. While I could strengthen his foundation and teach him the skills , making a Shinobi is not something I could do. That is why I wanted you to do it. ¡° Izanami said as he chuckled.


    This is one of the weaknesses she has. She is never a Shinobi and does not know how to be one. She is a swordmaster and a warrior through and through.


    Even Madara and Hashirama didn''t actually follow the standard Shinobi way. They just went forward and beat up everyone with their strength.


    ¡° Oh right Minato could you please open up this seal while you are at it. Since I''m here this seal is basically useless. ¡° Izanami suddenly said, making Minato look at her with caution.


    Seeing him suddenly vignt, Izanami exined, ¡° Don''t worry, I already promised Naruto''s safety so rest assured. And you must know if I really wanted to crack this seal I could. ¡°


    ¡° Why do you want to remove the seal? If Kurama escapes from his prison Naruto would die. ¡° Minato said, still vignt. He couldn''t just put his son in danger just because of a promise.


    Izanami sighed as she said, ¡°You know Minato you gonna have to trust me on this. ¡°


    Minato looked at her for a few seconds before sighing. ¡° Ok I trust your judgement on this ¡°. He said as he got closer to the seal.


    ¡° Where are you going Minato? ¡° Kushina asked as she came with Naruto towards them. She was holding Naruto¡¯s hand as they walked.


    ¡° I''m about to free the nine tails, ¡° Minato exined to his wife.


    ¡° What is that alright, what if he go out from this space? Wouldn¡¯t Naruto¡¯s life be in danger. ¡° Kushina asked in shock. She couldn¡¯t believe Minato would do such a dangerous thing.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry Kurama won''t do it. I guarantee that. ¡° izanami said as she gave Kurama a look. Kurama nodded, although reluctantly. As much he wanted to go out he wouldn¡¯t disappoint his sister¡¯s trust. Unlike humans they the tail beast keeps their promises.


    ¡° Kurama ¡° Kushina asked as she tilted her head. ¡®Who is Kurama? ¡®she wondered.


    ¡° oh oh I know. Kurama is the big fox there, ¡° Naruto said as he pointed at Kurama.


    ¡° What the nine tails has a name. Hey Kurama why didn¡¯t you tell me you had a name this whole time ¡° Kushina asked in shock then her shock turned into anger as she shouted at Kurama.


    ¡° huh why should I tell you my name? And stop calling my name you red paper you are not worthy of it ¡° Kurama said angrily.


    ¡°Huh what did you say, hey Kurama are you looking for a fight? ¡° Kushina said as her hair began to defy gravity. And like a thug she began to crack her knuckles.


    ¡°Hmp, do you think I¡¯m afraid of you red paper? You should be d this cage is still there or I will show you your ce. ¡° Kurama said as he snorted.


    ¡°Huh now you are asking for a beating. Hey Minato, quickly take down that seal. I''m going to show that fox who is boss, ¡° Kushina said as she red at Kurama.


    Kurama also didn¡¯t shy away as he too red at Kushina. Sparks flew as they both showed their hostility towards each other.


    Minato, seeing this, wondered whether or not to take down the seal. But as soon as that thought flew in his mind both of them suddenly red at him and shouted at the same time, ¡° what are you doing hurry up take this thing down ¡°


    Minato gulped as he hurriedly went to unseal Kurama. He didn¡¯t want to get caught in the crossfire.


    Naruto who went behind Izanami for cover peeked his head asked, ¡°big sis would mom and Kurama hate each other so much ¡°


    Izanami chuckled and answered, ¡°don¡¯t worry Naruto, those two get along too well that¡¯s why they would often fight like this. ¡°


    ¡° I see, ¡° Naruto said, unsure of how that is possible.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 55

    Chapter 55


    As soon as Minato opened the seal gate two red blurs rushed towards each other. One was a red haired woman who had 5 golden chainsing out from her back while the other was a big fox who has nine tails.


    As soon as they met each other they started their Brawl.


    While the duo was duking it out with each other Izanami and the rest watched the fight with interest as they ate some popcorn. Well it was only Izanami who was interested in this as the father and son duo were catching up with each other.


    ¡° Man those get along with each other so well ¡° Izanamimented as she ate another handful of popcorn.


    Minato, hearing her words, twitched his eyes as he thought, ¡® If that is called get along then I wonder what she considered to be the best of buddies ¡®.


    While he was thinking this he heard his wife''s voice ,


    ¡° Is that the best you could do you damn fox? ¡° Kushina said arrogantly as she immobilised Kurama with her chains. She had a condensing smirk as she showed her superiority.


    Kurama red at her with hatred. ¡® Damn Uzumaki ¡® he cursed as he tried his best to escape the Adamantine Chains.


    ¡° Heh face it Kurama you can¡¯t defeat me. ¡° Kushina taunted as she puffed her chest.


    ¡° You little¡± Kurama red at her. In his anger he tried to squash Kushina with his tails.


    This was of course was dodged by Kushina. But due to the sudden movement her hold on Kurama was loosened.Kurama used this chance to break free and make some distance between them.


    And like that both of them started their second round. This went on for a few minutes until Izanami got bored of it. So she just waved her hand and the next moment wood roots came out from the ground and retained both of them in a minute.


    ¡° ¡° ¡° Wood release ¡° ¡° ¡° Three voices said in shock. It was Minato , Kushina and Kurama.


    ¡° Oh please it¡¯s just wood release, nothing too big of a deal, ¡° Izanami said, shrugging her shoulders.


    ¡° Big sis how are you even able to use Wood release. If I remember correctly only Ashura¡¯s reincarnation has the ability to use it. I clearly didn¡¯t remember you being able to use it before. ¡° Kurama asked the question that everyone was curious about.


    ¡° Hmm it¡¯s quite simple actually. All you need is to find out the right chakra amounts and elements and mix them in a suitable ratio. If you get that right then boom. There you have it, Wood release.


    The only reason only Ashura¡¯s descendants were able to use Wood release is because they instinctively know how to do it. ¡° Izanami exined to the clueless crowd. ¡° And besides there are more than one person here in Konoha who could use wood release without being Ashura''s descendant. ¡° Izanami added.


    ¡°What who is that? ¡° Minato asked in shock. When he was the Hokage he didn¡¯t know anyone like that.


    ¡° Well there is this kid called Tenzo from the root. And besides them there is Obito. Both of them have Hashirama cells on them. This allowed them to use wood release while using the cells as a catalyst. Although they couldn¡¯t bepared to Hashirama¡¯s wood release it is quite decent. ¡° Izanami said while nodding her head.


    ¡° Wait, as in Obito Uchiha Minato¡¯s student, isn''t he supposed to be dead? '''' Kushina asked in shock.


    ¡° Nah Madara saved him so he survived that day. But you might as well think of him as a dead person, ¡° Izanami said, making Kushina puzzled and Minato frown. Then his eyes widened as he realised something.


    ¡° Well anyway naruto it¡¯s way past your bedtime. So you should sleep. Tomorrow we will start your training so you need to be in top shape, ¡° Izanami said, making Naruto sad.


    ¡° But big sister can¡¯t I stay here for a bit longer? ¡° he asked hopefully. He wanted to spend some more time with his parents.


    ¡° Don¡¯t worry, tomorrow I will teach you how to enter your mindscape without needing me. That way you cane here anytime you want ¡° Izanami said, making him think about it before nodding in agreement.


    And with a wave of her hand Naruto disappeared from his mindscape. After he was gone Izanami turned to the rest and asked, ¡° Hey since we have nothing to do wanna watch some anime ¡°


    ¡° Anime, what''s that and why are you here? I thought you would also leave with Naruto, ¡° Minato asked with a puzzled expression.


    ¡° Huh why would you even think that, you know, the me here is actually just a remnant of my soul. My originally made me to protect Naruto in case she is busy. So from today on I¡¯m staying with you guys.


    So anyway want to watch some anime. I got a tone of things for you to choose ¡° Izanami said as she materialised wide variety of animes for them to choose.


    ¡°Ohh let¡¯s watch this ¡° Kushina said as she selected one particr anime.


    ¡° Excellent choice. Well then people take a seat this one is going to blow your mind ¡° Izanami said as she snapped her fingers.


    A huge screen appeared in front of them and the lights began to die down. And with everyone seated the anime about a boy who wanted to be the pirate king which is also known as One piece began.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    The next day Naruto woke up with an excited smile. He couldn¡¯t help it. Today was the day he was going to train his chakra. And furthermore his big sister promised him to teach him how to go to that ce so he can meet with his parents anytime he wants.


    When Naruto came downstairs with such an excited expression the other¡¯s couldn¡¯t help but crack a smile. Naruto is like a bundle of joy that makes other¡¯s involuntarily cheer up.


    Tsunade seeing Naruto like this coldn¡¯t help but ask, ¡° Hey brat are you that excited to train ¡±


    Naruto nodded excitedly ¡° Mmm you bet I do. I¡¯m gonna train really hard ¡°


    ¡° hahaha I sure hope you can keep that spirit after today ¡° Tsunade said sarcastically. She heard how much of a torture Izanami¡¯s training could be. It was said inly in the diary.


    ¡° Well you might have to wait for your training Naruto ¡° Nanami said as she looked in a specific direction.


    Soon a knock came and a voice was heard, ¡° Excuse me could I speak to Miss Izanami , Hokage sama has asked for her presence in his office. ¡°


    Hearing those words everyone in the room frowned. ¡® What did the Third Hokage want this time ¡® the grown ups thought.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 56

    Chapter 56


    ¡° So what do you want? ¡° Izanami asked Hiruzen after she came to his office. She was a bit irritated that Hiruzen called for her early this morning. No one liked to be disturbed right in the morning after all. That would leave a bad taste in their mouths for the rest of the day.


    ¡° Why did you take the Nine tails Jinchuriki near the police station and even more into the Uchiha n? ¡° It was not Hiruzen who answered her. It was everyone¡¯s good old Danzo with his usual gloomy voice.


    ¡° And why should I answer you? ¡° Izanami asked as she gave Danzo a condescending look. Did this man never understand his ce? Does he have a fetish to look for trouble?


    ¡° YOU how dare you talk to me like that. I am the Hokage Advisor and one of the Konoha Vige elders. ¡° Danzo roared like a kid throwing a tantrum. He stillcks the experience to deal with people who don¡¯t even take him as a human being.


    ¡°And why should I care? And as far I know advisors don¡¯t really get the authority to speak until he is asked to. And as for your vige elder position I could care less about that. And look, even those two know their ce. And they are also called vige elders. ¡° Izanami said, pointing to the other two elders who are sitting at the back.


    Homura and Koharu both red at izanami. Even a small child could understand that the only reason they didn¡¯t speak was they trusted Danzo to handle this situation.


    Apart from Hiruzen only Danzo has the right to speak in Konoha¡¯s defence. This is how things were for thest few decades so everyone was used to it.


    ¡° You- You ¡° Danzo was almost about to lose it. No one has ever disrespected him like this. Who is he?. He is Danzo Shimura, the darkness of Konoha and the advisor of the Third Hokage. His name is known even to civilians who know nothing about ninjas. And this girl just said he is a nobody.


    ¡® I''m gonna kill this brat ¡® Danzo thought as a cold murderous light shed in eyes. He was just about to signal his root ninjas to capture her here and bring her to his base to torture her thorougly. He didn¡¯t even care if Hiruzen and the rest saw what he was about to do. As long as he produces satisfactory results Hiruzen would be more than d to look the other way.


    ¡® Oh is he finally gonna start it ¡® Izanami thought with azy expression. She could see that Danzo was almost on the verge of losing his patience. If he makes a move now her job will be way easier.


    She has more than one way for the four idiots to lose their prestige in an instant. And for her n to work Danzo needs to make a move. He is the easiest pawn to destroy the elder council.


    And just as Danzo and Izanami were about to have a showdown a voice suddenly interjected, ¡° Enough Danzo we are still in a meeting ¡° Hiruzen said as he fully released his aura.


    Although he spoke to Danzo, his eyes never left Izanami. He was using his aura to pressure Izanami to behave and know her ce.


    ¡° Yeah, you should listen to your Hokage. No one wants to hear a disabled old man bark, ¡° Izanami said, totally ignoring Hiruzen¡¯s pressure. To her this kind of pressure is like a spring breeze. Even Madara had way greater pressure when he was in his teens.


    Hiruzen narrowed his eyes as a cold light shed through them. He was beginning to lose patience too. Danzo was his teammate and most importantly his brother in arms so even he didn¡¯t like it when someone is disrespecting Danzo this much.


    But as a skilled politician he didn¡¯t want to make an obvious move. If he attacks Izanami or does any harm to her his reputation as well as Konoha¡¯s reputation will go down the drain. He would be the public enemy as no one would side with an old man who attacked a little girl who is also the representative of the World Bank.


    ¡° Lady Izanami, you must give us an exnation on why you took Naruto the nine tails Jinchuriki to the Uchiha n ¡° Hiruzen asked as he tried to change the subject. He would first need to know why Naruto is taken into the Uchiha n before deciding Izanami¡¯s fate.


    ¡° didn¡¯t I say that I was going to the Uchiha n to discuss the debt the vige owes. ¡° Izanami said as she gave Hiruzen azy smile.


    ¡° But why would you need to take the nine tails into that n? This and that has no connection ¡° Hiruzen asked, not getting the point.


    ¡°Isn¡¯t it simple? I as Naruto¡¯s guardian cannot simply let him be trapped in a house. And I simply can¡¯t let him wander around the vige when everyone is quite eager to beat him up. So as a respectable guardian I simply took him with me ¡° Izanami said as she unfolded her fan to hide her smirk.


    Her words made Hiruzen speechless. For some reason he felt that Izanami was scolding him.


    ¡°That simply doesn¡¯t mean you could take nine tails to the Uchiha n. What if they tried to control the nine tails again. ¡° While Hiruzen was contemting his next words Danzo interjected again.


    Unlike Hiruzen who wanted to have his image clean as possible Danzo didn¡¯t have any issues. He was already known as a ruthless and radical person amongst the higher ups after all. The only reason his personality is not widely spread amongst the general poption is because he has Hiruzen¡¯s support and the Root.


    ¡° You guys sure have an interesting imagination. If the Uchiha n could control the tail beast then why would they not dominate the whole shinobi world. Just because one could do it does not mean everyone could do it.


    Take your esteemed Hokage for example. He is known for his five nature transformations and made a technique that is not inferior to bloodlines techniques. And he is also from the Sarutobi n. But does anyone other than him have such skills in the Sarutobi n? Even his descendants did not have this, much less his disciples.


    So how could you expect the whole Uchiha n to have such power. Even so to attack their own vige they founded. That¡¯s just absurd. ¡° Izanami shaking her head.


    What she told was the truth that everyone wanted to forget. Konoha was founded by Uchiha and Senju. So why did the Uchiha as one of its founders wanted to rebel against the same vige they founded.


    There is only one exnation: they were forced to a corner. And in Konoha the only thing that didn¡¯t change was the Hokage and his advisors.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 57

    Chapter 57


    Hiruzen clenched his fists as he tried his best to calm down. What Izanami said was a sour subject he wished to forget. Despite being called as the ¡®Professor ¡® he was still unable to pass down his special ninjutsu to anyone. Even his favourite student Orochimaru wasn¡¯t able to grasp the technique. And he was the most talented one Hiruzen came across.


    The room descended into silence. No one wanted to refute as that would be like stepping on andmine.


    ¡° Since you guys are holding your silence I take this discussion is over. Oh and in the future don''t bother to ?all me for something trivial like this. That is unless you guys somehow want to pay off at least half of your debts. ¡° Izanami said disdainfully as she got up to leave.


    ¡° Wait where do you think you are going, we are still not done ¡° Danzo roared as he got up in furry.


    ¡° Oh we are done, and it will be this way unless you decided to pay all the debt you owe us ¡° Izanami said sarcastically as she continued her walk.


    ¡° You.. Get her, ¡° Danzo snapped as he heard her words. The look she gave him was that when someone was looking at a fool. That was thest straw he needed to give into his anger. He is Danzo Shimura. No one could live after humiliating him like this.


    At Danzo¡¯s words three Root ninjas surrounded Izanami. They all had cold, murderous looks in their eyes as they looked at Izanami.


    Izanami eyed them without any fear and asked in a cold voice, ¡° hey Hiruzen you should control your dogs or I will take this as a deration of war against the World Bank. This is your first andst warning ¡°


    Hiruzen didn¡¯t say anything. He only had a cold expression that made everything clear. He approves of what Danzo is doing.


    The other elders also didn¡¯t say anything. They too approve of what Danzo is doing. How dare a mere civilian talk back to them like that.


    Seeing everyone backing his decision Danzo felt even more confident. Earlier he only acted due to his anger. But with everyone one his side he decided to get even more bolder.


    He would first torture this brat and make her one of his root agents. That way he could slowly take control of the World Bank. When everything in his control he could be Hokage without anypetition.


    ¡° Capture her and bring her to my base. She is a threat to Konoha, ¡° Danzo said with a wicked smile as he ordered his men. He needed to make her his pawn before Hiruzen gets any funny ideas.


    The three Root ninjas obeyed Danzo¡¯s orders and rushed towards Izanami immediately.


    Looking at her assants Izanami had a cold smile as she said, ¡° Since this is your choice let me make my move ¡° She then snapped her fingers and in an instant the door to the office was cut open.


    Tengen with his twin swords readied came inside in a sh. With movements that are barely visible he killed the three Root ninjas in an instant.


    Danzo and Hiruzen barely managed to react as they saw Tengen massacre the Root ninjas. As for the other elders their reactions were even slower.


    Hiruzen and Danzo both released their killing intent as they readied for battle. They need to capture Izanami no matter the cost. If not, the consequences would be unimaginable. Thankfully they only need to wait for a minute for the Anbu toe as backup.


    Izanami, who knew what these geezers are thinking, gave them a cold smile. While she could massacre every ninja they threw at her but she didn¡¯t need to do that. Violence is not always the answer after all.


    She snapped her hands again and a holographic image appeared in the sky of the Fire country. Then a video began to y depicting the exact dialogue izanami had with them in thest few minutes . Of course she edited a few things so it will be more epic.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    Countless people saw a screen appear in the sky . Then they saw something they never expected. Danzo Shimura, the advisor of the third Hokage attacking the representative of the World Bank.


    In the capital of the Fire country inside the pce the Daimyo of the fire country also saw this happening. His expression turned pale. He then shouted, ¡° Quickly send someone to Konoha immediately. Nothing should happen to the representative of the World Bank. ¡°


    The attendant quickly dashed away. He has never seen his master this scared. His usual calmness is long gone.


    After the attendant left The fire, Daimyo walked back and forth. He had a restless expression as he bit his finger nails


    He knew how fearsome the World Bank could be. Unlike those stupid ninjas who only know how to fight, the World Bank holds the absolute authority over the whole economy. This is why no Daimyo dared to antagonise them.


    Most of their countries run on the loans the World Bank lends them. And if the money flow is stopped they would go bankrupt in a matter of days.


    ¡® Is that Hriuzen retarded to pick a fight with The World Bank? Who does he think he is? And that Danzo does have shit for brains. ¡® The Daimyo thought with a dark expression.


    The only reason he didn¡¯t pressure Hiruzen to select another Hokage is because he was quite suitable. But it seems old age might have got to him since he is doing something so foolish.


    ¡® It seems I have to go there personally to make sure everything is solved peacefully. Or else I would have make sure Konoha doesn¡¯t involve the Fire country when it inevitably crumbles. ¡® The Daimyo thought. As the sole bank that was there for centuries who knew what kinds of forces they have.


    ¡° Get someone to prepare the carriage. I''m going to Konoha this instant. ¡° The Fire Daimyo shouted as he went outside the room.


    While the Daimyo was preparing to head towards Konoha, Konoha itself was chaotic. When the huge screen suddenly appeared in the sky many were rmed. Ninjas swiftly took battle stances ready for battle.


    But unexpectedly they all saw one of the Konoha elders try to kill the representative of the World Bank. Although many might have not know about Izanami they all knew what the World Bank is.


    It is the Bank that helped mostmon people to earn a living by giving them loans. And furthermore they have a great reputation of being the best Bank that always try to help their sincere customers.


    So civilians families who only managed to earn a living due to that kindness began to make amotion. The Anbu ninjas didn¡¯t know what to do when so many civilians began to join themotion. Even some of them are indebted for the World Bank for the loans they give out.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 58

    Chapter 58


    ¡® Fuuuuck ¡® Hiruzen cursed inside his head as he looked at the vige below from the window. Even from here he could see the growingmotion outside. He didn¡¯t dare to make any more rash moves because he could still see the huge screen broadcasting everything that was happening in his office.


    One wrong move and he would be the sinner of the whole vige. Everything he worked hard for would be gone down the drain.


    ¡° What are you waiting for ? kill anyone who interferes with my orders !. ¡° While Hiruzen was freaking out, Danzo''s cold voice vibrated in the room. His anger only grew even more when he realised his men were killed off.


    At his words more Root Ninjas suddenly appeared and dashed towards Izanami. This made even Tengen freeze for a few seconds. Did Danzo finally lose it. Did he not care about the consequences after everyone saw what he was about to do?


    As much as Tengen wanted answers to those questions he had no time to spare. Unlike earlier when he was able to catch his opponents off guard he now has to protect Izanami from multiple opponents. While he may be the fastest he stillcked experience to fully unleash his potential so he is a bit worried.


    But his worries vanishedpletely when he saw the smile on Izanami¡¯s face. She had a look that screamed , ¡® It is all going ording to n ¡® . And just like he expected he didn¡¯t have to make a move. More ninjas suddenly came inside the room and apprehended them.


    ¡° Hiruzen, what are you doing? ¡° Danzo roared as he saw his men being stopped by Anbu ninjas. He red at Hiruzen demanding answers.


    ¡° Yeah Hiruzen, what are you doing ? Why is Danzo still unpunished when he dared to attack me ? Do you think the World Bank is an easy target for Konoha to bully? ¡° Izanami said in her arrogant voice.


    Before Danzo could say anything Hiruzen directly cut in, ¡° Lady Izanami I am terribly sorry ..¡±


    ¡° If you are sorry then prove it. Kill the culprit in front of you like you are supposed to ¡° Izanami cut him off mid sentence before he could say anything else.


    Hiruzen choked as he heard those words. He wanted tosh at this girl for even saying that. Who does she think for her to order him to kill his friend and partner. He would never agree to that.


    ¡° What, you can¡¯t do that? Then why do you even bother trying to fake an apology? If that dog can attack me even when he is in your presence, who knows what he would do in future. Wait, don''t tell me you want to protect him because he is the only person who would do all your dirty work. ¡° Izanami said as she was fortified. Her acting skills were so superb that she even fooled the Anbu ninjas.


    ¡° You know what screw this , since you aren¡¯t going to give me a sincere apology, we are going to go to war. The World Bank will stop supporting every single business we fund in Konoha and will collect thest bit of money anyone in Konoha owes to the world.


    And if Konoha doesn¡¯t give us the money they owe we willmision the other ninja viges to raise this vige to the ground. We will also abandon every World Bank branch we have in Konoha. And if the daimyo didn¡¯t give us a reasonable exnation we will withdraw from the Fire country as well.


    I don¡¯t believe the Daimyo who supports such a ninja vige which has such an irresponsible Hokage is trustworthy anymore, ¡° Izanami said, shocking everyone. And after that she walked out of the room with Tengen.


    Her words Homura who was incharge of finances pale in fright, Most of the major businesses that are in Konoha are funded by the World Bank¡¯s loans. If they stop giving these loans then most businesses would go bankrupt immediately. What¡¯s more they woulde to collect every single bit of money they owe to the World Bank.


    You must know that most ninjas when they are injured or hospitalised has to take loans to pay for their medical bills. With the scarcity of medical ninjas the prices are astronomical. And most of the people who usually gets hospitalised are the genins and chunins who don¡¯t earn much from doing missions.


    ¡® we may have screwed up ¡® he thought with a grave expression.


    His thoughts weren¡¯t wrong as when the Daimyo who was preparing to head to Konoha heard Izanami¡¯s words he almost had a heart attack. If the World Bank truly abandons the Fire country then he would truly go bankrupt.


    ¡° hey speed up we must go to Konoha as quickly as possible ¡° He shouted at his men as he bit his finger nails in anxiety. He wished he was there to give Hiruzen a good beating for screwing things this much.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    In Konoha hearing Izanami¡¯s deration many people, ninjas and civilians alike felt as though they were suddenly electrocuted. Then as though a switch was flipped a hugemotion broke out.


    They knew they had no way to pay off their debts suddenly. Especially for ninjas who rarely have a stable ie.


    ¡° It¡¯s over my life, it''s over ¡° cried one civilian as he knelt on the ground. He is just a small store owner who could barely pay off his bills. The only reason he was able to start his business was because of the money the World Bank lent him.


    The World Bank is the best ce that helps poor people like him to make a living. Even when they are here to collect payments the World Bank never acts high and mighty like loan sharks. If one was unable to pay with Ryo they would temporarily allow them to pay with their products.


    There is even a saying that if a person is unable to pay the World Bank he or she should just stop doing business. The World Bank is known to be the fairest ce as they would adjust the instalment fee to match the monthly earning. So unless someone is stupid they won¡¯t have to go through much trouble when paying the loans.


    ¡° Curse that bastard who attacked the World Bank. Why the hell did the Third Hokage keep such a cruel person beside him ? if he was dead then we won¡¯t be caught in this mess ¡° He couldn¡¯t help butment.


    He wasn¡¯t the only person who thought this. Many others also had the same thought. In the viewing screen they all saw how Danzo attacked Izanami just because he was angry. His intention of killing Izanami was too obvious.


    If the third Hokage epted Izanami¡¯s demand and punished Danzo for his actions then everyone would be happy.


    These thoughts kept pouring on the people¡¯s mind as they thought of ways to pay off their debts. They didn¡¯t think for a moment about not paying their debts. As Izanami said the World Bank would very much issue other ninja viges missions to collect the money. They had the capital to do such a thing.


    And since no one wanted to be the target of the World Bank¡¯s revenge n they could only obediently find some properties for them to sell and cover the loan payments. And of course they cursed Danzo every five minutes to alleviate a little bit of their resentment.


    If Danzo was here they would personally kill him so that the World Bank would not go to war with Konoha.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 59

    Chapter 59


    After putting up that little show, Izanami came home in a hurry. She wasted enough time with the Third Hokage. She still needed to train Naruto. And since she didn¡¯t want to be disturbed on her way she deployed her domain to hide herself from the despairing crowd.


    Izanami wasn¡¯t worried her n would backfire on her. Prior to her deration she gave the orders to the Yokai squad to spread some rumours about Danzo¡¯s bad behaviour so he would be the true bad guy.


    When it came to changing public opinion no one could challenge her. As someone who lived for centuries she knew how to manipte crowds with just a few words. And she is sure that even ck Zetsu could do that due to how much experience he has in that particr subject.


    With the help of her domain she and Tengen home in no time. But before she could say anything she was pulled to the side by Tsunade.


    ¡° Hey Tsunade, I didn''t think you would miss me this much. ¡° Izanami said as she looked at Tsunade with a chuckle. Currently she is being held by Tsunade and is pushed into a corner. If one didn¡¯t know any better they would think Tsunade is bullying Izanami.


    Tsunade wasn¡¯t amused by Izanami¡¯s jokes. She looked at Izanami seriously and asked , ¡° What were you thinking Izanami.? Why the hell did you broadcast that into the whole Konoha? Do you want to flip the vige upside down? ¡°


    ¡° Yes actually ¡° Izanami said seriously as she stopped her jokes.


    Tsunade was stunned and reflexively let go of Izanami¡¯s hand and took a few steps back. After she realised what she had done she coughed a bit before asking, ¡° What will you even gain in doing all this. Once the vige in utter chaos the ninja viges would attack Konoha without any hesitation. ¡°


    Izanami shook her head and answered, ¡° No you are wrong about that part. As long as I stay in Konoha the other viges wouldn¡¯t dare to advance their troops. Not unless they want to have their Daimyo turning against them. ¡°


    Tsunade thought about and realised that Izanami was right. Like Konoha the other hidden viges need to have their daimyo¡¯s backing to run their respected viges. After what is happening to Sunagakure every other ninja vige made sure their ties with their respected Daimyo is good.


    With the World Bank havingplete control over the economy these Daimyo¡¯s don¡¯t dare to mess with it.


    ¡° What are you going to do now? Are you seriously going to war unless Danzo is killed ? ¡° Tsunade asked . Frankly she didn¡¯t know how her teacher would solve this. Would he sacrifice Danzo like he did to many shinobi or clean up his mess like he was doing for all these years.


    Izanami gave a mysterious smile and said, ¡° It¡¯s too early to give an exact answer to that as some of the key yers are still missing. ¡°


    ¡°Hmm what is that supposed to mean? ¡° Tsunade asked, annoyed. Had it been someone else she would have punched him for speaking in riddles.


    ¡° No spoilers, ¡° Izanami said with a mischievous smile as she pressed a finger to her lips.


    ¡°Why you little ¡° Tsunade was instantly enraged as she tried to catch Izanami and teach her a lesson.


    After a series of ups and downs Izanami walked into the living room while carrying a huge sack on her little shoulder. The funny thing is that the sack kept moving like there was someone inside it.


    As she unceremoniously dumped the sack down on the floor, a groaning sound was heard for all to hear. Izanami, ignoring that sound, said to Shizune, ¡°here Shizune you can have this. ¡°


    Although Shizune was horrified she still nodded her head obediently . Even an elementary student could understand who was inside that sack. It¡¯s just that no one would expect that one of the legendary Sanins would be captured like this.


    ¡° Well I¡¯m going to train Naruto so if any annoying ninjase to see me just say that I have nothing to talk to them about. ¡° Izanami said as she left the room.


    After Izanami left Nanami sighed as she felt a great headacheing. Normally her mother would not do something so shy. But ever since she came to Konoha her every move made huge waves in the entire ninja world.


    And with how things are going Japan might have to make an appearance to humble the entire ninja world. These ninja viges have too much ego in their rotten brains.


    ¡® especially Danzo, how dare he try to attack my mother. And that Hiruzen, he also needs to be taught a lesson ¡® Nanami thought a bit of her killing intent leaking.


    Although Izanami could handle everything as her children, how could they do nothing when someone tries to harm their mother?


    Thinking for a minute, Nanami took out her smart phone-like device. She then send a message to one of her siblings. Specifically, it was Nagisa.


    After a few minutes she got a reply saying, ¡® I will make sure of it ¡®. And seeing this message Nanami nodded in satisfaction as she kept her phone back in her pocket.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    In the courtyard Naruto was meditating. Well that¡¯s what one would see at a nce but upon closer inspection they would realise he was sleeping .


    Izanami had a tick mark on her forehead as she looked at Naruto with an irritated look. Before she went to the Hokage¡¯s office she told Naruto to meditate and refine his chakra. But it seems he got toofortable and fell asleep.


    Izanami sighed and snapped her fingers. And in the next moment a waterfall appeared on top of Naruto andpletely drowned him. And with another snap the waterfall disappeared revealing apletely soaked Naruto.


    ¡°Hey what is the big idea, big sis Izanami? I was having such a beautiful dream I conquered the ramen ind ¡° Nauto asked, annoyed.


    ¡° Oh you even had the balls to have a dream when I left you to train. It seems you have already mastered how to refine chakra. So why don¡¯t we put that to the test. ¡° Izanami said with a dark smile.


    Naruto at this moment realised that he had screwed up badly. And for the rest of his life he would never dare to ck off when he is training with Izanami.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 60

    Chapter 60


    ¡° Now that''s what I call training. Good job surviving Naruto. As a reward I will ask Teuchi to make you a special miso ramen, ¡° Izanami said with a satisfied smile.


    ¡°Yay ¡° Naruto said weakly as heid on the ground powerless. Earlier Izanami had made him run for his life in the whole courtyard and she was chasing him with a big stick.


    When he slowed down or was about to be out of breath she would hit him. And the pain would make him run even faster. And when he was almost out of breath Izanami instructed him to use the chakra refining technique while running.


    Ninjas had to travel for hours straight to do missions. And to that they utilised their chakra to keep themselves from getting too tired. This is the most basic application for ninjas who just started refining chakra.


    This is why Izanami told Naruto to start refining his chakra after he was nearing physical limit. When one circtes chakra in their bodies they will be able to revitalise their tired bodies to some extent.


    And Naruto had to do this as his training. Since he is still at the age of three where physical training is too much for his body this exercise is the best for him.


    Well the problem was Naruto couldn¡¯t refine chakra perfectly due to him cking off easier so this exercise was quite hard for him. Not in the physical sense as he was just running. What made it too hard for him is because Izanami hit him everytime he tried to slow down.


    So when Naruto¡¯s proficiency reached an eptable range for Izanami he was almost out of breath and was on the verge of going unconscious.


    Izanami sighed and lifted him up and carried him in the famous princess carry. Thankfully Naruto is too young to feel the shame of being carried in a princess carry by a girl.


    As they were on their way to the next door Ichiraku Ramen they bumped into the animal group of Kaguya , Rin , Sakumo and Yahiko.


    ¡° What happened to Naruto? Did he get hurt during training? ¡°Rin asked as she came closer to inspect him almost immediately. Out of everyone she is the kindest and attached to Naruto. After all, Naruto is her sensei¡¯s child.


    ¡° Don¡¯t worry he is just exhausted after a day of training. A few bowls of Ramen will make him energetic again. ¡° Izanami said dismissively. She wasn''t lying when she said this.


    She had seen Ashura and even the Uzumaki n get all energetic after a good meal. The meal just had to be something they must love or else the magic wouldn¡¯t work at all. It was tested and verified.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡°See I told you all he needs is a few bowls of ramen ¡° Izanami said proudly as she enjoyed the gobsmack look of Rin and the others.


    They all came with Izanami and Naruto since they clearly didn¡¯t believe Izanami¡¯s words. They were expecting a scene of Naruto barely managing to eat his Ramen with how tired he is.


    But to their surprise as soon as he smelt the delicious smell of Teuchi¡¯s Ramen he was instantly healed. His eyes, which previously were tired and barely opened, were filled with excitement.


    It was like he was on steroids , which is his usual behaviour waiting for his ramen. If they hadn¡¯t witnessed his previous state with their own eyes they would seriously doubt their own words.


    ¡° How is this even possible , even Nagato didn''t have this much vitality? '''' Yahiko, who knew how broken Uzuamaki¡¯s endurance and vitality was, is asked inplete confusion. When they were young he often seen how much of a terrifying monster Nagato could be when ites to endurance but looking at Naruto that was nothing.


    ¡° You know Nagato has several things blocking him right. His Rinnegan which is continuously absorbing his chakra and his mentality . ¡° Izanami exined as she saw through Yahiko¡¯s thoughts.


    ¡° The Rinnegan I can understand but what does his mentality have to do with his vitality. ¡° Yahiko asked, confused. He knew nagato¡¯s Rinnegan was quite a bother as it continuously absorbs chakra. That part he could understand. Continuously draining your chakra will leave your body tired.


    Kakashi is a prime example. Due to his Sharingan half of his whole chakra is continuously being used to sustain it. Which is why he is always a bit tired even during missions.


    ¡° Well how do I put it ¡° Izanami thought her words carefully as she exined, ¡° Have you ever heard of a saying of never corner a Uchiha or Uzumaki in battle. ¡°


    ¡°Yes I remember hearing something like that when I was a kid from my father. Apparently it was a popr saying during the warring state ¡° it was Sakumo who answered. That was an old saying he heard from his n members who were very old.


    ¡°Yes, during the warring period many ns lost their members on a daily basis. It was during those times that the Uchiha , Senju Uzumaki and many more ancient ns made a name for themselves. And even amongst all these ns the Uzuamaki and Uchiha are the deadliest in battles.


    And that is because of their prideful nature and unyielding will. If a person from these ns decided to protect someone with their lives on the line then that moment will be the moment they will show their true nature. No matter the injury they would not stop until they finish their mission.


    Even if they lost both of their arms they would fight with their feet. Until there''s nothing left of them they would fight to the bitter end. It is this characteristic that the saying was made.¡± Izanami exined to the crowd.


    ¡°Iit is because of this undying will Naruto is able to stand up like it was nothing after going through that training. As long as a Uzumaki has their favourite food they would even wake up from aa if they were ever conscious. ¡° she said with a chuckle. Thatst one was is still being tested so it¡¯s nothing but a theory but Izanami thinks if it was Naruto it may be possible.


    Since Naruto as the reincarnation of their ancestors has the strongest will so as long as his mind stay strong there''s nothing he couldn¡¯t do¡¯ She thought inwardly.


    ¡®And besides if even a group of three idiot pirates could wake up from aa because of sentence someone said I doubt someone ancient as Ashura couldn¡¯t do something like that too ¡® she reasoned.


    ¡° Wow, ¡° the crowd was amazed. They never knew those ancient ns were that formidable.


    ¡® as expected of ancient ns who dominated the warring state¡¯ they all thought with a bit of admiration.


    ¡° But what about the Senju n? ¡° a voice suddenly asked as Tsunade came inside the shop. She heard Izanami¡¯s little exnation on her way inside. And she isn¡¯t amused on how the Senju n was missing in her exnation.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 61

    Chapter 61


    Hearing Tsunade¡¯s cold words everyone reflexively took a step back. Thankfully there were no outsiders here or they would run out in fear. Tsunade was really scary right now.


    ¡°Hmm the Senju n huh, well honestly they could be considered the ones with the best foundation amongst the other ancient ns. '''' Izanami said, thinking for a bit. Whether it was jutsus or exceptional physical strength none of the other ns could rival them. Even the Uzumaki don¡¯t have such physical strength even when they are from an ancient branch of the Senju n.


    ¡° Is that all? ¡° Tsunade asked with a bit of disappointment. Compared to the grand introduction Izanami gave to the Uchiha and Uzumaki, the one she gave to the Senju n is rather nk.


    Izanami gave her a look of exasperation. Did this girl not know what the benefits one could have with a great foundation. While normal ninjas work hard day and night at early age to build their foundation, But in the Senju n they would have an even better foundation after just being born.


    And even in the warring states the Senju had fewest casualties with ealy ninjas. In gamer terms a normal ninja would start at level 1 but a Senju n ninja would start at level 9 or 10.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    While Izanami and the rest were having some Ramen the entire Konoha was going crazy. Enemy spies were frantically trying to contact their viges to share thetest information.


    ¡®Konoha Hokage advisor Danzo Shimura tried to attack the representative of the World Bank. And the World Bank is beginning to retaliate. ¡®


    Konoha, although it is called the strongest hidden vige, has lost most of its vitality in the past years. So many nations who were eying the resources in the Land of Fire didn¡¯t think much before they poured oil into the fire.


    If Konoha is weakened their chances of taking territories from the Land of Fire will be way higher. So many ninja viges publicly issued statements condemning Konoha for their actions.


    And if that isn¡¯t bad enough, many ninjas and civilians in Konoha also go to the Hokage tower to ask for answers. The huge screen in the sky showed the evidence they needed to judge the situation.


    So many righteous individuals went to the Hokage tower and started a riot. Furthermore most of the people who participated in the riot are merchants. On their way they went to the World Bank branch in Konoha and found out that their loans would be cancelled and they have two weeks to pay up their debts.


    So many merchants joined the riot to stop this madness. They didn¡¯t want to lose their businesses because of a criminal. And worse get caught up in a war.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    From the Hokage office Hriuzen watched all that¡¯s happening outside the tower and felt his heart bleed. Today¡¯s incident will be recorded as something that will shame Konoha for years. And what¡¯s more the reputation he built for all these years is at the brink of being ruined.


    While he was regretting his actions an anbu ninja came and knelt before him. Without turning back he asked, ¡°did you find out how that screen appeared in the sky ¡°


    ¡°Yes Hokage sama that screen appeared because of a projection artefact the World Bank has stepped up. It is an advanced model of what we currently use. ¡° The Anbu ninja said. He was tasked to find out about the huge screen that appeared in the sky. That screen is the reason everything started.


    Hiruzen inhaled his cigarette and exhaled a mouthful of smoke. His fists were clenched as he gritted his teeth. It is just as he expected that screen was something Izanami set up. That girl is a snake in human skin.


    ¡° Is everyone present in the meeting room? ¡° He asked the Anbu ninja. After the whole incident he called everyone to hold a meeting on how to deal with this mess.


    ¡° Yes Hokage sama, everyone has already arrived at the meeting ce. But.. ¡° The Anbu ninja answered but he hesitated a bit as he stoped.


    Hiruzen looked at him and asked in worry . , ¡° But what ¡° He got a bad feeling when he heard that tone .


    ¡°But the Hokage advisor Danzo sama is not present. The people who went to look for him didn¡¯t find him at the Root base or at the Shimura n at all ¡° The Anbu ninja said.


    ¡° what!! Quickly send a few personnel to find him. He must be present at the meeting. Find him and bring him. If he resists you can apprehend him, arrest anyone who hinders the search ¡° Hiruzen said in a fit of anger. He had enough of his friend¡¯s reckless actions.


    ¡° yes Hokage sama ¡°the Anbu ninja bowed and quickly left.


    After the Anbu left Hiruzen inhaled his pipe in rapid session. When the entire room was almost covered in smoke did Hiruzen stop his smoking.


    ¡° Sigh Danzo if you decide to act like this and then don¡¯t me me for being ruthless ¡° He said as a cold light shed through his eyes.


    Earlier he was thinking of a way to solve this whole mess while leaving a way for Danzo to escape. But with Danzo¡¯s recent action his thoughts began to change. He didn¡¯t doubt that Danzo had already fled from Konoha.


    After all that is the most logical move at this moment. So despite sending a team to locate him he didn¡¯t expect to have any positive results. Who knew how many secret passages Danzo made for his Root ninjas to move in secret.


    If Danzo had decided to stick with him and fight to the bitter end Hiruzen would do his best to find a way to save him. But no Danzo decided to throw all the responsibilities and run away. He didn¡¯t even inform him.


    ¡®Since you want to run away that badly then face the consequences for your actions with you¡¯ Hiruzen thought as he got up from his seat. He needs to go to that meeting and make sure the situation doesn¡¯t elerate any more.


    While Hriuzen was going to the meeting room a few miles away from Konoha a group of ninjas were running at an elerating speed. Most of them wore Anbu-like masks. They all had their vignce as they covered each other¡¯s back.


    After a while they arrived near a waterfall. When they reached the waterfall the group split into three . One group went into hiding , one went to cover any tracks while the final group dashed straight into the waterfall.


    As they passed through the waterfall they arrived at an entrance to a cave that was covered perfectly by the waterfall. They waited there for a few seconds before another group of ninjas simr to them arrived in front of them.


    The third group handed a scroll to the forth group and left the save swiftly. The forth group then swiftly entered the cave while another group in the shadows followed them to make sure they were not enemies.


    As they arrived near a door to an office they all stopped. One of them knocked on the door in a peculiar manner. After that they all waited for an answer.


    ¡°Enter ¡° a cold voice came from the other side promoting the one with the scroll to enter while the others simply stood there guarding the door.


    The Root ninja came near Danzo who was sitting on a throne and knelt in front of him.Danzo then gestured to another root ninja to take the scroll and handed it to him.


    After he read the contents in the scroll his whole body began to radiate killing intent. ¡° Hiruzen, how dare you do this, ¡° he said in a cold tone.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 62

    Chapter 62


    In the scroll there was thetest information on what happened in Konoha. Which also means there is a copy of Hiruzen¡¯s order to arrest him.


    ¡® Thankfully I retreated to one of my secret hideouts. When all this mess is over I will make sure to make you pay dearly Hiruzen ¡® Danzo thought as he crumbled the scroll in his hand.


    His sudden retreat was just a precaution he took. When he heard that Daimyo himself ising to Konoha he knew he would be just waiting for his death if stayed in Konoha. He knew how much of a coward Hiruzen will be when the Daimyo gets involved.


    So he trusted his instincts and retreated from the limelight. But he never thought Hriuzen would be so ruthless as to give an arrest order as soon as he found out he was missing.Did the thought of him being kidnapped or went to solve this by himself cross Hiruzen¡¯s mind.


    ¡® As expected Hiruzen is too old. How could he dare to think of sacrificing me. Doesn¡¯t he realise how important he is to Konoha. ¡® Danzo thought angrily.


    ¡° Just wait, I will show all of them what the consequences of betraying me ¡° Danzo¡¯s gloomy voice echoed in the dark room as he dered his revenge .


    While Danzo was plotting his revenge the Hokage Tower was quite lively. In the streets the smallmotion grew bigger as numerous people joined . Had it not been for the Anbu ninjas who were there to maintain order they would have flipped the Hokage towerpletely.


    While this was happening in one of many meeting rooms all of the important people were seated. Whether they were small n heads or even high level elders none were missing.


    All of them had grim expressions as they waited for Hiruzen to arrive. Everyone knew why they are gathered here. I mean how couldn¡¯t they when a huge screen disyed Izanami dering war on them.


    The door to the meeting room was opened and Hiruzen walked in. As soon as he sat in his chair he said, ¡° I take it I don''t have to inform you all why I called this emergency meeting ¡°. He went straight into business.


    Everyone nodded their heads as they agreed with Hiruzen¡¯s words. They were called here to discuss what they should do next now that Izanami has dered war on them.


    ¡° Hokage sama pardon me from asking but what really happened in the Hokage office this morning? ¡° Shikaku Nara asked as he looked at Hiruzen with a serious gaze.


    Although everyone had already seen it on the huge screen they still needed to understand the whole truth before arriving at a decision .


    Hiruzen smoked a bit before answering, ¡° Earlier today I summoned Izanmi Yosokuna to my office to question her decision to take Naruto to the Uchiha n without any escorts. I simply wanted to know whether she wanted to create an internal conflict by doing that. ¡°


    ¡° Wait a minute Hokage sama but why is she even able to get close to the Nine tails Jinchuriki in the first ce. Shouldn¡¯t the Anbu stop her or anyone from getting close to that kid? ¡° Hiashi Hy¨±ga, the patriarch of the Hy¨±ga n asked as he interrupted Hiruzen.


    Due to his brother¡¯s recent death he was still a little salty with Hriuzen so he wouldn''t miss any chance to me Hiruzen.


    Hiruzen gave Hiashi a look before saying with gritted teeth , ¡° It is because Naruto¡¯s legal guardian is Izanami more specifically the World Bank ¡°


    Amotion erupted as everyone processed what they heard. Although they knew of the policy of the World Bank adopting orphan children whose parents have astronomical debts they didn¡¯t think Naruto too would fall under this category.


    One must know that he is the son of Minato Namikaze, the fourth Hokage. And if that isn¡¯t enough Naruto¡¯s mother is the sole inheritor of the Uzumaki n legacy. Both of them are not ordinary people who would be in debt.


    ¡° How is that even possible even if we ignore the fourth Hokage background as a former civilian Kushina Uzumaki¡¯s legacy is enough for anyone to pay off any debts. So there is no way Naruto who has both of his inheritances be in debt¡± it was Inoichi Yamanaka who said that.


    ¡°Nomaly that wouldn¡¯t be possible but Minato before dying took a n debt under the Uzumaki n. ording to the documents it was used to stabilise Konoha after the Third Great shinobi war ¡° Homura said.


    ¡° Well that makes sense but even so wouldn¡¯t the World Bank usually deduct a n''s legacy if the other party died. There should be enough coteral if both of their inheritances are taken into ount. ¡° Ch¨­za Akimichi said as he thought aloud.


    ¡°That¡¯s because umm¡± Homura was at a loss for words. He couldn¡¯t simply say that Naruto¡¯s inheritance was used to rebuild the vige and was split between all of them.


    ¡° I think that is enough. Do not forget why we gathered here ? ¡° hiruzen interjected. ¡°As I was saying after Izanami came, an argument broke out between her and Danzo. And as you all might have guessed Danzo didn¡¯t take it very well and attacked her. ¡° he continued his exnation while making everyone forget about Naruto.


    He didn¡¯t want them to point fingers at him at this critical moment. So like the usual put his dear friend on the pedestal and made him take the limelight.


    ¡® My friend Danzo you are still useful even if you are not here ¡® Hiruzen thought as he saw everyone forgetting the earlier discussion.


    ¡°Where is elder Danzo , shouldn¡¯t he be here to exin himself? ¡° Shikaku asked as he had a grave expression. Although he could pretty much guess what happened he still needed to ask.


    ¡° Danzo has gone missing. I have already ordered Anbu to find him. ¡° Hiruzen said


    ¡°So what will our next move be? Should we ready our troops and get ready for war ¡° Fugaku who was silent all this time asked,


    ¡° That¡¯s impossible, Konoha is still dealing with the nine tail aftermath. We can''t afford another war. Especially when the World Bank is our enemy. The public will not agree¡± one high level elder said.


    ¡° So what else should we do? We can¡¯t just surrender without even putting up a fight. That would make us aughing stock in the whole ninja world. ¡° One other said.


    Like that a huge debate began to start. Although Danzo was shown guilty in the video, but that isn¡¯t a reason for Konoha to punish one of their high level elders. The World Bank is just a civilian organisation. No matter what they can¡¯t be the one to lose this early.


    ¡° Isn¡¯t Konoha¡¯s goal peace? Why don¡¯t we just capture elder Danzo and offer his head like what the World Bank asked us to do. It will save us from going into a meaningless war. ¡° Hiashi said with an indifferent tone. But everyone could feel the sarcasm in his voice.


    ¡° And besides, why should we protect a guilty man? And besides, isn¡¯t he simply doing his duty as Konoha elder by sacrificing himself for Konoha¡¯s prosperity? ¡° he continued as he red at Hiruzen.


    ¡°Hiashi that is enough, we get your point ¡°Shikaku said as he tried to calm Hiashi down. Everyone knew how much Hiashi suffered because of the Kumo incident. And ironically the situation is quite simr to this one.


    Just as they were about to continue their discussion a Anbu ninja came to the room and whispered a few words to Hiruzen. Hiruzen, hearing those words, immediately stood up.


    He then said, ¡°the meeting will be put on hold until tomorrow. The Fire Daimyo has arrived so I will take my leave ¡° and with those words he left in a hurry.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 63

    Chapter 63


    ¡° Things got more troublesome, ¡° Shikaku muttered as he saw Hiruzen leave. If the Daimyo is here personally then things will get moreplicated.


    One had to know that the Fire Daimyo apart from the time Konoha was founded had never set foot in Konoha. It is them who goes to the Fire country to discuss important matters. For the Fire Daimyo to personallye here there could be one reason.


    The impending war with the World Bank. If the Daimyo were to interfere then that would mean Konoha is deep shit.


    The current Konoha cannot have both the Daimyo and the World Bank as their enemies at the same time.


    ¡°Sigh what a drag ¡° he said as he wished things wouldn¡¯t get any more worse.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    In a morevish room the fire Daimyo was looking at Hiruzen with an angry look. He was furious at what he heard.


    Previously he came to order Hriuzen to apprehend Danzo and hand him to Izanami so that she wouldn¡¯t start a war. But his hopes were instantly crushed when he heard Danzo had gone missing.


    ¡° Hiuzen do you have any excuses for you to say ? Not only did you fail to keep a criminal in custody, you even let him live after he dared to attack a representative from the World Bank. ¡° The Fire Daimyo asked with a cold tone.


    Hiruzen was sweating profusely as he heard the tone fire Daimyo was speaking. At this time he regretted not capturing Danzo earlier. If he had made a decision earlier he would have been spared from this lecture.


    ¡°I ..i ¡° just before Hiruzen was about to give an exnation the Fire Daimyo interrupted him while saying,


    ¡° Forget it , I don¡¯t want to hear your pathetic excuses. I will give you two days to find that Danzo and bring him to me, dead or alive. If not, you better be prepared to face the consequences. ¡° The Fire Daimyo said he stood up as left the room.


    Just before he left the room he turned back and said, ¡°Oh and find me someone who could guide me to wheredy Izanami is. ¡°


    Hiruzen, although a bit reluctant getured one of his Anbu ninja to escort the Daimyo. As a politician he could see what the Daimyo wanted to do.


    He wanted to meet Izanami and make sure the Land of Fire wouldn¡¯t be affected by the war. This means he has already given up Konoha. In other words he has chosen to side with the World Bank.


    ¡°Damn it ¡° Hiruzen said, banging his fists on the desk ,pletely breaking it. Due to his anger he released his chakra unconsciously. Fortunately the Daimyo was quite far away so he couldn¡¯t really feel it.


    Or else Hiruzen would have to deal with another problem. An attempt to threaten the Daimyo is thest thing he wanted to be known for.


    ¡°Danzo you better pray you have enough luck because I''m gonna kill you for causing all this mess. ¡° Hiruzen said as he stormed off the room. Hopefully others are still in the meeting room. Or else he would have to waste more time waiting for them toe.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° So that''s what happening huh ¡° Izanami said as a member of the Yokai unit reported to her what Hiruzen and the Daimyo talked about.


    ¡° I must say that guy came here too fast. I wonder why is that ¡° Izanami said as she gave Nanami a look.


    Nanami didn¡¯t even flinch as she stated, ¡° it was stated that he came here by the express carriages from the World Bank. ¡°


    ¡°Oh I wonder why that is, ¡° Izanami asked with a smile.


    ¡°ording to what I heard he practically begged them to let him aboard the express carriage.His reason being that he wanted to solve this problem as soon as possible. ¡° Nanami said, still not showing any emotion.


    ¡° I see that is quite the coincidence isn¡¯t it. Just when the Daimyo wanted to go to Konoha, he just so happened to see a passing by empress carriage that so happens to be heading towards Konoha. ¡° Izanami said with a chuckle.


    Hearing her words even Nanami had a twitch in her eye. She knew no matter how much she tried she could never hide anything from her mother. How could she when her mother is the best at Schemes.


    ¡° So wanna tell me what you and Nagisa are nning this time? ¡° Izanami asked with a sigh.


    Nanami shook her head and answered, ¡°I don¡¯t know what you are talking about ¡°


    Hearing this Izanami sighed again. She knew Nanami can be very stubborn sometimes. ¡® well I''ll just deal with it when the timees. I doubt those two would do anything drastic that would crumble my whole n. ¡®Izanami thought as she pushed those worries to the back of her mind.


    ¡° So anyways, how are the other viges taking this? Are they already marching with their troops? ¡° Izanami asked changing the subject.


    ¡°Well Kumo , Iwa and Suna were about to do that but after they all received a letter from their respected Daimyo they all backed down immediately. ¡° Nanami said as she adjusted her sses.


    ¡° Oh all three of them, ¡° Izanami asked, raising one eyebrow.


    ¡°Yes all three hidden viges'' '' Nanami said, confirming Izznami¡¯s words.


    ¡°That¡¯s surprising . Iwa and Suna I can understand. But Kumo, that''s shocking. Didn¡¯t the Raikage give his usual middle finger and dismiss the order. ¡° Izanami asked.


    ¡° Well that¡¯s what¡¯s supposed to happen but from what I heard the Thunder Daimyo threatened to cut all ties with them if they even moved a single soldier to the borders. This of course didn¡¯t deter A but he was forced to submit because of the rest of the council also threatening him to take a step down. ¡° Nanami said.


    ¡°Oh I can imagine A¡¯s face when he finds out that most of the vige will go to war with him for disregarding the Daimyo¡¯s orders. ¡° Izanami said as sheughed out loud.


    ¡°Well this is to be expected. The Land of Thunder¡¯s Daimyo is the most cunning amongst all the other Daimyo''s. He would never let a prideful man like A rain over the hidden cloud vige if he didn¡¯t have any back up ns. ¡° Nanami said with a shrug.


    Strictly speaking hidden viges are supposed to be called a part of the Daimyo¡¯s forces. So most of the time it is the Daimyo who sponsors the hidden vige''s more expensive missions.


    So that is why the hidden cloud vige usually goes to extreme measures when they are trying to go to war. They knew the Daimyo had their back. Which is also why they were so shameless as to sacrifice one of their men into being a Byakugan into their vige while threatening to go to war.


    And as far as Iznami know, the hidden cloud ninjas came to Konoha while carrying the identities of the Daimyo¡¯s representatives. This directly told anyone that the Daimyo fully supports the whole operation.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 64

    Chapter 64


    ¡° Do we have any idea where Danzo ran off to ¡°Izanami asked as she looked at Nanami. Danzo¡¯s behaviour caught even her off guard. She didn¡¯t expect him to be this decisive.


    ¡°Yes, our spies have already infiltrated his new base. He seems to have thought hiding in one of the many waterfalls is a great idea. ¡° Nanami said sarcastically. Although he hid very well, that ce is too cliche.


    ¡° Well what do you expect from a guy who made one of his secret root hideouts inside his teacher''s stone statue?. Now that I think about the door to that base under the nostril of Toboroma¡¯s statue right. Danzo really took the saying ¡®doing everything under his teacher¡¯s nose. ¡® quite literally. ¡° Izanami said with a chuckle.


    ¡°Yeah so what do we do about him? ¡° Nanami asked, not really getting the joke, Izanami said.


    Izanami pouted as she didn¡¯t get the reaction she wanted. But she nheless said, ¡° Order the Yokai members to spread a rumour of Danzo¡¯s dirty deals. And also make sure Hiruzen has an equal amount of me for his actions. ¡°


    ¡°Yes as you wish Matriarch ¡° Nanami bowed a little as she left the room with the Yokai member.


    After they left Izanami closed her eyes and said, ¡°Now Hiruzen what would you do now? How will you react when you be Konoha¡¯s public enemy? ¡°


    ¡°I really can¡¯t wait for your next move ¡°she said with a bloodthirsty smile that looked identical to the one the Ghost of Uchiha always has in his face.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° Would you hurry up? I already wasted a lot of time talking to Hiruzen. I don¡¯t wantdy Izanami to be annoyed at myte greeting, ¡° the Fire daimyo yelled as opened the curtain to his carriage.


    The Anbu ninja who was telling directions to the driver really wanted to give a piece of his mind to the Daimyo after hearing thatment. But he wisely kept those thoughts to himself. He knew talking back would only make him dig his own hole.


    After all, how dare a mere Anbu ninja talk back to the esteemed Daimyo. Even the Hokage would have to lower his head and listen to the Daimyo. Not everyone is Hashirama Senju or Madara Uchiha.


    ¡° Lady izanami¡¯s house is just around the corner. We would arrive there in a few minutes ¡°the Anbu ninja said as he saw the Daimyo was about to continue his scolding again.


    ¡°Oh how close are we talking about? ¡° the Fire Daimyo suddenly asked.


    Although the Anbu ninja was puzzled at this question he still answered. ¡°We are only 3-4 blocks away. ¡°


    ¡°Good this much is enough, coachman stop the carriage I will walk from here. ¡°The Fire Daimyo said as he ordered his men to stop the carriage.


    After he got out of his carriage he looked at the Anbu ninja and ordered, ¡°show me where Lady Izanami lives. ¡°


    The Anbu ninja nodded his head dumbly. He just realised why this annoying person suddenly ordered the carriage to stop.


    Although as ninjas they don¡¯t learn much about politics as a Anbu ninja he had his fair share of experience to know what the Daimyo¡¯s actions signify. Bying down from his carriage and simply walking he shows that he is nothing special in front of the World Bank. politically this meant the Fire Daimyopletely submitted to the World Bank.


    While he was mulling over this he suddenly heard a very disturbing conversation.


    ¡°Hey, have you heard The Hokage assistant Danzo shimura has run away. ording to the rumour he fled as soon as today¡¯s incident happened. ¡° a civilian said he and his friends were chatting.


    ¡°Danzo Shimura isn¡¯t that the person who is responsible for the uing war. ¡°One of them asked.


    ¡°Yeah but did you know this isn¡¯t the first time that guy had done something terrible. ¡°


    ¡°Oh really what could they do something more horrible than starting a war ¡°


    ¡°Hehehe I was as surprised as you when I heard about it for the first time too. Here look at this list. I got this when I wasing back from the mainstreet. Apparently these papers are distributed throughout Konoha. Nobody knows who did that though, ¡° the first man said as he brought a paper from his pocket.


    ¡° Show me the crime that is way worse than starting a war between Konoha and the World Bank. ¡° said one as he snatched the piece of paper.


    After he started reading it his whole expression turned pale. His hands were trembling as he continued to read. ¡° how can a person be such a monster ¡° he said he almost lost his bnce.


    ¡°Hah what are you so scared for ¡° another one spoke as he took the fallen paper and read it. After a while he too was trembling. But instead of fear he was trembling in anger. ¡°Damn that freak, how could such a monster be our hokage assistant.


    ¡° Hey ninja, bring me that piece of paper ¡° The fire Daimyo said as he looked at the Anbu nina who was sweating.


    Although the Anbu ninja didn¡¯t see the contents of the paper he could tell that it isn¡¯t something good. ¡® oh god please help us ¡® he prayed as hesitantly took the piece of paper from the civilians and gave it to the Fire Daimyo.


    The daimyo took the paper from him and looked at it. And after reading just a few lines his body also began to tremble uncontrobly.


    On the paper there is a detailed report about the things Danzo did for thest few years. On the top of the list there is killing Kagami Uchiha , assassinating talented ninjas especially who are from the Uchiha n,framing Sakumo Hatake and forcing him tomit suicide, plotting to assassinate Hriuzen Sarutobi , Killing Senju Nawaki , kidnapping children and using them for many forbidden experiments. The list went on making even the Daimyo sacred.


    ¡° Hey is this true? ¡° the daimyo asked the Anbu ninja with bloodshot eyes. He knew ninjas were very dark but he never knew they could be this dark. And this ising from someone who had to fight for the throne as soon as he was born.


    The Anbu sweated under the murderous look of the Fire Daimyo. One didn¡¯t need to be a genius to know that he might have screwed up Konoha even more. He just hoped the squad that went to hunt Danzo would seed in their mission.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 65

    Chapter 65


    ¡°Damn it who the hell did this ¡°Danzo roared as he punched the table in front of him. He did so in an excellent way that even the Raikage would feel proud. Unfortunately Danzo didn¡¯t care about the now broken table as he had other matters to worry about.


    ¡° Who the hell spread those papers. Is it Hiruzen , No that''s impossible these papers would drag him down too so he would never dare do it. ¡° Danzo muttered as he bit his finger in frustration.


    As someone who was always in charge he didn''t like it when there is something he doesn''t know.


    ¡° Could it be someone from the other ninja viges? No, if those guys have this much information they would have dered war on Konoha already. ¡° Danzo suddenly thought but denied this idea immediately. If the other ninja viges had this much information they would have already gone to war with this as an excuse.


    And for next few minutes Danzo continued to name possible suspects before discarding them from his imaginary list.


    ¡° Arrg damn it who is it ? Who the hell spread those papers¡± Danzo roared as felt a massive headache.


    It is now that Danzo had realised that in the past years he had made too many enemies. Damn it who told him to be so overbearing when he kidnapped his shoulders from orphanages , ninja ns and civilian families.


    ¡®I need to get to the bottom of this ¡® Danzo thought as a cold light shed in his eyes. No matter who it is, they will pay for what they did.


    ¡°F¨± and Torune ¡° Danzo said as his cold voice reverberated in the dark room.


    Shortly after, two silhouettes appeared in front of Danzo while kneeling. ¡° Yes Danzo sama ¡° both of them said at the same time .


    ¡°Go and find out who is plotting against me. Use whatever method you want. But be extra cautious as to not to be spotted by the Anbu. And if you ever were to be discovered, destroy any traces of your involvement ande back. ¡° Danzo said gloomily.


    Although going to Konoha at this time is a bad decision Danzo thought it was necessary. He could smell a deep scheme and he wanted to know what that was. His instincts were telling him that being in the dark at this time is a death sentence. That is why he gave this task to his most powerful ninjas.


    With those two¡¯s abilities they would be able to gather much more information in a short amount of time and escape in a short notice.


    ¡° As you wish Danzo sama ¡° both F¨± and Torune saluted before they left to do what they were ordered to do.


    While Danzo was making his move at the same time in the Hokage Tower meeting room there was deadly silence. In the room there are numerous elite Jonins , n leaders and even Konoha elders. But none of them spoke. That is because almost everyone is ring at Hiruzen.


    This is especially the Uchiha n. Whether they were from the neutral, radical or even the peace faction everyone had their sharingan opened. In the paper there were many ims that directly involved the Uchiha n.


    Whether it is the assassinating of Kagami Uchiha and other numerous geniuses is not something that they would take lightly. For this they put away all their differences and united to seek justice.


    Normally when the Uchiha is like this other ninja n may be pressured and even scared to be in the same room as them. But this time no one cared about them. Because in the list there was a im the other ninja¡¯s couldn¡¯t ept. That is the tragic death of Sakumo Hatake and Senju Nawaki.


    Sakumo was a hero of Konoha. His fame was so great that the Sand Ninja vige didn¡¯t dare to Attack Konoha if Konoha¡¯s white fang was there. Not only that, Sakumo Hatake was someone who was very influential amongst ninjas. Many ninjas were trained by him once or twice. This is especially for Anbu ninjas as Sakumo was once the Commander of the Anbu ninjas.


    And apart from Sakumo , Senju Nawaki¡¯s death also made everyone angry. Senju Nawaki was someone everyone knew. As the grandson of the First Hokage and the heir to the Senju n, his influence was much greater than Tsunde herself. He was the prince of Konoha. So how could they not be angry when they realised his death was nned.


    Facing everyone''s ring eyes Hiruzen had a calm poker face as she inhaled his pipe. But inside he was raging with insults.


    ¡®Shit shit shit who the hell spread those papers in Konoha. And why does it all have detailed exnations of how Danzo got away with it. ¡® Hiruzen cursed in his mind.


    Yes, in the paper there were detailed exnations of how Danzo got away. And most of the time he used his authority as the Hokage¡¯s assistant and the leader of the Root to clean his mess. The details were so clearly written that Hiruzen for a moment thought that Danzo was the one who wrote it.


    This is why almost everyone came to the Hokage Office to seek answers. Both of Danzo¡¯s positions were something he Hriuzen gave him. So he is as guilty as Danzo.


    As for the excuse of not knowing anything. Please even a toddler wouldn¡¯t believe it. As a Hokage how could he not know what his assistant was doing? And even if he tries to deny his knowledge of it wouldn¡¯t that mean he as a Hokagepletely failed his duty.


    Just as Hiruzen was mulling over what excuse he should give, the door was sted open gaining everyone¡¯s attention. Turning around they saw the one who had the audacity toe to this room like this none other than Tsunade , the princes of Konoha.


    But it was not her presence that made everyone freeze because they expected Tsunade would barge in. How could she not do anything when she finds out that her brother¡¯s death was not an ident.


    No, what made everyone uneasy is the person who came with Tsunade. And that is none other than Fire Daimyo. And from his expression he doesn¡¯t seem too pleased. It must be because he has also found out about what Danzo did while he was the Hokage assistant.


    The person who had the greatest reaction was Hiruzen. When he saw Tsunade with the Fire Daimyo he was sweating buckets. Not even his poker face could cover that. If it was just Tsunade he could lie all he wanted. But against the Daimyo all his excuses would onlye to bite him in the ass. He just wished the Daimyo was here to talk about something else.


    ¡° Hiruzen you better give me a reasonable exnation about what is written here ¡°The Fire Daimyo said as he threw a piece of paper at him.


    When Hiruzen took it he felt endless despair. Because this is one of the many copies that is circting in Konoha.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 66

    Chapter 66


    ¡°I ..i.. I ¡° words didn¡¯te out from Hriuzen¡¯s mouth. He felt that he aged another decade in thest few seconds.


    Seeing Hiruzen like this, the Daimyo got even more angry. ¡°What are you stuttering about ? Tell me how the hell did your goddamn Hokage assistant abuse his authority to this extent? What were you doing when all this happened? Were blind that Danzo could do all this and walk away scott free? ¡°


    ¡°No.. I ¡° Hiruzen tried to defend himself but he was cut off mid sentence.


    ¡° You what huh tell me what did you do ? ording to me you not only failed to stop these crimes you looked away ignoring everything your assistant did. ¡° the Fire Daimyo ruthlessly said.


    You know Konoha¡¯s reputation waspletely destroyed because of Hiruzen and Danzo. One did the crimes while the other supported him by looking away. And it wouldn¡¯t be a surprise the Fire country would be implicated in this. After all, Konoha at the end of the day is the military force guarding the Land of Fire.


    When your bodyguards are a bunch of scumbags how could anyone not have any negative feelings towards their owner. Human beings love to point fingers after all.


    ¡° I will tell you this onest time Hiruzen find that Danzo and publicly execute him. If this isn¡¯t done before the deadline I gave you then Konoha would no longer be a part of the Land of Fire. I will publicly dere that the Fire country would cut any ties that it has with Konoha. ¡° The Fire Daimyo said, shocking Hiruzen to the core.


    You know a ninja vige and a nation is something like a bridge. Both parties need each other. So even if both sides have conflict with each other they will not destroy their connection.


    Even the wind Daimyo only dared to cut the funds he sent to the Sand vige. He knew that for his nation''s safety he needed the sand vige. So despite not liking Rasa he didn¡¯t order the ninja vige to disband or select a new Kazekage.


    So when Fire Daimyo said that he was going to cut all ties with Konoha he was basically crippling the Land of Fire¡¯s military strength. But he didn''t care as he knew with iing war aliying with Konoha would be a far worse decision.


    What if the whole united and goes to war with the Fire country and Konoha because they chose to defend a criminal who has done numerous inhuman stuff. Doesn¡¯t that basically destroy the Fire country removing its foundation from the roots.


    And apart from that they would be numerous revolutions leading to a civil war. No country or ninja vige can handle fighting in the inside and out at the same time.


    So the safest option for the Land of Fire is to cut all ties with Konoha. Although it would weaken them but with enough time they would gradually recover.


    After the Daimyo finished saying all the things he wanted to say he turned back and was about to leave the room. No one stopped him as they were too shocked by the orders he gave them.


    But just as he was about to leave he turned onest time and said, ¡° Or and even if you finally manage to find Danzo, you will resign your position from the Hokage . No screw that you should do that immediately. That way I could at least hope the new Hokage would do his best to find Danzo. If it was left to you , you would just let him go just like all the times he did anything. ¡°


    Hiruzen, who was almost pale like a corpse, felt his remaining life force burn even faster as he heard those words. He may not be a good person but he truly loved Konoha. That¡¯s why during the nine tails attack he was the first to engage with Kurama head on. Even when he was teen he volunteered instantly to be the bait for Tobirama to escape.


    It¡¯s just that during the years he became obsessed with power. The Hokage position became his obsession. He would scheme with Danzo to increase his reputation while assassinating any of thepetition he had for his position.


    Even when Minato became the Hokage he didn¡¯t have full control over Konoha. The Anbu squad were still loyal to the Third Hokage so he was like a Hokage with no real power.


    So when Minato died Hiruzen immediately came back to power again. His greed for power didn¡¯t allow him to give the position to anyone.But even so Hiruzen knew that he couldn¡¯t sit in this position for a long time as there were still some members who wanted a new Hokage.


    That is why he needed to get rid of any opposition. To do that he first needed to stabilise the situation in Konoha. So he used Naruto¡¯s inheritance money to make the Sarutobi n increase their influence before the others could do anything.


    After that he made sure that Naruto as the nine tail Jinchuriki would only be loyal to him. That way no matter who the next Hokage is he would have enough leverage to retain much of his authority.


    Everything was going smoothly for the next few years but all his hard work went to waste because of this war. Not only was his reputation taken a big hit, the Daimyo even threatened him to resign. If he ignored that order Konoha would suffer even before the war started.


    ¡° I will see to that ¡°Hiruzen barely managed to say those words as he felt his heart ache. All his dreams , ambition are over.


    ¡° You better ¡° The Daimyo spat as he stormed out of the room. His role is done. He just hopes everything will go smoothly from now.


    After the Daimyo left there was awkward silence. No matter whether it was the Uchiha or the other ninjas they didn¡¯t know what to say.


    On one hand they wanted to ask for an exnation and if possible force Hiruzen to abdicate. But after the Daimyo scolded the Hokage like that they didn¡¯t have the heart to say anything. Hiruzen looked like he was about to die any minute now. And they don¡¯t really want to kill Hiruzen before this whole mess is over.


    ¡° Sigh Tsunade from tommorow on wards you shall be apointed as the Hokage. ¡° Hiiruzen said with a tired tone. He knew all his hard work is over. So as his finalitment for Konoha he decided to appoint Tsunade as the Hokage.


    ¡° I take there is no one who is objecting to this ¡° Hiruzen asked looking at the cround. Although he said this he knew the answer in his heart. No one would object this and even more they have no time to argue about this.


    ¡° we agree to this ¡° Shikaku Nara said as he agreed to this. He knew this is the most correct choice at this moment. Tsunade had the enough reputation and skills to be the Hokage. And no n would disagree to have her as the Hokage.


    ¡®Although it is unlikly but would Tsunade sama disagree to this ¡® He thougjt as he looked at Tsunade. He wasn¡¯t the only one as almost everyone was lookng at Tsunade waiting for her answer.


    Facing everyone¡¯s stares tsunade sighed and said, ¡° Fine old man I will take that hat. But you all better do your best to find that Danzo. I really need to have a little talk with him. ¡°


    ¡®And besides I doubt Izanami would let me rest in piece after all the talk she had ealier ¡®Tsunade said.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 67

    Chapter 67


    ~ A few minutes earlier~


    ¡°It is done matriarch, we have already spread the details of Danzo¡¯s crimes to the whole Konoha. The way he did it, why he did it and how he got away with it everything was recorded in those fliers. ¡° Nanami said as she adjusted her sses. She had a cold smile as she said those words.


    Nanami always had a grudge against Danzo. Her best friend Kagami was killed by him. That is why she was the one who collected all the dirt Dazo had. From wanting to kill a n or steal a child¡¯s toy she wrote everything.


    ¡°So did the daimyo learn of this yet ¡° Izanami asked as she ignored Nanami¡¯s darkness that was leaking out. She always knew that her children had a dark side. But each time she pointed out that they would say thatpared to her they were angels.


    Preposterous how could that be true? She is the nicest and kindest person you could find in this world. How dare they say that she is evil. She has never done anything evil at all.


    ¡° ehem yes, he is actually learning about this at this very moment. ¡° Nanami said as she coughed a bit to her dark thoughts.


    ¡°I see, so do we need someone to call him in case he runs away in fear? ¡° Izanami asked as she sipped her tea,


    ¡°Hmm, that would be for the best as it seems he is too scared toe near our house. He is just taking one step and retracting it the next second. If this continued I¡¯m afraid this would take a while. ¡° Nanami said as she used her observation haki to see the situation outside the house.


    When the Daimyo found out how corrupt and cruel Danzo was, he had no face to talk to Izanami and ask for this matter to settle down peacefully. Previously he wanted to find if there is a way to avoid war as this may affect the Land of Fire¡¯s security.


    No matter what Konoha is still the force that is protecting the other countries from invading the Fire country. If Konoha is weakened too badly the other countries may have ideas of expanding their territory.


    For this, the Fire Daimyo wanted to negotiate with Izanami. If he couldn¡¯t avoid war he at the very least wanted to protect the Fire country from being affected by this war.


    But after learning this, how could he ask for anything? Anyone could tell that Hriuzen had turned a blind eye to Danzo¡¯s crimes which made him too arrogant. This may be one of the reasons why he dared to attack Izanami when he was still in the presence of Hiruzen.


    It may also be that Danzo is acting on Hiruzen¡¯s orders. And no matter what, all these reasons show that Izanami is a victim and has a legitimate reason to wage war. How could a direct descendant of the CEO of the World Bank be threatened when she was here to do her job?


    So the Daimyo was hesitating to go meet with Izanami. He didn¡¯t doubt that Izanami wouldn¡¯t know what was happening in Konoha. For god¡¯s sake even he learned of this matter when he was in this neighbourhood.


    The Daimyo was pretty sure Izanami has lost all hope in the Land of Fire. If a criminal like Danzo could be the Hokage assistant then what about others who are in high positions? Like they say alike people tend to stick together.


    Just as he was thinking about what to do the front door to the mansion opened. From it came Tengen. With calm steps, Tengen walked towards the Fire Daimyo.


    Seeing Tengen the fire daimyo¡¯s mind began to buzz with the intelligence he collected whileing here, ¡® Tengen Uzui a prodigy who was born in the Land of Iron. He is the youngest Hashira who was assigned to protect Lady Izanami under the orders of the Daimyo of the Land of Iron. ¡®


    ¡°Greeting Daimyo of the Land of Fire. ¡° Tengen said as he bowed with proper etiquette. Since he had been serving Iron Daimyo for a while he knew the proper manners when dealing with nobles.


    ¡°Oh If I am not wrong your name should be Tengen Uzi right? I have heard of you a couple of times ¡°The fire Daimyo said as he used his fan to cover half of his face. He has a calcting gaze as he looked at Tengen.


    ¡° I am honoured to be remembered by your Highness. But do pardon my rude behaviour, Your Majesty butdy Izanami said that she would like to meet you. ¡° Tengen said with a fake smile.


    He felt disgusted when the Daimyo¡¯s gaze washed over him. Although he is no mind reader he could see that this man didn¡¯t take him as a human being. His gaze was like he was evaluating an object. So that is why he quickly got to the point.


    ¡°I see then we better not keep Lady Izanami waiting ¡°Hearing Izanami wanted to meet him the Fire Daimyo didn¡¯t dare to wait a second.


    So under Tengen¡¯s guidance, he was escorted inside to a room where Izanami was. Izanami at this moment is sipping her tea at a leisurely pace. She only nced at the Fire Daimyo once before ignoring him.


    The Daimyo didn¡¯t take offence at her behaviour. How could he when he is here to beg for her forgiveness?


    ¡°Take a seat, we have some things to talk about, ¡°Izanami said with an indifferent tone.


    ¡°Yes of course ¡°The Daimyo said as he took a seat opposite Izanami.


    Izanami put away her teacup and said, ¡°I take it you are already informed of the recent happenings in Konoha. Especially about the crimes the Hokage assistant did¡°


    ¡°Yes, I have hearddy Izanami. I too was shocked when I heard about it at first, never have I realised how cruel a person could be ¡° The Fire Daimyo said while trying to act all surprised. Well, he honestly didn¡¯t know Danzo did all these so it wasn¡¯t that hard to act the part.


    ¡° I don¡¯t care whether you knew about it beforehand or not. What I see is a criminal who dared to threaten me is still on the loose. And it so happened that he had a whole list of crimes before this. ¡° Izanami said with a cold tone.


    ¡° I see, worry notdy Izanami. I have already ordered Hiruzen to capture that criminal. In just two days he would be at Lady Izanami¡¯s feet begging for forgiveness. ¡° the Fire Daimyo said with a bit of panic.


    ¡° He better be, ¡° Izanami spat as she red at the Daimyo.


    ¡° So what are you going to do about Hiruzen? In those fliers, it is said that he knew about everything his dear old friend did. ¡° Izanami asked as gave the fire Daimyo a look.


    As though he was understanding what to do he said, ¡° Of course he needs to be punished. Hiruzen is no longer fit to be Hokage. Lady Izanami would happen to have any suitable candidates. ¡°


    ¡°How about Tsunade? I don¡¯t think she is half bad. ¡°Izanami said as she looked at the peeking head of Tsunade a little wink while telepathically saying, ¡® Tsunade get ready, it''s time for you to take that mantle and protect your grandfather¡¯s legacy. ¡®


    ¡®Can I not be the Hokage and try to save my grandfather''s legacy? ¡® Tsunade asked with a bit of depression.


    Izanami smiled sweetly and said, ¡® No. ¡®


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 68

    Chapter 68


    Tsunade still felt like crying after remembering that conversation. Although she really loved her grandfather she really didn¡¯t want to be Hokage. That is just asking for hell. But unfortunately, the devil herself dered her fate and she is too powerless to do anything.


    ¡®Well I¡¯ll just y ording to what Izanamiu wants for now and when the situation here is stabilized I will immediately throw this mantle to a fool so I can live as freely as I want ¡® Tsunade thought with an evil smile.


    If Izanami had heard Tsunade¡¯s thoughts she would just shake her head in pity. Didn¡¯t Tsunade just raise a g? So now she would be the Hokage for a very long time.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡°As expected that monkey is too easy for an opponent. ¡° Izanami said as she watched the whole drama in the Hokage Office with her observation of Haki.


    Honestly speaking she was a bit shocked at how easily Hiruzen gave in when the pressure he felt increased. She thought he would at the very least hesitate when nominating Tsnade.


    ¡® Did his guilt finally get to him ¡® she wondered.


    While she was wondering this she felt a tug on her clothes. Coming out of her contemtion she found it was Naruto who was tugging at her clothes.


    She smiled at him and asked, ¡°What is the matter Naruto ¡°


    ¡°Big sis, can we go to the park today to y? ¡° Naruto asked with a bit of expectation. In the past, he didn¡¯t have anyone to y with because all the adults would take away their children when he came to the park. So he was always lonely. But now with big sister Izanami here he won¡¯t be lonely anymore.


    ¡° Oh since it is a request from sweet dear Naruto I can¡¯t refuse can I ¡° Izanami smiled and said to Naruto.


    ¡°Yay, I¡¯m going to the park with big sister Izanami. ¡°Naruto said excitedly as he jumped up and down.


    ¡° Oh, I know why don¡¯t we take the four animals with us too. I don¡¯t think they had any exercise for a while. ¡°Izanami said as she suddenly remembered this. Although none of them are normal animals for Naruto they are excellent ymates.


    And besides, Kaguya has been getting a little fattely. If this goes on she would be a fat rabbit that would only be good atzing around.


    ¡°Yay with all of us together it will be more fun. ¡° Naruto¡¯s excitement doubled when he heard he would be getting more ymates.


    ¡° Now then Naruto, why don¡¯t you fetch them so we can go immediately? "Hearing Izanami¡¯s words, Naruto saluted like a soldier and said, ¡°As you wish mam ¡° and then he immediately ran inside to fetch them all.


    After he left Izanami snapped her fingers and a Yokai member came out from her shadow. The yokai member knelt on one knee and bowed quietly waiting for Izanami¡¯s orders.


    ¡° Go and make sure none of the protesterse near the park and disturb my ydate with Naruto. It would be troublesome if those guys came and bothered me when I¡¯m at the park. ¡°Izanami said.


    ¡° As you wish Matriarch, ¡° the yokai member said she disappeared into the shadows again.


    After the yokai member disappeared Izanami stretched her body a bit. Honestly, she was a bit tired after all the scheming and plotting. So Naruto¡¯s suggestion of going to the park was a wee one. Even she liked to rx after a long day.


    ¡® I wonder what Kiyomi is doing now. She might be busy since everyone must be deployed to find Danzo. Speaking of Danzo, I need to find a good opportunity to secretly reveal his hiding spot. ¡® Izanami thought.


    ¡® Well, I will just leave it to Nanami to deal with it. That girl has endured long enough and it¡¯s time for her to take revenge. ¡® Izanami thought as she left the room.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ~ Uchiha n n meeting room ~


    ¡° So patriarch, what do you propose we do now? Do we support the new Hokage? ¡° one of the elders asked Fugaku.


    After the whole fiasco at the Hokage office, everyone returned to their respective ns to ry the information on what happened.


    Although everyone at that agreed to Tsunade¡¯s ascension as the Hokage some were still dissatisfied. Like the Uchiha n who always wanted to have a Hokage from their line.


    ¡° is that something to talk about we should naturally oppose her. If she were to be Hokage there would be three Senjus who became Hokage. How could allow another Senju to be a Hokage? I say we should select one from our n to be the Hokage. ¡° an elder from the radical faction said arrogantly.


    ¡° I say we forget about this matter for now. If we failed to capture Danzo, forget about being Hokage, even living in Konoha would be a pipe dream. ¡° one of the elders from the opposite faction said.


    ¡° huh do you truly think we would lose to the World Bank? That thought itself is absurd. We are the strongest hidden vige. We have battled every other ninja vige together and still emerged victorious. So how could we lose to a bank that is just run by a bunch of civilians. ¡° the radical elder said with disdain.


    And so an argument erupted. Both sides refused to submit to the other. But before everything escted to a full-blown fight Fugaku finally spoke, ¡° That is enough. All of you shut up ¡°. With his full aura released and Three Tomoe Sharingan opened he managed to silence the crowd.


    He looked at everyone and said, ¡°We will not oppose Tsunnade¡¯s ascension. As the peace faction said, now is not the time to fight for the Hokage position. If tried to show any opposition that would worsen the rtions we have with Konoha.


    And besides, isn¡¯t this a wonderful opportunity? For thest few years, Danzo Shimura and the others tried to suppress by doing many despicable things.


    They assassinated our n geniuses and forced us to go away from our ancestralnd. After all these actions fate is finally on our side.


    The higher-ups agreed that every ninja would put everything away and search for Danzo Shimura. Their only requirement was to bring him alive or half-dead. So if one of our men found him first the vige wouldn¡¯t mind us beating some sense to him ¡° Fugaku said with a cold smile.


    Simr smiles began to appear on the rest of the people. They could get what Fugaku was hinting at. Everyone here knows that almost all the problems they get are because of Danzo. So they wouldn¡¯t mind uniting against him.


    Itachi, who was also in the meeting room, looked at everyone with a nk look. ¡® It seems like I would be able to avenge Shisui sooner than I expected. ¡® he thought as his eyes shed with the Mangekyou pattern. Thankfully everyone was too excited to notice it.


    Yes unlike in the future Itachi who had to let go of his emotions of revenge for his brother¡¯s safety the Itachi now is brimming with killing intent for Danzo. It is because of him that he has lost his best friend.


    So the person who wanted to torture Danzo the most is undoubtedly Itachi. And it just so happens that he had the perfect technique to use on Danzo.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 69

    Chapter 69


    While the whole Konoha was at a boiling limit the kids were none the wiser all gathered in the yground to y. To them, they cared less about the stuff adults do. The only thing they cared about was what game they would y with their friends.


    Coming to the park Izanami saw that it was a bit more crowded than usual.


    Looking around she saw that many of these children were from ns. That is surprising since she didn''t think these kids woulde here during a time like this.


    What Izanami doesn''t know is that it was Tsunade who ordered the n children to go to the park today. Beforeing here she heard Naruto wanting to go to the park so knowing how doting Izanami is she spected that she would take Naruto to the park.


    Since this is a rare opportunity Tsunade said to the ns to send their children to the park and make friends with Naruto and possibly Izanami. That way maybe they could possibly have some more time to sort out the huge mess.


    Although the possibility of Izanami falling for their n is very low, Tsunade thought it is better than nothing.


    As for whether using her connection with Izanami to solve the problem, Tsunade never thought about it. If she had asked that of her Tsunade was sure Izanami would give her a thousand reasons she would not.


    What Tsunade didn¡¯t know was that if she asked nicely Izanami wouldn¡¯t mind extending the deadline she gave them. Not only would this help to solidify Tsunade¡¯s position, but it would also give them enough time to catch Danzo.


    ¡° So Naruto, now that we are here, what do you want to do first? ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at Naruto.


    ¡°I know why don¡¯t we go try the swing first, ¡° Naruto said excitedly. He always wanted to try the swing with his friends but unfortunately, no one wanted to be friends with him.


    ¡°Ok, ¡°Izanami said with a bit of emotion. She is finally going to see the legendary swing. The swing that has been a main part of the story.


    Arriving at the swing they saw it was free for anyone to use. Both of them hurriedly go there before someone else goes and tries the swing first.


    ¡° Ok Naruto, sit down immediately before someone elsees to im the swing. ¡°Izanami urged him to sit down immediately as she looked around.


    Naruto obediently sat down and then suddenly as though remembering something he asked Izanami, ¡°Big sis Izanami can you ride the swing with me? I saw some big brothers do it with their siblings so I was wondering whether we could do the same. ¡°His voice became more quiet as he finished his sentence.


    ¡°Oh you are so adorable, of course I can ride the swing with you, ¡° Izanami said with a smile. Then without further ado, she got on top of the swing with Naruto sitting near her legs.


    ¡° Ok Naruto I¡¯m going to start moving, you better hold on tight, ¡°Izanami said as she began to move forward and backward.


    Gradually the swing began to gain momentum and just in no time, it began to move high up in the air.


    ¡°Hahaha this is the best, ¡° Naruto said as he enjoyed the feeling of the wind hitting his face. Izanami too had a smile on her face. Riding a swing is one of the things one could do even if you are an adult.


    After both of them had their fun they got off the swing and let the other curious kids have their turn. After both of them sat on a bench Izanami asked, ¡°So what else do you want to do ¡°


    Naruto took a thinking posture and began to contemte and after a few minutes he said ¡°Hmm I didn¡¯t really think about that ¡°.


    Hearing his answer Izanami almost fell down the bench. She looked at him speechless and thought, ¡® Why the hell did you take that much time to say that then? Oh, wait isn¡¯t this normal for Naruto? I do vaguely remember Ashura was like this in the past too. ¡®


    ¡° Sigh says Naruto why don¡¯t you make some new friends? ¡° Izanami asked as she saw a look of loneliness sh through his eyes.


    ¡°But wouldn¡¯t they hate me if I tried to talk with them? ¡° Naruto asked hesitantly. In the past, he tried to make some friends but they started shouting at him calling him a monster and demon fox.


    Izanami gave him a reassuring smile and said, ¡° That¡¯s all in the past. If you are that unsure why don¡¯t you try it just this once for my sake? You will be surprised that not everyone would treat you like that. ¡°


    ¡°Ok ¡° Naruto agreed but his eyes were still filled with doubt. The past scars are very hard to erase so he didn''t have any expectations.


    ¡° Good, why don¡¯t you try talking to those three over there, ¡° Izanami said as she pointed to three familiar children who were sitting under a tree.


    There were two boys and one girl. The girl has short blonde hair with a hairclip on one side and blue eyes and is wearing a long-sleeved pink dress with a darker pink trim around the neckline and cuffs. She has a dark purple sash tied around her waist and a purple apron-like garment with a fringed hem over the dress. Her legs are covered with knee-high dark brown socks, and she wears open-toed sandals.


    Next to her, there were two boys. One was a boy with shoulder-length ck hair tied in a spiky ponytail, His brown eyes were filled withziness while the other was a boy with a rotund build and markings on his cheeks in the form of swirls. He has spiky, light brown hair that sticks upward. In his hands was a bag of chips that he was munching happily.


    The trio are the young generation of the Ino¨CShika¨CCh¨­. Their names are Ino Yamanaka, Shikamaru Nara, andstly Ch¨­ji Akimichi. The first friends Naruto made in the original story.


    They too were kicked out of their homes to go to y in the park under their parent''s orders. Although no one knew why they were kicked out they all thought this must have something to do with the iing war.


    And since Shikamaru thought doing anything would be a drag heid under a tree to continue his cloud-watching. And Ino and Choji also followed his lead as they too had nothing to do. Ino decided to make a flower crown while Choji just sat near Shikamaru and started eating his chips.


    Naruto looked at them and then at Izanami again. After hesitating a bit he walked towards the trio. The trio naturally noticed himing over but they didn¡¯t do anything. They just observed him with curiosity.


    Seeing them not showing any hostility, Naruto cheered up internally. In the past when he tried to approach someone they would either throw stones at him or stand up and walk away.


    After Naruto arrived near them he took a deep breath and said with his usual sunshine smile ¡°Hey my name is Naruto Uzumaki wanna be friends ¡°


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 70

    Chapter 70


    Time seems to stop for Naruto as he waited for any response. Ino , Shikamaru and Choji looked at each other before shikamaru introduced themselves.


    ¡°What¡¯s up names Shikamaru , this is Ino and Choji. As for bing friends, sure why not. Just don¡¯t make it such a drag ¡° Shikamaru said as he yawned.


    ¡°Shikamaru, that''s not very nice.¡± Ino said as she red at Shikamaru she then turned to Naruto and said with a smile¡± Ignore him, he is always like this. why don¡¯t you sit down first¡±


    ¡° Ok ¡° Naruto said with a bit of excitement. He was super happy to meet someone who would not be disgusted by the idea of being friends with him.


    After he sat down with them his attention was immediately caught by the bag of chips Choji was holding. Choji too seemed to notice his gaze as he looked at Naruto and then at the bag chips. This went on for a few times before he hesitantly offered his bag of chips to naruto.


    ¡°Here you can have some. There are spicy chicken vour ¡° Choji said with a forced smile. He really didn¡¯t like to share his chips with anyone but it would simply be too rude to Naruto if he gave him the cold shoulder.


    ¡°Thanks a lot, ¡° Naruto said with a happy smile. He has never eaten chips before so he was simply curious on how it tasted. ¡°Hmm this is super delicious I love it ¡° he praised as he gave Choji a thumbs up.


    ¡°I know right there is also Beef voured , Cheese voured and ¡­ ¡° Choji said as he excitedly exined the different vours to Naruto.


    ¡°Wow Shikamaru did you see that Choji is sharing his chips with someone ¡° ino said in amazement as she shook him violently to wake him up from his sleep.


    ¡°I can see that but Ino please stop shaking me. I''m about to faint from dizziness. ¡° Shikamaru said as he tried his best to escape Ino¡¯s clutches.


    ¡°Oops sorry about that, '''' Ino said as she realised that she might have shook Shikamaru too much.


    ¡° Sigh, what a drag ¡° Shikamaru said as he used the tree to save himself from the pain of falling down and hitting his nose.


    ¡° Say Naruto, tell us a bit about yourself, ¡° Choji asked as he finished his exnation. He got too excited a bit earlier. Since Ino and Shikamaru have no interest in food he as a food lover and a bit lonely. So when Naruto passed the chips he got excited to meet another food lover.


    ¡°Me huh. Mmm My name is Naruto Uzumaki. I used live at my apartment but now I live with big sis Izanami in her house. My favourite food is Ramen. And the ramen uncle Teuchi make at Ichiraku Ramen is the best. ¡° Naruto said as he wiped the drool that escaped his lips when he talked about Ichiraku Ramen.


    ¡°Ichiraku huh I heard of that ce. ording to my mom their ramen is something to die for ¡° Ino said as she joined the conversation. Although she didn¡¯t know much about food she heard of Ichiraku Ramen.


    ¡° Yeah, my parents talked about that ce too. ¡° Shikamaru too joined in. From his father he learned that ce was something they went to while he was dating my mom.


    ¡°Hey why don¡¯t we go there now. All this talking made me crave some ramen. ¡° Choji said as he rubbed his belly.


    ¡°That¡¯s great, I will show you the way. I¡¯m a regr there, ¡° Naruto said excitedly as he showed a sunny smile.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    While the four of them were chatting happily, Izanami was having a conversation on her own. Next to her was Nanami who appeared there at some point.


    ¡° We have delivered the information to Tsunade. Every secret base Danzo has will be raided in a few hours. If all goes ording to the n Dazno would be arrested and be publicly executed, ¡° Nanami said as she adjusted her sses.


    ¡° That is true but you and I both know nothing would go right in this cursed world, ¡° Izanami said as she narrowed her eyes.


    ¡°While that may be true with the preparation we made it would be impossible for him to escape. ¡° Nanami said as she furrowed her brows.


    ¡° Nothing is absolute Nanami. There may be numerous ways Dazno could escape from this situation. So keep an eye on him. Even if he was caught, don''t lower your vignce. Danzo has too many experiences dealing with the darkness so he may have enough trump cards to do aeback. ¡°Izanami warned.


    ¡° I will take note of that matriarch, ¡° Nanami said as she got up. Then after giving a small bow she walked towards a crowded ce and disappeared within the crowd in a second.


    ¡° Well, let¡¯s wait for what will happen in the future. Zetsu and Obito still haven¡¯t made their move after all. Danzo is the perfect pawn for them to weaken Konoha. ¡° izanami muttered as she got up from her seat.


    Then with a refreshing smile she turned to the four kids who came running near her.


    ¡°Big sis Izanami, can we go to Ichiraku Ramen, ¡° Naruto asked as he used his puppy dog eyes on Izanami.


    Izanami chuckled and said while ruffling his hair, ¡° Sure we can go and you don¡¯t need to use those puppy dog eyes to convince me ¡°


    And so the group of five headed towards Ichiraku Ramen. If one were to ignore Izanami¡¯s actual age they would look like five friends walking together.


    While they headed towards Ichiraku Ramen on the opposite side of the park , three people walked towards the park. All of three of them had white eyes signifying their identities as Hy¨±ga n members.


    The group consisted of two girls and one boy. If anyone who was familiar with the Naruto world they would immediately recognize two people in this group. The boy who is about 5-6 years old is the genius of the Hy¨±ga n, the son of Hizashi Hy¨±ga, Neji Hy¨±ga.


    Next to him was a young girl. If one were to describe in one word that would be ¡°a cute little rabbit ¡®. she held the hand of the other girl who is about the same age as Neji. This girl''s name is Hinata Hy¨±ga, the eldest daughter of Hiashi Hy¨±ga.


    Leading them was a girl who is about Neji¡¯s age. If Hinata could be considered innocent then this girl could be considered mature. Although that is quite ironic considering her age this is the impression she gives to anyone who meets her for the first time.


    As though sensing something the girl stoped and looked in a specific direction. Seeing her behaviour Neji asked puzzled, ¡°Is something the matter big sister? Why did you stop ¡°


    The girl shook her head and answered, ¡° it¡¯s nothing I just felt I sensed someone familiar ¡°. After turning around and looking at both of them in the eye she said, ¡°well enough that, remember why we came here. We came here to have fun. So for the rest of the day no need to keep up appearances. You can y at long as you want and of course eat as much as you want ¡°


    ¡° ¡°Ok big sister ¡° ¡° both Hinata and Neji nodded to her words.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 71

    Chapter 71


    ~ Hokage Office ~


    Tsunade looked at the squad captains who gathered in her office. Yes, her office. Although her coronation should be held tomorrow they didn¡¯t have the luxury to do that. So she directly kicked Hiruzen out of his office before he could pack his things.


    Fortunately, Tsunade didn¡¯t have time to inspect the drawers and hiddenpartments in the office or she would have beaten Hiruzen ck and blue just like how she would beat Jiraiya when she finds him doing something perverted.


    The old man may be the root cause of Jiraiya¡¯s pervertness.


    ¡°Is everything ready? This mission absolutely cannot fail no matter what ¡° Tsunade asked as she looked at them seriously.


    ¡°Yes, Hokage sama we have made sure everything is in order. ¡°Shikaku, who is appointed as themander for this operation, said seriously.


    For this mission, Tsunade appointed four captains and onemander. Themander is Shikaku Nara while the five captains are Kakashi Hatake, Fugaku Uchiha, Hiashi Hy¨±ga, andstly Hiruzen Sarutobi. Each captain would lead 25 members making it a total of 100 members.


    Each captain has a specific task assigned to them. For example, team Hiashi is the scout who would locate the enemies. Then team Fugaku would lead the charge. Team Kakashi has the duty of capturing Danzo while team Hiruzen would have the duty of supporting them.


    Yes, the team that was assigned the task of capturing Danzo was left to Kakashi and his members of Team Ro and not to Hiruzen Tsunade didn¡¯t trust the old man not to let Danzo escape. So she ordered his team to be the mod cleaner so Kakashi and the others could do their job perfectly.


    ¡° That''s good. Ok men, I''m gonna say this once again. Your mission is to capture Danzo. Whether he is dead or alive does not matter. But try your best to bring him alive so he can face justice. And even if you killed him, be sure to bring back his head. We need that to prove our innocence.


    As for the Root ninjas, you can deal with them as you like. If they are beyond redemption then do us all a favor and deal with them before they be a nuisance in the future.


    Do any of you have any more questions? ¡° Tsunade asked as she let her gaze wander.


    Hiruzen wanted to ask whether he could take the task of capturing Danzo but he didn¡¯t dare to speak when he felt Tsunade¡¯s re. He felt the world is unfair. How could his own students be this cruel to him?


    Seeing nobody have any other questions Tsunade nodded her head and said, ¡°Good now go. Bring victory to Konoha. ¡°


    ¡° Yes Hokage sama, ¡° everyone except Hiruzen said loudly. They knew the mission they are about to go on is more dangerous than fighting in any ninja wars as if they didn¡¯tplete this mission they wouldn¡¯t have a home to return to.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° Are both of you ready? ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at her opponents. On her right was Naruto who had his chopsticks at the ready. And on her left, there is Choji who looks like a wild bull who is about to go on his 1-kilometre run.


    In front of each of them was a bowl filled with ramen. The ramen was freshly made since you could see the hot steaming out of it.


    ¡°Well then in 3, 2, 1 go, ¡° Izanami said as she, Naruto, and Choji started eating.


    Naruto was like a wild beast as he charged at the ramen at an astonishing speed. Choji for the most part was like a vacuum cleaner gulping down everything on his te. And as for Izanami, she had the most elegance but her hands were moving at an astonishing speed leaving after images.


    And as though all three of them had discussed this beforehand they all put down their bowls at the same time. ¡° Seconds please, ¡°the three of them said in unison.


    ¡°Wow, that''s so cool, ¡° Ino said as she had stars in her eyes. ¡° How could you be so elegant while still eating that fast ¡° she asked as she looked at Izanami.


    Izanami puffed her chest and proudly said, ¡°Of course, it is because of practice. ¡°. Inwardly though she said, ¡®Well I had thousands of years to practice so this much is expected. ¡®


    ¡° Wow, I wish I could do that too, ¡°Ino said with a look of dejection. Even if she wanted to eat like that her stomach could not handle that. She is the type that would eat very slowly so as not to get choked.


    ¡° Sigh what a drag, can¡¯t you guys just eat like normal people ¡° Shikamaru remarked as he ate his ramen.


    Earlier Naruto and Choji got into a heated argument on who could finish their ramen cup the earliest. Izanami also got interested in this subject so she too joined thepetition.


    ¡°Shikamaru don¡¯t be rude. Not everyone iszy like you, ¡° Ino said as she scolded Shikamaru.


    ¡° Here are your orders ¡°While they were talking, Teuchi finished making their food and ced them in front of the glutenous trio.


    ¡° Well then round two begins, ¡° Izanami said as she picked up her bowl again. But just as she was about to start she got a telepathicmunication from Nanami.


    ¡® Matriarch Tsunade has made her move so it shouldn¡¯t be long before they attack Danzo in hisir. ¡® Nanami¡¯s voice rang in her head.


    Izanami not showing any abnormalities asked calmly, ¡® I see but I take this isn¡¯t the only reason you called me ¡®


    ¡® Yes, we have found Danzo¡¯s two bodyguards in Konoha. And it seems two of them managed to gather information about the attack on theirir. Should we apprehend them? ¡® Nanami asked.


    ¡® Hmm Ok. Capture both of them and hand them over to Tsunade. Tell her to interrogate them about how many secret passages Danzo has. Oh and before I forget crack that seal on their tongue before they couldmit suicide. ¡® Izanami said as she finished her bowl.


    ¡® As you wish Matirach ¡® Nanami said as she went back to work. She needs to find some reasonable excuse to go into the Hokage Office without alerting anyone. She can¡¯t just dump two bodies in the Office and be done with that.


    After finishing her conversation with Nanami, Izanami fell into a bit of contemtion. She had this feeling that something terrible would happen soon.


    Deciding to trust her instincts, Izanami got up from her seat. She looked at Naruto apologetically and said, ¡° Sorry Naruto but I just remembered that I have some important work to do. So I would have to go now.


    You can go back home after spending enough time with your friends. ¡°


    ¡° Ahh, is it really that important?¡± Naruto asked dejectedly. He looked like an abandoned puppy.


    ¡° Yes it is really important so sorry, but don''t I promise you I will make up for it next time. ¡° Izanami said with a helpless smile.


    ¡° Ok, ¡° Naruto said with a bit of sadness. He then started to eat even faster to wash away this sadness.


    Giving Naruto another smile Izanami turned to Teuchi and said, ¡° Teuchi you can add the food these guys order to my ount. ¡°


    ¡° Ok,dy Izanami. ¡° Teuchi said with a smile.


    If it was any other person Teuchi would argue with them to pay even if the person is the Hokage himself. But Izanami is a special guest who helped him greatly so Teuchi would naturally help her too.


    And with her work done Izanami worked out of the restaurant and disappeared into the crowd.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 72

    Chapter 72


    In the Land of Fire not far from Konohagakure in the shadows hundreds of ninjas surrounded a waterfall that seemed natural at first nce. But behind this waterfall is the secret base where Danzo Shimura, the true darkness of Konoha, is hiding.


    Hiashi, who is leading the scout team, signalled his men topletely map out the terrain. They cannot let Danzo escape from here so Shikaku ordered that no one would make a move until every exit is secured.


    After a few minutes Hiashi presented a small map to Shikaku. After ncing at it for a few times Shikaku swiftly divided everyone into a few teams to secure the exits. After all his men were in position Shikaku gave the order to attack.


    The Uchiha n was the first to make a move as they attacked each entrance with their signature Great FireBall Jutsu. Behind them the Anbu ninjas were the second to move. They swiftly dealt with the Root members who were caught in the fire st and advanced forward.


    Hiashi and his n members were like guides as they walked through the enemy base like it was a walk in the park. Of course this is only possible because the Uchiha members were like war machines as they harvested the lives of every root member who came their way.


    But even the Uchiha n paled inparison when the two Anbu ninjas made their move. One was a silver haired man who had his signature lightning jutsu gathered in his hand while the other. A 13 year old kid who had his short swords at the ready while his Three Tomoe Sharingan spin like crazy.


    Both of them were like death gods as they killed many Root ninjas in a matter of seconds. The Root ninja squad captain who was brainwashed to be emotionless were terrified as they watched the duo kill off all his men.


    And before he could even move he too was killed by them in the next second. Inst breath he only heard the chirping of a thousand birds.


    Shikaku who also saw this frowned as he contemted, ¡® why are these two so active? I can understand kakashi somewhat but why is Itachi also this aggressive? Is he angry because of what Danzo did to the Uchiha n? ¡®


    But after a few seconds he shook his head and thought, ¡® well it doesn¡¯t matter. As long as those two don¡¯t hinder the mission I shouldn¡¯t interfere. ¡®. After surveying the battlefield again Shikaku ordered,¡± Team Ro continue your advance and leave the rest to the third Hokage¡¯s team. ¡°


    He then turned to Inoichi and said, ¡° Make sure the other teams have continuousmunication. We can¡¯t let Danzo get away by any of those exits. ¡°


    ¡° I know that¡¯s why I¡¯m constantly checking everyone every few seconds. ¡° Inoichi said with a serious expression.


    While Kakashi and the rest continued on the offensive he and the Yamanaka n members are doing their best to keep the informationwork running. In this situation every second counts so as soon as one of them spotted Danzo the whole team would be there in a second to capture him.


    While Konoha ninjas were advancing at a rapid pace inside the base, Danzo, the owner of the hidden base was not having a good time.


    Everything happened so fast that he was too stunned to do anything. He was just as usual in his seat thinking of a perfect n to take his revenge when he was suddenly informed that his base was being surrounded by Konoha ninjas.


    Danzo had a million questions and those were, ¡® how did they find this ce? Why wasn¡¯t he aware of this n? How did theye here undetected until now ? ¡®. But sadly there is no one who could answer Danzo.


    Danzo for the first time of his life was panicking like crazy. His strongest bodyguards are not with him as he had sent them on a mission. Furthermore, since it has not been more than a few days since he came to this base , he was not able to prepare many traps like he would do in any of his secret bases.


    Now he is like a mouse that is trapped in a cage waiting for the cat to slowlye and eventually devour him whole.


    ¡°I refuse to go down like this. I will be Hokage. ¡° Danzo said as his eyes grew colder and more insane.


    ¡°Go and kill all the intruders. No matter who dies I want them all dead. ¡° Danzo said as he ordered his remaining men go on a suicide mission.


    ¡°Yes Lord Danzo ¡°they all said as they rushed towards the battleground. They didn¡¯t feel anything as Danzo sacrificed them. In the root emotions are no longer something they could have.


    After they left Danzo began to walk to a nearby wall. After injecting a bit of his chakra and doing a few hand signs he opened a secretpartment in his office. If one were to look inside it they would have been traumatised for life.


    Inside there are numerous ss containers that are filled with a green liquid. And what¡¯s terrifying is that in that liquid there is a pair of eyes. And these are not just any eyes, they are Sharingans.


    And in thatpartment there are about 50 of these bottles. And apart from these ss containers ,there are several misceneous objects like cash and several scrolls packed in the corner.


    This is Danzo¡¯s secret stash. The only thing he is reluctant to part with. And this is why he is taking all of this before escaping from this ce.


    Although Danzo was on the verge of insanity he still had the rationality to understand that he has no chance in killing everyone who came to capture him. So that is why he would escape for now and have his revenge on themter.


    Just as he was about to collect everything a chilling voice was heard behind him, ¡° My my that¡¯s quite the collection. The darkness of Konoha truly lived up to his fame. ¡°


    It took Danzo less than a second to react as he threw a kunai at the enemy who was behind him. But much to his surprise the Kunai went through him without leaving any injuries.


    ¡°Oh how scary, ¡° Obito said with usual jovial tone.


    Danzo narrowed his eyes as he looked at the masked man with heightened vignce. He recognized the uniform he was wearing, ¡°Akatsuki ¡° Danzo said with a grave tone. He still remembered the day he witnessed the true terror of that Uzumaki brat.


    And looking at the sharingan on his eye Danzo also released something else. ¡° You , you are the one who attacked Konoha by controlling the nine tails ¡°


    ¡° Yes, that¡¯s right. My name is Madara Uchiha it i who controlled the nine tails that day ¡° Obito said with an arrogant tone.


    Hearing his words Danzo grew even more warrier. He didn¡¯t know why this person came here but he knows that it isn¡¯t anything that would help him. Furthermore he maye here to take revenge on him for what he did to the Akatsuki in the past.


    ¡° Oh don¡¯t be afraid. I¡¯m not here to take revenge, in fact I¡¯m here to offer you a deal, ¡° Obito said with a cold smile that Danzo couldn¡¯t see because it was covered by his mask.


    Danzo narrowed his eyes but he still lowered his weapon. He looked at Obito and said, ¡° I¡¯m listening. ¡°


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 73

    Chapter 73


    ¡° We have found Danzo¡¯s chakra signature. He is at a distance of 100 meters. ¡° one of the Hyuuga members said as he spotted Danzo¡¯¡¯s chakra signature up ahead.


    ¡°Everyone speed up. Leave these men to the third Hokage¡¯s team ¡° Kakashi ordered as rushed toward the direction the sensor ninja pointed.


    Behind him, all the members of the team Ro advanced. They even ignored the root members who they were fighting a moment ago. Fortunately, Hiruzen¡¯s team was there to cover them or the root ninjas may go to court for being abandoned suddenly.


    ¡° He is over there, ¡° the sensory ninja said as he pointed to a corridor. Looking at that direction Itachi did some hand signs and shouted, ¡° Fire Style Fire Dragon me ¡°


    A torrent of mes came out of Itachi¡¯s mouth. The mespletely lit up the dark corridor. The mes destroyed everything in their path.


    ¡°Wind Style violent whirlwind ¡°a gloomy voice was heard. A massive whirlwind came rushing at the firestorm and canceling each other.


    ¡° Everyone gets into position, the target has arrived, ¡° Kakashi ordered as he looked at Danzo who wasing towards them.


    ¡° Danzo you have been surrounded. It is in your best interest if youe with us without any resistance. ¡° Although Kakashi said this, even he didn¡¯t believe Danzo would agree to do this. And even if the off chance he agreed Kakashi would still attack him.


    For cornering his father intomitting suicide Danzo must pay the price. So even if he couldn¡¯t kill him Kakashi would still cut a limb or two as revenge.


    ¡°Heh, who do you think you are brat? I am Danzo Shimura who gave you the courage to speak to me like this ¡° Danzo sneered at the audacity of these people. He is someone who could fight Hriuzen on equal terms. How dare they think of arresting him.


    ¡°Wind style: Vacuum de ¡° Danzo shouted as he attacked.


    ¡°Earth style: earth wall ¡° two of the Anbu ninjas shouted in unison as they blocked the wind des.


    ¡° water style: hydro st ¡° another Anbu ninja shouted as he attacked Danzo at the same time to catch him off guard.


    Unfortunately, Danzo was a war veteran so he won''t go down that easily. ¡°Summoning Jutsu ¡°.


    A huge cloud of smoke erupted as Danzo¡¯s summoning beast Baku appeared. Due to hisrge size the roof of the secret cave was destroyed and rocks fell down towards the Anbu ninja.


    ¡° Wood Style: Wood Shield ¡° Yamato quickly did some hand signs and made a huge shield to protect them from the falling debris.


    ¡° Baku kill them ¡° Danzo ordered as he prepared to leave. With Baku, he could escape this ce.


    ¡° Amaterasu ¡° Itachi said as he used Amaterasu on Baku. Since this was the first time he used the Mangekyou Sharingan his eyes began to bleed and he held his right eye in pain.


    While his teammates were stunned Danzo who saw the Mangekyou Sharingan pattern on Itachi''s eyes shouted, with eyes filled with greed ¡° Mangekyou, you evil Uchiha you don¡¯t deserve such power. ¡°


    He decisively tore upon the bandage wrapped in his arm revealing an arm that was pale white and has three Three tomoe Sharingan embedded on it.


    Seeing this everyone took a step back in disgust. Danzo looked hideous like a monster. And amongst them, the Uchiha n members were burning with rage. How Danzo got those sharingans is something everyone could think of.


    ¡° Fire release: raging fire dragon, ¡° Iatchi said as he attacked more aggressively. He and Shisui made countless efforts to stabilize the situation in the n and the vige. But while they are doing this Danzo kills many of their n members disrupting their efforts.


    So apart from avenging Shisui itachi has another objective in mind. And that is to kill Danzo so he won¡¯t hinder their efforts again.


    ¡° Wood style: wood dragon jutsu ¡°Facing Itachi¡¯s attack Danzo decided to no longer hold back. He needs to make things quick and collect Itachi¡¯s Mangekyou Sharingan before Hiruzen shows up.


    With another Mangekyou Sharingan in his hands, his strength would be more than enough for his future ns. Although his root is destroyed he could always make another one from the sleeper agents he ced in various nations.


    ¡° Everyone get back Rikiri, ¡° Kakashi ordered as he used his most powerful attack to destroy the wood dragon. His face was very grim behind the mask. He never thought Danzo could use Wood style. And it seems his wood style is more powerful than Yamato¡¯s.


    At Kakashi''s orders, everyone backs down immediately. They didn¡¯t dare to underestimate Danzo¡¯s attack. This is the legendary wood style. The first Hokage dominated the whole ninja world with this style.


    And they were not wrong. Due to the special property of absorbing chakra upon contact, wood style is very hard to counter. This is shown when Kakashi had used a S-rank jutsu to just to counter the Wood dragon.


    ¡° Wind Style: Vacuum des, ¡° Danzo said as he threw many shurikens at the Anbu Ninjas.


    The shurikens empowered by the wind chakra rushed towards the Anbu ninjas at an impressive speed. Although one could see that they were specifically targeting one person.


    ¡° Earth style: Mud wall ¡°Several mud walls came out of the ground anbu ninjas used mud walls to block the wind des while Itachi used his crow clone substitution to get away.


    ¡° Everyone attack at once, ¡° Kakashi ordered. He decided that they would go nowhere if this battle continued.


    ¡° Wind style: wind des¡±


    ¡°Fire style: dragon bullet ¡°


    ¡°Water style: water dragon bullet ¡°


    ¡° earth style: rock bullet ¡°


    ¡°Wood style: great forest technique ¡°


    Numerous attacks came down on Danzo. Seeing no ce to dodge, Danzo decided to defend. Danzo¡¯s right arm became a gigantic tree and blocked all the attacks that were aimed at him.


    While they were fighting Nanami and the youkai members who were still hiding in the shadows frowned looking at Danzo. Although it was subtle they could feel Danzo had changed. From what they have gathered Danzo isn¡¯t a person who would go on a frontal attack like this.


    He is like a poisonous coward who would only dare to take action himself if he had 100% confidence his n would seed. But Nanami is so puzzled by how he has the confidence to defeat the elite Anbu ninja team by himself.


    What¡¯s more, destroying his chance to escape is really worth it for just two Mangekyou eyes. No matter how you look at it, it really isn¡¯t worth it.


    Forget about getting the Mangekyou, can he even imnt them in such a short amount of time? If he decided to imnt one in his other eye he would simply die of chakra exhaustion as there is no seal to temporarily close it like what Kakashi does.


    ¡® what is this guy nning ¡® Nanami thought with a grim expression. It is at these times she really wishes she had Izanami¡¯s ability to predict what a person thinks.


    After all, if they don¡¯t know the situation clearly they couldn¡¯t possibly spring into action. Japan is hidden from the rest of the world for a reason. A person like Danzo should not be allowed to know of its existence unless he dies.


    And from the looks of it, he has absolute confidence to escape from this situation. And Nanami wanted to know how he was going to do that.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 74

    Chapter 74


    In the end, Nanami finally understood a part where Danzo got his confidence. From the beginning to the end, he didn¡¯t use Izanagi. So his escape method should be the same as what Uchiha Madara used.


    After finding this the situation made more sense to Nanami. If he is able to fake his own death then he couldy low for a few years and rebuild his own army so he could take revenge again.


    ¡° What are your orders madam? ¡° one of the Yokai members asked as they looked at Nanami.


    Nanami thought about it before saying, ¡°Let¡¯s go and take everything Danzo has stored in this base. That way even if he escapes from Konoha he would be crippled without any funds or equipment to start his revenge n.


    ¡°But before that let¡¯s finish this boring fight. Injure him as much as you like, Oh, and don¡¯t forget to put the tracker on him ¡° Nanami said with a cold smile.


    ¡°As you wishdy Nanami ¡°The Yokai members nodded as one of them began to grow small into the size of an ant. Then another began to dissolve into a mist.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    On the battlefield, the fight was at its peak. Although Danzo had not fought recently his experience and straight was not something to be underestimated. And Dnzo, who has the habit of wanting to know everything, has enough information about Team Ro.


    So even when he is surrounded by them he isn''t suppressed. The only thing slowing him down is his chakra capacity. Not everyone is like Naruto who could make thousands of shadow clones at once and remake them again after they were defeated.


    And since they were continuously fighting for at least half an hour Danzo was running very low on Chakra. So apart from the wind des, he didn''t have enough chakra to use anymore jutsus.


    Just like how Danzo knew he was at his limit, Kakashi and the others also knew this fact. So they began to attack more aggressively.


    Just as everything was at a stalemate Danzo suddenly felt his body be more sluggish as time went by.


    And at the same time, he felt his footing suddenly bing unstable.


    Thispletely caught Danzo off guard leading to him showing a gap in his defence. And this gap was quickly exploited by Kakashi and Itachi.


    ¡° Tsukuyomi ¡° Itachi said as he used his other Mangekyou Ability on Danzo. Danzo¡¯s consciousness was trapped in a world of Genjutsu and he was tortured repeatedly by Itachi. And when Danzo was finally able to break out he was once again met with another attack.


    A thousand birds chirping was heard as Danzo¡¯s chest was pierced by Kakashi''s chidori. ¡°You bastards ¡° That was all Danzo could say before he fell towards the ground lifeless.


    ¡° Someone bring a storage scroll so we can take the body away, ¡° Kakshi said weakly. His chakra is almost exhausted. If the fight goes on even further he would be the first one to run out of juice.


    At Kakashi¡¯s words, someone brought a storage scroll and stored Danzo¡¯s dead body away. He then quickly put away the scroll.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go now. Others would do the clean up ¡° Kakashi said as he and his team flickered away.


    After they left the space began to fluctuate as Obito came out of his Kamui dimension. ¡° Fools believing everything they see as reality ¡°


    ¡°Yes, that''s true but is it really worth it? Nagato won¡¯t allow him to join the Akatsuki, ¡° a voice said as ck Zetsu came out of the ground.


    ¡°Who said he needs to join the Akatsuki? We only need to make sure he is alive so he can continue to weaken Konoha. And when we finally start our tail beast capture n Konoha will be too weak to deal with us. ¡° Obito said as he chuckled.


    ¡° That¡¯s true, ¡° ck Zetsu said as he agreed with Obito¡¯s n. Danzo is a fool that would even beat Uchiha in foolishness so it would be a waste not to make use of him.


    ¡°What are you gonna do about the new Mangekyou sharingan? ¡° ck Zetsu suddenly asked. He knew Obito was closely monitoring Itachi Uchiha.


    ¡° Oh, Itachi. I was thinking of using him to weaken the Uchiha n but with all of Danzo¡¯s crimes in the light, he may have grown a pair of brains. But no matter what, I will think of a way to make use of him. He is a much-needed piece for our tail beast capture n. ¡° Obito said with a bit of annoyance. Itachi was a great pawn he was cultivating so he could get some extra sharingans.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡°This is getting moreplicated than I thought ¡° Izanami muttered as she felt a headacheing over. She leaned on the tree and closed her eyes to think about the situation more clearly.


    She came here to ensure Nanami and the others'' safety. Danzo can be considered the next best person after Orochimaru in terms of nning. So who knows what kind of traps he may set up?


    So just in case she arrived here sat on top of a big tree where she could ess the secret base immediately when necessary. With her observation Haki all over the ce nothing could escape her notice.


    And although she expected it she was really surprised that Obito would go out of his way to create an escape path for Danzo. This made her ns a bitplicated. Should she let him live so he would go for the Uchiha massacre which would allow her to bring the whole Uchiha n to Japan or should she kill him now so he won¡¯t be a bother in the future?


    She did put a seal on Shisui¡¯s stolen eye so she could make sure his death was done swiftly.


    But she also wants to see whether Itachi would go down the path of n yer even after all of this. With Tsunade as the Hokage, she doubted she would issue such an order as Hiruzen would.


    ¡° Well, let¡¯s just let fate take its course for now. ¡°Izanami said as she finally decided to do nothing. If she met Danzo in the future he would die and the Uchiha would be staying with Konoha.


    And she is quite curious about what Nanami will do to Danzo when this whole mess is over. That girl put a tracker on him for a reason after all.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 75

    Chapter 75


    ¡°We have seeded in our mission Hokage sama ¡° Kakashi and his team Ro knelt down as they presented the scroll containing Danzo¡¯s dead body. As soon as they finished storing Danzo¡¯s body they rushed here as soon as possible. So a few of them still had blood flowing on their fresh wounds.


    Tsunade tried her best to stop herself from fainting from the hemophobia. Although izanami helped her suppress it during her stay in japan she is still not cured fully as she would try to faint from time to time after seeing blood. ording to izanami, unless she has a very good catalyst, she would be like this for the next 10 years.


    ¡°Good , you all take a good rest. I will inform others about the sess of the mission. I will give out rewards for your contribution tomorrow after we stop this meaningless war. ¡° Tsunade said as she confirmed Danzo¡¯s body.


    Now with the Daimyo as the witness she could finally stop this farce Izanami started. After that she would have to do damage control due to the problems Danzo has caused due to his many crimes.


    ¡®Uggh why did i have to ept this position, There is nothing but work for me to do all day. Except for a workaholic no one would want this damn position. ¡® Tsunade grumbled inwardly.


    ¡° Shizune send someone to call for the Daimyo and Izanami. We can finally stop this foolish war. ¡° Tsunade said as she looked at Shizune, her unofficial secretary.


    ¡°Yes Tsunade sama ¡° Shizune nodded as she went to find someone to ry Tsunade¡¯s message.


    ¡°No need I¡¯m already here ¡° but before Shizune could leave the room Izanami came inside. After disarming the explosion traps, ck Zetsu set up secretly behind Obito¡¯s back, Izanami came here directly. That bastard wanted to cause more chaos by killing many elite ninjas at once.


    It was at these times izanami wondered whether Obito really had no brains. I mean that bastard didn¡¯t even hide the fact he was acting on his own.


    ¡® sigh Uchiha are really so narrow minded that they cannot even understand the obvious ¡® Izanami thought with a sigh. This is something she had to begrudgingly agree with ck Zetsu. They are too easy to deceive.


    ¡° Did you put a bug in my office? ¡° Tsunade asked with a raised eyebrow. The timing is too perfect for it to be a coincidence.


    ¡°Woah there calm your horses . I didn¡¯t put a bug in your office, I just came when I sensed Kakashi and his teaming back to the vige, ¡° Izanami said immediately. ¡® And besides if I really want to hear or see what you are doing in your office all I have to do is use my Observation Haki. In the whole vige there is no ce where my observation haki cannot cover. ¡® she thought internally.


    ¡° I see, ¡° Tsunade said but her eyes still held a bit of suspicion. Izanami could only smile wryly at this, why can¡¯t anyone take her words at face value. Is she that untrustworthy?


    If anyone in Japan were to hear this they would unanimously say ¡° yes ¡°. when ites to shamelessness if izanami were to say she is second no one would dare say they are first. Her shamelessness so much that even when she is caught doing something she would not admit it even against the evidence.


    So citizens of Japan were already ustomed to izanami saying she was doing something to prank them andter saying she was innocent. She has the original will of Stone that Onoki is looking for.


    After a few minutes the Fire Daimyo arrived. And with him as the witness Izanami dered the stop of the uing war. And before both of them could sigh in relief Izanami said that they would take drastic measures if Konoha is unable to pay the debt they owe.


    This of course made Tsunade want to fight with Izanami. Couldn¡¯t she say this when the Fire Daimyo isn¡¯t here ? and what¡¯s with that threat ? did she really think Konoha would dare to not pay the World Bank after all this ?


    But to Tsunade¡¯s surprise the Fire Daimyo didn¡¯t blow up like she expected him to. He even said he would support them a little by increasing the budget. This made Tsunade very d and very suspicious. This is too good to be true.


    ¡® I should ask what the hell is happening from Izanami when I go back home ¡® Tsunade thought as she made a mental note.


    Tsunade tapped her fingers on the desk in a certain pattern. And in the next moment a Anbu ninja arrived in front of her.


    ¡° Here take this and give this body for the Intelligence department. Tell them to pry open Danzo''s brain and collect as much information as possible. Or while you are on the way tell them that I want the report about those two root ninjas I captured this morning, ¡° Tsunade said as she handed the scroll to the Anbu ninja.


    ¡° Yes Hokage sama ¡° the Anbu ninja said as he bowed and left the Hokage tower.


    ¡°Oh right, gotta send someone to give the announcement that this war is over ¡° Tsunade said as realised she had almost forgotten to do this.


    ~ The next day ~


    Izanami hummed a tune as she read the newspaper. Although this newspaper doesn¡¯t include any important information, business owners like to promote their goods by putting ads.


    And today¡¯s headline is ¡® The war that was about to start was over. ¡®. Izanami didn¡¯t know who the writer was but she had to admit that this guy managed to write a fantastic article. He made this so that this article would show how cruel Danzo is while highlighting Tsunade¡¯s good qualities. After many people read this Tsunade¡¯s fame may have risen to a level her grandfather had.


    ¡°Big sis Izanami, can''t we do something else for our training? Meditating is boring, ¡° Naruto said as heid on the ground cross legged.


    Izanami sighed as she said, ¡° Naruto, it hadn''t even been 15 minutes. You need to at least meditate for an hour a day. ¡°


    ¡°But it¡¯s so boooring ¡° Narutoined as he gave his puppy dog eyes to try to win over Izanami.


    ¡° Sigh well If you are that bored then there is one other way you could train ¡° Izanami said as she remembered something Ashura would do when they were young.


    ¡° You won''t beat me likest time, right ¡° Naruto asked fearfully as he remembered what happenedst when he slept during meditation. Izanami made him fight her for hours straight.


    ¡° No it¡¯s not like that ¡° Izanami said as she got up from her seat.


    ¡°Try to follow my movements as much as you could, ¡° Izanami said as she began to do a dance every avatar fan would know. The moves she was using are the moves you would need to practise bending styles.


    If there were some special effects like water, fire, earth and air then they could say they are the avatar.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 76

    Chapter 76


    While Naruto and Izanami were doing their exercises, Tsunade, Shizune, Tengen, and Shisui looked at them with a weird look. It¡¯s just to them what those two were doing seemed to be a weird dance.


    ¡° Do you know what those two are doing? ¡°Tsunade asked as she turned to Nanami.


    Nanami shook her head and said, ¡° yes, although I haven¡¯t seen that exercise I could somewhat guess what it would do. ¡°. With her enhanced senses she could feel the chakra slowly being guided into their chakra points.


    ¡°They are opening the chakra points in their bodies. Normally chakra points would open as someone aged with their continuous use of chakra. But with that exercise, the process is being done at a faster pace. ¡° Nanami exined.


    ¡°But isn¡¯t forcibly opening chakra points a dangerous thing? If one were to damage their chakra points they would be forced to stop using chakra their whole lives. ¡° Tsunade said as she frowned. As a medical ninja, she knew how delicate a chakra point is.


    The chakra path is like a circuit. If one ce is damaged the whole body would not be able to use the chakra paths again. And if you try to force it you would be having so much internal damage that you would be at death¡¯s door in a matter of minutes.


    And apart from the most experienced Hyuga, no one would dare try to mess with their chakra points.


    ¡° You are not wrong but not correct either. Although chakra points are a delicate thing, they are also very flexible. What Izanami is doing is guiding the spiritual and physical energy inside of Naruto to flow in a way that they would mix automatically and be released from the body after going through the chakra points. She is making his body remember the feel of gathering chakra. ¡° Kaguya who waszing on the sofa exined in azy tone.


    That exercise is something Ashura found out when he was still learning hand seals. ording to him, he wanted to make it look more cool. Although his experiment ended with failure he inadvertently managed to create a very interesting way to refine chakra.


    Others hearing Kaguya¡¯s words were stunned. Isn¡¯t this exercise something very valuable? Children no longer needed to force themselves to meditate every day for a long time. With this exercise, they could refine chakra at a faster speed with full concentration.


    ¡° Whoever found this method is a genius, ¡° Shisui said, making not only Kaguya but even Izanami, who was eavesdropping on their conversation almost trip.


    ¡®Well he was a genius whose test scores were way lower than Obito when he was a kid ¡® Izanami thought as she remembered the day Ashura was just a foolish kid.


    Although she didn¡¯t know whether it was fate but every Ashura reincarnation is very stupid in their childhood. And when she meant stupid she meant the kind who would rather run around and fight than read a book.


    They never change that habit until they are old. Izanami tried it and still didn¡¯t get any positive results.


    This is why when Naruto asked for another method to train Izanami didn¡¯t argue with him. She knew this guy would not change his habits even if she beat him till he was half dead.


    ¡° did you memorise the moves ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at Naruto.


    ¡°Hmm ¡° Naruto nodded as he began to do the exact moves Izanami just did. Although there were some mistakes, Izanami was there to correct them so gradually he began to get more proficient.


    Unknowingly time went by and the training lesson was over. Since it was close to noon Izanami and Naruto went inside to eat lunch.


    Arriving at the dining room, Izanami found that Tsunade and Shizune were missing. ¡° Didn¡¯t Tsunade and Shizunee back yet for lunch? ¡° she asked as she looked at Nanami who was setting up the table.


    ¡° Tsunade sent a letter saying that she and Shizune would not be present for lunch. She said that there was a ceremony in the Hokage tower to reward the ninjas who participated in yesterday¡¯s mission. ¡° Nanami exined.


    ¡° oh I see ¡°Izanami nodded while inwardly thinking, ¡®Should I go there to have fun? Nah I would just be a party pooper. But should I go there in disguise? Nah too much work. I should just stay at home. ¡®


    ¡° Izanami sama, are you free this evening? ¡° Tengen suddenly asked, making Izanamie out of her thoughts.


    Izanami looked at him and said, ¡°Yeah I currently free whatcha need. Oh and for your information I¡¯m lesbian so I won¡¯t date you ¡°


    ¡°What¡¯s a lesbian ¡° Naruto asked innocently.


    ¡°Go ask your mother Naruto I¡¯m sure she will give you an exnation, ¡° Izanami said with a mischievous smile.


    ¡°Okay," Naruto nodded, not knowing Kushina would beat him for trying to learn something he should not be knowing till he is an adult.


    ¡°Hahaha well I just want to ask for some guidance on my sword training, ¡° Tengen said with a wryugh not knowing whether tough or cry.


    ¡°Hmm sure I can do that, ¡° Izanami nodded, agreeing to Tengen¡¯s suggestion. It¡¯s been a while since shest taught someone Kenjutsu.


    ¡°Thank you very muchdy Izanami ¡° Tengen said as he bowed excitedly. He knew how precious getting learning tips from the Founder of Demon yer Corp is. He could brag about it for his whole life.


    After their small talk, everyone sat down and ate lunch together, After eating their meals Tengen and Izanami excused themselves as they went towards the backyard.


    ¡°Okay first have a small spar with me. That way I can understand what ces you arecking ¡° Izanami said as she brought a wooden sword that was there on the side.


    ¡°Should I use wooden swords too? ¡° Tengen asked as he looked at Izanami¡¯s wooden sword.


    ¡°No, don''t bother. Come at me with your usual swords. Since those are something you are most familiar with, your true fighting style can only be brought out when you are using them, ¡° Izanami exined as she did some practice swings.


    ¡°Yesdy Izanami ¡° Tengen nodded as she sheathed his twin des. His weapons were two gigantic Nichirin cleavers that were amber in color. The des each have a notch in the cutting edge and are held together by a metal chain, making it very reminiscent of nunchucks.


    ¡°Oh remember not to hold back, ¡° Izanami said as she gave a smile that was filled with coldness to Tengen. She knew Tengen is someone who liked to show off so he would first go easy and then gradually strengthen his attacks. He is the type of person who wants the other party to realize that he is getting stronger during the fight.


    Well during a fight that may be a good move as it would allow you to catch the opponent off guard. But now since we are just training, this time hobby shouldn¡¯t be allowed at all.


    Tengen shivered and nodded repeatedly, ¡° I will definitely give it my all Lady Izanami, ¡° he said almost immediately.


    ¡°Here Ie, ¡°Tenegen said as he dashed towards Izanami in a sh. He wielded his des and was about to behead Izanami in a matter of a second.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 77

    Chapter 77


    Facing the des that were nearing her neck Izanami showed no panic. She calmly lowered her center of gravity and crouched down a little. The de passed away harmlessly. Izanami then swung her wooden sword hitting Tengen in the abdomen.


    Due to Izanami using a bit more strength than usual, Tenegen was blown away. He took a few steps back while holding his abdomen in pain. His heart was very shaken at this moment.


    Although he knew Izanami was a great master swordsman he never expected he would be defeated in one blow. If Izanami¡¯s sword was a real one then he would be split in half.


    ¡°You are using too much of your concentration on your first move. Due to this, your focus is lost resulting in you being in a perfect state to be ambushed. ¡° Izanami said as instructed Tengen of his weakness.


    ¡° Instead of that, you could do this. While you are attacking with a de to the head, use the other to block any attacksing from below. You could also attack the top and bottom at the same time to make up for your weakness, ¡° Izanami then added her suggestion. As a twin sword user herself, Izanami knew how to deal with these situations.


    ¡° I see, ¡° Tengen said as he took a deep breath to prepare himself again. He then narrowed his eyes and attacked Izanami again. But this time he used his twin swords to attack from the top and bottom at the same time. Just like how Izanami instructed him to do.


    ¡° Good, ¡° Izanami said as she blocked one sword while sidestepping to evade the other. Then she used that momentum to deliver a roundhouse kick. The kick connected and Tengen once again was blown away. ¡° Don¡¯t stop and wait for your opponent. Connect every move with each other leaving no gaps for your ope to respond. ¡° Izanami said as she looked at Tengen again.


    Tengen nodded and got to his feet again. He then once again dashed towards Izanami. This time instead of aiming for the head he aimed his sword at Izanami¡¯s side. Izanami easily blocked the sword but then she suddenly had to push that sword away and jump to the side as Tengen swung his other sword at her head.


    After that Tenegen turned to the side and swung his sword at Izanami again like it was a nunchuck.


    Izanami crouched down and swung her sword at Tengen''s feet. Tengen seemed to have predicted this as he jumped while rotating so his sword would once again attack Izanami.


    Izanami used her sword as a jumping pole and adjusted her center of gravity to bring her whole body up. While doing so she didn¡¯t forget to deliver a kick to Tenegen since his face is at her strike range.


    Tengen hastily used his other sword to block but he was still pushed away taking a few steps back. This action destroyed the flow he kept. And due to this Izanami had enough time to take her distance.


    ¡° Impressive. Although you stillck some experience your skills are able to cover that shoring. And if you manage to improve your defense and parry you may just be the best twin swordsman I have seen after me. ¡° Izanami said with a smile. This was high praiseing from her.


    Tengen is truly a genius. She only needs to point out his mistake once and he will do his best to correct it in the next minute. His only shoring in swordsmanship is theck of experience he would naturally gain over the next few years.


    She could kind of understand why Luna insisted Tenegene here. With her here he would be able to fight many new opponents while gaining the experience he wants at a faster pace. And if he is lucky he may even be able to gain some experience fighting some elite Yokai members.


    ¡°Okay nowe at me with your breathing style, ¡° Izanami said as she readied her sword again.


    Tengen nodded and he took a deep breath to calm his nerves down. Then with a determined gaze, he started the attack, ¡° Sound Breathing First Form: Roar ¡°.


    Natural energy gathered in his twin swords as he shed down at Izanami with a greater speed than he had ever shown. Even the sound barrier was broken due to his speed.


    Izanami¡¯s sword began to turn ck as she activated her Armament Haki. Otherwise, her wooden sword wouldn¡¯t be able tost long till this spar ends.


    ¡° Izanami style: wind diety¡¯s armor ¡° Izanami said as she swung her sword casually to block the twin swords that wereing down on her. But for Tengen who was almost near Izanami that strike was anything but ordinary.


    His attack stopped midway as his strike was unable to even touch Izanami¡¯s sword as there was some kind of wind barrier that stopped his sword from advancing.


    ¡° Come one Tengen if you don¡¯t give your all you will never be able to destroy this barrier and hit me ¡° Izanami taunted as she smiled.


    Tengen gritted his teeth as he shouted, ¡°Sound breathing Fourth Form: Constant Resounding shes ¡°


    He began to hold his twin swords apart and spun them rapidly around himself. This is his special technique that is meant to destroy any barrier. The philosophy is if one strike cannot destroy it maybe a ten would if not a hundred and if that isn¡¯t enough then a thousand.


    ¡° good but isn¡¯t all right. Keep iting break your limits ¡° Izanami encouraged him as she too began to move her hands as an impressive speed to block or parry


    ¡°Arrrrrgggg ¡°Tengen screamed as he increased his speed to its maximum limit. Now his hands were already giving off after images.


    ¡°That¡¯s it, keep it up Tengen. I know you can do it ¡° Izanami encouraged him even more as she too increased her speed to pressure Tenegen even more. Izanami could feel it . Tengen is on the verge of breaking through his limit. He only needs one more push.


    ¡°Arrrrrr ¡° Tengen gritted his teeth as blood came down from his mouth. His hands were beginning to be numb. His vision was beginning to be more and more blurry. Tengen knows he is at his limit.


    But it was because of this that he felt anger. Although he rarely showed he is proud that he became the youngest Hashira. He felt there was nothing he couldn¡¯t do with his talent. But during this whole spar, he was beaten very badly.


    While he was sweating buckets, Izanami didn¡¯t even break a sweat. He couldn¡¯tst a single minute with her. She just needed a single move or two topletely defeat him. And up to now, he has never seen her use her famous breathing style.


    Even that barrier is something anyone could do bypressing wind chakra to a higher degree. But even that single technique seemed to be as strong as a mountain.


    Tengen couldn¡¯t ept this reality. He as a genius cannot lose like this. That¡¯s why he used his fourth form to destroy that barrier. Although he couldn¡¯t see any cracks in the barrier he could feel it was barely hanging.


    And just when he was about to get an upper hand his body had to give up like this. This is something he cannot ept.


    ¡®I will break that barrier even if it is thest thing I do ¡®Tenegen thought as he ignored everything and began to increase his speed. His muscles burst and blood gusted out of his arms but despite this, Tengen refused to back down.


    And what felt like forever a cracking sound was heard. Then in an instant, Izanami¡¯s wind diety¡¯s armour broke no matter how many times she tried to reinforce it.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 Chapter 79

    Chapter 79


    ~Time Skip A Yearter ~


    A year went by after the whole incident with the World Bank. The situation in Konoha returned back to its original calm.


    During this time period, Tsunade solidified her authority and made many changes. She, unlike Hiruzen, stopped the excessive monitoring of the Uchiha n. She thought it was too cruel to do that to a founding n just because of one person.


    Of course, the next day her office was invaded by the Konoha corrupt trio saying this was a wrong decision, and demanded Tsunade to take her order back. But like what Izanami liked to do she gave the trio the middle finger and said, ¡°I¡¯m the Hokage and my decision is final. If you bother me again I won''t mind digging up the old records of your corruption and publishing it. ¡°


    This stunned the trio so much that they almost stopped breathing. And before they could argue anymore Tsunade directly kicked them out of her office. She was done with dealings with these clowns.


    She had read the book Izanami wrote about a governess and understood that tolerating these guys and changing her orders because of the pressure would not help her in any way. If you are the ruler and you are confident in your judgement then don''t change it because of a third party.


    Although democracy is good and all that¡¯s only when you have a group of people who truly care for the country and its citizens. So unless you have such people you should trust your judgment and not change your orders even if you are seen as a tyrant.


    It is never a bad decision to do the right thing. Many regret their past choices after seeing the consequences of not doing what¡¯s right. In this case, Hiruzen and two friends don''t ept the Uchiha n because of their personal reasons that have no logic behind them.


    And decides it isn¡¯t like shepletely dropped the surveince on them. There was still an Anbu ninja unit that would periodically monitor every n for any abnormalities. It¡¯s just she didn¡¯t make it too obvious that the Uchiha n is under heavy surveince like what Hiruzen did.


    Also during her time she changed the school curriculum and made it so that the kids graduating from school would not be like Sakura who is only good at theory. She added many courses such as Medical ninjutsu and Fuinjutsu etc.


    She also created an after-ss for grown-ups who wanted to learn medical ninjutsu to increase the medicals in the Konoha hospital. For this, she invited many retired medical ninjas as teachers.


    As for the budget for these sses, Tsunade found it by cutting off unnecessary spending such as monthly bonuses for elders mainly for three extremely old people. Could you believe that these guys would take twice their pay just to travel from their homes to the Hokage Office. What¡¯s more, they also include the health and loans to be paid off by the Konoha treasury.


    And if that isn¡¯t enough most of the money of the treasury is used to build towers to monitor the Uchiha n. Tsunade had to use every bit of willpower to stop herself from running towards that trio and beating the shit out of them for wasting this much money on something so stupid.


    Even Izanami was speechless about this. But this also made sense after thinking about it. I mean how many ninjas do you need to send to monitor the whole Uchiha n for 24 hours every day? And those guys are Anbu ninjas who have very high sries due to taking high risks every day.


    For Izanami¡¯s side nothing changed, every day she would train Naruto and asionally Tengen too. Under her guidance, Naruto managed to perfectly control his chakra.


    Although Izanami didn¡¯t teach him any ninjutsu as this was a task that she had given Minato and Kushina, Izanami was sure Naruto could use the clone technique without any problem now.


    Of course, apart from his training Naruto also made friends with the original Konoha 11. After training in the morning, he would go to the park and y with them almost every day.


    This greatly pleased Izanami. One of her promises to Minato and Kushina was to not let Naruto feel any loneliness like he felt in the original work. And to this day she has sessfully managed to achieve that.


    Although she really couldn¡¯t do anything about the rumours she made sure those would not inconvenience Naruto too much.


    So no longer does Naruto have to endure that harsh treatment of getting beaten up randomly or being scolded for just passing by. If any of the vigers actually tried two burly men would suddenly appear and take them into custody for child abuse.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡°Big sis Izanami let¡¯s go already we are gettingte ¡° Narutoined as he tried to wake up Izanami who was hugging plushie Kaguya like a sleeping pillow.


    ¡° Mmmm, five more minutes, ¡° Izanami said, groggily as she turned over to return to her sleep.


    ¡°But today¡¯s the school opening day and we will gette if we don¡¯t go now ¡° Narutoined as he began to shake Izanami like crazy.


    ¡°Okay okay I¡¯m up geez can¡¯t ady get her beauty sleep? ¡° Izanamiined softly as she got up from her bed. Last night she, Minato, Kurama, and Kushina were watching the new Deadpool & Wolverine movie together so Izanami didn¡¯t get much sleep.


    If one were to ask how Izanami could watch a new movie that was just released on Earth. Well, this is one of the bonuses her boss gifted her. By using a bit of her chakra she could connect to her Earth¡¯s Netflix ount and watch the new movies by projecting it into a screen.


    The only problem with this is the massive chakra consumption and the cooldown time of 30 days till the next time she could watch another movie.


    After freshening up, Izanami had breakfast with everyone. After that, she and Naruto walked out of the house and went in the direction where Ninja School. Although it is still early many people were on the road with their children in hand.


    Most of them are like Naruto and Izanami heading towards the Ninja school. And almost everyone had their faces full of smiles. For a kid, their journey starts today. So everyone is very excited.


    Well everyone except for the Nara n children who think all this is a drag.


    After a few minutes of walking Izanami and Naruto arrived at the gate of the ninja school. Although there is at least an hour till the opening ceremony starts there are still many people here.


    ¡° Hey Naruto, you finally arrived, ¡° Choji said as he greeted Naruto when he saw himing through the gate.


    ¡°Hey there Choji ¡°Naruto greeted him back with a smile. He then looked around and asked, ¡°Where are Shikamaru and Ino ¡°


    ¡°Oh those two are with our parents. Come on let me show you where they are, ¡°Choji said as he dragged Naruto with him.


    Izanami sighed as she followed them. She was quite bored since there was no one who she was familiar with. If she knew this was going to happen she should havee with Tsunade.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 79:School opening day

    79:School opening day


    ~Time Skip A Yearter ~


    A year went by after the whole incident with the World Bank. The situation in Konoha returned back to its original calm.


    During this time period, Tsunade solidified her authority and made many changes. She, unlike Hiruzen, stopped the excessive monitoring of the Uchiha n. She thought it was too cruel to do that to a founding n just because of one person.


    Of course, the next day her office was invaded by the Konoha corrupt trio saying this was a wrong decision, and demanded Tsunade to take her order back. But like what Izanami liked to do she gave the trio the middle finger and said, ¡°I¡¯m the Hokage and my decision is final. If you bother me again I won''t mind digging up the old records of your corruption and publishing it. ¡°


    This stunned the trio so much that they almost stopped breathing. And before they could argue anymore Tsunade directly kicked them out of her office. She was done with dealings with these clowns.


    She had read the book Izanami wrote about a governess and understood that tolerating these guys and changing her orders because of the pressure would not help her in any way. If you are the ruler and you are confident in your judgement then don''t change it because of a third party.


    Although democracy is good and all that¡¯s only when you have a group of people who truly care for the country and its citizens. So unless you have such people you should trust your judgment and not change your orders even if you are seen as a tyrant.


    It is never a bad decision to do the right thing. Many regret their past choices after seeing the consequences of not doing what¡¯s right. In this case, Hiruzen and two friends don''t ept the Uchiha n because of their personal reasons that have no logic behind them.


    And decides it isn¡¯t like shepletely dropped the surveince on them. There was still an Anbu ninja unit that would periodically monitor every n for any abnormalities. It¡¯s just she didn¡¯t make it too obvious that the Uchiha n is under heavy surveince like what Hiruzen did.


    Also during her time she changed the school curriculum and made it so that the kids graduating from school would not be like Sakura who is only good at theory. She added many courses such as Medical ninjutsu and Fuinjutsu etc.


    She also created an after-ss for grown-ups who wanted to learn medical ninjutsu to increase the medicals in the Konoha hospital. For this, she invited many retired medical ninjas as teachers.


    As for the budget for these sses, Tsunade found it by cutting off unnecessary spending such as monthly bonuses for elders mainly for three extremely old people. Could you believe that these guys would take twice their pay just to travel from their homes to the Hokage Office. What¡¯s more, they also include the health and loans to be paid off by the Konoha treasury.


    And if that isn¡¯t enough most of the money of the treasury is used to build towers to monitor the Uchiha n. Tsunade had to use every bit of willpower to stop herself from running towards that trio and beating the shit out of them for wasting this much money on something so stupid.


    Even Izanami was speechless about this. But this also made sense after thinking about it. I mean how many ninjas do you need to send to monitor the whole Uchiha n for 24 hours every day? And those guys are Anbu ninjas who have very high sries due to taking high risks every day.


    For Izanami¡¯s side nothing changed, every day she would train Naruto and asionally Tengen too. Under her guidance, Naruto managed to perfectly control his chakra.


    Although Izanami didn¡¯t teach him any ninjutsu as this was a task that she had given Minato and Kushina, Izanami was sure Naruto could use the clone technique without any problem now.


    Of course, apart from his training Naruto also made friends with the original Konoha 11. After training in the morning, he would go to the park and y with them almost every day.


    This greatly pleased Izanami. One of her promises to Minato and Kushina was to not let Naruto feel any loneliness like he felt in the original work. And to this day she has sessfully managed to achieve that.


    Although she really couldn¡¯t do anything about the rumours she made sure those would not inconvenience Naruto too much.


    So no longer does Naruto have to endure that harsh treatment of getting beaten up randomly or being scolded for just passing by. If any of the vigers actually tried two burly men would suddenly appear and take them into custody for child abuse.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡°Big sis Izanami let¡¯s go already we are gettingte ¡° Narutoined as he tried to wake up Izanami who was hugging plushie Kaguya like a sleeping pillow.


    ¡° Mmmm, five more minutes, ¡° Izanami said, groggily as she turned over to return to her sleep.


    ¡°But today¡¯s the school opening day and we will gette if we don¡¯t go now ¡° Narutoined as he began to shake Izanami like crazy.


    ¡°Okay okay I¡¯m up geez can¡¯t ady get her beauty sleep? ¡° Izanamiined softly as she got up from her bed. Last night she, Minato, Kurama, and Kushina were watching the new Deadpool & Wolverine movie together so Izanami didn¡¯t get much sleep.


    If one were to ask how Izanami could watch a new movie that was just released on Earth. Well, this is one of the bonuses her boss gifted her. By using a bit of her chakra she could connect to her Earth¡¯s Netflix ount and watch the new movies by projecting it into a screen.


    The only problem with this is the massive chakra consumption and the cooldown time of 30 days till the next time she could watch another movie.


    After freshening up, Izanami had breakfast with everyone. After that, she and Naruto walked out of the house and went in the direction where Ninja School. Although it is still early many people were on the road with their children in hand.


    Most of them are like Naruto and Izanami heading towards the Ninja school. And almost everyone had their faces full of smiles. For a kid, their journey starts today. So everyone is very excited.


    Well everyone except for the Nara n children who think all this is a drag.


    After a few minutes of walking Izanami and Naruto arrived at the gate of the ninja school. Although there is at least an hour till the opening ceremony starts there are still many people here.


    ¡° Hey Naruto, you finally arrived, ¡° Choji said as he greeted Naruto when he saw himing through the gate.


    ¡°Hey there Choji ¡°Naruto greeted him back with a smile. He then looked around and asked, ¡°Where are Shikamaru and Ino ¡°


    ¡°Oh those two are with our parents. Come on let me show you where they are, ¡°Choji said as he dragged Naruto with him.


    Izanami sighed as she followed them. She was quite bored since there was no one who she was familiar with. If she knew this was going to happen she should havee with Tsunade.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 80: I want to destroy that invisible boundary that separates the village and Uchiha

    80: I want to destroy that invisible boundary that separates the vige and Uchiha


    ¡°...And with that, I wee you future ninjas to our academy ¡°With those words Tsunade finished her opening speech. Everyone gave a round of apuse for Tsunade.


    After Tsunade got down from the stage a teacher came up and began to announce the names of the children and their sses. While he was doing this Tsunade came near Izanami while making sure not to attract attention.


    ¡° Good speech, did you make it yourself or forced Shizune to make one for you? ¡° Izanami asked in a low voice. Since there are many people here saying bad things about the Hokage is not a good thing.


    ¡° No, I made it myself. ¡° Tsunade said as she shook her head. At first, she tried to ck off by letting Shizune prepare it but regretfully that girl was not very good at preparing speeches. So Tsunade had no choice but to do it herself.


    ¡°Well, the crowd loved it. They have been so used to hearing the boring one-hour-long Will of Fire speech for so many years that they seem to appreciate the change¡± Izanami said as she looked at the numerous parents praising Tsunade¡¯s speech.


    Tsunade didn''t know how toment on that. Should she be d for the praise or be mad at the fact that her speech is only good because the third Hokage never bothered to give a shorter speech?


    ¡°Oh right, did you contact Jiraiya? I thought he woulde running here when he heard we were going to war, ¡° Izanami asked. As Konoha''s best spymaster, Jiraiya¡¯s informationwork is not something you can underestimate. So Izanami actually expected him toe running back to Konoha.


    But for some reason, she didn¡¯t see him even after waiting for a year. So that is why she asked Tsunade.


    Hearing Jiraiya¡¯s name, Tsunade immediately put on an angry expression. She also wanted to meet that bastard. While she was dealing with that boring paperwork every day that bastard was enjoying himself to the fullest.


    She has read one of his depraved novels that were released in thest few months. She knew perfectly well how he wrote his books.


    ¡°No, that bastard only sent some letters saying he is on a very important mission. I was just thinking of issuing him a direct order to return. That bastard has yed around enough, ¡° Tsunade said.


    ¡° That¡¯s good. Tell him that if he doesn¡¯t arrive in two weeks he would be punished for ignoring the Hokage¡¯s order and be sentenced to domunity service for a month. ¡° Izanami said as had an evil smile. She wanted to give that man a very harsh lesson for ignoring his duties as a godfather.


    Tsunade¡¯s eyes lit up as she heard Izanami¡¯s idea. She knew how torturousmunity service could get. In Konoha, the people who are sentenced to do or have the job of doingmunity service have a title. And that is ¡® Green ninjas ¡®. The ninjas would have to collect the garbage and clean the roads early in the morning.


    And the worst part of this job is that if you didn¡¯t do a good job you would be scolded very badly by the stupid Karens who have nothing to do every day. This is the perfect punishment for someone like Jiraiya.


    ¡°hehe I¡¯ll go do that immediately, ¡° Tsunade said with an evil smile as she dashed to her office immediately. She knew just how to trick Jiraiya into that punishment.


    After watching Tsunade leave, Izanami looked at the person who was beside her and asked, ¡° So how is the situation in the n Kiyomi? ¡°


    Kiyomi looked at her aunt with a deadpan gaze and asked, ¡° Do you really want to know? I don¡¯t think there would be anything you don¡¯t know with all those spies in the n.¡°


    ¡°Hahahaha ¡°Izanami chuckled wryly at Kiyomi¡¯s words. Maybe she shouldn¡¯t have shown her the full extent of her informationwork.


    It was a few months ago when Kiyomi finally went to one of her many business stores to see what type of authority that ne would give her. And after a few hours, she came out of that store with a pale face.


    She saw that almost 80% of Konoha¡®s famous businesses belong to Izanami. And if that isn¡¯t enough there was an entire army that was in Konoha for her to immobilize in emergencies. What¡¯s more, she saw that there was a squad that is specially made for collecting information and how good they were.


    Whatever information one would need they have it stored in their archives. Even the sensitive information of each n was with them. If she didn¡¯t know any better she would seriously suspect that there would be invisible people stalking them at all times.


    Thankfully it wasn¡¯t as serious as that. She found out that they managed to collect this much information due to nting listening devices inside the furniture that were purchased by their businesses.


    These days they were even thinking of changing that to carpets or curtains since their listening devices are often being destroyed because of a certain man¡¯s short-tempered nature of breaking tables for the silliest reason.


    ¡°Well anyway, did youe alone for Sasuke¡¯s enrolment ¡°Izanami asked as she didn¡¯t see Fugaku or Mikoto anywhere near.


    ¡° No Itachi is also here. He is with Sasuke, ¡° Kiyomi said as she looked at her two brothers who were listening to the announcement in a further corner. Although the situation between the n and the vige was somewhat resolved. The Uchiha are still not very popr.


    ¡° Hmm, so Kiyomi tell me what do you think of the situation with the n ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at her niece with a serious expression.


    ¡°What problem are you asking about the money problem where almost every family is barely affording to pay up their debt or the problem where Uchiha are still getting more and more isted? ¡° Kiyomi asked as she looked at her aunt. The Uchiha n is full of problems and only these two are things Izanami would care about.


    ¡° You don¡¯t have to worry about the debt as I heard Tsunade saying she would being up with a way to lessen the burden of the Uchiha. It was something about making a bounty hunting unit made up of the Sarutobi, Shimura, and other small ns to go hunt down the rogue ninjas and present their bounties in exchange for some ninjutsu.


    And for your other problem you and I both know where that problemes from ¡° Izanami said as she looked at Kiyomi with a smile.


    ¡°The police department, ¡° Kiyomi muttered with a tired sigh. She knew that the root of all eviles from that ce.


    ¡°Yes. In every vige, the police department is a ce where they would gather resentment no matter what they do. And that ce is a Uchiha-only ce made so that normal people throw their resentments at the Uchiha n. ¡° Izanami exined.


    ¡°And the attitude of Uchiha made the problem even bigger, ¡° she also added. The Uchiha would never look away from a fight. They are too proud to bear any humiliation. So they would often pick fights with normal civilians who don¡¯t know when to shut up.


    ¡°So Kiyomi, tell me what is your opinion of the Uchiha n? ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at Kiyomi. Depending on her answer Izanami may have to change some ns she has made.


    Kiyomi thought about it before speaking, ¡° At first when I was just reborn I thought this is a stupid n. You could clearly see that Konoha''s higher-ups are looking at them like beasts who would break from their cage at any time but despite understanding this they still wanted to prove themself.


    But as I grew up I began to understand why they still clung to the hope of being recognised. It was them who founded Konoha and they still were reluctant to abandon the safe haven they created. ¡° she passed before looking at Izanami dead in the eye and said, ¡° And I respect that so that is why I want to destroy that invisible boundary that separates the vige and Uchiha. ¡°


    Izanami smiled as she said, ¡°Then I as your aunt will help you. And besides I really can¡¯t let one of my student¡¯s n be isted from the very vige he created. ¡°


    Kiyomi smiled as she heard Izanami¡¯s words. Although she is reluctant to say it, she really couldn¡¯t convince the whole vige higher-ups. Although she has her Mangekyou Sharingan that alone is not enough. She is sure that Tobirama guy has made some ns in case a rogue Mangekyou were ever to appear.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 81: When do you want to transfer the authority?

    81: When do you want to transfer the authority?


    After the teachers were done announcing the sses of each student they began to introduce the kids to their new ssrooms. The parents were then asked to leave the school premises to start sses.


    After making sure Naruto was fine and hadn¡¯t forgotten anything, Izanami walked out of the school building. However, instead of heading back towards her house, she made her way to the Police Department.


    She needed to have a word with Fugaku. As for why she didn¡¯t head towards the Uchiha n. Well, there seem to be some problems in the police department prompting him to go there early in the morning.


    After a few minutes of walking, she arrived at the police department. Unlikest time, when she was rudely treated, there was a stark contrast in her treatment this time. As soon as she stepped inside the building everyone who was idle straightened up.


    One of the captains even came by personally to ask for the reason for her visit. After hearing that she came here to meet Fugaku he guided her to his office without asking any other questions. While on the way, every passing Uchiha gave a small bow to Izanami as she passed by them.


    The Uchiha respect strength, and Izanami, who performed the Hyakki Yagy¨­ and sessfully defeated every single opponent within the n, is someone they deeply revere. In fact, if Izanami decided to run for the position of n head, the Uchiha n wouldn¡¯t necessarily oppose her. She might even have a strong chance of winning.


    As she arrived at Fugaku¡¯s office she dismissed the captain and knocked on the door twice. ¡°Come in ¡°Fugaku¡¯s voice came from the other side after a few seconds.


    Opening the door she saw Fugaku sitting in his chair while on his desk there were mountains of paperwork.


    ¡®Oh, it seems like even the Police department has to share the same fate as the Hokage. Maybe this is something Tobarama did to show them how much of a bother being a Hokage is ¡® Izanami thought.


    As far as she knows the Police department like the rest of the vige hasn''t changed their old system since it was founded. So most of the things are still done by one person or a select few. This is also why the Hokage office was always filled with mountains of paperwork that needed his signature as every small thing wanted his approval.


    And from the looks of it, the police department is also the same. The police department has a certain autonomy in the vige as they have the authority to arrest criminals and interrogate them without needing the Hokage¡¯s approval.


    It was due to this system that the Uchiha managed to secure the vige and keep it from being harmed by any spies or criminals. While this system is good and all since there wouldn¡¯t be an issue keeping public security the downside in this system is that there would be two ruling parties.


    While Toborama didn¡¯t mind this as he had full confidence in Uchiha¡¯s impartialness Hiruzen and more specifically Danzo didn¡¯t like this. Since their goal was to takeplete control over Konoha they saw the police department as a thorn in their side. That is why they thought of isting the Uchiha n so they wouldn¡¯t be able to grab any more power.


    And with their years of hard work, they managed to push the Uchiha n to the brink of causing a rebellion.


    ¡° What might be the reason for your visit,dy Izanami? ¡° Fugaku asked as he put away the documents he was reading.


    ¡° Well Fugaku, do you remember the proposal I gave you when we metst time? ¡° Izanami asked as she took her seat.


    Fugaku narrowed his eyes and asked, ¡°Do you mean it''s time? have the situation escted to this point already ¡°


    ¡°Yes, the Uchiha police force is having too much of a negative impact on the n, ¡° Izanami said with a sigh.


    Previously, she made a deal with Fugaku. The deal was quite simple: if the police force, which is managed by the Uchiha n, hindered the n''s businesses, Fugaku would sell some of his authority as the head of the police force to the vige and the World Bank. Of course, the authority he would be selling is the right to bring in new members.


    By selling this right, the Uchiha n would lose their dictatorship over the police force. So the Uchiha n can no longer hold the monopoly over the police force.


    ¡°Sigh ¡°Fugaku sighed as hemented in his mind. During this past year, he tried his best to improve the opinion of the civilians on the police department but his efforts seem to be in vain.


    ¡°When do you want to transfer the authority?¡± Fugaku asked as he looked at Izanami. While it was frustrating, he couldn¡¯t ignore the deal. This deal was made after considering many reasons.


    Firstly, this would allow the n to be spared from 10% of the total debt. Secondly, the reason why this situation arose was because the family businesses were failing to meet the required ie. So, after this deal, they would have enough time to improve their businesses. Thirdly, the police department is very short on staff.


    So, this deal is actually very beneficial to the Uchiha n. It¡¯s just due to Fugaku¡¯s sentimentality that this deal was pushed to a yearter.


    ¡°Hmm, how about two weeks from now on? ¡° Izanami said after thinking about it for a while. She needs to have a little discussion with Tsunade to finalize the deal. And Fugaku also needs some time to convince the rest of the n.


    ¡°Ok, ¡° Fugaku said after thinking about it. As Izanami predicted he needed to make the elders agree to this as he has still not told anyone about this.


    ¡°Well then I¡¯ll take my leave then I don¡¯t want to waste too much of your time, ¡°Izanami said as she got up from her seat and walked away.


    After walking out of the police station she used her Observation haki to find where Tsunade is. Sensing her in the Hokage office, she decided on her next destination. She needs to have a permit to open an auction house in two weeks.


    That¡¯s right she is going to auction off her new rights as she has no use for it. And besides she is pretty sure only wealthy ns would have the ability to purchase these rights.


    So from two weeks from now on the police department would have many members from different ns. And if Tsunade were to do a perfect job, many teambinations like the Ino¨CShika¨CCh¨­ would be born in the new police department.


    Thinking of the bright future, Izanami couldn¡¯t help but smile. She is very much expecting the changes that would happen in the future.


    ¡® Speaking of changes, I really need to tell Tsunade to install a new barrier. The Konoha barrier is too old and outdated. Maybe I should force Jiraiya to remodel the whole thing after hees back, ¡® she thought while on her way to the Hokage office.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 82: A decision that affects the whole clan.

    82: A decision that affects the whole n.


    ¡° Ok let me get this straight, you made a deal with Fugaku that in exchange for some of his rights as the Police head you will free him from 10% of his full debt


    And in two weeks, you will auction off these rights to any n in Konoha. ¡° Tsunade asked in shock. Can money buy anything these days?


    The answer to that question is yes. There is nothing money can''t buy. It''s just a matter of what price.


    ¡° Yes, that''s exactly what happened. ¡° Izanami said, nodding her head in confirmation.


    ¡° Arrgg you know this is going to drop Konoha¡¯s reputation even more right ¡° Tsunade asked as he felt a headacheing.


    Even though it was a year Danzo''s actions are still negatively affecting Konoha. Ordinary people outside the vige have been avoiding Konoha ninjas like a gue. This also meant that the mission requests had also dropped.


    ¡° Oh please, like ninja viges had any good reputation to begin with, ¡° Izanami scoffed as she replied. The number of ninjas from major vigesmitting crimes are too numerous.


    In thend of rain people used to run for their lives when they heard a ninjaing their way. And this situation is quitemon in this world.


    Of course, if there were things like this happening in Japan then it would be Izanami who would deliver the punishment for those people. Although Ninja is an evil and dark job she would never let anyone from her vige do stuff like this.


    That is her principle. And even if her actions led to a rebellion in the vige she would still uphold her principle.


    ¡°Anyway, what is your motive in this anyway? Why bother going through all this to buy some rights and then auction them immediately? ¡° Tsunade asked changing the subject. She could tell Izanami was about to give her a long lecture if she kept talking about this subject.


    ¡°Well this is so those ns won¡¯t get too excited over this, ¡° Izanami said, making Tsunade raise one eyebrow.


    ¡°Oh please do exin, ¡°she said as she looked at her.


    ¡° Well, it¡¯s human nature to not value something we get for free. Let¡¯s take two kids as an example. If I were to give a poor kid and a rich kid a schrship for free education, what do you think would happen? ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at Tsunade with a frown.


    Tsunade thought about it and answered, ¡°The rich kid would not care much about it since he can pay for his studies himself. But the poor kid would use the money to its fullest and try his very best to learn everything. ¡°


    ¡°Yes, That''s right. The rich don''t need to work hard since he can always ask for more money from his parents but the poor kid on the other hand has no one to turn to so he would not waste the given opportunity.


    Simrly, if we just distributed the rights then ns would just ask for more as days passed by. But if we auction these rights then these ns would have to fight it and pay a great price to have them. And I¡¯m sure after purchasing them they wouldn¡¯t be like that rich kid. ¡° Izanami said with a chuckle.


    ¡°Yeah I hope so, ¡° Tsunade said with a sigh she could now understand why everyone in Japan never wanted to rece Izanami. She is the best person to lead everyone as she knows how to do her job perfectly.


    ¡°So you just want a permit to host your auction right? ¡° Tsunade asked as she looked at the form Izanami gave her. It was an application requesting a permit.


    ¡°Yeah that¡¯s all I need, ¡° Izanami nodded. She had already found a ce to host the auction and after Tsunade gave her approval she would go and distribute some invitations to the n heads.


    ¡°Well here you go then just don¡¯t go too crazy like you didst time ¡°Tsunade said as she stamped the paper with her signature.


    ¡° Sure, ¡° Izanami said with a smile as she took the permit. Although she said Tsunade who saw Izanami¡¯s smile knew that there would be more chaos in the future.


    ¡®Sigh I should have asked for some premium alcohol in exchange for that permit ¡® she thought as she felt the signs of an impending headache.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ~ Two dayster ~


    Just as Tsunade expected, a huge storm erupted as many began to discuss the auction that would be happening in two weeks. Many were discussing about it as it would be hosted by none other than the World Bank representativedy Izanami.


    Although many didn¡¯t know that the main item was the police department''s rights as the n heads kept their mouth shut. But there was a rumour going on that there would be many artefacts, jutsus and ancient weapons would be auctioned off. And most importantly there would be a mysterious item that only the ones with the ck invitation could bid.


    And so many were excited about who would be invited as ording to the word in the street about 100 people were invited. And many were very curious about who these invites were.


    While the vige was bustling with excitement about this topic in the Uchiha n, the n members all walked towards a specific direction. Today is the day they hold their regr n meeting. Last year they had to hold such meetings weekly but after Danzo¡¯s incident, the number of times was reduced to once a month.


    ¡° What do you this is about for the n leader to hold this meeting ahead of schedule? ¡° asked one guy who just arrived and took a seat next to his friend.


    His friend shrugged his shoulders and said, ¡° I don¡¯t have a clue either. Maybe it is about the auction that is about to be held in two weeks. I think the n leader was invited and he wanted to discuss who would go with him. ¡°


    ¡°You fool if it was because of that then why the hell would he also summon us. He would just have a meeting with the elders and decide who would participate with him ¡° his friend rebuked him immediately.


    ¡° hey I was just saying and don¡¯t curse me you bastard it was you who asked first, ¡° the man said as he red at his friend.


    While they were arguing the door to the meeting room was opened and Fugaku, Itachi and Kiyomi walked inside the room. Everyone stopped what they were doing, stood up and waited in silence.


    After Fugaku sat down everyone followed suit and got seated. Fugaku inspected the room and asked, ¡°Is everyone here ¡°


    ¡°Yes patriarch apart from the ones who are tasked with long-term missions everyone else here ¡° an elder stood up and replied.


    Fugaku, hearing this, nodded and signalled the elder to sit down. After that, he looked at everyone and said, ¡° First of all I am thankful you all came to this meeting despite it being held on short notice.


    The reason I called you here is because we need to make a decision that affects the whole n. ¡°


    Hearing his words everyone had a serious expression. Although they may fight amongst each other as factions they would unite when ites to the survival of the n.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 83: Sorry about it, I just had to teach some idiots what reality is

    83: Sorry about it, I just had to teach some idiots what reality is


    ¡° What is this decision, n head? ¡° asked one of the great elders as he looked at Fugaku with a cold gaze that is typical for a Uchiha.


    ¡° I take it everyone has heard about the uing auction that the World Bank is hosting, ¡° Fugaku asked to which everyone nodded. Unless they are living under a rock, everyone in Konoha knows about that auction.


    ¡° Do you know that in that auction there is a mysterious item that would be only known after the auction starts? ¡° Fugaku asked, to which everyone nodded again.


    "Well, you see, that mysterious item is the right the police head holds to recruit more men into the police department," Fugaku said, dropping a bombshell on everyone in the room.


    The soon suddenly got noisy as many elders stood up in shock, ¡° Fugaku exin yourself now ¡°one of the old grand elders shouted as he looked at Fugaku with a gloomy look.


    ¡°Yes, patriarch, please exin the situation to us, ¡° even one of the elders from Fugaku¡¯s faction also said. Even if they belong to the same faction they couldn¡¯t allow such a decision since it affects the n as a whole.


    ¡°Exin yourself, patriarch, ¡° Many elders and n members said as they began to get restless. The police department was always something Uchiha owned so many were protesting.


    ¡° Calm down ¡° Fugaku ordered as he activated his Mangekyou Sharingan. He knew if he wanted to make all of them agree then he needed to go all out.


    Seeing the Mangekyou pattern in Fugaku¡¯s eyes, everyone who was making a scene was shocked. Especially the hardliners who were the most unreasonable.


    ¡°Father, ¡° Itachi softly said as he looked at his father with aplex expression. As a person who had the Mangekyou Sharingan, he knew how broken one must be to awaken it. He himself awakened his when Shisuimitted suicide in front of him.


    ¡°Fugaku, when did you awaken the Mangekyou? ¡° a grand elder asked as he looked at Fugaku with excitement. The n had no idea how to awaken the Magekyou sharingan as Madara had taken away everything known record about it. They only know that after awakening the Mangekyou sharingan they could control the nine tails.


    And for hardliners who wanted to throw a rebellion, controlling the nine tails was crucial. So that is why the grand elder was very excited about it. Although Danzo was not causing trouble for them, the hardliners are still unhappy with the treatment they are getting from the vigers.


    ¡°Since the third ninja war, ¡° Fugaku said after some hesitation. He knew what was about toe next so he had to remove the bud before it could bloom any further.


    ¡°Hahahaha wonderful, the n finally had given birth to a Mangekyou Sharingan user. With this we no longer need to fear and take back what is rightfully ours. ¡° the elderughed maniacally as his sharingan shone with insanity.


    Many of the hardliners also had crazy smiles as they also had their Sharingan opened due to their excitement. They also began to deliver their own motivational speeches. Many began to agree with them.


    Fugaku¡¯s face turned ugly as he heard those words. He began to regret his decision to flex his Mangekyou as he didn¡¯t expect that these old guys would act like this. Even though they are usually very radical it was never to this extent.


    ¡° You know for someone who couldn¡¯t awaken his mangekyou you sure have some interesting ambitions. ¡° Kiyomi said as she sneered at the great elder. She was getting enough of this shit. Especially the look those geezers had. It was as if they didn¡¯t care about her father¡¯s opinion.


    ¡° Kiyomi, how dare you talk to me like this. Fugaku is this how you raise your offspring? Look, she doesn¡¯t even know how to respect her elders. ¡° the grand elder scolded with a gloomy look.


    ¡® how dare a brat who isn¡¯t even the main heir talk to me like this ¡® he thought as he looked at Kiyomi with a cold look. Maybe it was because of her previous life memories or maybe because she didn¡¯t want toe into the limelight. Kiyomi, although was the oldest among Fugaku¡¯s children, didn''t show much of her talents.


    In fact, she could be considered an average Uchiha who is a genius outside the n but no one special inside. And at the beginning, many didn¡¯tment much since she was still a genius. But with Itachi¡¯s birth things gotplicated.


    Unlike Kiyomi, Itachi showed his talents without any reservation. So gradually people began to disdain Kiyomi as she was less talented than her little brother. Of course, Kiyomi didn¡¯t care much about it since she was never someone who cared about others'' opinions of herself.


    But that doesn¡¯t mean she would let them talk shit about her without suffering any punishment.


    Kiyomi activated her Mangekyou Sharingan she awakened since she was three and cast a genjutsu on that grand elder. The grand elder who was cursing suddenly stopped moving and his eyes became lost indicating that he was captured in her genjutsu.


    ¡° Tsk you couldn¡¯t escape from a simple genjutsu like that, how the hell are you a great elder? "Kiyomi said with disgust. Although she brought out her Mangekyou Sharingan she didn¡¯t really put that much strength into her genjutsu as she was hoping he would lift it so she could let him taste her real genjutsu.


    But who would have thought that this guy couldn¡¯t even resist before he was caught in her simple genjutsu.


    The hall once again returned to its original silence. The hardliners who were about to make a scene were shocked when they saw their faction leader, one of the great elders, was defeated so easily. And their shock doubled when they saw Kiyomi¡¯s Mangekyou Sharingan.


    ¡® WTF ¡® they all thought as their minds were blown away. There is another pair of Mangekyou Sharingan and that too from a young member like Kiyomi.


    They could somewhat understand Fugaku since he is a war veteran who made a name for himself in the Third Great Ninja War. But Kiyomi, she was just a 15-year-old girl who didn¡¯t fight any wars or had a near-death experience.


    The poor elders had no idea that there are currently five Mangekyou Sharingan users in the n and most of them are from the younger generation. If they had known that then they would have some very interesting reactions.


    After all, the Mangekyou Sharingan which was said to be a legend seemed to be a verymon thing for these young people who are considered geniuses.


    ¡°Kiyomi, that is enough, release the great elder from your genjutsu, we are still in the meeting ce, ¡° Fugaku said as he looked at his daughter. He knew that his daughter is a genius more monstrous than his first son. But even he didn¡¯t expect her to awaken the Mangekyou Sharingan.


    But despite his shock, he wanted to stop her. Although the great elder¡¯s behavior disgusted him he was still a great elder. And the other elders wouldn¡¯t sit still if she went too far. So he had to use his aura to calm her down.


    Kiyomi hearing her father¡¯s words looked at him and unconsciously released her aura that terrifies everyone present. Although it may not look like it, Kiyomi could be said to be the one who understands the Mangekyou Sharingan best as she had her own eternal Mangekyou in the past.


    And so her handling of Mangekyou Sharingan was far greater than Fugaku so when the sh of aura started he lost very badly. Fortunately, Kiyomi stopped releasing her aura as if not Fugaku would have to get serious and that may elerate his uing blindness.


    ¡°Sorry about it, I just had to teach some idiots what reality is ¡° Kiyomi said as she turned off her sharingan.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 84: Should ask Kiyomi to do this often in future meetings

    84: Should ask Kiyomi to do this often in future meetings


    Although Kiyomi was still insulting the great elders no one dared to reprimand her. They saw the horror of her Mangekyou Sharingan as she trapped the great elder into a genjutsu. The great elder couldn¡¯t even resist as he was helpless against her.


    What greatly made them fear her the most was how she managed to win over Fugaku. They all saw that in that sh of aura, Fugaku lost miserably like how the great elder did. And Fugaku as the n leader is the strongest of them all. So if she managed to defeat him wouldn¡¯t that mean she is much stronger than him?


    ¡° Coming back to the topic at hand I have many reasons to sell those rights as this is the best oue for the vige. ¡° Fugaku said as he decided to not bother with Kiyomi anymore.


    ¡° Firstly we are short-staffed and due to this many of our n members were overworked. ¡° Fugaku began his exnation. Although the police department is handled by the Uchiha n not everyone can be a part of it.


    The basic requirement for one to join the police department is at least have the rank of chunin. Otherwise, the whole department would be flooded with people who only have the rank of gennin. After all, why should they go out and do missions while risking their own life when you could just join the police department?


    ¡°Secondly, due to the police department having solely Uchiha n members, the n has gotten more and more negative reputation. It has been affecting our family businesses. And if this went on those businesses would go bankrupt. ¡° Fugaku stated.


    Hearing this, many Uchiha n members clenched their fists. This is the ugly truth everyone was purposely avoiding. At first, things were not that serious but after the nine-tails incident things went downhill.


    ¡° And the third andst reason is because of the deal I made with Lady Izanami, ¡° Fugaku said, surprising everyone. They didn''t expect that.


    ¡° As you all may already be aware, we are currently very tight on our finances because of the amount of debt we are paying to the World Bank.


    And with our family businesses are no longer able to earn enough to pay that amount. So that is why Lady Izanami proposed this idea one year ago.


    If our family businesses are suffering huge losses every year due to the negative impact the police department has then we would have to sell the rights to the World Bank and they would buy these rights in exchange for 10% of our total debt. ¡° Fugaku finished his exnation.


    Many n members had various reactions to this. Some were nodding in agreement while some were very dissatisfied. The most dissatisfied were the elders who belonged to the hawk faction.


    But despite their dissatisfaction, they didn''t argue back. Everyone who isn''t a fool could see that Izanami was giving them a favor.


    Even 10% of the debt is a veryrge amount of money. And even if the rights were auctioned off they couldn''t earn that much money since unlike in the past most ns are still suffering from the aftermath of the third great ninja war and the nine-tails attack.


    So Izanami giving them this chance is something they were very grateful for. And besides the rights they were selling were to authority to recruit new members.


    And even then these recruits would still have to listen to the old squad captains who are still Uchiha n members.


    So if you look closely you could see that this deal isn''t bad for the n as they still hold the authority over the police department. It''s just now they would have to share the police department with other ns.


    This could even be considered a win as this would allow the other viges to work alongside Uchiha n members.


    But although there are numerous advantages there is the reason why this topic has never been approved or brought to the n meetings.


    It is because most n members, especially the elders have the mindset that the police department belongs to them and them only. They have the same mentality as some old grandpas who refused to try using a telephone because there was a rumor saying that the enemy nation could be using it to spy on them.


    ¡°Patriarch this ..¡± one of the older elders wanted to protest but he was quickly silenced when someone else spoke.


    ¡°It¡¯s a nice proposal right ¡° Kiyomi asked as she looked at the elder who was about to protest. She had a sweet smile on her face that made the elder break into a cold sweat.


    ¡°Yes, it¡¯s as Lady Kiyomi said the proposal is wonderful. I wanted to thank the n leader for thinking of such a method to help our n in such dire situations. ¡° the elder quickly said as he began to ringpliments afterpliments about how great this proposal is.


    ¡°That¡¯s wonderful I knew the elder was a wise man indeed, ¡° Kiyomi said with an innocent smile as if she didn¡¯t scare the poor guy to death.


    ¡°So anyone else who wants to express their opinion ¡° she asked as she gazed at the crowd while still having her sweet smile.


    The rest of the elders shook their heads vigorously. They didn¡¯t dare to speak. Although they have their own pride no one is suicidal. Especially after seeing the state the great elder was in a few minutes ago.


    ¡°Good since we all came to an agreement let¡¯s go into the next subject. Who amongst you would volunteer to protect the auction house next week? They have asked for at least fifty personnel. ¡° Fugaku said as he ignored the disbelieving looks from the rest of the n members. He knew if it wasn¡¯t for Kiyomi scaring the shit out of these guys they would argue with other for the next few days without arriving at a decision.


    So when his daughter made his work easy why should ignore her help andplicate things? No one likes to work overtime after all.


    With that, the meeting went on for the next 2 or 3 hours. During the whole meeting, the n members felt their whole worldview change as they finally realized how shameless a n leader could be.


    Since the elders were still too scared to show any opposition he changed many old rules that were unchanged due to the old geezers refusing to change. Of course, Fugaku kept the changes to a minimum since even he didn¡¯t dare to push his luck too much and face a bacsh afterward. After all, who knows whether these old geezers may get too angry and go insane.


    ¡®Should ask Kiyomi to do this often in future meetings ¡® Fugaku thought as he pondered this very seriously.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 85: Are you up to the challenge

    85: Are you up to the challenge


    Although Fugaku was tempted, he ultimately decided against it. He knew that would only bring more disaster in the future. After all, what if a decision that they made would harm the n in the future? If that happened those guys would be all over his head ming them for everything. So Fugaku decided that unless it is a very important decision they would not use this method.


    ¡° Good work out there Kiyomi, ¡° Fugaku said as he looked at his eldest daughter with a smile.


    ¡° Hn ¡° Kiyomi nodded with the iconic Uchiha sound.


    Fugaku then looked at her daughter and after hesitating for a bit asked, ¡° When did you awaken your Mangekyou Sharingan Kiyomi¡±. Usually, Fugaku wouldn''t ask such a question since it isn''t polite for a person to ask this. But as a father, he was very curious and worried.


    For a Uchiha to awaken the Mangekyou Sharingan he or she must go through intense emotional moments. One can say that they muste close to having their mindpletely broken.


    One can say that only mentally unstable people could hold the Mangekyou Sharingan. This is why Tobirama said those who awaken the Mangekyou are dangerous as they always have extreme reactions.


    And Fugaku has never found his daughter in such a state so he was worried about it. Even though he may not look like it he always tries his best to be the best father to his children. It¡¯s just that his parenting methods can be very unique.


    To teach his first son about the cruelty of war he brought him to the battlefield. Fugaku wanted his son to understand the consequences of his actions if he ever became n leader and be swayed to form a rebellion against the Leaf Vige.


    For Sasuke, he always gave him the cold shoulder due to him getting very arrogant for the simplestpliment. Fugaku understood that if his second son could keep his pride in check then he was a true monster much greater than his older brother. This was shown when Sasuke managed to outss his brother in the range of his fireball jutsu after some hard work.


    Kiyomi thought about it before answering ¡°Hmm I think I identally awakened it when I was three or maybe it was five, I don¡¯t really remember since it was a long time ago ¡°.


    Hearing her words Fugaku and Itachi who was eavesdropping on their conversation almost tripped and fell. Both of them looked at Kiyomi and thought, ¡®What the hell do you mean you identally awakened your Mangekyou? The Mangekyou Sharingan isn¡¯t something like a fruit that someone could pluck at any moment. And how the hell did you awaken them at such a young age? ¡®


    Although they both wanted to scream out their frustrations they were a little scared to voice them out. You know the longer you have your Mangekyou the stronger one gets as it would take a long time for one to master it to the fullest. This is true as Itachi despite having the Mangekyou Sharingan didn¡¯t think he is a match for his father much less his elder sister.


    They had enough time to familiarise themselves with the Mangekyou Sharingan to use it optimally while he would just go blind after using his for a few times. This is also the reason why Sasuke was the fastest person to go blind after getting his Mangekyou Sharingan. He clearly didn¡¯t have the patience or time to slowly master his new powers and only used the Mangekyou in such a crude way he was out of juice in no time.


    If Madara was like him then the warring states would be over much sooner as Hashirama would have no problem defeating a blind Madara.


    What¡¯s more frightening is that Kiyomi managed to awaken her Mangekyou at the age of five. You know at that age a normal Uchiha wouldn¡¯t even have opened his Sharingan much less unlocking your Mangekyou. Even Madara wasn¡¯t such a genius monster.


    For the rest of the journey, the three of them were very quiet. Fugaku and Itachi were so shocked and scared at Kiyomi¡¯s aplishments that they didn¡¯t know what to say. And Kiyomi wasn¡¯t one to initiate a conversation. So in awkward silence, they all arrived home.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    While Kiyomi and others were still in the n meeting, Izanami was having a small meeting of her own. Well, the meeting was with a nun. And this nun is none other than the legendary wandering miko Non¨­ Yakushi.


    After Danzo¡¯s escape, she was reduced to a humble orphanage caretaker. And it seems Danzo hadn¡¯t thought of using her since he didn¡¯t bother contacting her. After all, what good would he have as a spy if he didn¡¯t have any power to make use of the information she was sending?


    As for why she is meeting with Izanami, well there could only be one reason. She couldn¡¯t request for more funds from the vige as her true identity as a past root member may be revealed.


    The treatment people have for the Root is very harsh. Due to them being brainwashed very thoroughly most of them are under heavy surveince. If they showed the slightest chance of being rebels they would be killed without any mercy.


    This is the only solution the higher-ups hade up with after many tries of trying to correct the Root ninjas. And although Nono didn¡¯t have that much loyalty towards Danzo that didn¡¯t mean her threat level is any lower than any other root ninja. Maybe due to her past record, she may be killed or forced to do a very dangerous mission to redeem herself.


    As an undercover agent, Nono knew her capabilities very much. She knew that her strength was not enough for any high-level missions. That is why she retired from the Root at an early age and became the caretaker of the orphanage.


    ¡° So what do you think of the proposal I gave you? ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at Nono with a smile.


    Nono had a stiff smile as she asked hesitantly, ¡°While I¡¯m ttered, if I may ask why did Lady Izanami want me to be the host of the auction house? I don¡¯t think I have any outstanding qualities that would make youe to see me personally. ¡°


    Izanami just smiled at her and didn¡¯t answer her question. This made Nono even more anxious. She knew the person in front of her was a very big shot who could make wars happen in days.


    So she was very cautious and afraid of what this person wanted when she arrived at the orphanage doorsteps. But unexpectedly Izanami said she was here to offer her a job opportunity to be the host of the auction house. And what¡¯s more the sry she is about to receive is astronomical.


    But although Nono was very happy about it, she was also very anxious about the reason why she was offered such a job. Nothinges for free in this world she knew that better than anyone.


    ¡° Well, you see I have heard about how good of a caretaker you are. Although you have limited funds you still use them to take good care of the children without sparing any expense.


    I greatly admire that about you. But you see I don¡¯t have a habit of giving charity. In my book giving away charity is just wasting someone¡¯s determination to strive further. After all, if you can get charity every day, why waste effort working?


    So that is why I decided toe up with this proposal. So what do you think, are you up to the challenge? ¡° Izanami said with a meaningful smile.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 86: Can I go with you

    86: Can I go with you


    Izanami hummed a tune as she walked out of the orphanage. She was in a very good mood since she managed to make Nono agree to her proposal.


    Truth be told the real reason she wanted to help Nono was actually very simple. Nono reminded Izanami of herself. She too cared for her children deeply even if they had no blood connection to her.


    And what¡¯s more, Izanami felt that Nono was a very pitiful character. Had it not for Danzo screwing things up she would still be living a happy life with Kabuto and the rest of the kids.


    ¡®Speaking of Danzo I wonder what that guy is up to these days. Thest time I heard about him he was near the Land of Rain. Did he go to Amagakure to seek shelter from Hanzo? Well, I doubt he woulde alive if he actually went there. Nagato¡¯s surveince technique is quite ingenuous if I say so myself. ¡® Izanami thought as she took her smartphone to check whether her guess was correct.


    After a while, her expression turned strange as put away her phone. She didn¡¯t what to say after reading thetest information the youkai members got on Danzo.


    It turns out that Danzo somehow managed to secure a base of operations in the Land of Wind near the borders Land of Rain. And he was now in the process of making a new ninja vige simr to how Orochimaru was doing.


    In fact, calling it a ninja vige is wrong as it looked like a cult at first nce. Danzo seemed be wanting to create a batch of death warriors as he began to brainwash some poor civilians to start a cult.


    Every now and then he would select some talented people and brand them with the curse seal. And of course, he also gave them some good training manuals that would allow him to train his army. As for the funds to run this cult he seemed to use the nearby mine that he found and purposely kept it secret from the vige.


    ¡® Should I give away Danzo¡¯s location to Nagato? ¡® Izanami thought seriously. She didn¡¯t expect Danzo would go this path. She thought he would go into hiding in one of his bases while trying to increase his influence through the remaining root ninjas.


    After all, this is his usual way of doing things. That bastard is the person who wants to use his tools to do everything for him. She never expected him to be this active.


    Of course, she didn¡¯t fear Danzo as she could kill him with her eyes closed. What she is worried is about the civilians who would be brainwashed into doing his dirty work. Although she isn¡¯t a saint she didn¡¯t want innocents to get caught up in this.


    After thinking for a bit she decided to let Shisui go there. That guy has been very idle these days. So it''s time he does some exercise every very often. And this would be a good mission for him.


    His Eternal Mangekyou abilities are quite suitable for this. After all, now he could use Kotoamatsukami without any cooldown. In addition, he also has another new ability which is quite simr to Aizen¡¯s Ky¨­ka Suigetsu.


    So in mental maniption, no one can beat Shisui. That is unless he does something foolish again and goes around exining his abilities.


    Thinking of this possibility Izanami quickly messaged Nanami and told her to go with Shisui to where Danzo is hiding. As for whether they could kill or make him go on the run again is up to them. Although Danzo is a very valuable piece for her uing n he isn¡¯t a very important one.


    ¡° I¡¯m home, ¡°Izanami said as she opened the door to her house.


    ¡°Wee back big sis Izanami ¡° Naruto shouted as he ran towards her and gave her a big hug. Although Naruto wasn¡¯t that lonely when he was a year he still clings to Izanami at every given chance.


    Izanami ruffled his hair and asked, ¡°So Naruto how was school? Did you make new friends yet? ¡°


    Although school has been going on for thest few days Naruto wasn¡¯t able to make new friends. The civilian kids still believed the rumor about the demon fox and kept their distance from him. Even Izanami¡¯s presence didn¡¯t help as these vigers are too stupid and only know how to follow the trend. As for the n kids they have yet to officially start school.


    Due to civilian kids not knowing the shinobi world they are needed to be taught the basics of basics at school. So n kids are excluded from attending these sses as it would be pointless for them since they are taught about this at a young age.


    Of course, they could also attend ss as no one is forbidding them. But in the entire ninja world who would like to go to school just to listen to some boring lessons they already know since they were young?


    So unfortunately Naruto had to go to school alone without any of his friends. And he was a little sad about it.


    ¡° no those guys still don¡¯t want to talk to me, ¡° Naruto said as heined. Izanami could see the sadness in his eyes.


    ¡°You know you could also skip school for this month and attend ss with the rest of your friends. ¡° Izanami said as she looked at him.


    Although one might say this is irresponsible Izanami didn¡¯t really care as she could always homeschool Naruto. She didn¡¯t want him to suffer due to loneliness again. So she had proposed this to Naruto earlier but he unexpectedly refused.


    ¡° No, I want to try making some more friends. I don¡¯t want to run away every time things get hard ¡°was Naruto¡¯s reply as he looked at her with determination.


    Since he is this determined Izanami stopped trying to persuade him. Although she knew it would be impossible she just wanted him to at least have hope. After all this Naruto had his parents with him so he won¡¯t feel like he was abandoned like it was in the original story.


    ¡°No, I know they would finally talk to me. ¡°Naruto said stubbornly as he shook his head.


    ¡°Anyway big sis is it true that you will be opening a new auction house next week? ¡°Naruto asked curiously as he looked at Izanami.


    ¡°Yes I originally wanted to rent an existing auction house but who knew the great Konoha doesn¡¯t have an auction house. So I had no choice but to build one myself ¡°Izanami sighed.


    Building that auction house wasn¡¯t cheap. She had to issue a hugemission to Yamato so he could build the building with his wood release. Originally he wanted to reject the mission as he had never built a building with aplex design like the one Izanami wanted but money does make wonders. After she directly doubled the price that guy finished the whole construction work in less than two days without any rest.


    ¡°Hey, Big sis Izanami I was just wondering can I alsoe with you when the auction house is opened. ¡° Naruto asked shyly.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 87: So you want to go to the auction?

    87: So you want to go to the auction?


    Although going to the auction house has no age limits, usually adults don¡¯t really bring any children with them. Especially to an auction that might affect the whole vige.


    So the little children of these invited people are expressing their jealousy these days. After all, they too wanted to see what it was like to go to an auction house. And like any other kid, Naruto was also curious.


    Well, he might have also wanted to go and brag in front of his friends. Who knows Kids can be unpredictable, especially Naruto who is known as the No. 1 Unpredictable ninja at an early age.


    ¡° So you want to go to the auction?¡± Izanami asked, raising one eyebrow.


    ¡° Hmm ¡° Naruto nodded eagerly as he said, ¡° Everybody at school was talking about it so I wanted to see what it is really like. ¡°


    ¡° Well I don''t mind youing to the auction with us since it wouldn''t be much of a hassle to take you with us, ¡° Izanami said as she smiled.


    ¡° But you need to behave okay. You can''t make trouble in the Auction House''s opening ceremony. ¡° Izanami warned as she looked at Naruto. Although she herself didn''t believe her words she still had to tell.


    ¡° Okay I''ll be on my best behavior,¡± Naruto said as he puffed his chest.


    ¡® yeah I should make some preparation so he won''t take things too far ¡® Izanami thought inwardly while still smiling as though she was believing Naruto''s words.


    ¡° Oh right, do you want some tickets to give your friends?¡± Izanami asked as she remembered something.


    ¡° Huh, is that fine? ¡° Naruto asked, surprised. He didn''t think his big sister would even allow them toe.


    Although he wants to brag in front of his friends, going with them is also fine.


    ¡° Yeah, I don''t really mind. You go and ask Nanami for some invitation cards and give it to them tomorrow. ¡° Izanami said.


    She thought with his friends there Naruto would be stable as Ino and Shikamaru could contain him to a certain extent.


    ¡°Yay Thank you big sis Izanami ¡° Naruto eximed as he gave a big hug to Izanami. Then he ran inside to find Nanami to ask for the tickets. He is going to surprise his friends with them.


    Seeing him running away in such a hurry Izanami chuckled and said, ¡°Well it seems someone is excited. ¡° She then turned to the side and asked, ¡°Do you also want an invitation Kiyomi ¡°


    From the shadows, Kiyomi Uchiha came out as she heard Izanami¡¯s words. ¡° well I would certainly like it ¡° she said as her Mangekyou began to spin rapidly.


    Izanami looked at her with a smile and said, ¡°Then I would have no choice but to give you one ¡°. and with her words fell, she took out a small knife from her pocket and threw it at her.


    The de passed through her like she was a ghost and got stuck on the wall. Kiyomi didn¡¯t even flinch as she just smiled evilly at Izanami. But just when she was about to grab Izanami¡¯s neck she suddenly froze.


    Izanami literary froze him by activating the mansion¡¯s sealing arrays. She installed this function to capture intruders without causing amotion.


    ¡°What an idiot. Don¡¯t you know breaking into a sealing grand ancestors'' house is more foolish thanmitting suicide? ¡° Izanami said with a sneer.


    ¡° What happened I felt the mansion''s defense system activating, ¡° Kaguya asked as she rushed towards the scene. As the second master of this house, she could also control the formation to a certain extent.


    ¡°Nothing it''s just a foolish boy who thinks he is smart trying to control me with a Genjutsu. Sigh these guys overestimate their sharingan too much. Thinking they could do anything with it ¡° Izanami said with a shake of her head.


    ¡°So who is this, I doubt you would imprison the actual Kiyomi like this. ¡°Kaguya asked as she looked at Izanami. She didn¡¯t think this person is Kiyomi as she wouldn¡¯t be this easy to capture much less even thinking of intuding here. What¡¯s more, if this was really Kiyomi then the mansion¡¯s defensive system would not harm her as she had the ne with her.


    Izanami wasn¡¯t lying when she said that people who have this ne could have authority second only to her. Simr to her they could go to any establishment that is under the control of Japan.


    ¡°Well, he is a very good friend of our dear Rin ¡° Izanami said making Kaguya look at her in surprise. She then began to observe the captured Kiyomi in surprise. Since normal eyes couldn¡¯t see through the illusion Kaguya began to use her special eye.


    Her forehead split vertically and the Rinne Sharingan appeared. Although this body isn¡¯t Kaguya¡¯s original body she could still use some of her abilities due to her soul inhabiting it and gradually changing the body with time.


    With her Rinne Sharingan activated Kaguya managed to look through the transformation jutsu. Instead of Kiyomi the one who is trapped is a boy with ck hair who wears a grey cloak that covers his body. On his face, there was an orange mask that had only one hole.


    ¡° oh, it''s this guy ¡° Kaguya eximed as she finally realized who this intruder is. When Izanami said that he was Rin¡¯s friend she didn¡¯t get it. But after seeing that mask and Mangekyou Patern she finally realized who it was.


    ¡°Why the hell did this guye here ¡° Kaguya asked as she looked at Izanami curiously. Obito would have no reason toe here much less disguise himself as Kiyomi.


    ¡°Well I do have some guesses but why don¡¯t we see his memories to really understand why he came here? ¡° Izanami said as she put her hand on Obito¡¯s face.


    Closing her eyes she began to do someone hand hand seals. ¡° Memory search, ¡° Izanami said as she activated her jutsu.


    As the name suggests it is a memory-searching jutsu. This is one of the standard jutsus the interrogation unit in Japan uses to collect information from their captives. Although this jutsu is quite simr to the Yamanaka n''s secret techniques the principles arepletely different.


    Instead of forcibly reading through memories and harming the person this jutsu puts the person into a trance and sends signals to his brain to remember his past without damaging his mind. It¡¯s like the brain is rewinding the ongoing movie and a third party is secretly watching it.


    After a while, Izanami stopped the technique. She had read enough of his memories to understand what really happened.


    ¡°Sigh, I can¡¯t believe how idiot a person can get ¡° Izanami muttered as she looked at Obito with a veryplex look. She was considering whether to teach this brat somemon sense since his intellect didn¡¯t seem to grow with his Sharingan.


    ¡°What did he do this time ¡° Kaguya asked with a raised eyebrow. She was curious on what made even the normally chil Izanami this agitated.


    ¡°Sigh this idiot¡­sigh¡­. ¡° Izanami started to speak but just sighed heavily. She was hesitating whether to say this. Obito¡¯s image as the hidden boss may be in danger if she says what she saw in his memory.


    ¡°Just say that damn thing, I won¡¯t be a brat who is a hundred times younger than me for being stupid. I have seen many stupid people to judge ¡° Kaguya said iratedly. And she really didn¡¯t think there would be any other idiot than her two sons who would try to kill their own mother because a toad said she was evil.


    After hesitating for a bit Izanami began to exin, ¡°Well the thing here is,....... ¡°


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!

 88: He will always be my best friend

    88: He will always be my best friend


    ¡° Well, you see our Obito has been gathering some intel on the World Bank due to heavy movements we have been makingst year. And somehow he hade to the conclusion that we are walking money bags. This idiot thinks we are like the Daimyos who are all just talk.


    So this idiot decided to control me with an heir that is easily essible to him with his Genjutsu. He hoped after taking control over me he could get enough finances to fund his ns. ¡° Izanami exined with an annoyed look. She didn¡¯t like beingpared to those pigs who only knew how to order people around.


    Kaguya looked at her nkly and asked, ¡° I still don¡¯t hear anything that would make you hesitate to speak. And why the hell did hee here after transforming into Kiyomi ¡°


    Hearing this Izanami said, ¡°That¡¯s the part I¡¯m mad about. You see apart from controlling me he had another objective. And that is to find a way to collect some spare Sharingans.


    You see after being very close to death under Minato¡¯s hand he had be more paranoid. So he began to take lessons from Madara and mostly Danzo and began to study Izanagi. After finally being able to cast Izanagi he ran into the problem of not having enough Sharingan to use.


    This dumbass copied Danzo and nted 3 spares Sharingan Madara had kept with him into his body. The process was smoother since half of his body is already made out of white Zetsu.


    And after the experiment, the first thing he did was to find a way to restock on his Sharingan since he wanted to at least nt 7 Sharingan in his body. And the first thing he thought of was to cause fighting in the Uchiha n so many would die.


    And since he was going to control he had the wonderful idea of impersonating Kiyomi so even if the likelihood of his involvement was found by Konoha they would only me the Uchiha n and further deteriorate the rtions with them.


    So no matter what he would get what he wants one way or another ¡° Izanami exined in one breath.


    ¡°Really that n came out of a Uchiha brat who almost failed to graduate from school. ¡° Kaguya asked as she blinked her eyes in surprise.


    ¡°Yeah surprising, I know ¡° Izanami nodded as she too agreed with Kaguya on this.


    ¡°But I still didn¡¯t hear the reason why you were upset. You are not a person who gets angry over being seen as a pawn or even cares much when someone takes action against the Uchiha n. ¡° Kaguya said as she looked at Izanami with a look that said, ¡®I¡¯m tired of waiting around just to tell the damn reason¡¯.


    ¡°Well the reason I got mad at him was his thinking pattern. You know if he really needed some money all he had to do was take control over some businessmen and make them take a loan from the Bank and take away all the money.


    Not only is this method very safe it is also very practical as there is no way a normal person could track him down. But no, this idiot didn¡¯t think of such a simple solution and went to control a very high-ranking member who is monitored 24 hours by Anbu ninjas who could easily find her in a Genjutsu.


    If that isn¡¯t stupid I don¡¯t know what. And what¡¯s with his mindset of taking away Sharingan after killing some innocents? Couldn¡¯t he rob Danzo of his collection? Did he really need to make a huge fuss to do one task? ¡° Izanamiined as she looked at Obito as though he was a mentally unstable fool who needed help.


    ¡°This guy definitely needs to go through some therapy to change his thoughts that are always leaning towards violence and murder. ¡°Kaguya had agreed with Izanami on this matter.


    ¡° So what are you going to do with him? ¡° She asked as she looked at Izanami.


    ¡° Hmm ¡° Izanami began to rub her chin as she began to think of her options. And after a while a mischievous smile came across her face as she said, ¡° I may have just thought of the perfect punishment for him ¡°


    Seeing that smile Kaguya gave the frozen Obito a pitying look. This poor boy had already been marked by this devil. And for the foreseeable future, his life may be hell.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° Huh, where am I ¡°Obito said as he eximed. He was in a pure white room with nothing but white.


    Frowning he tried to disrupt his chakra flow thinking this is a Genjutsu. Although as a Mangekyou user, his resistance is very high he can still be affected. In fact,


    In the original story, one of the reasons why he didn¡¯t try to kill Itachi for his Mangekyou Sharingan is because Itachi was a master of illusions and had the ability to kill him. He couldn¡¯t use his Kamui ability if he was in an illusion after all. Itachi just needed to put him in a Genjutsu and use Amaterasu to finish him up.


    Obito¡¯s frown deepened when he saw no matter how much he disrupted his chakra the white room didn¡¯t disappear at all. Just as he was about to use Kamui the scenery suddenly changed, The white room disappeared and he was suddenly transported into a forest.


    Normally a shinobi would be on guard or at the very least try to run away when they are transported into a different ce. But Obito who was so shocked was rooted into the ground in disbelief.


    It wasn¡¯t due to the fact someone teleported him that he was shocked. No, it was because he recognized the ce where he was teleported. How could he forget it? This is the same forest where his beloved Rin died.


    ¡°Hey, Kakashi, Since you have already pierced my heart you have to take responsibility. ¡° the ever-so-familiar voice rang behind him.


    With a hint of disbelief, he turned around to see his beloved Rin who had her heart pierced by Kakashi just like it was in the past. Seeing this scene Obito¡¯s anger broke out and he shouted, ¡° Damn you Kakashi what are you doing? ¡°


    And without hesitation, he tried to separate them but his hand passed through them like how it would be when he activated his Kamui.


    After almost stumbling and falling Obito managed to readjust his center of gravity. He looked at the two of them with doubt.


    ¡°Rin, what are you saying we need to take you to a medic immediately, ¡° Kakashi said with distress. ¡°I won¡¯t let Obito down, what would he think when he woke up from hisa and found you not beside him? ¡° He said as he tried to take his hand away from Rin.


    But Rin caught it and said with a helpless smile, ¡°Hey Kakashi we both know I have very little time. So can you fulfill myst request ¡°


    ¡°No Rin I will save you ¡° Obito shouted as he once again rushed towards Rin. Even when he knew this was an illusion he still couldn¡¯t let Rin die in front of him.


    But like his previous try, he passed through them. It looked like he was a ghost as both of them didn¡¯t seem to notice him.


    ¡°Tell me Rin, whatever it is, I will do it, ¡°Kakashi said as a sad expression appeared on his face.


    Rin took a moment to calm her breath and said slowly, ¡° Tell Obito when he wakes up that he will always be my best friend ¡°


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!

 89: I hope you don’t go back on your words in the future,

    89: I hope you don¡¯t go back on your words in the future,


    ¡°Aaaaahhh ¡° Obito screamed as he woke up. He looked at his surroundings and saw that he was in the old hideout that he had inherited from Madara.


    ¡°What happened Obito did you poop in your sleep. ¡° Tobi asked jokingly as he came to see Obito. It¡¯s not every day they see him showing such emotions after Rin¡¯s death.


    ¡°Haa haaa ¡° Obito breathed heavily as he wiped his sweat from his forehead. He felt that he had a very bad nightmare but he can¡¯t remember what exactly. ¡®Wait, when did I return to the base to sleep?


    ¡° Hey Guruguru when did Ie back here ¡° He asked as he looked at Tobi. He didn¡¯t remembering back afterpleting his mission.


    ¡°Well, you came back yesterday evening like usual. ¡° Tobi answered as he looked at Obito with puzzlement.


    ¡°I see, ¡° he said as he began to remember yesterday¡¯s memories. After he snuck into that Izanami girl''s mansion he heard about an auction house being held in Konoha. And they were discussing what items to highlight as they have collected many treasures for all these years.


    And this piece of information had his interest peaked. He wondered what sort of artifacts would they auction there. So after stealing a VIP ticket, he came back. If this auction house has some decent artifacts then he would steal them and cause chaos in Konoha.


    Not only would this cause the World Bank to sh with Konoha again he could also rope the other hidden viges and start a new ninja war.


    The more chaotic the hidden viges the better it is for him. Not only would that in fighting make them weaken each other it would also allow him to rope in some customers to Akatsuki. After all apart fromrge ninja viges, independent organizations like Akatsuki were the general public¡¯s second option.


    And Konan has been nagging that they are not making enough money these days. So Obito had to find a way to solve this situation.


    ¡®Sigh things I do to create my perfect world with my Rin ¡® Obito thought as began to freshen up. He still has numerous jobs to do like finding new potential members for the organization.


    ¡®But still, I feel I just forgot something important. Hmm, maybe it was the dream I had. Although I can¡¯t remember it my instincts are telling me it is something I would dread ¡® Obito muttered inwardly.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    While the poor Obito was going on with his usual day Izanami and Kaguya wereughing their asses off.


    What Izanami did was cast a seal on Obito so each time he false asleep he would dream of his greatest nightmares. And it seems Obito¡¯s greatest nightmare is being friend-zoned.


    ¡°Hahaha izanami this time you really did a good job, ¡° Kaguya said as she wiped away the tears that wereing out of her eyes due toughing that hard. Usually, she doesn¡¯t care much about these pranks Izanami usually does but this one is really too funny. She is even tempted to show Rin this video of Obito¡¯s dream that Izanami managed to project to a screen.


    ¡° yeah I know right ¡° Izanami nodded as she agreed with Kaguya. What she used on Obito is a modified inner demon seal.


    Normally this seal would be applied to people who are having a bottleneck. This seal forces them to face their inner demons and conquers them to break their bottlenecks. But after Izanami¡¯s modification, this seal would only make the person confront their inner demons every time they sleep. And what''s more, they willpletely forget about everything they saw in their dreands.


    So for the next few years, poor Obito would have to be woken up by nightmares daily. And that too without knowing what he was dreaming.


    ¡° How is the auction house going, ¡° Kaguya asked as finished calming herself down.


    ¡°Well things are already now, I¡¯m just waiting for the opening day toe, ¡° Izanami said with a smile. Although the opening day is still four days away she has finished preparing everything needed.


    The auction products, catalogs, and even security measures have been prepared ahead of schedule. This is one of her past life habits. She always tried to finish her work before the deadline. This way she could have more breathing room when a new problem arises.


    ¡° That''s good but is it really necessary for you to change Obito¡¯s memories so that he changes his focus towards the auction house? ¡°Kaguya asked with puzzlement. Izanami could easily change Obito¡¯s memories into making him believe that he had control over Izanami so that he would not bother with them ever again.


    But instead of that Izanami modified his memories so that he would shift his focus into the auction house and make trouble there. She even gave him a VIP ticket.


    ¡° Of course it is. Do you know if Obito suddenly lost interest in me then not only ck Zetsu, but even a normal Zetsu would be suspicious? How could Uchiha who are known to be one-track-minded suddenly lose all interest in their target? ¡° Izanami said. Although she isn''t a stalker like ck Zetsu she could still be considered very knowledgeable about the Uchiha n.


    When you catch an Uchiha¡¯s interest then you should be prepared to have your life full of thorns. They are very persistent and most of the time their approaches end with nothing but trouble.


    After all, when a n of arrogant Tsunderes that have anger issueses together normal people have a tough time handling them.


    ¡° I see I didn''t think of that possibility ¡° Kaguya nodded, epting that exnation. She isn''t that much of a schemer so she doesn''t see the much bigger picture like Izanami.


    ¡°Well, anyway do you guys also want toe to the auction house? I¡¯m sure you guys would surely love the experience ¡° Izanami said as she looked at Kaguya with a smile. Her eyes had a calcting light that she hid perfectly from Kaguya.


    Izanami had a very crazy business idea that she wanted to try. If this idea works then she would be able to start another new sessful business.


    ¡°Hmm, sure why not ¡° Kaguya said not knowing that she had doomed her animal friends to a day full of torture.


    ¡°That¡¯s wonderful I hope you don¡¯t go back on your words in the future, ¡° Izanami said with a sweet smile while secretly storing away the recording device that she activated when this conversation started.


    In recent years her grandmother seemed to have developed her shamelessness into a very high limit. So unless you have hard evidence she would not agree to anything even if there was a contract. Izanami wondered whose influence that was, as when she was just freed from the seal, she had been quite honorable.


    She should find that just in case Naruto was also led astray like her. She didn¡¯t want him to go to the dark side. At least not until he became the Hokage.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>

 90:THE AUCTION

    90:THE AUCTION


    Today, the Konoha streets were extremely lively, even with the sun already set. Most of the streets were filled with high-profile individuals, all walking and chatting happily. Whether they were well-known businessmen or n elders, everyone with power in Konoha could be seen heading toward a single destination.


    And that destination is the newly opened Red Fox auction house. The new auction house that was built recently. Due to almost every high-ranking individualing here, the security was very tight.


    The police department took this matter very seriously as everyone knew what would happen if they displeased the owner of this establishment. So as to ensure everything was okay they mobilized almost a quarter of their own troops to this ce.


    And with them keeping public safety everything was very peaceful. The invites just had to show their invitation and then they could enter without any problem. As for troublemakers they were swiftly dealt with and escorted to a prison cell.


    While everything was happening so smoothly outside, inside the auction house in a special VIP room Izanami observed everything with her observation Haki. She made sure to memorize those troublemakers who were being escorted to prison cells.


    She knew who these people were as there were only a few people who would dare to cause trouble for her. And those are the two corrupt elders.


    Yes after Tsunade took over Konoha their influence was severely weakened. Especially Hiruzen who lost almost everything. Especially after the scandal where all of his silent support was shown to the whole world.


    Although the reports didn¡¯t show any of his involvement in Danzo¡¯s crimes but ninja ns are not fools. How could Danzo do all of that without him knowing? If that was totally true and he actually didn¡¯t know anything wouldn¡¯t things be even worse?


    As the Hokage he didn¡¯t know what his assistant was doing under his back wouldn¡¯t that clearly show how ipetent he is?


    So in short Hiruzen lost almost all of his support from the major ns. And with him, his two dear friends also came down with him. Without him or Danzo holding the fort, how could those two clowns keep their authority?


    Their only saving grace was that Tsunade didn¡¯t revoke their status as elders. But even so, they don¡¯t have any departments as Tsunade took over everything. Their only duty is toe to the Hokage Office and give their suggestions if Tsunade ever asked them.


    And with their high pride, they didn¡¯t like this at all. Originally Izanami was thinking of letting them go since they are harmless but with these actions, she decided to teach them a lesson.


    ¡® It seems it is time for Shisui to initiate his hunt ¡® Izanami thought as a very dangerous light passed through her eyes. Shisui has been learning from Nanami about the art of silent assassination. And this seems to be a very good assignment for him.


    And Silent assassination isn''t like your original assassination where you sneak up on a guy and slit his throat. In Silent Assination you will kill a guy without anyone knowing he was killed.


    For example, you will put a poison in his drink that will only get active when hees closer to something very specific. You could even make it so that he or she would be killed in a natural cause like a heart attack.


    Although she won¡¯t let them get killed she would make sure they would be hospitalised at the very least. Living in content fear is way worse than dying silently. Especially for Old people like them who have a very fragile ego.


    What Izanami wanted to do was scare the shit out of these two fools or maybe make it so that they would get a very bad stomach ache if they evere closer to the Hokage Office.


    ¡° You should stop smiling like that or kids will cry ¡° A voice said breaking Izanami out of her dark thoughts. Turning around she saw that it was Tsunade who was talking to her.


    Izanami rolled her eyes and retorted, ¡° Please you''re thest person who is qualified to teach me about this subject. I mean look at you, the auction house didn''t even start yet you are already starting to drink. ¡°


    ¡° Please I never considered myself a role model¡± Tsunade retorted as she took a big sip of her wine. ¡° And besides I didn''t get to drink due to all the work for the past few days ¡° she said as she took another sip.


    Looking at her like this Izanami was speechless. If one didn''t know they would think that Tsunade didn''t get an ounce of wine for the past few weeks.


    But Izanami knew that this girl always drank a full barrel every time she came back from work.


    ¡° So did you really have some good stuff for this auction house?¡± Tsunade suddenly asked as she looked at Izanami.


    Izanami raised one eyebrow as she questioned, ¡°Didn''t you read that item catalogue I gave you when I came to get that permit? ¡°


    ¡° Of course not, I''m toozy to read that, and besides you will never take a no for an answer so I figured it isn''t worth the hassle, ¡° Tsunade said, making Izanami for a moment consider bringing back Mito from the dead to educate this girl.


    Tsunade inherited Hashirama¡¯s will perfectly. She is as irresponsible as he is.


    ¡° Sigh here at least read this now ¡°At the end Izanami sighed as she just handed Tsunade one of the spare catalogues that were ced in the room.


    Taking the catalogue, Tsunade read through it for a while before looking at Izanami with a serious expression. ¡° Hey Izanami, answer me honestly. Are you asking for trouble? ¡°


    ¡° No, not partially why though,¡± Izanami asked as she tilted her head. She didn''t understand why Tsunade got all serious all of a sudden.


    ¡° Then tell me why the hell are you auctioning off Jutsu scrolls. Even more, why the hell are there very unique sealing scrolls ¡± Tsunade shouted as she looked at Izanami with a re.


    Jutsu scrolls are very rare. Most ninjas would only get to master one or two jutsus due to how rare they are. For a n ninja, they would need to make some connections to go through their libraries to read Jutsu scrolls.


    And formoner ninjas, they would at least need to make some serious contributions to even borrow some D-rank jutsus.


    Even when someone is assigned a Jonnin Sensei that person necessarily doesn''t need to teach them some ninjutsu.


    As students, killing their masters for Jutsus is amon thing in this world. So unless you are absolutely sure no one would teach one''s Jutsus to another.


    And with Izanami auctioning off some Jutsu scrolls, that''s just asking for trouble. Not to mention sealing tags that are more rare than jutsu scrolls.


    Due to Fuinjustu being very umon with ninjas, these sealing scrolls are like trouble mas.


    Tsunade wouldn''t even be surprised if there was a bloodbath due to many parties wanting specific sealing scrolls.


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b>.</b>


    <b> If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon ount.</b>


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!